This is a modern-English version of Man and His Migrations, originally written by Latham, R. G. (Robert Gordon). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

 

Note: Images of the original pages are available through Internet Archive. See https://archive.org/details/manhismigrations00lathuoft

 

Transcriber’s Note

Transcription Note

Greek text with transliteration has a dotted underline. To see the transliteration, hover the cursor over the underlined Greek text (example: βιβλος) and the transliteration should appear.

Greek text with transliteration has a dotted underline. To see the transliteration, hover the cursor over the underlined Greek text (example: book) and the transliteration should show up.

 


 

 

 

MAN AND HIS MIGRATIONS.

CORRESPONDING MEMBER TO THE ETHNOLOGICAL SOCIETY, NEW YORK,
ETC. ETC.

CORRESPONDING MEMBER OF THE ETHNOLOGICAL SOCIETY, NEW YORK,
ETC. ETC.

LONDON:
JOHN VAN VOORST, PATERNOSTER ROW.

LONDON:
JOHN VAN VOORST, Paternoster Row.

MDCCCLI.

1851.

PRINTED BY RICHARD TAYLOR,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

PRINTED BY RICHARD TAYLOR,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

PREFACE.

The following pages represent a Course of Six Lectures delivered at the Mechanics’ Institution, Liverpool, in the month of March of the present year; the matter being now laid before the public in a somewhat fuller and more systematic form than was compatible with the original delivery.

The following pages present a series of six lectures given at the Mechanics’ Institution in Liverpool during March of this year. The content is now shared with the public in a more complete and organized format than what was possible during the original presentation.

CONTENTS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Page

The Natural or Physical history of Man—the Civil—their difference—divisions of the Natural or Physical history—Anthropology—Ethnology—how far pursued by the ancients—Herodotus—how far by the moderns—Buffon—Linnæus—Daubenton—Camper—Blumenbach—the term CaucasianCuvier—Philology as an instrument of ethnological investigation—Pigafetta—Hervas—Leibnitz—Reland—Adelung—Klaproth—the union of Philology and of Anatomy—Prichard—its Palæontological character—influence of Lyell’s Geology—of Whewell’s History of the Inductive Sciences 1–36

The Natural or Physical history of Man—the Civil—their difference—divisions of the Natural or Physical history—Anthropology—Ethnology—how far pursued by the ancients—Herodotus—how far by the moderns—Buffon—Linnæus—Daubenton—Camper—Blumenbach—the term CaucasianCuvier—Philology as a tool for ethnological investigation—Pigafetta—Hervas—Leibnitz—Reland—Adelung—Klaproth—the combination of Philology and Anatomy—Prichard—its Palæontological aspect—influence of Lyell’s Geology—of Whewell’s History of the Inductive Sciences 1–36

Ethnology—its objects—the chief problems connected with it—prospective questions—transfer of populations—Extract from Knox—correlation of certain parts of the body to certain external influences—parts less subject to such influences—retrospective questions—the unity or non-unity of our species—opinions—plurality of species—multiplicity of protoplasts—doctrine of development—Dokkos—Extract—antiquity of our species—its geographical origin—the term race 37–66

Ethnology—its objects—the main problems associated with it—future questions—migration of populations—Extract from Knox—the relationship of certain body parts to specific external influences—parts less affected by such influences—past questions—the unity or non-unity of our species—opinions—multiple species—variety of original forms—the theory of evolution—Dokkos—Extract—the age of our species—its geographical origins—the term race 37-66

Methods—the science one of observation and deduction rather than experiment—classification—on mineralogical, on zoological principles—the first for Anthropology, the second for Ethnology—value of Language as a test—instances of its loss—of its retention—when it proves original relation, when intercourse—the grammatical and glossarial tests—classifications must be real—the distribution of Man—size of area—ethnological contrasts in close geographical contact—discontinuity and isolation of areas—oceanic migrations 67–100

Methods—it's more about observation and deduction than experimentation—classification—based on mineralogical and zoological principles—the first one for Anthropology, the second for Ethnology—the importance of Language as a test—examples of its loss—its preservation—when it indicates original relationships, when interaction—the grammatical and glossarial tests—classifications must be real—the distribution of humans—size of area—ethnological differences in close geographical proximity—discontinuity and isolation of regions—oceanic migrations 67-100

Details of distribution—their conventional character—convergence from the circumference to the centre—Fuegians; Patagonian, Pampa, and Chaco Indians—Peruvians—D’Orbigny’s characters—other South American Indians—of the Missions—of Guiana—of Venezuela—Guarani—Caribs—Central America—Mexican civilization no isolated phænomenon—North American Indians—Eskimo—apparent objections to their connection with the Americans and Asiatics—Tasmanians—Australians—Papuás—Polynesians—Micronesians—Malagasi—Hottentots—Kaffres—Negroes—Berbers—Abyssinians—Copts—the Semitic family—Primary and secondary migrations 101–157

Details of distribution—their typical nature—moving from the outside to the center—Fuegians; Patagonian, Pampa, and Chaco Indians—Peruvians—D'Orbigny’s characteristics—other South American Indians—from the Missions—of Guiana—of Venezuela—Guarani—Caribs—Central America—Mexican civilization is not an isolated phenomenon—North American Indians—Eskimos—seeming objections to their connection with the Americans and Asiatics—Tasmanians—Australians—Papuan people—Polynesians—Micronesians—Malagasy—Hottentots—Kaffirs—Negroes—Berbers—Abyssinians—Copts—the Semitic family—Primary and secondary migrations 101–157

The Ugrians of Lapland, Finland, Permia, the Ural Mountains and the Volga—area of the light-haired families—Turanians—the Kelts of Ireland, Scotland, Wales, Gaul—the Goths—the Sarmatians—the Greeks and Latins—difficulties of European ethnology—displacement—intermixture—identification of ancient families—extinction of ancient families—the Etruscans—the Pelasgi—isolation—the Basks—the Albanians—classifications and hypotheses—the term Indo-European—the Finnic hypothesis 158–183

The Ugrians from Lapland, Finland, Permia, the Ural Mountains, and the Volga—home to the light-haired families—Turanians—the Celts from Ireland, Scotland, Wales, and Gaul—the Goths—the Sarmatians—the Greeks and Romans—challenges of European ethnology—migration—mixing—identifying ancient families—disappearance of ancient families—the Etruscans—the Pelasgians—isolation—the Basques—the Albanians—classifications and theories—the term Indo-European—the Finnic hypothesis 158–183

The Monosyllabic Area—the Tʻhay—the Môn and Khô—Tables—the Bʻhot—the Chinese—Burmese—Persia—India—Tamulian family—the Brahúi—the Dioscurians—the Georgians—Irôn—Mizjeji—Lesgians—Armenians—Asia Minor—Lycians—Carians—Paropamisans—Conclusion 184–250

The Monosyllabic Zone—the Tʻhay—the Môn and Khô—Tables—the Bʻhot—the Chinese—Burmese—Persia—India—Tamulian family—the Brahúi—the Dioscurians—the Georgians—Irôn—Mizjeji—Lesgians—Armenians—Asia Minor—Lycians—Carians—Paropamisans—Conclusion 184-250

MAN AND HIS MIGRATIONS.

MAN AND HIS MIGRATIONS.

CHAPTER I.

The Natural or Physical history of Man—the Civil—their difference—divisions of the Natural or Physical history—Anthropology—Ethnology—how far pursued by the ancients—Herodotus—how far by the moderns—Buffon—Linnæus—Daubenton—Camper—Blumenbach—the term CaucasianCuvier—Philology as an instrument of ethnological investigation—Pigafetta—Hervas—Leibnitz—Reland—Adelung—Klaproth—the union of Philology and of Anatomy—Prichard—its Palæontological character—influence of Lyell’s Geology—of Whewell’s History of the Inductive Sciences.

The natural or physical history of humans—the civil aspect—their differences—divisions of the natural or physical history—anthropology—ethnology—how much was explored by the ancients—Herodotus—how much by moderns—Buffon—Linnaeus—Daubenton—Camper—Blumenbach—the term CaucasianCuvier—philology as a tool for ethnological research—Pigafetta—Hervas—Leibniz—Reland—Adelung—Klaproth—the connection between philology and anatomy—Prichard—its paleontological aspects—the impact of Lyell’s geology—of Whewell’s history of the inductive sciences.

Let us contrast the Civil with the Natural History of Man.

Let us compare the Civil with the Natural History of Man.

The influence of individual heroes, the effect of material events, the operations of ideas, the action and reaction of the different elements of society upon each other, come within the domain of the former. An empire is consolidated, a contest[2] concluded, a principle asserted, and the civil historian records them. He does more. If he be true to his calling, he investigates the springs of action in individual actors, measures the calibre of their moral and intellectual power, and pronounces a verdict of praise or blame upon the motives which determine their manifestation. This makes him a great moral teacher, and gives a value to his department of knowledge, which places it on a high and peculiar level.

The impact of individual heroes, the effects of major events, the workings of ideas, and the interactions of different social elements all fall within this area. An empire is strengthened, a conflict[2] is resolved, a principle is established, and the civil historian records these occurrences. He does even more. If he stays true to his role, he explores the motivations behind individual actions, assesses their moral and intellectual capacities, and offers judgments of praise or criticism based on the motives that drive their actions. This positions him as a significant moral teacher and adds value to his field of knowledge, placing it on a distinguished and unique level.

Dealing with actions and motives, he deals nearly exclusively with those of individuals; so much so, that even where he records the movements of mighty masses of men, he generally finds that there is one presiding will which regulates and directs them; and even when this is not the case, when the movement of combined multitudes is spontaneous, the spring of action is generally of a moral nature—a dogma if religious, a theory if political.

Dealing with actions and motives, he focuses almost entirely on those of individuals; so much so that even when he notes the movements of large groups of people, he usually finds there is one dominant will that controls and guides them. And even when this isn't the case, when the movement of combined crowds happens spontaneously, the reason behind the action is usually moral—either a religious belief or a political theory.

Such a history as this could not be written of the brute animals, neither could it be written for them. No animal but Man supplies either its elements or its objects; nor yet the record which transmits the memory of past actions, even when they are of the most material kind. The civil historian, therefore, of our species, or, to speak with a conciseness which common parlance allows,[3] the historian, living and breathing in the peculiar atmosphere of humanity, and exhibiting man in the wide circle of moral and intellectual action,—a circle in which none but he moves,—takes up his study where that of the lower animals ends. Whatever is common to them and man, belongs to the naturalist. Let each take his view of the Arab or the Jew. The one investigates the influence of the Bible and the Koran; whilst the other may ask how far the Moorish blood has mixed with that of the Spaniard, or remark the permanence of the Israelite features under climates so different as Poland, Morocco, or Hindostan. The one will think of instincts, the other of ideas.

A history like this can't be written about brute animals, nor can it be written *for* them. No animal except for humans supplies either its elements or its objects; nor can they provide the record that preserves the memory of past actions, even when those actions are quite significant. Therefore, the civil historian of our species, or to be concise in everyday language, the *historian*, who lives and breathes in the unique atmosphere of humanity and showcases humans in the broad scope of moral and intellectual activity—a realm where only they operate—begins their studies where those of lower animals end. Whatever is shared between them and humans belongs to the naturalist. Let each observer take their perspective on the Arab or the Jew. One investigates the influence of the Bible and the Koran, while the other may explore how much Moorish blood has mixed with that of the Spaniard or note the lasting characteristics of the Israelites in vastly different climates like Poland, Morocco, or Hindostan. One will contemplate instincts, while the other will consider ideas.

In what part of the world did this originate? How was it diffused over the surface of the earth? At what period in the world’s history was it evolved? Where does it thrive best? Where does it cease to thrive at all? What forms does it take if it degenerate? What conditions of soil or climate determine such degenerations? What favour its improvement? Can it exist in Nova Zembla? In Africa? In either region or both? Do the long nights of the Pole blanch, does the bright glare of the Equator deepen its colour? &c. Instead of multiplying questions of this kind, I will ask to what they apply. They apply to every being that multiplies its kind upon earth; to every animal of[4] the land or sea; to every vegetable as well; to every organized being. They apply to the ape, the horse, the dog, the fowl, the fish, the insect, the fruit, the flower. They apply to these—and they apply to man as well. They—and the like of them—Legion by name—common alike to the lords and the lower orders of the creation, constitute the natural history of genus Homo; and I use the language of the Zoologist for the sake of exhibiting in a prominent and palpable manner, the truly zoological character of this department of science. Man as an animal is the motto here; whilst Man as a moral being is the motto with the Historian.

In what part of the world did this originate? How was it spread across the Earth's surface? At what time in history did it develop? Where does it thrive best? Where does it not thrive at all? What forms does it take if it declines? What soil or climate conditions cause such declines? What encourages its improvement? Can it survive in Nova Zembla? In Africa? In either region or both? Do the long nights at the Pole pale it, and does the intense heat of the Equator deepen its color? Instead of piling on questions like these, I will ask what they pertain to. They pertain to every living thing that reproduces on Earth; to every animal on land or in the sea; to every plant as well; to every organized being. They pertain to the ape, the horse, the dog, the bird, the fish, the insect, the fruit, the flower. They pertain to these—and they pertain to humans as well. They—and similar questions—are collectively known as Legion, common to both the high and low orders of creation, making up the natural history of the genus Homo; and I use the language of zoology to clearly highlight the zoological aspect of this scientific field. Man as an animal is the guiding principle here, while Man as a moral being is the guiding principle for the Historian.

It is not very important whether we call this Natural or Physical History. There are good authorities on both sides. It is only important to see how it differs from the History of the Historian.

It doesn't really matter whether we refer to this as Natural or Physical History. There are reputable arguments for both. What matters is understanding how it differs from the History of the Historian.

Man’s Civil history has its divisions. Man’s Natural history has them also.

Man's civil history has its divisions. Man's natural history has them too.

The first of these takes its name from the Greek words for man (anthrôpos) and doctrine (logos), and is known as Anthropology.

The first of these gets its name from the Greek words for man (anthrôpos) and doctrine (logos), and is called Anthropology.

When the first pair of human beings stood alone on the face of the earth, there were then the materials for Anthropology; and so there would be if our species were reduced to the last man. There would be an Anthropology if the world had[5] no inhabitants but Englishmen, or none but Chinese; none but red men of America, or none but blacks of Africa. Were the uniformity of feature, the identity of colour, the equality of stature, the rivalry of mental capacity ever so great, there would still be an Anthropology. This is because Anthropology deals with Man as compared with the lower animals.

When the first pair of humans stood alone on the face of the earth, the foundation for Anthropology was laid; and it would still exist if our species were reduced to just one person. There would be Anthropology even if the world had[5] only English people, or only Chinese; only Native Americans, or only people from Africa. Even if features were uniform, skin color identical, height equal, and mental abilities matched, there would still be an Anthropology. This is because Anthropology focuses on humans in comparison to lower animals.

We consider the structure of the human extremities, and enlarge upon the flatness of the foot, and the flexibility of the hand. The one is subservient to the erect posture, the other to the innumerable manipulations which human industry demands. We compare them with the fins of fishes, the wings of birds; in doing which, we take the most extreme contrasts we can find. But we may also take nearer approximations, e.g. the hands of the higher apes. Here we find likeness as well as difference; difference as well as likeness. We investigate both; and record the result either in detail or by some general expression. Perhaps we pronounce that the one side gives the conditions of an arboreal life, the other those of a social state; the ape being the denizen of the woods, the man of towns and cities; the one a climber, the other a walker.

We examine the structure of human limbs, focusing on the flatness of the foot and the flexibility of the hand. One supports our upright posture, while the other is essential for the countless tasks that human work requires. We compare these features to fish fins and bird wings, highlighting the most notable contrasts. However, we can also look at closer examples, like the hands of higher apes. In this comparison, we observe both similarities and differences. We explore both aspects and document our findings in detail or with general statements. We might conclude that one side aligns with arboreal life, while the other aligns with social living; the ape inhabits the forests, while humans inhabit towns and cities—the ape is a climber, and the human is a walker.

Or we compare the skull of the man and the chimpanzee; noticing that the ridges and prominences[6] of the external surface, which in the former are merely rudimentary, become strongly-marked crests in the latter. We then remember that the one is the framework for the muscles of the face; the other is the case for the brain.

Or we compare the skull of a man and a chimpanzee, noticing that the ridges and protrusions[6] on the outside, which are just slight in the former, become prominent crests in the latter. We then recall that one serves as the structure for the muscles of the face, while the other protects the brain.

All that is done in this way is Anthropology.

All that is done in this manner is Anthropology.

Every class of organized beings has, mutatis mutandis, its anthropological aspect; so that the dog may be contemplated in respect to the fox which equals, the ape which excels, or the kangaroo which falls short of it in its approach to a certain standard of organization; in other words, as species and genera have their relative places in the ladder of creation, the investigation of such relations is co-extensive with the existence of the classes and groups on which it rests.

Every category of organized beings has, mutatis mutandis, its anthropological aspect; so that the dog can be looked at in relation to the fox that is similar, the ape that is superior, or the kangaroo that falls short in reaching a certain standard of organization. In other words, just as species and genera hold their relative positions in the hierarchy of creation, studying these relationships is as extensive as the existence of the classes and groups that depend on it.

Anthropology deals too much with such matters as these to be popular. Unless the subject be handled with excessive delicacy, there is something revolting to fastidious minds in the cool contemplation of the differentiæ of the Zoologist

Anthropology focuses too much on issues like these to be widely liked. Unless the topic is approached with extra sensitivity, there’s something off-putting to sensitive minds about the unemotional examination of the differentiæ of the Zoologist.

“Who shows a Newton as he shows an ape.”

“Who presents a Newton as he would present an ape.”

Yet, provided there be no morbid gloating over the more dishonourable points of similarity, no pleasurable excitement derived from the lowering view of our nature, the study is not ignoble. At any rate, it is part of human knowledge, and a step in the direction of self-knowledge.

Yet, as long as there’s no unhealthy enjoyment in the more shameful aspects of our similarities, and no thrill taken from a negative perspective on our nature, the study is not unworthy. In any case, it’s part of human knowledge and a step toward understanding ourselves better.

Besides this, the relationship is merely one of degree. We may not be either improperly or unpleasantly like the orang-utan or the chimpanzee. We may even be angelomorphic. Nevertheless, we are more like orang-utans and chimpanzees than aught else upon earth.

Besides this, the relationship is just a matter of degree. We might not be improperly or unpleasantly similar to the orangutan or the chimpanzee. We might even seem angelic. Still, we are more like orangutans and chimpanzees than anything else on earth.

The other branch of Man’s Natural History is called Ethnology—from the Greek word signifying nation (ethnos).

The other branch of Man’s Natural History is called Ethnology—from the Greek word meaning nation (ethnos).

It by no means follows, that because there is an anthropology there is an ethnology also. There is no ethnology where there is but a single pair to the species. There would be no ethnology if all the world were negroes; none if every man was a Chinese; none if there were naught but Englishmen. The absolute catholicity of a religion without sects, the centralized uniformity of a universal empire, are types and parallels to an anthropology without an ethnology. This is because Ethnology deals with Man in respect to his Varieties.

It doesn't necessarily mean that just because there's an anthropology, there’s also an ethnology. There’s no ethnology if there’s only one type of species. There wouldn't be any ethnology if everyone in the world were Black; none if everyone were Chinese; and none if everyone were English. The complete inclusiveness of a religion without divisions and the centralized uniformity of a global empire are examples that parallel an anthropology without an ethnology. This is because Ethnology focuses on Man in relation to his Varieties.

There would be an anthropology if but one single variety of mankind existed.

There would be anthropology if only one single type of humanity existed.

But if one variety of mankind—and no more—existed, there would be no ethnology. It would be as impossible a science as a polity on Robinson Crusoe’s island.

But if there was only one type of humanity—and nothing else—there would be no ethnology. It would be as impossible a science as a government on Robinson Crusoe’s island.

But let there be but a single sample of different though similar bodily conformation. Let there be a[8] white as well as a black, or a black as well as a white man. In that case ethnology begins; even as a polity began on Crusoe’s island when his servant Friday became a denizen of it.

But let there be just one example of different but similar body types. Let there be a[8] white person as well as a black person, or a black person as well as a white person. In that case, the study of different races begins; just like a society started on Crusoe’s island when his servant Friday became a part of it.

The other classes of organized beings, although, mutatis mutandis, they have, of necessity, their equivalent to an anthropology, may or may not have an ethnology. The dog has one; the chimpanzee has either none or an insignificant one; differences equivalent to those which separate the cur from the greyhound, or the shepherd’s-dog from the pointer, being wanting. Again, a treatise which showed how the chimpanzee differed from the orang-utan on one side, and man on the other, would be longer than a dissertation upon the extent to which chimpanzees differed from each other; yet a dissertation on the varieties of dogs would be bulkier than one on their relations to the fox. This shows how the proportions of the two studies may vary with the species under consideration. In the Natural History of Man, the ethnological aspect is the most varied. It is also the one which has been most studied. With the horse, or the sheep, with many of the domestic fowls, with the more widely-cultivated plants, the study of the variety outweighs that of the species. With the dog it does so in an unparalleled degree. But what if the dog-tribe had the use of language?[9] what if the language differed with each variety? In such a case the study of canine ethnology would be doubly and trebly complex, though at the same time the data for conducting it would be both increased and improved. A distant—a very distant approach—to this exists. The wild dog howls; the companion of man alone barks. This is a difference of language as far as it goes. This is written to foreshadow the importance of the study of language as an instrument of ethnological investigation.

The other types of organized beings, although, mutatis mutandis, they have their version of anthropology, may or may not have an ethnology. The dog has one; the chimpanzee has either none or a very limited one; the differences that separate a mutt from a greyhound, or a shepherd's dog from a pointer, are absent. Furthermore, a work that described how the chimpanzee differs from the orangutan on one side and humans on the other would be longer than a study on how chimpanzees differ from one another; yet a study on the varieties of dogs would be more extensive than one on their relationship to the fox. This indicates that the proportions of the two studies can change based on the species being examined. In the Natural History of Man, the ethnological aspect is the most diverse. It is also the most researched. When it comes to horses, sheep, many domestic chickens, and widely cultivated plants, the study of variety takes precedence over that of species. With dogs, it does so to an unmatched extent. But what if the dog family could use language?[9] what if the language varied with each breed? In that case, the study of canine ethnology would be far more complicated, but at the same time, the data to conduct it would be both expanded and improved. There is a distant—a very distant approach—to this concept. The wild dog howls; only the companion of humans barks. This is a difference in language, to the extent that it applies. This serves to highlight the importance of studying language as a tool for ethnological research.

Again—what if the dog-tribe were possessed of the practice of certain human arts, and if these varied with the variety? If they buried their dead? and their tombs varied with the variety? if those of one generation lasted for years, decenniums, or centuries? The ethnology would again increase in complexity, and the data would again be increased. The graves of an earlier generation would serve as unwritten records of the habits of sepulture with an earlier one. This is written to foreshadow the importance of the study of antiquities as an instrument of the same kind with philology.

Again—what if the dog tribe practiced certain human arts, and if those practices varied among them? What if they buried their dead? And if their tombs varied by type? What if the tombs from one generation lasted for years, decades, or even centuries? The study of cultures would become more complex, and the data would increase once more. The graves from an earlier generation would act as unwritten records of burial customs from that time. This is written to highlight the importance of studying ancient artifacts as a tool similar to philology.

With dogs there are impossibilities. True; but they serve as illustrations. With man they are realities—realities which make philology and archæology important adjuncts to his natural history.

With dogs, there are things that seem impossible. That’s true, but they act as examples. With humans, these are real—realities that make philology and archaeology important companions to our understanding of human history.

We have now ascertained the character of the study in question; and seen how far it differs from history properly so-called—at least we have done so sufficiently for the purpose of definition. A little reflection will show its relations to certain branches of science, e.g. to physiology, and mental science—a relation upon which there is no time to enlarge. It is enough to understand the existence of such a separate substantive branch of knowledge and inquiry.

We have now figured out the nature of the study in question and seen how much it differs from real history—at least we've done so enough for our definition. A bit of thought will reveal its connections to certain areas of science, like physiology and mental science—connections we don't have time to expand on. It's enough to recognize that there is a distinct and separate field of knowledge and inquiry.

What is the amount of this knowledge? This is proportionate to that of the inquiry. What has this been? Less than we are prepared to expect.

What is the extent of this knowledge? It's proportional to that of the inquiry. What has this been? Less than what we are ready to expect.

“The proper study of mankind is Man.”

“The proper study of humanity is humans.”

This is a stock quotation on the subject.

This is a stock quote on the topic.

“Homo sum; humani nihil a me alienum puto.”

“Homo sum; humani nihil a me alienum puto.”

This is another. Like many apophthegms of the same kind, they have more currency than influence, and are better known than acted on. We know the zoology of nine species out of ten amongst the lower animals better than that of our own genus. So little have the importance and the investigation of a really interesting subject been commensurate.

This is another one. Like many sayings of this type, they are more popular than impactful, and are better recognized than actually followed. We understand the biology of nine out of ten species among lower animals better than that of our own kind. The significance and the study of a truly interesting topic have been far from equal.

It is a new science—so new as scarcely to have reached the period of adolescence. Let us ask what the ancients cared about it.

It is a new science—so new that it has hardly reached the age of adolescence. Let's ask what the ancients thought about it.

We do not look for systematic science in the Scriptures; and the ethnology which we derive from them consists wholly of incidental notices. These, though numerous, are brief. They apply, too, to but a small portion of the earth’s surface. That, however, is one of pre-eminent interest—the cradle of civilization, and the point where the Asiatic, African, and European families come in contact.

We don’t expect systematic science in the Scriptures; the ethnology we get from them is entirely made up of incidental mentions. These are numerous but brief. They also apply to only a small part of the earth. However, that area is of major importance—it’s the birthplace of civilization and the point where the Asian, African, and European cultures intersect.

Greece helps us more: yet Greece but little. The genius of Thucydides gave so definite a character to history, brought it so exclusively in contact with moral and political, in opposition to physical, phænomena, and so thoroughly made it the study of the statesman rather than of the zoologist, that what may be called the naturalist element, excluded at the present time, was excluded more than 2000 years ago. How widely different this from the slightly earlier Herodotean record—the form and spirit of which lived and died with the great father of historic narrative! The history of the Peloponnesian war set this kind of writing aside for ever, and the loss of what the earlier prototype might have been developed into, is a great item in the price which posterity has to pay for the κτῆμα εἰς ἀεὶ of the Athenian. As it is, however, the nine books of Herodotus form the most ethnological work not written by a professed[12] and conscious ethnologist. Herodotus was an unconscious and instinctive one; and his ethnology was of a sufficiently comprehensive character. Manners he noted, and physical appearance he noted, and language he noted; his Scythian, Median, Ægyptian, and other glosses having the same value in the eyes of the closet philologist of the present century, as the rarer fossils of some old formation have with the geologist, or venerable coins with the numismatic archæologist. Let his name be always mentioned with reverence; for the disrespectful manner in which his testimony has been treated by some recent writers impugns nothing but the scholarship of the cavillers.

Greece helps us more, yet Greece contributes only a little. The brilliance of Thucydides gave history such a distinct character, connecting it so closely with moral and political matters, as opposed to physical phenomena, that it has become the study of statesmen rather than zoologists. The so-called naturalist aspect, which is absent today, was also excluded over 2000 years ago. This is in stark contrast to the slightly earlier works of Herodotus, the form and spirit of which began and ended with the great father of historical narrative. The history of the Peloponnesian War permanently set aside this style of writing, and the loss of what the earlier model might have developed into is a significant part of what future generations will have to pay for the property forever of the Athenians. As it stands, the nine books of Herodotus make up the most ethnological work not created by a dedicated and conscious ethnologist. Herodotus was an unconscious and instinctive ethnologist, and his ethnology was broad enough. He observed customs, physical appearances, and languages; his notes on the Scythians, Medes, Egyptians, and others hold the same value for today’s closet philologist as rare fossils do for geologists or ancient coins do for numismatic archaeologists. Let his name always be mentioned with respect, for the disrespectful way some recent writers have treated his testimony reflects solely on their scholarship.

I do not say that there are no ethnological facts—it may be that we occasionally find ethnological theories—in the Greek writers subsequent; I only state that they by no means answer the expectations raised by the names of the authors, and the opportunities afforded by the nature of their subjects. Something is found in Hippocrates in the way of theory as to the effect of external condition, something in Aristotle, something in Plato—nothing, however, by which we find the study of Man as an animal recognized as a separate substantive branch of study. More than this—in works where the description of new populations was especially called for, and where the evidence[13] of the writer would have been of the most unexceptionable kind, we find infinitely less than there ought to be. How little we learn of Persia from the Cyropædia, or of Armenia from the Anabasis—yet how easily might Xenophon have told us much!

I’m not saying there aren’t any ethnological facts—it’s possible we occasionally find ethnological theories in the later Greek writers; I just want to point out that they don’t really meet the expectations set by the names of the authors and the subjects they cover. There are some theories in Hippocrates about the effects of external conditions, a bit in Aristotle, and some in Plato—however, there’s nothing that establishes the study of humans as animals as a distinct field. Moreover, in the works where a description of new populations was especially necessary, and where the writer's observations would have been highly reliable, we find far less than we should. We learn so little about Persia from the Cyropædia or about Armenia from the Anabasis—yet Xenophon could have easily shared so much more!

Amongst the successors of Aristotle, we find none who writes a treatise περὶ βαρβάρων—yet how natural the subject, and how great the opportunities!—great, because of the commerce of the Euxine, and the institution of domestic slavery: the one conducting the merchant to the extreme Tanais, the other filling Athens with Thracians, and Asia Minor with Africans. The advantages which the Greeks of the age of Pericles neglected, are the advantages which the Brazilian Portuguese neglect at present, and which, until lately, both the English and the States-men of America neglected also. And the loss has been great. Like time and tide, ethnology waits for no man; and, even as the Indian of America disappears before the European, so did certain populations of antiquity. The process of extinction and amalgamation is as old as history; and whole families have materially altered in character since the beginning of the historical period. The present population of Bulgaria, Wallachia, and Moldavia is of recent introduction. What was the ancient? “Thracians and Getæ” is the answer. But what[14] were they? “Germans,” says one writer; “Slavonians,” another; “an extinct race,” another. So that there is doubt and difference of opinion. Yet we know some little about them in other respects. We know their political relations; a little of their creed, and manners; the names of some of their tribes. Their place in the classification of the varieties of our species we do not know; and this is because, though the Greeks wrote the civil, they neglected the physical history of Man.

Among the followers of Aristotle, none wrote a treatise about barbarians—yet how fitting the topic is, and how many opportunities there were!—great opportunities due to the trade in the Euxine Sea and the existence of domestic slavery: one facilitating merchants traveling to the far reaches of the Tanais, the other filling Athens with Thracians and Asia Minor with Africans. The advantages overlooked by the Greeks during the era of Pericles are the very advantages that the Brazilian Portuguese currently overlook, and until recently, both the English and American statesmen ignored as well. The loss has been significant. Just like time and tide, ethnology waits for no one; and just as the Native American disappears before the European, certain ancient populations have vanished too. The process of extinction and merging has existed since the dawn of history, and entire families have significantly changed in character since historical records began. The current population of Bulgaria, Wallachia, and Moldavia is relatively new. What was ancient? "Thracians and Getæ" is the answer. But what[14] were they? "Germans," says one writer; "Slavs," another; "an extinct race," says yet another. There is uncertainty and differing opinions. However, we know some details about them in other areas. We know their political ties, a bit about their beliefs and customs, and the names of some of their tribes. Their position in the classification of human varieties remains unknown to us; and this is because, while the Greeks documented the civil, they overlooked the physical history of mankind.

Thrace, Asia Minor, and the Caucasus—these are the areas for which the ancients might easily have left descriptions, and for which they neglected to do so; the omission being irreparable.

Thrace, Asia Minor, and the Caucasus—these are the regions where the ancients could have easily provided descriptions, but they failed to do so; this omission is irreversible.

The opportunities of the Roman were greater than those of the Greek; and they were better used. Dissertations, distantly approaching the character of physical history, occur in even the pure historical writers of Greece, I allude more especially to the sketch of the manners and migrations of the ancient Greeks in the first, and the history of the Greek colonization of Sicily in the sixth book of Thucydides. Parallels to these re-appear in the Roman writers; and, in some cases, their proportion to the rest of the work is considerable. Sallust’s sketch of Northern Africa, Tacitus’ of Jewish history are of this sort—and, far superior to either, Cæsar’s account of Gaul and Britain.

The opportunities for the Romans were greater than those for the Greeks, and they made better use of them. Even among the purely historical writers of Greece, there are essays that touch on physical history, particularly in the sections on the customs and migrations of the ancient Greeks in the first book and the history of Greek colonization in Sicily in the sixth book of Thucydides. Similar examples can be found in Roman writers, and in some cases, their significance is quite substantial. Sallust’s overview of Northern Africa, Tacitus’ examination of Jewish history, and, far more impressive, Caesar’s account of Gaul and Britain all fit this mold.

The Germania[1] of Tacitus is the nearest approach to proper ethnology that antiquity has supplied. It is far, however, from either giving us the facts which are of the most importance, or exhibiting the method of investigation by which ethnology is most especially contrasted with history.

The Germania[1] by Tacitus is the closest we have to proper ethnology from ancient times. However, it falls short of providing the most important facts or showing the method of investigation that clearly distinguishes ethnology from history.

But the true measure of the carelessness of the Romans upon these points is to be taken by the same rule which applied to that of the Greeks; i. e. the contrast between their opportunities and their inquiry. Northern Italy, the Tyrol, Dalmatia, Pannonia, have all stood undescribed in respect to the ancient populations; yet they were all in a favourable position for description.

But the true measure of how careless the Romans were about these matters can be understood in the same way as we do with the Greeks; i. e. by looking at the difference between their opportunities and their investigation. Northern Italy, the Tyrol, Dalmatia, and Pannonia have all gone undocumented in terms of the ancient populations, yet they were all in a good position for being described.

If the Jewish, Greek, and Roman writers give but little, the literatures derived from them give less; though, of course, there is a numerous selection of important passages to be made from the authors of the Middle Ages, as well as from the Byzantine historians. Besides which, there is the additional advantage of Greece and Rome having ceased to be the only countries thought worthy of being written about. A Gothic, a Slavonic, a[16] Moorish history now make their appearance. Still they are but civil—not natural—histories. However, our sphere of observation increases, the members of the human family increase, and our records increase. Nevertheless, the facts for the naturalist occur but incidentally.

If the Jewish, Greek, and Roman writers provide little, the literature that comes from them offers even less; however, there is still a large selection of important excerpts from Middle Ages authors and Byzantine historians. Additionally, it's beneficial that Greece and Rome are no longer the only places deemed worthy of being written about. Now we have histories from Gothic, Slavic, and Moorish backgrounds. Yet, these are primarily civil—not natural—histories. Our range of observation is expanding, the number of people in the world is growing, and our records are increasing. Still, the facts relevant to the naturalist appear only incidentally.

Of the Oriental literature I can only give my impression; and, as far as that goes, it is in favour of the Chinese statements having the most, and the Indian the least ethnological value; indeed, the former nation appears to have connected the notice of the occupant population with the notice of the area occupied, with laudable and sufficient closeness. I believe, too, that several differences of language are also carefully noted. Still, such ethnology as this supplies is an educt from the works in question, rather than their subject.

Of the Oriental literature, I can only share my impression; and based on that, I think the Chinese accounts hold the most ethnological value, while the Indian ones hold the least. In fact, the Chinese seem to have linked the information about the population living in an area with the description of the area itself, which is commendable and thorough. I also believe that several language differences are noted with care. However, the ethnology provided here comes more from analyzing these works than from their main topics.

We now come to times nearer our own. For a sketch like the present, the Science begins when the classification of the Human Varieties is first attempted. Meanwhile, we must remember that America has been discovered, and that our opportunities now differ from those of the ancients not merely in degree but in kind. The field has been infinitely enlarged; and the world has become known in its extremities as well as in its middle parts. The human naturalists anterior to the times of Buffon and Linnæus are like the great men before Agamemnon. A minute literary history[17] would doubtless put forward some names for this period; indeed for some departments of the study there are a few great ones. Still it begins with the times of Linnæus and Buffon—Buffon first in merit. That writer held that a General History of Man, as well as A Theory of the Earth, was a necessary part of his great work; and, as far as the former subject is concerned, he thought rightly. It is this, too, in which he has succeeded best. Thoroughly appreciating its importance, he saw its divisions clearly; and after eight chapters on the Growth of Man, his Decay, and his Senses, he devotes a ninth, as long as the others put together, to the consideration of the Varieties of the Human Species. “Every thing,” he now writes, “which we have hitherto advanced relates to Man as an individual. The history of the species requires a separate detail, of which the principal facts can only be derived from the varieties that are found in the inhabitants of different regions. Of these varieties, the first and most remarkable is the colour, the second the form and size, and the third the disposition. Considered in its full extent, each of these objects might afford materials for a volume[2].” No man need draw a clearer line between anthropology and ethnology than this. Of the systematic classification,[18] which philology has so especially promoted, no signs occur in his treatise; on the other hand, his appreciation of the effects of difference in physical conditions is well-founded in substance, and definitely expressed. To this he attributes the contrast between the Negro, the American, and the African, and, as a natural result, he commits himself unequivocally to the doctrine of the unity of the species.

We now reach times that are closer to our own. For a discussion like this one, the Science starts when the classification of Human Varieties is first attempted. At the same time, we need to remember that America has been discovered, and our opportunities now differ from those of ancient times not just in degree but in kind. The field has expanded infinitely, and the world is known in its farthest reaches as well as in its central areas. The human naturalists before Buffon and Linnæus are like the great figures who existed before Agamemnon. A detailed literary history[17] would surely highlight some names from this period; indeed, there are a few notable scholars in certain areas of the study. Still, it begins with the times of Linnæus and Buffon—Buffon being the more significant one. That writer believed that a General History of Man, along with A Theory of the Earth, was essential to his major work; and regarding the former subject, he was correct. It is also the area where he achieved his best results. Fully recognizing its importance, he clearly delineated its sections; and after discussing the Growth of Man, his Decay, and his Senses in eight chapters, he dedicates a ninth chapter, as long as the previous ones combined, to the examination of the Varieties of the Human Species. “Everything,” he writes, “that we have discussed so far pertains to Man as an individual. The history of the species requires a separate account, the main facts of which can only be derived from the varieties found among the inhabitants of different regions. Among these varieties, the first and most striking is color, the second is form and size, and the third is disposition. When considered thoroughly, each of these subjects could provide material for a volume[2].” No one needs to draw a clearer distinction between anthropology and ethnology than this. In the systematic classification,[18] which philology has particularly advanced, there are no signs in his work; however, his acknowledgment of the effects of differing physical conditions is well-founded in substance and clearly expressed. He relates this to the differences between the Negro, the American, and the African, and, as a natural conclusion, he firmly commits to the notion of the unity of the species.

Linnæus took less cognizance of the species to which he belonged; the notice in the first edition of the Systema Naturæ being as follows:—

Linnæus paid less attention to the species he belonged to; the note in the first edition of the Systema Naturæ said the following:—

Quadrupedalia.
Corpus hirsutum, pedes quatuor, feminæ viviparæ, lactiferæ.
Anthropomorpha.
Dentes primores iv. utrinque vel nulli.
Homo Nosce te ipsum H. Europæus albescens.
Americanus rubescens.
Asiaticus fuscus.
Africanus niger.
  Ante­riores. Poste­riores.  
Simia Digiti 5.   Digiti 5.   Simia, cauda carens. Papio. Satyrus.
  Posteriores anterioribus similes.   Cercopithecus. Cynocephalus.
Bradypus Digiti 3. vel 2. Digiti 3.   Ai—ignavus. Tardigradus.

Now both Buffon and Linnæus limit their consideration of the bodily structure of man to the phænomena of colour, skin, and hair; in other words, to the so-called soft parts.

Now both Buffon and Linnæus restrict their focus on the physical structure of humans to the phenomena of color, skin, and hair; in other words, to the so-called soft parts.

From the Greek word osteon = bone, we have the anatomical term osteology = the study of the bony skeleton.

From the Greek word osteon = bone, we get the anatomical term osteology = the study of the bony skeleton.

This begins with the researches of the contemporary and helpmate of Buffon. Daubenton first drew attention to the base of the skull, and, amongst the parts thereof, to the foramen ovale most especially. Through the foramen ovale the spinal chord is continued into the brain, or—changing the expression—the brain prolonged into the spinal chord; whilst by its attachments the skull is connected with the vertebral column. The more this point of junction—the pivot on which the head turns—is in the centre of the base of the skull, the more are the conditions of the erect posture of man fulfilled; the contrary being the case if the foramen lie backward, as is the case with the ape as compared with the Negro, and, in some instances, with the Negro as compared with the European. I say in some instances, because the backward position of the foramen ovale in the Negro is by no means either definite or constant. Now the notice of the variations of the position of the foramen ovale—one of the first specimens of ethnological criticism[20] applied to the hard parts of the human body—is connected with the name of Daubenton.

This starts with the research of Buffon's contemporary and assistant. Daubenton first highlighted the base of the skull, particularly focusing on the foramen ovale. The foramen ovale is where the spinal cord connects to the brain or, in other words, where the brain extends into the spinal cord. Its connections link the skull to the vertebral column. The more centralized this point of junction—the pivot upon which the head turns—is at the centre of the base of the skull, the better the conditions for an upright posture in humans. The opposite occurs if the foramen is positioned further back, as seen in apes compared to Black individuals, and in some cases, Black individuals compared to Europeans. I say in some cases because the backward location of the foramen ovale in Black individuals is not definite or constant. Now, the observation of variations in the position of the foramen ovale—one of the earliest examples of ethnological criticism[20] applied to the hard parts of the human body—is associated with Daubenton.

The study of the skull—for the skeleton is now dividing the attention of investigators with the skin and hair—in profile is connected with that of Camper. This brings us to his well-known facial angle. It means the extent to which the forehead retreated; sloping backwards from the root of the nose in some cases, and in others rising perpendicularly above the face.

The study of the skull—since researchers are now equally focused on the skeleton as well as the skin and hair—when viewed in profile is related to Camper's work. This leads us to his famous facial angle. It refers to how much the forehead set back; sloping back from the root of the nose in some instances, and in others, standing straight above the face.

Now the osteology of Daubenton and Camper was the osteology that Blumenbach found when he took up the subject. It was something; but not much.

Now the osteology of Daubenton and Camper was the osteology that Blumenbach found when he took up the subject. It was something; but not much.

In 1790, Blumenbach published his anatomical description of ten skulls—his first decade—drawn up with the special object of showing how certain varieties of mankind differed from each other in the conformation of so important an organ as the skull of a reasonable being—a being thereby distinguished and characterized.

In 1790, Blumenbach published his anatomical description of ten skulls—his first decade—created specifically to demonstrate how different human varieties varied in the structure of such an important organ as the skull of a rational being—thereby distinguishing and characterizing that being.

He continued his researches; publishing at intervals similar decades, to the number of six. In 1820, he added to the last a pentad, so that the whole list amounted to sixty-five.

He continued his research, publishing at intervals similar to a decade, bringing the total to six. In 1820, he added five more to the last one, so the entire list reached sixty-five.

It was in the third decade, published A.D. 1795, that an unfortunate skull of a Georgian female made its appearance. The history of this should[21] be given. Its owner was taken by the Russians, and having been removed to Moscow died suddenly. The body was examined by Professor Hiltenbrandt, and the skull presented to De Asch of St. Petersburg. Thence it reached the collection of Blumenbach, of which it seems to have been the gem—“universus hujus cranii habitus tam elegans et venustus, ut et tantum non semper vel indoctorum, si qui collectionem meam contemplentur, oculos eximia sua proportionis formositate feriat.” This encomium is followed by the description. Nor is this all. A plaster cast of one of the most beautiful busts of the Townley Museum was in possession of the anatomist. He compared the two; “and so closely did they agree that you might take your oath of one having belonged to the other”—“adeo istud huic respondere vides, ut illud hujus prototypo quondam inhæsisse pejerares.” Lastly, he closes with an extract from Chardin, enthusiastically laudatory of the beauty of the women of Georgia, and adds that his skull verifies the panegyric—“Respondet ceteroquin formosum istud cranium, quod sane pro canone ideali habere licet, iis quæ de summa Georgianæ gentis pulcritudine vel in vulgus nota sunt.

It was in the 1790s that the unfortunate skull of a Georgian woman was discovered. The story behind it should be shared. Its owner was captured by the Russians, and after being taken to Moscow, she died suddenly. The body was examined by Professor Hiltenbrandt, and the skull was given to De Asch in St. Petersburg. From there, it ended up in Blumenbach's collection, where it appeared to be the highlight—“universus hujus cranii habitus tam elegans et venustus, ut et tantum non semper vel indoctorum, si qui collectionem meam contemplentur, oculos eximia sua proportionis formositate feriat.” This praise was followed by a detailed description. That’s not all. The anatomist also had a plaster cast of one of the most beautiful busts from the Townley Museum. He compared the two and noted, “they matched so closely that you could swear one belonged to the other”—“adeo istud huic respondere vides, ut illud hujus prototypo quondam inhæsisse pejerares.” Finally, he concluded with a quote from Chardin, who praised the beauty of Georgian women, adding that the skull supports this praise—“Respondet ceteroquin formosum istud cranium, quod sane pro canone ideali habere licet, iis quæ de summa Georgianæ gentis pulcritudine vel in vulgus nota sunt.

At the end of the decade in question he used the epithets Mongolian, Æthiopian, and Caucasian (Caucasia varietas).

At the end of the decade in question, he used the terms Mongolian, Ethiopian, and Caucasian (Caucasia varietas).

In the next (A.D. 1808), he speaks of the excessive beauty—the ideal—the normal character of his Georgian skull; and speaks of his osteological researches having established a quinary division of the Human Species; naming them—1. The Caucasian; 2. The Mongolian; 3. The Æthiopic; 4. The American; and 5. The Malay.

In the next (A.D. 1808), he talks about the extreme beauty—the ideal—the typical traits of his Georgian skull; and mentions that his studies of bones have led to a five-part classification of the Human Species, naming them—1. The Caucasian; 2. The Mongolian; 3. The Æthiopic; 4. The American; and 5. The Malay.

Such is the origin of the term Caucasian; a term which has done much harm in Ethnology; a term to which Blumenbach himself gave an undue value, and his followers a wholly false import. This will be seen within a few pages. Blumenbach’s Caucasian class contained—

Such is the origin of the term Caucasian; a term that has caused a lot of harm in Ethnology; a term to which Blumenbach himself attributed too much importance, and his followers completely misinterpreted. This will be evident in a few pages. Blumenbach’s Caucasian class included—

  • 1. Most of the Europeans.
  • 2. The Georgians, Circassians, and other families of Caucasus.
  • 3. The Jews, Arabs, and Syrians.

In the same year with the fourth decade of Blumenbach, John Hunter gave testimony of the value of the study of Man to Man, by a dissertation with a quotation from Akenside on the title-page—

In the same year as the fourth decade of Blumenbach, John Hunter showcased the importance of studying humanity with a dissertation that included a quote from Akenside on the title page—

————— the roomy West
And all the crowded areas of the South,
Don't hold onto a search for the curious flight. Of knowledge that is half as tempting or as beautiful,
As Man to Man.

His tract was an Inaugural Dissertation, and I merely mention it because it was written by Hunter, and dedicated to Robertson.

His paper was an inaugural dissertation, and I only bring it up because it was written by Hunter and dedicated to Robertson.

Cuvier, in his Règne Animal, gives at considerable length the anthropological characteristics of Man, and places him as the only species of the genus Homo, the only genus of the order Bimana = two-handed; the apes being Quadrumana = four-handed. This was the great practical recognition of Man in his zoological relations.

Cuvier, in his Règne Animal, provides a detailed account of the anthropological traits of humans and identifies us as the only species in the genus Homo, which is the sole genus in the order Bimana = two-handed; whereas apes belong to Quadrumana = four-handed. This was a significant acknowledgment of humans in relation to their place in zoology.

In respect to the Ethnology, the classification of Blumenbach was modified—and that by increasing its generality. The absolute primary divisions were reduced to three—the Malay and the American being—not without hesitation—subordinated to the Mongolian. Meanwhile, an additional prominence was given to the group which contained the Australians of Australia, and the Papuans of New Guinea. Instead, however, of being definitely placed, it was left for further investigation.

In terms of Ethnology, Blumenbach's classification was adjusted by broadening its scope. The main categories were simplified to three, with the Malay and American groups being—though with some uncertainty—placed under the Mongolian category. At the same time, more emphasis was given to the group that included the Australians from Australia and the Papuans from New Guinea. However, instead of being definitively categorized, it was left open for further research.

The abuse of the term Caucasian was encouraged. Blumenbach had merely meant that his favourite specimen had exhibited the best points in the greatest degree. Cuvier speaks of traditions that ascribe the origin of mankind to the mountain-range so-called—traditions of no general diffusion, and of less ethnological value.

The misuse of the term Caucasian was promoted. Blumenbach only intended to say that his favorite specimen displayed the best qualities to the highest degree. Cuvier mentions traditions that claim humanity originated from the mountain range referred to—traditions that are not widely spread and hold little ethnological significance.

The time is now convenient for taking a retrospective view of the subject in certain other of its branches. Colour, hair, skin, bone, stature—all[24] these are points of physical conformation or structure; material and anatomical; points which the callipers or the scalpel investigates. But colour, hair, skin, bone, and stature, are not the only characteristics of man; nor yet the only points wherein the members of his species differ from each other. There is the function as well as the organ; and the parts of our body must be considered in regard to what they do as well as with reference to what they are. This brings in the questions of the phænomena of growth and decay,—the average duration of life,—reproduction, and other allied functions. This, the physiological rather than the purely anatomical part of the subject, requires a short notice of its own. A priori, we are inclined to say that it would be closely united, in the practice of investigation, with what it is so closely allied as a branch of science. Yet such has not been exactly the case. The anatomists were physiologists as well; and when Blumenbach described a skull, he, certainly, thought about the power, or the want of power, of the brain which it contained. But the speculators in physiology were not also anatomists. Such speculators, however, there were. An historian aspires to philosophy. There are some facts which he would account for; others on which he would build a system. Hot climates favour precocity of[25] the sexual functions. They also precipitate the decay of the attractions of youth. Hence, a woman who is a mother at twelve has outgrown her beauty at twenty. From this it follows that mental power and personal attractions become, necessarily, disunited. Hence the tendency on the part of the males to take wives in succession; whereby polygamy is shown to have originated in a law of nature.

The time is now right to look back at the subject from different angles. Color, hair, skin, bones, height—all[24] of these are aspects of physical form or structure; they are material and anatomical aspects that can be measured with calipers or examined with a scalpel. But color, hair, skin, bones, and height aren't the only traits that define a person; nor are they the only differences among members of our species. There's also function in addition to the organ; we must consider what parts of our body do as well as what they are. This raises questions about growth and decay—the average lifespan—reproduction, and other related functions. This, the physiological rather than purely anatomical part of the topic, needs its own brief discussion. A priori, we might think that it would be closely tied to a branch of science due to their connection in research. However, that hasn’t been exactly the case. Anatomists were also physiologists; when Blumenbach described a skull, he definitely thought about the capabilities, or lack thereof, of the brain inside it. But the theorists in physiology weren't necessarily anatomists. There were, however, such theorists. A historian aims for philosophy. Some facts he wants to explain; others he wants to use as a foundation for a theory. Hot climates promote early development of[25] sexual functions; they also accelerate the decline of youthful appeal. Therefore, a woman who becomes a mother at twelve might lose her beauty by the age of twenty. From this, it follows that mental ability and physical attractiveness inevitably become separated. This explains why males tend to have successive wives, showing that polygamy seems to arise from a natural law.

I do not ask whether this is true or false. I merely remind the reader that the moment such remarks occur, the natural history of Man has become recognized as an ingredient in the civil.

I’m not questioning whether this is true or false. I’m just pointing out to the reader that the moment these kinds of comments happen, the natural history of Man has been acknowledged as a part of the civil.

The chief early writers who expanded the real and supposed facts of the natural history of Man, without being professed ethnologists, were Montesquieu and Herder. By advertising the subject, they promoted it. It is doubtful whether they did more.

The main early writers who expanded on the real and imagined aspects of the natural history of Man, without being professional ethnologists, were Montesquieu and Herder. By bringing attention to the topic, they helped to promote it. It's uncertain whether they achieved much more.

We are still within the pale of physical phænomena; and the purely intellectual, mental, or moral characteristics of Man have yet to be considered. What divisions were founded upon the difference between the arts of the Negro and the arts of the Parisian? What upon the contrast between the despotisms of Asia and the constitutions of Europe? What between the cannibalism of New Zealand and the comparatively graminivorous diet[26] of the Hindu? There were not wanting naturalists who even in natural history insisted upon the high value of such characters, immaterial and supra-sensual as they were. The dog and fox, the hare and rabbit were alike in form; different in habits and temper—yet the latter fact had to be recognized. Nay, more, it helped to verify the specific distinctions which the mere differences of form might leave doubtful.

We are still looking at physical phenomena; the purely intellectual, mental, or moral traits of humans still need to be examined. What divisions were based on the differences between the arts of Black people and the arts of Parisians? What about the contrast between the autocracies of Asia and the governments of Europe? What about the difference between the cannibalism of New Zealand and the relatively herbivorous diet[26] of Hindus? There were naturalists who, even in natural history, emphasized the importance of such traits, no matter how intangible and beyond the senses they were. The dog and fox, the hare and rabbit are similar in shape; they differ in habits and temperament—yet this difference has to be acknowledged. Moreover, it helped confirm the specific distinctions that the mere differences in shape might leave unclear.

All that can be said upon this matter is, that no branch of the subject was earlier studied than that which dealt with the manners and customs of strange nations; whilst no branch of it both was and is half so defective as that which teaches us their value as characteristics. With ten writers familiar with the same facts there shall be ten different ways of appreciating them:—

All that can be said about this topic is that no part of it was studied earlier than the one focused on the manners and customs of foreign nations; yet, no part is as flawed as the one that teaches us how to value these characteristics. With ten writers familiar with the same facts, there will be ten different ways to interpret them:—

“Manserunt hodieque manent vestigia ruris.”

"Remnants of the countryside remain today."

In the year 1851, this is the weakest part of the science.

In 1851, this is the weakest aspect of the science.

With one exception, however—indefinite and inappreciable as may be the ethnological value of such differences as those which exist between the superstitions, moral feelings, natural affections, or industrial habits of different families, there is one great intellectual phænomenon which in definitude yields to no characteristic whatever—I mean Language. Whatever may be said against certain[27] over-statements as to constancy, it is an undoubted fact that identity of language is primâ facie evidence of identity of origin.

With one exception, though—no matter how unclear and minimal the ethnological significance of differences in superstitions, morals, natural feelings, or work habits among various families may be, there is one major intellectual phenomenon that stands out distinctly—I'm talking about Language. Regardless of any criticisms about certain overstatements regarding consistency, it's undeniably true that shared language is primâ facie evidence of shared origin.

No reasonable man has denied this. It is not conclusive, but primâ facie it undoubtedly is. More cannot be said of colour, skin, hair, and skeleton. Possibly, not so much.

No reasonable person has denied this. It is not conclusive, but primâ facie it definitely is. More can't be said about color, skin, hair, and bones. Maybe not even that much.

Again, language without being identical may be similar; just as individuals without being brothers or sisters may be first or second cousins. Similarity, then, is primâ facie evidence of relationship.

Again, language, even if not identical, can be similar; just as individuals, without being siblings, can be first or second cousins. Similarity, then, is primâ facie evidence of a relationship.

Lastly, this similarity may be weighed, measured, and expressed numerically; an important item in its value. Out of 100 words in two allied languages, a per-centage of any amount between 1 and 99 may coincide. Language then is a definite test, if it be nothing else. It has another recommendation; or perhaps I should say convenience. It can be studied in the closet: so that for one traveller who describes what he sees in some far-distant country, there may be twenty scholars at work in the libraries of Europe. This is only partially the case with the osteologist.

Lastly, this similarity can be evaluated, assessed, and expressed numerically; an important aspect of its value. Out of 100 words in two related languages, a percentage between 1 and 99 can match. Language then serves as a clear test, if nothing else. It has another advantage; or maybe I should say convenience. It can be studied privately: so for every traveler who describes what they see in some far-off country, there might be twenty scholars working in the libraries of Europe. This is only partially true for the osteologist.

Philological ethnology began betimes; long before ethnology, or even anthropology—which arose earlier—had either a conscious separate[28] existence or a name. It began even before the physical researches of Buffon.

Philological ethnology started early; long before ethnology, or even anthropology—which emerged earlier—had a clear separate existence or a name. It began even before the physical studies of Buffon.

“There is more in language than in any of its productions”—Many who by no means undervalue the great productions of literature join in this: indeed it is only saying that the Greek language is a more wonderful fact than the Homeric poems, or the Æschylean drama. This, however, is only an expression of admiration at the construction of so marvellous an instrument as human speech.

“There is more in language than in any of its expressions”—Many who definitely appreciate the great works of literature agree with this: in fact, it’s just saying that the Greek language is a more remarkable phenomenon than the Homeric poems or the plays of Aeschylus. This, however, is just a reflection of admiration for the creation of such an amazing tool as human communication.

“When history is silent, language is evidence”—This is an explicit avowal of its value as an instrument of investigation.

“When history is silent, language is evidence”—This is a clear statement of its importance as a tool for investigation.

I cannot affiliate either of these sayings; though I hold strongly with both. They must prepare us for a new term—the philological school of ethnology, the philological principle of classification, the philological test. The worst that can be said of this is that it was isolated. The philologists began work independently of the anatomists, and the anatomists independently of the philologists. And so, with one great exception, they have kept on.

I can't fully embrace either of these sayings, but I strongly agree with both. They should get us ready for a new term—the philological school of ethnology, the philological principle of classification, the philological test. The worst thing that can be said about this is that it was isolated. The philologists started their work independently of the anatomists, and the anatomists worked separately from the philologists. And so, with one major exception, they have continued on that path.

Pigafetta, one of the circumnavigators with Magalhaens, was the first who collected specimens of the unlettered dialects of the countries that afforded opportunities.

Pigafetta, one of the explorers who traveled around the world with Magellan, was the first to gather samples of the spoken languages from the regions that provided the chance.

The Abbé Hervas in the 17th century, published his Catalogue of Tongues, and Arithmetic of Nations, parts of a large and remarkable work, the Saggio del Universo. His data he collected by means of an almost unlimited correspondence with the Jesuit missionaries of the Propaganda.

The Abbé Hervas in the 17th century published his Catalogue of Tongues and Arithmetic of Nations, which are parts of a larger and notable work, the Saggio del Universo. He gathered his data through extensive correspondence with the Jesuit missionaries of the Propaganda.

The all-embracing mind of Leibnitz had not only applied itself to philology, but had clearly seen its bearing upon history. A paper on the Basque language is a sample of the ethnology of the inventor of Fluxions.

The comprehensive mind of Leibnitz not only focused on philology but also understood its implications for history. An article on the Basque language is an example of the ethnology from the inventor of calculus.

Reland wrote on the wide distribution of the Malay tongue; criticised certain vocabularies from the South-Sea Islands of Hoorn, Egmont, Ticopia (then called Cocos Island), and Solomon’s Archipelago, and gave publicity to a fact which even now is mysterious—the existence of Malay words in the language of Madagascar.

Reland wrote about the widespread use of the Malay language; he critiqued certain vocabularies from the South Sea Islands of Hoorn, Egmont, Ticopia (previously known as Cocos Island), and the Solomon Islands, and he highlighted a fact that is still a mystery today—the presence of Malay words in the language of Madagascar.

In 1801 Adelung’s Mithridates appeared, containing specimens of all the known languages of the world; a work as classical to the comparative philologist as Blackstone’s Commentaries are to the English lawyer. Vater’s Supplement (1821) is a supplement to Adelung; Jülg’s (1845) to Vater’s.

In 1801, Adelung’s Mithridates was published, featuring examples of all the known languages of the world; a work just as essential to the comparative linguist as Blackstone’s Commentaries are to the English lawyer. Vater’s Supplement (1821) is an addition to Adelung; Jülg’s (1845) is an addition to Vater’s.

Klaproth’s is the other great classic in this department. His Asia Polyglotta and Sprachatlas[30] give us the classification of all the families of Asia, according to the vocabularies representing their languages. Whether a comparison between their different grammars would do the same is doubtful; since it by no means follows that the evidence of the two coincides.

Klaproth’s work is the other major classic in this field. His Asia Polyglotta and Sprachatlas[30] provide a classification of all the families of Asia based on the vocabularies of their languages. It's uncertain whether comparing their different grammars would yield the same results, as it doesn’t necessarily mean that the evidence from both aligns.

Klaproth and Adelung have the same prominence in philological that Buffon and Blumenbach have in zoological ethnology.

Klaproth and Adelung are as significant in philological studies as Buffon and Blumenbach are in zoological ethnology.

Blumenbach appreciated the philological method: but the first who combined the two was Dr. Prichard. His profession gave him the necessary physiology; and that he was a philologist amongst philologists is shown not only by numerous details scattered throughout his writings, but by his ‘Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations’—the most definite and desiderated addition that has been made to ethnographical philology. I say nothing about the details of Dr. Prichard’s great work. Let those who doubt its value try to do without it.

Blumenbach valued the philological method, but the first to merge the two was Dr. Prichard. His profession provided him with the essential understanding of physiology, and his status as a philologist among philologists is evident not only through numerous details throughout his writings, but also in his ‘Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations’—the most concrete and sought-after contribution made to ethnographical philology. I won't discuss the specifics of Dr. Prichard’s significant work. Let those who question its importance try to manage without it.

But there is still something wanting. The relation of the sciences to the other branches of knowledge requires fixing. With anthropology the case is pretty clear. It comes into partial contact with the naturalist sciences (or those based on the principle of classification) and the biological (or those based on the idea of organization and life).

But there is still something missing. The relationship between the sciences and other areas of knowledge needs to be clarified. With anthropology, the situation is pretty clear. It has some overlap with the natural sciences (or those based on classification) and the biological sciences (or those based on the concepts of organization and life).

Ethnology, however, is more undecided in respect to position. If it be but a form of history, its place amongst the inductive sciences is equivocal; since neither the laws which it developes nor the method of pursuing it give it a place here. These put it in the same category with a series of records taken from the testimony of witnesses, or with a book of travels—literary but not scientific. And so it really is to a certain extent. Two remarkable productions, however, have determined its relations to be otherwise.

Ethnology, on the other hand, is less clear about its stance. If it’s just a type of history, its standing among the inductive sciences is questionable, since neither the laws it uncovers nor the methods it uses support that classification. This puts it alongside a collection of records based on witness testimony or a travelogue—more literary than scientific. To some extent, that’s true. However, two significant works have altered its relationship with these fields.

In Sir C. Lyell’s ‘Principles of Geology’ we have an elaborate specimen of reasoning from the known to the unknown, and of the inference of causes from effects. It would have been discreditable to our philosophy if such a sample of logic put in practice had been disregarded.

In Sir C. Lyell’s ‘Principles of Geology,’ we have a detailed example of reasoning from what we know to what we don't, and of the inference of causes from effects. It would have been embarrassing for our philosophy if such a practical example of logic had been ignored.

Soon after, came forth the pre-eminently suggestive works, par nobile, of the present Master of Trinity College, Cambridge. Here we are taught that in the sciences of geology, ethnology, and archæology, the method determines the character of the study; and that in all these we argue backwards. Present effects we know; we also know their causes as far as the historical period goes back. When we get beyond this, we can still reason—reason from the experience that the historical period has supplied. Climate, for instance, and[32] certain other conditions have some effect; within the limits of generation a small, within that of a millenium a larger one. Hence, before we dismiss a difference as inexplicable, we must investigate the changes that may have produced it, the conditions which may have determined those changes, and the time required from the exhibition of their influence.

Soon after, the incredibly insightful works of the current Master of Trinity College, Cambridge emerged. Here we learn that in the fields of geology, ethnology, and archaeology, the method shapes the nature of the study; and that in all these areas, we reason backwards. We know the present effects and also their causes, at least as far back as the historical period goes. Beyond that, we can still reason—drawing from the experiences that the historical period has provided. Climate, for example, and certain other factors have some effect; within a generation, the impact is small, while over a millennium it becomes larger. Therefore, before we dismiss a difference as unexplainable, we need to explore the changes that might have caused it, the conditions that may have influenced those changes, and the time needed for their effects to be felt.

In Dr. Prichard’s ‘Anniversary Address,’ delivered before the Ethnological Society of London in 1847—a work published after the death of its illustrious author—this relationship to Geology is emphatically recognized:—“Geology, as every one knows, is not an account of what nature produces in the present day, but of what it has long ago produced. It is an investigation of the changes which the surface of our planet has undergone in ages long since past. The facts on which the inferences of geology are founded, are collected from various parts of Natural History. The student of geology inquires into the processes of nature which are at present going on, but this is for the purpose of applying the knowledge so acquired to an investigation of what happened in past times, and of tracing, in the different layers of the earth’s crust—displaying, as they do, relics of various forms of organic life—the series of the repeated creations which have taken place. This investigation evidently belongs to History or Archæology,[33] rather than to what is termed Natural History. By a learned writer, whose name will ever be connected with the annals of the British Association, the term Palæontology has been aptly applied to sciences of this department, for which Physical Archæology may be used as a synonym. Palæontology includes both Geology and Ethnology. Geology is the archæology of the globe—ethnology that of its human inhabitants.”

In Dr. Prichard’s ‘Anniversary Address,’ delivered before the Ethnological Society of London in 1847—a work published after the death of its renowned author—this relationship to Geology is clearly acknowledged: “Geology, as everyone knows, is not a record of what nature produces today, but of what it produced long ago. It investigates the changes our planet's surface has undergone over ages past. The facts that support geological conclusions are gathered from various fields of Natural History. A geology student looks into the natural processes occurring right now, but this is for the purpose of applying that knowledge to understand what happened in the past and to trace the different layers of the earth’s crust—which display, as they do, remnants of various forms of life—the series of repeated creations that have occurred. This investigation clearly falls under History or Archæology,[33] rather than what is called Natural History. A learned writer, whose name will always be linked to the history of the British Association, has rightly referred to the field as Palæontology, for which Physical Archæology can be used as a synonym. Palæontology encompasses both Geology and Ethnology. Geology is the archæology of the Earth—ethnology that of its human inhabitants.”

When ethnology loses its palæontological character, it loses half its scientific elements; and the practical and decided recognition of this should be the characteristic of the English school of ethnologists.

When ethnology loses its paleontological aspect, it loses half of its scientific foundation; and the clear and practical acknowledgment of this should be a key trait of the English school of ethnologists.

This chapter will conclude with the notice of the bearings of the palæontological method upon one of the most difficult parts of ethnology, viz. the identification of ancient populations, or the distribution of the nations mentioned by the classical, scriptural and older oriental writers amongst the existing or extinct stocks and families of mankind.

This chapter will end with a discussion about how the paleontological method relates to one of the toughest areas of ethnology, specifically the identification of ancient populations, or the distribution of the nations described by classical, biblical, and earlier Eastern writers among the current or extinct groups and families of humans.

There are the Etruscans—who were they? The Pelasgians—who were they? The Huns that overrun Europe in the fifth century; the Cimmerii that devastated Asia, 900 years earlier? Archæology answers some of these questions; and the testimony of ancient writers helps us in others. Yet both mislead—perhaps, almost as often as they[34] direct us rightly. If it were not so, there would be less discrepancy of opinion.

There are the Etruscans—who were they? The Pelasgians—who were they? The Huns who swept through Europe in the fifth century; the Cimmerians who caused havoc in Asia 900 years earlier? Archaeology answers some of these questions, and the writings of ancient authors assist us with others. However, both can mislead us—maybe just as often as they actually guide us correctly. If that weren't the case, there would be fewer differing opinions.

Nevertheless, up to the present time the primary fact concerning any such populations has always been the testimony of some ancient historian or geographer, and the first question that has been put is, What say Tacitus—Strabo—Herodotus—Ptolemy, &c. &c.? In critical hands the inquiries go further; and statements are compared, testimonies weighed in a balance against each other, the opportunities of knowing, and the honesty in recording of the respective authors investigated. In this way a sketch of ancient Greece by Thucydides has a value which the authority of a lesser writer would fail to give it—and so on with others. Nevertheless, what Thucydides wrote he wrote from report, and inferences—report, most probably, carefully weighed, and inferences legitimately drawn. Yet sources of error, for which he is not to be held responsible, are innumerable. He went upon hearsay evidence—he sifted it, perhaps; but still he went upon hearsay evidence only. How do we value such evidence? By the natural probabilities of the account it constitutes. By what means do we ascertain these?

Nevertheless, up to now, the main point about any such populations has always been the accounts of some ancient historian or geographer, and the first question that gets asked is, What do Tacitus—Strabo—Herodotus—Ptolemy, etc., say? In critical analyses, the inquiries go deeper; statements are compared, testimonies are weighed against one another, and the author's opportunities to know the facts and their honesty in recording them are scrutinized. In this way, a sketch of ancient Greece by Thucydides holds a value that a lesser writer wouldn't provide—and the same goes for others. However, what Thucydides wrote was based on reports and inferences—reports that were likely carefully assessed and inferences that were reasonably drawn. Yet, there are countless sources of error for which he shouldn't be blamed. He relied on hearsay—he sifted it, perhaps; but ultimately, he relied on hearsay only. How do we assess such evidence? By the natural probabilities of the account it presents. How do we determine these?

I submit there is but one measure here—the existing state of things as either known to ourselves, or known to contemporaries capable of[35] learning them at the period nearest the time under consideration. This we examine as the effect of some antecedent cause—or series of causes. Ποῦ στῶ; says the scholar. On the dictum of such or such an author. Ποῦ στῶ; says the Archimedean ethnologist. On the last testified fact.

I argue that there is only one standard here—the current situation as known to us or to others who can learn about it from the time closest to the period we're discussing. We look at this as the result of some preceding cause or series of causes. Where should I stand? says the scholar. Based on the views of this or that author. Πού να σταθώ; says the Archimedean anthropologist. Based on the most recently confirmed fact.

Of the unsatisfactory character of anything short of contemporary testimony in the identification of ancient nations, the pages and pages that nine-tenths of the historians bestow upon the mysterious Pelasgi is a specimen. Add Niebuhr to Müller, and Thirlwall to Niebuhr—Pelion to Ossa, and Olympus to Pelion—and what facts do we arrive at—facts that we may rely on as such, facts supported by contemporary evidence, and recorded under opportunities of being ascertained? Just the three recognized by Mr. Grote; viz. that their language was spoken at Khreston—that it was spoken at Plakeæ—that it differed, in some unascertained degree, from the Greek.

Of the unsatisfactory nature of anything less than contemporary evidence in identifying ancient nations, the extensive pages that most historians dedicate to the mysterious Pelasgi serve as a prime example. Combine Niebuhr with Müller, and Thirlwall with Niebuhr—Pelion to Ossa, and Olympus to Pelion—and what facts do we end up with—facts that we can trust as such, supported by contemporary evidence, and recorded when verification was possible? Just the three acknowledged by Mr. Grote; namely, that their language was spoken at Khreston—that it was spoken at Plakeæ—that it varied, to some unknown extent, from Greek.

This is all that the ethnologist recognizes; and from this he argues as he best can. Every fact, less properly supported by either first-hand or traceable evidence, he treats with indifference. It may be good in history; but it is not good for him. He has too much use to put it to, too much to build upon it, too much argument to work out of it, to allow it to be other than unimpeachable.

This is all that the ethnologist acknowledges, and he makes his arguments based on this as best as he can. He considers any fact that isn’t well-supported by first-hand or verifiable evidence with indifference. It might be useful in history, but it doesn’t serve his purpose. He has too much at stake, too much to build from it, and too many arguments to develop from it to accept anything that isn’t absolutely reliable.

Again—Tacitus carries his Germania as far as the Niemen, so as to include the present countries of Mecklenburg, Pomerania, Brandenburg, West and East Prussia, and Courland. Is this improbable in itself? No. The area is by no means immoderately large. Is it improbable when we take the present state of those countries in question? No. They are German at present. Is it improbable in any case? and if so, in what? Yes. It becomes improbable when we remember that the present Germans have been as unequivocally and undoubtedly recent immigrants for the parts in question, as are the English of the Valley of the Mississippi, and that at the beginning of the historical period the whole of them were Slavonic, with nothing but the phraseology of Tacitus to prevent us from believing that they always had been so. But it is also improbable that so respectable a writer as Tacitus should be mistaken. Granted. And here begins the conflict of difficulties. Nevertheless, the primary ethnological fact is the state of things as it existed when the countries under consideration were first accurately known, taken along with the probability or improbability of its having so existed for a certain period previous, as compared with the probability or improbability of the migrations and other assumptions necessary for its recent introduction.

Again—Tacitus extends his Germania as far as the Niemen, including what we now know as Mecklenburg, Pomerania, Brandenburg, West and East Prussia, and Courland. Is this unlikely on its own? No. The area isn’t excessively large. Is it unlikely when we consider the current status of those regions? No. They are German now. Is it unlikely in any case? If so, why? Yes. It becomes unlikely when we remember that the current Germans are undeniably recent immigrants in the regions mentioned, just like the English in the Mississippi Valley, and that at the start of the historical period, they were all Slavic, with only Tacitus's wording to suggest they had always been otherwise. However, it's also unlikely that such a respected writer as Tacitus would make an error. Agreed. And here the conflict of difficulties arises. Nevertheless, the key ethnological fact is the situation as it was when the regions in question were first accurately recorded, along with the likelihood or unlikelihood of it having existed in that way for some time beforehand, compared to the likelihood or unlikelihood of the migrations and other assumptions needed for its recent establishment.

FOOTNOTES

[1] The value of Tacitus as an authority is minutely investigated in an ethnological edition of the Germania by the present writer, now in course of publication. The object of the present chapter is merely to show the extent to which the science in question is of recent, rather than ancient, origin.

[1] The significance of Tacitus as an authoritative source is thoroughly examined in an ethnological edition of the Germania by the current author, which is currently being published. The goal of this chapter is simply to demonstrate how recent this scientific field is, rather than being of ancient origin.

[2] Barr’s Translation, vol. iv. p. 191.

[2] Barr’s Translation, vol. iv. p. 191.

CHAPTER II.

Ethnology—its objects—the chief problems connected with it—prospective questions—transfer of populations—Extract from Knox—correlation of certain parts of the body to certain external influences—parts less subject to such influences—retrospective questions—the unity or non-unity of our species—opinions—plurality of species—multiplicity of protoplasts—doctrine of development—Dokkos—Extract—antiquity of our species—its geographical origin—the term race.

Ethnology—its subjects—the main issues related to it—future questions—movement of populations—Excerpt from Knox—connection between certain body parts and specific external factors—parts that are less affected by such factors—past questions—the unity or diversity of our species—views—multiple species—variety of original forms—theory of evolution—Dokkos—Excerpt—age of our species—its geographical origin—the term race.

In Cuvier—as far as he goes—we find the anthropological view of the subject predominant; and this is what we expect from the nature of the work in which it occurs: the degree in which one genus or species differs from the species or genus next to it being the peculiar consideration of the systematic naturalist. To exhibit our varieties would have required a special monograph.

In Cuvier—as far as he discusses it—we see that the anthropological perspective on the subject is the main focus; and that’s what we anticipate given the kind of work he’s doing: the extent to which one genus or species differs from the one nearby is the specific concern of the systematic naturalist. Showing our varieties would have needed a separate monograph.

In Prichard on the contrary ethnology preponderates; of anthropology, in the strict sense of the word, there being but little; and the ethnology is of a broad and comprehensive kind. Description there is, and classification there is; but, besides this, there is a great portion of the work devoted to what may be called Ethnological Dynamics, i. e. the appreciation of the effect of the external conditions[38] of climate, latitude, relative sea-level and the like upon the human body.

In Prichard, ethnology takes the spotlight, while there's not much anthropology in the strict sense. The ethnology is broad and comprehensive. There’s description and classification, but a significant part of the work focuses on what can be called Ethnological Dynamics, meaning the analysis of how external conditions like climate, latitude, and sea-level affect the human body.[38]

Prichard is the great repertory of facts; and read with Whewell’s commentary it gives us the Science in a form sufficiently full for the purposes of detail, and sufficiently systematic for the basis of further generalization. Still it must be read with the commentary already mentioned. If not, it fails in its most intellectual element; and becomes a system of simple records, rather than a series of subtle and peculiar inferences. So read, however, it gives us our facts and classifications in a working form. In other words, the Science has now taken its true place and character.

Prichard is a great source of information; and when read alongside Whewell’s commentary, it provides the Science in a detailed and systematic way, ideal for building further generalizations. However, it should be read with the mentioned commentary; otherwise, it lacks its most intellectual aspect and turns into just a collection of records rather than a series of insightful and unique conclusions. When read this way, though, it presents our facts and classifications in a working form. In other words, the Science has finally found its rightful place and identity.

If more than this be needed—and for the anthropology, it may be thought by some that Cuvier is too brief, and Prichard too exclusively ethnological—the work of Lawrence forms the complement. These, along with Adelung and Klaproth, form the Thesaurus Ethnologicus. But the facts which they supply are like the sword of the Mahometan warrior. Its value depended on the arm that wielded it; and such is the case here. No book has yet been written which can implicitly be taken for much more than its facts. Its inferences and classification must be criticised. Be this, however, as it may, in A.D. 1846 Mr. Mill writes, that “concerning the physical nature of man, as an[39] organized being, there has been much controversy, which can only be terminated by the general acknowledgement and employment of stricter rules of induction than are commonly recognized; there is, however, a considerable body of truth which all who have attended to the subject consider to be fully established, nor is there now any radical imperfection in the method observed in this department of science by its most distinguished modern teachers.”

If more than this is needed—and for anthropology, some might think that Cuvier is too concise, and Prichard too focused on ethnology—the work of Lawrence completes the picture. Together with Adelung and Klaproth, they make up the Thesaurus Ethnologicus. However, the facts they provide are like the sword of a warrior from the Islamic tradition. Its value depends on who is using it; and that's the case here. No book has been written that can be completely trusted for much more than its facts. Its conclusions and classifications must be criticized. Nonetheless, in A.D. 1846, Mr. Mill writes that “regarding the physical nature of man, as an [39] organized being, there has been a lot of debate, which can only be resolved by agreeing on and applying stricter rules of induction than are typically acknowledged; still, there is a considerable amount of truth that everyone who has studied the topic agrees is well established, and there is no longer any major flaw in the methods used in this area of science by its most prominent modern educators.”

This could not have been written thirty years ago. The department of science would, then, have been indefinite; and the teachers would not have been distinguished.

This could not have been written thirty years ago. The department of science would, then, have been indefinite; and the teachers would not have been distinguished.

It may now be as well to say what Ethnology and Anthropology are not. Their relations to history have been considered. Archæology illustrates each; yet the moment that it is confounded with either, mischief follows. Psychology, or the Science of the laws of Mind, has the same relation to them as Physiologymutatis mutandis; i.e. putting Mind in the place of Body.

It might be helpful to clarify what Ethnology and Anthropology are not. Their connections to history have been discussed. Archaeology sheds light on both fields; however, when it's mixed up with either, problems arise. Psychology, or the study of the laws of the mind, relates to them in the same way that Physiology does—mutatis mutandis; i.e. substituting Mind for Body.

But nearer than either are its two subordinate studies of Ethology[3], or the Science of Character, by which we determine the kind of character produced in conformity with the laws of Mind, by any set of circumstances, physical as well as moral; and[40] the Science of Society which investigates the action and reaction of associated masses[4] on each other.

But closer than either of those are its two supporting studies of Ethology[3], or the Science of Character, through which we identify the type of character formed according to the principles of the Mind, by any set of circumstances, physical as well as moral; and[40] the Science of Society that explores the interactions and influences of groups[4] on one another.

Such then is our Science; which the principle of Division of Labour requires to be marked off clearly in order to be worked advantageously. And now we ask the nature of its objects. It has not much to do with the establishment of any laws of remarkable generality; a circumstance which, in the eyes of some, may subtract from its value as a science; the nearest approach to anything of this kind being the general statement implied in the classifications themselves. Its real object is the solution of certain problems—problems which it investigates by its own peculiar method—and problems of sufficient height and depth and length and breadth to satisfy the most ambitious. All these are referable to two heads, and connect themselves with either the past or the future history of our species; its origin or destination.

This is our Science, which the principle of Division of Labour requires to be clearly defined in order to be effectively utilized. Now, let's discuss what its objects are. It doesn't focus much on establishing any laws of significant generality, which some might see as a drawback to its value as a science; the closest it gets to this is the general statement found in its classifications. Its main goal is to solve specific problems—problems that it examines through its unique method—and these problems are substantial enough to meet the expectations of the most ambitious. All of these can be categorized into two areas, relating to either the past or the future history of our species; its origin or destination.

We see between the Negro and the American a certain amount of difference. Has this always existed? If not, how was it brought about? By what influences? In what time? Quickly or slowly? These questions point backwards, and force upon us the consideration of what has been.

We notice some differences between Black people and Americans. Has this always been the case? If not, how did it happen? What influences contributed to it? Over what period? Was it fast or slow? These questions look to the past and make us think about what has been.

But the next takes us forwards. Great experiments in the transfer of populations from one climate to another have gone on ever since the discovery of America, and are going on now; sometimes westwards as to the New World; sometimes eastwards as to Australia and New Zealand; now from Celtic populations like Ireland; now from Gothic countries like England and Germany; now from Spain and Portugal;—to say nothing of the equally great phænomenon of Negro slavery being the real or supposed condition of American prosperity. Will this succeed? Ask this at Philadelphia, or Lima, Sydney, or Auckland, and the answer is pretty sure to be in the affirmative. Ask it of one of our English anatomists. His answer is as follows:—“Let us attend now to the greatest of all experiments ever made in respect of the transfer of a population indigenous to one continent, and attempting by emigration to take possession of another; to cultivate it with their own hands; to colonize it; to persuade the world, in time, that they are the natives of the newly occupied land. Northern America and Australia furnished the fields of this, the greatest of experiments. Already has the horse, the sheep, the ox, become as it were indigenous to these lands. Nature did not place them there at first, yet they seem to thrive and flourish, and multiply exceedingly. Yet, even as regards these domestic animals,[42] we cannot be quite certain. Will they eventually be self-supporting? Will they supplant the llama, the kangaroo, the buffalo, the deer? or in order to effect this, will they require to be constantly renovated from Europe? If this be the contingency, then the acclimatation is not perfect. How is it with man himself? The man planted there by nature, the Red-Indian, differs from all others on the face of the earth; he gives way before the European races, the Saxon and the Celtic; the Celt, Iberian, and the Lusitanian in the south; the Celt and the Saxon in the north.

But the next part takes us forward. Major experiments in moving populations from one climate to another have been happening since the discovery of America and continue to this day; sometimes westward to the New World, sometimes eastward to Australia and New Zealand; from Celtic regions like Ireland at times; from Gothic countries like England and Germany; from Spain and Portugal—all this, not to mention the significant phenomenon of Black slavery being the real or presumed cause of American wealth. Will this work? Ask this question in Philadelphia, Lima, Sydney, or Auckland, and the answer is likely to be yes. Ask one of our English anatomists, and their answer would be: "Let’s consider now the greatest experiment ever conducted regarding the transfer of a population that’s native to one continent, trying to settle another through emigration; to cultivate the land with their own hands; to establish colonies; to convince the world, over time, that they are the natives of this new land. Northern America and Australia provided the grounds for this greatest of experiments. The horse, the sheep, and the ox have become almost indigenous to these regions. Nature didn’t place them there initially, yet they seem to thrive, flourish, and multiply abundantly. However, even regarding these domesticated animals,[42] we can’t be entirely sure. Will they eventually sustain themselves? Will they replace the llama, the kangaroo, the buffalo, and the deer? Or will they need to be continually brought over from Europe to do so? If that’s the case, then the acclimatization isn’t complete. What about humans? The person initially placed there by nature, the Native American, is different from everyone else on Earth; they give way to the European races, the Saxon and the Celtic; the Celt, Iberian, and Lusitanian in the south; the Celt and the Saxon in the north.

“Of the tropical regions of the New World, I need not speak; every one knows that none but those whom nature placed there can live there; that no Europeans can colonize a tropical country. But may there not be some doubts of their self-support in milder regions? Take the Northern States themselves. There the Saxon and the Celt seem to thrive beyond all that is recorded in history. But are we quite sure that this is fated to be permanent? Annually from Europe is poured a hundred thousand men and women of the best blood of the Scandinavian, and twice the number of the pure Celt; and so long as this continues, he is sure to thrive. But check it, arrest it suddenly, as in the case of Mexico and Peru; throw the onus of reproduction upon the population, no longer European, but a struggle between the European[43] alien and his adopted father-land. The climate; the forests; the remains of the aborigines not yet extinct; last, not least, that unknown and mysterious degradation of life and energy, which in ancient times seems to have decided the fate of all the Phœnician, Grecian, and Coptic colonies. Cut off from their original stock, they gradually withered and faded, and finally died away. The Phœnician never became acclimatized in Africa, nor in Cornwall, nor in Wales; vestiges of his race, it is true, still remain, but they are mere vestiges. Peru and Mexico are fast retrograding to their primitive condition; may not the Northern States, under similar circumstances, do the same?

“Of the tropical regions of the New World, I don’t need to say much; everyone knows that only those who are native to the area can survive there; Europeans simply cannot colonize a tropical country. But could there be some questions about their ability to sustain themselves in milder regions? Take the Northern States, for instance. There, the Saxon and the Celt seem to thrive beyond anything recorded in history. But are we really sure that this will last forever? Every year, about a hundred thousand men and women from Europe, mainly of Scandinavian descent, and twice that number of pure Celts arrive; as long as this continues, they are sure to flourish. But what happens if this is suddenly cut off, like in Mexico and Peru? If the responsibility for reproduction falls on a population that is no longer European but is instead a mix of the European alien and their adopted homeland? The climate, the forests, the remnants of the indigenous people who are not yet extinct, and last but not least, that unknown and mysterious decline of life and vitality that seems to have determined the fate of all the Phoenician, Greek, and Coptic colonies in ancient times. Cut off from their original roots, they slowly withered and faded away until they disappeared completely. The Phoenician never truly acclimatized in Africa, nor in Cornwall, nor in Wales; it's true that traces of his race still exist, but they are just traces. Peru and Mexico are quickly sliding back to their original state; could the Northern States, under similar circumstances, end up doing the same?”

“Already the United States man differs in appearance from the European: the ladies early lose their teeth; in both sexes the adipose cellular cushion interposed between the skin and the aponeuroses and muscles disappears, or, at least, loses its adipose portion; the muscles become stringy, and show themselves; the tendons appear on the surface; symptoms of premature decay manifest themselves. Now what do these signs, added to the uncertainty of infant life in the Southern States, and the smallness of their families in the Northern, indicate? Not the conversion of the Anglo-Saxon into the Red-Indian, but warnings that the climate has not been made for him, nor he for the climate.

“Already, the appearance of Americans is different from that of Europeans: women often lose their teeth early; in both genders, the fatty layer between the skin and the muscles diminishes or at least loses its fat content; the muscles become sinewy and more visible; tendons are apparent on the surface; signs of early decay show up. Now, what do these signs, combined with the uncertainty of infant survival in the Southern States and the small size of families in the Northern States, indicate? Not that the Anglo-Saxon is transforming into the Native American, but rather signals that the climate isn’t suited for him, nor is he suited for the climate.”

“See what even a small amount of insulation has done for the French Celt in Lower Canada. Look at the race there! Small men, small horses, small cattle, still smaller carts, ideas smallest of all; he is not even the Celt of modern France! He is the French Celt of the Regency, the thing of Louis XIII. Stationary—absolutely stationary—his numbers, I believe, depend on the occasional admixture of fresh blood from Europe. He has increased to a million since his first settlement in Canada; but much of this has come from Britain, and not from France. Give us the statistics of the original families who keep themselves apart from the fresh blood imported into the province. Let us have the real and solid increase of the original habitans, as they are pleased to call themselves, and then we may calculate on the result.

“See what even a small amount of insulation has done for the French Celt in Lower Canada. Look at the people there! Small men, small horses, small cattle, even smaller carts, and ideas that are the smallest of all; he is not even the Celt of modern France! He is the French Celt of the Regency, a remnant from the time of Louis XIII. Stationary—absolutely stationary—his population, I believe, relies on the occasional mix of new blood from Europe. He has grown to a million since his initial settlement in Canada; but much of this has come from Britain, not from France. Let's look at the statistics of the original families who keep themselves separate from the new blood brought into the province. We need to know the real and tangible increase of the original habitans, as they like to call themselves, and then we can assess the results.”

“Had the colony been left to itself, cut off from Europe, for a century or two, it is my belief that the forest and the buffalo, and the Red-Indian, would have pushed him into the St. Lawrence[5].”

“Had the colony been left alone, cut off from Europe, for a hundred years or so, I believe that the forest, the buffalo, and the Native Americans would have pushed him into the St. Lawrence[5].”

I give no opinion as to the truth of the extract; remarking that, whether right or wrong, it is forcibly and confidently expressed. All that the passage has to do is to illustrate the character of the question. It directs our consideration to what will be.

I won't comment on whether the extract is true or not; I just want to point out that, whether it is right or wrong, it is strongly and confidently stated. The purpose of the passage is to highlight the nature of the question. It focuses our attention on what will be.

To work out questions in either of these classes,[45] there must, of course, be some reference to the general operations of climate, food, and other influences;—operations which imply a correlative susceptibility of modification on the part of the human organism.

To address questions in either of these categories,[45] we must, of course, reference the overall effects of climate, food, and other influences—factors that suggest a corresponding ability of the human body to change.

In a well-constructed machine, the different parts have a definite relation to each. The greater the resistance, the thicker the ropes and chains; and the thicker the ropes and chains, the stronger the pulleys; the stronger the pulleys, the greater the force; and so on throughout. Delicate pulleys with heavy ropes, or light lines with bulky pulleys, would be so much power wasted. The same applies to the skeleton. If the muscle be massive, the bone to which it is attached must be firm; otherwise there is a disproportion of parts. In this respect the organized and animated body agrees with a common machine, the work of human hands. It agrees with, but it also surpasses it. It has an internal power of self-adjustment. No amount of work would convert a thin line into a strong rope, or a light framework into a strong one. If bulk be wanted, it must be given in the first instance. But what is it with the skeleton, the framework to the muscles? It has the power of adapting itself to the stress laid upon it. The food that we live upon is of different degrees of hardness and toughness; and the harder and tougher it is, the[46] more work is there for the muscles of the lower jaw. But, as these work, they grow; for—other things being equal—size is power; and as they grow, other parts must grow also. There are the bones. How they grow is a complex question. Sometimes a smooth surface becomes rough, a fine bone coarse; sometimes a short process becomes lengthened, or a narrow one broadens; sometimes the increase is simple or absolute, and the bone in question changes its character without affecting that of the parts in contact with it. But frequently there is a complication of changes, and the development of one bone takes place at the expense of another; the relations of the different portions of parts of a skeleton being thus altered.

In a well-designed machine, the different parts have a clear relationship with each other. The greater the resistance, the thicker the ropes and chains; and the thicker the ropes and chains, the stronger the pulleys; the stronger the pulleys, the greater the force; and so on. Using delicate pulleys with heavy ropes, or light lines with bulky pulleys, would waste power. The same goes for the skeleton. If the muscle is large, the bone it’s connected to must be sturdy; otherwise, the parts are mismatched. In this way, the organized and living body is similar to a standard machine made by human hands. It is similar, but it also surpasses it. It has an internal ability to self-adjust. No amount of work can turn a thin line into a strong rope, or a light framework into a strong one. If size is needed, it must be established from the start. But what about the skeleton, the framework for the muscles? It has the ability to adapt to the stress placed on it. The food we eat varies in hardness and toughness, and the tougher it is, the more effort is required from the muscles of the lower jaw. But as these muscles work, they grow; because—everything else being equal—size equals power; and as they grow, other parts must grow too. Then there are the bones. How they grow is a complex issue. Sometimes a smooth surface becomes rough, a fine bone becomes coarse; sometimes a short process becomes longer, or a narrow one widens; sometimes the increase is straightforward or complete, and the bone changes its character without affecting the parts it touches. But often, there’s a mix of changes, and the development of one bone happens at the expense of another; the relationships between the different parts of a skeleton are thus altered.

A skeleton, then, may be modified by the action of its own muscles; in other words, wherever there are muscles that are liable to an increase of mass, there are bones similarly susceptible—bones upon which asperities, ridges, or processes may be developed—bones from which asperities, ridges, or processes may disappear, and bones of which the relative proportions may be varied. In order, however, that this must take place, there must be the muscular action which determines it.

A skeleton can be changed by the actions of its own muscles; in other words, wherever there are muscles that are likely to grow in mass, there are also bones that can do the same—bones that can develop bumps, ridges, or projections—bones from which bumps, ridges, or projections can fade away, and bones whose relative proportions can change. However, for this to happen, there must be the muscular action that triggers it.

Now this applies to the hard parts, or the skeleton; and as it is generally admitted, that if the bony framework of the body can be thus modified[47] by the action of its own muscles, the extreme conditions of heat, light, aliment, moisture, &c., will, à fortiori, affect the soft parts, such as the skin and adipose tissue. Neither have any great difficulties been raised in respect to the varieties of colour in the iris, and of colour and texture, both, in the hair.

Now this applies to the hard parts, or the skeleton; and it's generally accepted that if the bony structure of the body can be changed[47] by the action of its own muscles, the extreme conditions of heat, light, food, moisture, etc., will, à fortiori, impact the soft parts, like the skin and fat tissue. There haven't been any significant challenges regarding the variations in color of the iris, or the color and texture of hair.

But what if we have in certain hard parts a difference without its corresponding tangible modifying cause? What if parts which no muscle acts upon vary? In such a case we have a new class of facts, and a new import given to it. We no longer draw our illustrations from the ropes and pulleys of machines. Adaptation there may be, but it is no longer an adaptation of the simple straightforward kind that we have exhibited. It is an adaptation on the principle which determines the figure-head of a vessel, not one on the principle which decides the rigging. Still there is a principle on both sides; on one, however, there is an evident connection of cause and effect; on the other, the notion of choice, or spontaneity of an idea, is suggested.

But what if we have certain hard parts that differ without any clear reason for that change? What if parts that aren’t influenced by any muscle still vary? In this case, we have a new set of facts and a new meaning attached to them. We no longer use examples from the ropes and pulleys of machines. There may be adaptation, but it’s not the straightforward kind we previously demonstrated. It’s an adaptation based on the principle that determines the figurehead of a ship, not one based on the principle that decides the rigging. Still, there is a principle at play on both sides; however, on one side, there is a clear connection between cause and effect, while on the other, the idea of choice or spontaneity of an idea comes into play.

In this way, the consideration of a tooth differs from that of the jaw in which it is implanted. No muscles act directly upon it; and all that pressure at its base can do is to affect the direction of its growth. The form of its crown it leaves untouched.[48] How—I am using almost the words of Prof. Owen—can we conceive the development of the great canine of the chimpanzee to be a result of external stimuli, or to have been influenced by muscular actions, when it is calcified before it cuts the gum, or displaces its deciduous predecessor—a structure preordained, a weapon prepared prior to the development of the forces by which it is to be wielded[6]?

In this way, the way we think about a tooth is different from how we think about the jaw it’s attached to. No muscles directly affect it; all the pressure at its base can only influence the direction of its growth. The shape of its crown remains untouched. [48] How—I'm using almost the words of Prof. Owen—can we imagine the development of the large canine of the chimpanzee as a response to external stimuli, or being influenced by muscle movements, when it’s already calcified before it breaks through the gum or pushes out its baby tooth—a structure that was predetermined, a tool ready before the forces that will be used to operate it were developed[6]?

This illustrates the difference between the parts manifestly obnoxious to the influence of external conditions and the parts which either do not vary at all, or vary according to unascertained laws.

This shows the difference between the parts that are clearly affected by external conditions and the parts that either don't change at all or change based on unknown rules.

With the former we look to the conditions of sun, air, habits, or latitude; the latter we interpret, as we best can, by references to other species or to the same in its earlier stages of development.

With the first, we consider the conditions of sunlight, air, habits, or latitude; the second we interpret, as best we can, by referring to other species or to the same species in its earlier stages of development.

Thus, the so-called supra-orbital ridge, or the prominence of the lower portion of forehead over the nose and eyes, is more marked in some individuals than in others; and more marked in the African and Australian varieties than our own. This is an ethnological fact.

Thus, the so-called supra-orbital ridge, or the bulge of the lower part of the forehead above the nose and eyes, is more noticeable in some people than in others; and it’s more pronounced in Africans and Australians than in our own group. This is an ethnological fact.

Again—and this is an anthropological fact—it is but moderately developed in man at all: whilst in the orang-utan it is moderate; and in the[49] chimpanzee enormously and characteristically developed.

Again—and this is an anthropological fact—it is only moderately developed in humans at all: while in the orangutan it is moderate; and in the[49] chimpanzee, it is extremely and distinctly developed.

Hence it is one of the nine points whereby the Pithecus Wurmbii approaches man more closely than the Troglodytes Gorilla[7], in opposition to the twenty-four whereby the Troglodytes Gorilla comes nearer to us than the Pithecus Wurmbii.

Hence, it is one of the nine points that show the Pithecus Wurmbii is closer to humans than the Troglodytes Gorilla[7], in contrast to the twenty-four points where the Troglodytes Gorilla is more similar to us than the Pithecus Wurmbii.

Had this ridge given attachment to muscles, we should have asked what work those muscles did, and how far it varied in different regions, instead of thinking much about either the Pithecus Wurmbii or the Troglodytes Gorilla.

Had this ridge been connected to muscles, we would have wondered what those muscles did and how their function varied in different areas, instead of focusing on either the Pithecus Wurmbii or the Troglodytes Gorilla.

However, it is certain problems which constitute the higher branches of ethnology; and it is to the investigation of these that the department of ethnological dynamics is subservient. Looking backwards we find, first amongst the foremost, the grand questions as to—

However, there are specific problems that represent the advanced areas of ethnology, and the study of these issues is what the field of ethnological dynamics supports. Looking backwards, we find, at the forefront, the major questions about—

  • 1. The unity or non-unity of the species.
  • 2. Its antiquity.
  • 3. Its geographical origin.

The unity or non-unity of the human species has been contemplated under a great multiplicity of aspects; some involving the fact itself, some the meaning of the term species.

The unity or non-unity of the human species has been considered from many different angles; some addressing the fact itself, and others focusing on the meaning of the term species.

  • 1. Certain points of structure are constant.[50] This is one reason for making man the only species of genus, and the only genus of his order.
  • 2. All mixed breeds are prolific. This is another.
  • 3. The evidence of language indicates a common origin; and the simplest form of this is a single pair. This is a third.
  • 4. We can predicate a certain number of general propositions concerning the class of beings called Human. This merely separates them from all other classes. It does not determine the nature of the class itself in respect to its members. It may fall in divisions and subdivisions.
  • 5. The species may be one; but the number of first pairs may be numerous. This is the doctrine of the multiplicity of protoplasts[8].
  • 6. The species may have had no protoplast at all; but may have been developed out of some species anterior to it, and lower in the scale of Nature, this previous species itself having been so evolved. In this case, the protoplast is thrown indefinitely backwards; in other words, the protoplast of one species is the protoplast of many.
  • 7. The genus Homo may fall into several species; so that what some call the varieties of a single species are really different species of a single genus.
  • 8. The varieties of mankind may be too great[51] to be included in even a genus. There may be two or even more genera to an order.
  • 9. Many of the present varieties may represent the intermixtures of species no longer extant in a pure state.
  • 10. All known varieties may be referable to a single species; but there may be new species undescribed.
  • 11. All existing varieties may be referable to a single species; but certain species may have ceased to exist.

Such are the chief views which are current amongst learned men on this point; though they have not been exhibited in a strictly logical form, inasmuch as differences of opinion as to the meaning of the term species have been given in the same list with differences of opinion as to the fact of our unity or non-unity.

Such are the main perspectives that educated people hold on this topic; however, they haven't been presented in a strictly logical way, since disagreements about the meaning of the term species have been included alongside disagreements about whether we are united or not.

These differences of opinion are not limited to mere matters of inference. The facts on which such inferences rest are by no means unanimously admitted. Some deny the constancy of certain points of structure, and more deny the permanent fecundity of mixed breeds. Again, the evidence of language applies only to known tongues; whilst the fourth view is based upon a logical rather than a zoological view of species.

These differences of opinion aren't just about simple interpretations. The facts that these interpretations are based on are not universally accepted. Some people dispute the consistency of certain structural features, and even more question the lasting fertility of hybrid breeds. Furthermore, the evidence from language only pertains to languages that are already documented; meanwhile, the fourth perspective relies on a logical rather than a zoological understanding of species.

The doctrine of a multiplicity of protoplasts is[52] common. Many zoologists hold it, and they have of course zoological reasons for doing so. Others hold it upon grounds of a very different description—grounds which rest upon the assumption of a final cause. Man is a social animal. Let the import of this be ever so little exaggerated. The term is a correlative one. The wife is not enough to the husband; the pair requires its pair for society’s sake. Hence, if man be not formed to live alone now, he was not formed alone at first. To be born a member of society, there must be associates. This is the teleological[9]—perhaps it may be called the theological—reason for the multiplicity of protoplasts.

The idea of a variety of original life forms is[52] widely accepted. Many zoologists support this view for various zoological reasons. Others believe it for very different reasons—those that are based on the idea of a purpose behind existence. Humans are social beings. Regardless of how much this might be overstated, the term is interrelated. A wife alone isn't sufficient for her husband; the couple needs its community for the sake of society. Therefore, if humans weren't meant to live in isolation now, they weren't meant to exist that way from the beginning. To be born into society, there must be companions. This is the teleological[9]—perhaps it can also be considered the theological—reason for the variety of original life forms.

Its non-inductive character subtracts something from its value.

Its non-inductive nature takes away from its value.

The difficulty of drawing a line as to the magnitude of the original society subtracts more. If we admit a second pair, why not grant a village, a town, a city and its corporation? &c.

The difficulty of drawing a line on the size of the original society takes away even more. If we accept a second pair, why not include a village, a town, a city, and its corporation? &c.

Again, this is either a primitive civilization or something very like it. Where are its traces? Nevertheless, if we grant certain assumptions in respect to the history of human civilization, the teleological doctrine of the multiplicity of protoplasts is difficult to refute.

Again, this is either a primitive civilization or something very similar. Where are its traces? Still, if we accept certain assumptions about the history of human civilization, the idea of multiple ancestors is hard to argue against.

And so is the zoological; provided that we make[53] concessions in the way of language. Let certain pairs have been created with the capacity but not the gift of speech, so that they shall have learned their language of others. Or let all, at first, have been in this predicament, and some have evolved speech earlier than others—a speech eventually extended to all. It is not easy to answer such an argument as this.

And so is the zoological; provided that we make[53] concessions in the way of language. Let some pairs be created with the ability but not the gift of speech, so that they learned their language from others. Or let everyone initially be in this situation, with some evolving speech sooner than others—a speech that eventually spread to all. It's not easy to respond to an argument like this.

The multiplicity of protoplasts is common ground to the zoologist and the human naturalist, although the phænomena of speech and society give the latter the larger share. The same applies to the doctrine of development. The fundamental affinity which connects all the forms of human speech is valid against the transcendentalist only when he assumes that each original of a species of Man appeared, as such, with his own proper language. Let him allow this to have been originally dumb, and with only the capacity of learning speech from others, and all arguments in favour of the unity of species drawn from the similarity of language fall to the ground.

The variety of protoplasts is a common topic for both zoologists and human naturalists, although the phenomena of speech and society give the latter an advantage. The same goes for the doctrine of development. The basic connection that links all forms of human speech only challenges the transcendentalist if he assumes that each original of a species of Man appeared, as such, with his own specific language. If he accepts that this was originally silent and only capable of learning speech from others, then all arguments supporting the unity of the species based on language similarity collapse.

The eighth doctrine is little more than an exaggeration of the seventh. The seventh will not be noticed now, simply because the facts which it asserts and denies pervade the whole study of ethnology, and appear and re-appear at every point of our investigations.

The eighth doctrine is just an exaggeration of the seventh. The seventh won't be recognized now, mainly because the facts it claims and rejects are everywhere in the study of ethnology and show up repeatedly in all our investigations.

All known varieties may be referable to a single species; but there may be other species undescribed.—What are the reasons for believing this? Premising that Dilbo was a slave from whom Dr. Beke collected certain information respecting the countries to the south-west of Abyssinia, I subjoin the following extract:—

All known varieties might belong to a single species; however, there could be other species that haven't been described yet.—What makes us think this? Assuming that Dilbo was a slave from whom Dr. Beke gathered some information about the countries to the southwest of Abyssinia, I will include the following excerpt:—

“The countries on the west and south-west of Kaffa are, according to Dilbo, Damboro, Bonga, Koolloo, Kootcha, Soofa, Tooffte, and Doko; on the east and south-east are the plains of Woratto, Walamo, and Talda.

“The countries to the west and southwest of Kaffa are, according to Dilbo, Damboro, Bonga, Koolloo, Kootcha, Soofa, Tooffte, and Doko; to the east and southeast are the plains of Woratto, Walamo, and Talda.”

“The country of Doko is a month’s journey distant from Kaffa; and it seems that only those merchants who are dealers in slaves go farther than Kaffa. The most common route passes Kaffa in a south-westerly direction, leading to Damboro, afterwards to Kootcha, Koolloo, and then passing the river Erow to Tooffte, where they begin to hunt the slaves in Doko, of which chase I shall give a description as it has been stated to me, and the reader may use his own judgement respecting it.

“The country of Doko is a month’s journey away from Kaffa, and it seems that only slave merchants travel beyond Kaffa. The most common route heads southwest from Kaffa, going to Damboro, then to Kootcha, Koolloo, and crossing the river Erow to reach Tooffte, where they start hunting for slaves in Doko. I will describe this hunt as it has been told to me, and the reader can make their own judgment about it.”

“Dilbo begins with stating that the people of Doko, both men and women, are said to be no taller than boys nine or ten years old. They never exceed that height, even in the most advanced age. They go quite naked; their principal food are[55] ants, snakes, mice, and other things which commonly are not used as food. They are said to be so skilful in finding out the ants and snakes, that Dilbo could not refrain from praising them greatly on that account. They are so fond of this food, that even when they have become acquainted with better aliment in Enarea and Kaffa, they are nevertheless frequently punished for following their inclination of digging in search of ants and snakes, as soon as they are out of sight of their masters. The skins of snakes are worn by them about their necks as ornaments. They also climb trees with great skill to fetch down the fruits; and in doing this they stretch their hands downwards and their legs upwards. They live in extensive forests of bamboo and other woods, which are so thick that the slave-hunter finds it very difficult to follow them in these retreats. These hunters sometimes discover a great number of the Dokos sitting on the trees, and then they use the artifice of showing them shining things, by which they are enticed to descend, when they are captured without difficulty. As soon as a Doko begins to cry he is killed, from the apprehension that this, as a sign of danger, will cause the others to take to their heels. Even the women climb on the trees, where in a few minutes a great number of them may be captured and sold into slavery.

“Dilbo starts by saying that the people of Doko, both men and women, are typically no taller than boys who are nine or ten years old. They never grow taller than that, even as they get older. They go mostly naked, and their main food consists of ants, snakes, mice, and other things that are usually not considered food. They are so skilled at finding ants and snakes that Dilbo couldn’t help but praise them for it. They love this food so much that even after they learn about better options in Enarea and Kaffa, they still often get in trouble for digging for ants and snakes as soon as they’re out of sight of their masters. They wear snake skins around their necks as ornaments. They also climb trees very well to get fruit; while climbing, they stretch their hands down and their legs up. They live in large forests of bamboo and other woods, which are so dense that slave hunters find it very hard to track them in these hideouts. These hunters sometimes see many Dokos sitting in the trees, and they use shiny objects to lure them down, making it easy to capture them. As soon as a Doko starts to cry, they are killed because it’s feared that this might signal danger to the others, causing them to run away. Even the women climb trees, and within a few minutes, many of them can be captured and sold into slavery.”

“The Dokos live mixed together; men and women unite and separate as they please; and this Dilbo considers as the reason why the tribe has not been exterminated, though frequently a single slave-dealer returns home with a thousand of them reduced to slavery. The mother suckles the child only as long as she is unable to find ants and snakes for its food: she abandons it as soon as it can get its food by itself. No rank or order exists among the Dokos. Nobody orders, nobody obeys, nobody defends the country, nobody cares for the welfare of the nation. They make no attempts to secure themselves but by running away. They are as quick as monkeys; and they are very sensible of the misery prepared for them by the slave-hunters, who so frequently encircle their forests and drive them from thence into the open plains like beasts. They put their heads on the ground, and stretch their legs upwards, and cry, in a pitiful manner, ‘Yer! yer!’ Thus they call on the Supreme Being, of whom they have some notion, and are said to exclaim, ‘If you do exist, why do you suffer us to die, who do not ask for food or clothes, and who live on snakes, ants, and mice?’ Dilbo stated that it was no rare thing to find five or six Dokos in such a position and state of mind. Sometimes these people quarrel among themselves, when they eat the fruit of the trees; then the[57] stronger one throws the weaker to the ground, and the latter is thus frequently killed in a miserable way.

“The Dokos live mixed together; men and women come and go as they please, which Dilbo thinks is why the tribe hasn’t been wiped out, even though a single slave dealer often returns home with a thousand people enslaved. A mother breastfeeds her child only until she can find ants and snakes for it to eat; she leaves it as soon as it can fend for itself. There’s no hierarchy among the Dokos. No one gives orders, no one follows them, no one defends the country, and no one cares about the nation’s welfare. They don’t try to protect themselves other than by fleeing. They’re as agile as monkeys and are very aware of the danger posed by slave hunters, who often surround their forests and chase them into the open fields like animals. They lay their heads on the ground, raise their legs up, and cry out, ‘Yer! yer!’ This is how they call on a Supreme Being, whom they have some awareness of, and they are said to shout, ‘If you exist, why do you let us die, when we don’t ask for food or clothes, and we survive on snakes, ants, and mice?’ Dilbo mentioned that it’s not uncommon to see five or six Dokos in such a position and state of mind. Sometimes these people fight among themselves over the fruit from the trees; then the stronger one throws the weaker one to the ground, often killing them in a terrible way.”

“In their country it rains incessantly; at least from May to January, and even later the rain does not cease entirely. The climate is not cold, but very wet. The traveller, in going from Kaffa to Doko, must pass over a high country, and cross several rivers, which fall into the Gochob.

“In their country, it rains constantly; at least from May to January, and even after that, the rain doesn't stop completely. The climate isn't cold but is really wet. When traveling from Kaffa to Doko, the traveler has to go over a high area and cross several rivers that flow into the Gochob.

“The language of the Dokos is a kind of murmuring, which is understood by no one but themselves and their hunters. The Dokos evince much sense and skill in managing the affairs of their masters, to whom they are soon much attached; and they render themselves valuable to such a degree, that no native of Kaffa ever sells one of them to be sent out of the country. As Captain Clapperton says of the slaves of Nyffie:—‘The very slaves of this people are in great request, and when once obtained are never again sold out of the country.’ The inhabitants of Enarea and Kaffa sell only those slaves which they have taken in their border-wars with the tribes living near them, but never a Doko. The Doko is also averse to being sold; he prefers death to separating from his master, to whom he has attached himself.

“The language of the Dokos is a kind of murmuring that only they and their hunters understand. The Dokos show a lot of sense and skill in managing their masters' affairs, to whom they quickly become very attached; they make themselves so valuable that no native of Kaffa ever sells one to be sent out of the country. As Captain Clapperton says about the slaves of Nyffie: 'The very slaves of this people are in great demand, and once obtained, are never sold out of the country again.' The people of Enarea and Kaffa only sell the slaves they’ve captured in border wars with neighboring tribes, but they never sell a Doko. The Doko also dislikes being sold; he would rather die than be separated from his master, to whom he is devoted.”

“The access to the country of Doko is very difficult, as the inhabitants of Damboro, Koolloo,[58] and Tooffte are enemies to the traders from Kaffa, though these tribes are dependent on Kaffa, and pay tribute to its sovereigns; for these tribes are intent on preserving for themselves alone the exclusive privilege of hunting the Dokos, and of trading with the slaves thus obtained.

“The access to the country of Doko is very difficult, as the inhabitants of Damboro, Koolloo,[58] and Tooffte are enemies of the traders from Kaffa, even though these tribes rely on Kaffa and pay tribute to its rulers. These tribes are focused on keeping for themselves the exclusive right to hunt the Dokos and to trade the slaves they capture.”

“Dilbo did not know whether the tribes residing south and west of the Dokos persecute this unhappy nation in the same cruel way.

“Dilbo didn’t know if the tribes living south and west of the Dokos were treating this unfortunate nation with the same cruelty.”

“This is Dilbo’s account of the Dokos, a nation of pigmies, who are found in so degraded a condition of human nature that it is difficult to give implicit credit to his account. The notion of a nation of pigmies in the interior of Africa is very ancient, as Herodotus speaks of them in II. 32.”

“This is Dilbo’s account of the Dokos, a nation of pygmies, who are in such a degraded state of humanity that it’s hard to fully believe his account. The idea of a nation of pygmies in the heart of Africa is very old, as Herodotus mentions them in II. 32.”

Now those who believe in the Dokos at all, may fairly believe them to constitute a new species.

Now, those who actually believe in the Dokos can reasonably consider them to be a new species.

Other imperfectly known populations may be put forward in a similar point of view.

Other imperfectly known populations can be considered in a similar way.

All existing varieties may be referable to a single species; but certain species may have ceased to exist.—There is a considerable amount of belief in this respect. We see, in certain countries, which are at present barbarous vestiges of a prior civilization, works, like those of Mexico and Peru for instance, which the existing inhabitants confess to be beyond their powers. Be it so. Is the assumption of a different species with architectural propensities[59] more highly developed, legitimate? The reader will answer this question in his own way. I can only say that such assumptions have been made.

All existing varieties might be linked to one species; however, some species may no longer exist.—There is a strong belief regarding this. In certain countries that are currently considered primitive, we find remnants of a previous civilization, such as the works found in Mexico and Peru, which the current inhabitants admit are beyond their capabilities. So, is it reasonable to assume the existence of a different species with greater architectural skills?[59] The reader can come to their own conclusion. I can only state that such assumptions have been made.

Again—ancient tombs exhibit skeletons which differ from the living individuals of the country. Is a similar assumption here justifiable? It has been made.

Again—ancient tombs show skeletons that are different from the living people in the area. Is a similar assumption valid here? It has been made.

The most remarkable phænomena of the kind in question are to be found in the history of the Peruvians.

The most remarkable phenomena of this kind can be found in the history of the Peruvians.

The parts about the Lake Titicaca form the present country of the Aymaras, whose heads are much like those of the other Americans, whose taste for architecture is but slight, and whose knowledge of having descended from a people more architectural than themselves is none.

The sections about Lake Titicaca make up what is now the country of the Aymaras, whose leaders are similar to those of other Americans. Their interest in architecture is minimal, and they have no awareness of their descent from a culture that was more advanced in architecture than they are.

Nevertheless, there are vast ruins in their district; whilst the heads of those whose remains are therein preserved have skulls with the sutures obliterated, and with remarkable frontal, lateral, and occipital depressions.

Nevertheless, there are extensive ruins in their area; while the skulls of those whose remains are preserved there have sutures that are erased and show notable frontal, lateral, and occipital depressions.

Does this denote an extinct species? Individually, I think it does not; because, individually, with many others, I know that certain habits decline, and I also believe that the flattenings of the head are artificial. Nevertheless, if I, ever so little, exaggerated the permanency of habits, or if I identified a habit with an instinct, or if I considered[60] the skulls natural, the chances are that I should recognise the remains of ancient stock—possibly an ancient species—without congeners and without descendants.

Does this mean the species is extinct? I don't think so, not on an individual basis; because, individually, along with many others, I know that some habits fade away, and I also believe that the flattening of the skulls is artificial. Still, if I were to slightly exaggerate how permanent habits are, or if I confused a habit with an instinct, or if I saw the skulls as natural, then I might actually recognize the remains of an ancient stock—possibly an ancient species—without any relatives or descendants.

The antiquity of the human species.—Our views on this point depend upon our views as to its unity or non-unity; so much so, that unless we assume either one or the other, the question of antiquity is impracticable. And it must also be added that, unless the inquiry is to be excessively complicated, the unity-doctrine must take the form of descent from a single pair.

The antiquity of the human species.—Our perspectives on this issue rely on whether we believe in the unity or diversity of the species; so much so that without assuming one or the other, discussing antiquity becomes impossible. Additionally, it should be noted that if we want to avoid excessive complications in our inquiry, the unity perspective must imply descent from a single pair.

Assuming this, we take the most extreme specimens of difference, whether it be in the way of physical conformation or mental phænomena—of these last, language being the most convenient. After this, we ask the time necessary for bringing about the changes effected; the answer to this resting upon the induction supplied within the historical period; an answer requiring the application of what has already been called Ethnological Dynamics.

Assuming this, we consider the most extreme examples of differences, whether in physical appearance or mental phenomena—with language being the most convenient among the latter. After this, we look at the time needed to bring about the changes that have occurred; the answer to this depends on the evidence provided within the historical period and requires the application of what has already been termed Ethnological Dynamics.

On the other hand, we may assume a certain amount of original difference, and investigate the time requisite for effecting the existing amount of similarity.

On the other hand, we can assume there’s some original difference and look into how much time it takes to create the current level of similarity.

The first of these methods requires a long, the second a short period; indeed, descent from a[61] single pair implies a geological rather than a historical date.

The first of these methods needs a long time, while the second only requires a short period; in fact, coming from a[61] single pair suggests a geological date instead of a historical one.

Furthermore—that uniformity in the average rate of change which the geologist requires, ethnology requires also.

Furthermore—that consistency in the average rate of change that geologists need, ethnology needs as well.

The geographical origin of Man.—Supposing all the varieties of Man to have originated from a single protoplast pair, in what part of the world was that single protoplast pair placed? Or, supposing such protoplast pairs to have been numerous, what were the respective original locations of each? I ask these questions without either giving any answer to them, or exhibiting any method for discovering one. Of the three great problems it is the one which has received the least consideration, and the one concerning which there is the smallest amount of decided opinion. The conventional, provisional, or hypothetical cradle of the human species is, of course, the most central point of the inhabited world; inasmuch as this gives us the greatest amount of distribution with the least amount of migration; but, of course, such a centre is wholly unhistorical.

The geographical origin of humanity.—If we assume that all human varieties came from a single pair of ancestors, where in the world did that pair originate? Or, if there were multiple pairs, where did each of them first appear? I'm asking these questions without providing answers or offering any methods to find them. Among the three major questions, this one has received the least attention and has the least consensus. The commonly accepted, temporary, or theoretical birthplace of the human species is, naturally, the most central point of the inhabited world; this location allows for the widest distribution with the least migration. However, this idea is entirely unhistorical.

Race—What is the meaning of this word?

Race—What does this term mean?

Does it mean variety? If so, why not say variety at once?

Does it mean variety? If so, why not just say variety right away?

Does it mean species? If it do, one of the two phrases is superfluous.

Does it mean species? If it does, one of the two phrases is unnecessary.

In simple truth it means either or neither, as the case may be; and is convenient or superfluous according to the views of the writer who uses it.

In simple truth, it means either one or neither, depending on the situation; and it is useful or unnecessary based on the perspective of the writer using it.

If he believe that groups and classes like the Negro, the Hottentot, the American, the Australian, or the Mongolian, differ from each other as the dog differs from the fox, he talks of species. He has made up his mind.

If he believes that groups and classes like the Black, the Hottentot, the American, the Australian, or the Mongolian differ from each other as much as a dog differs from a fox, he is talking about species. He has made his decision.

But, perhaps, he does no such thing. His mind is made up the other way. Members of such classes may be to Europeans, and to each other, just what the cur is to the pug, the pointer to the beagle, &c. They may be varieties.

But maybe he doesn't do that at all. He's decided on the opposite. Members of those classes might be to Europeans, and to one another, just like a mutt is to a pug, or a pointer to a beagle, etc. They might be varieties.

He uses, then, the terms accordingly; but, in order to do so, he must have made up his mind; and certain classes must represent either one or the other.

He uses the terms accordingly, but to do that, he must have made up his mind, and certain groups must represent either one or the other.

But what if he have not done this? If, instead of teaching undoubted facts, he is merely investigating doubtful ones? In this case the term race is convenient. It is convenient for him during his pursuit of an opinion, and during the consequent suspension of his opinion.

But what if he hasn't done this? If, instead of teaching clear facts, he's just exploring uncertain ones? In this case, the term race is useful. It's helpful for him while he's searching for an opinion, and during the resulting pause in forming that opinion.

Race, then, is the term denoting a species or variety, as the case may be—pendente lite. It is a term which, if it conceals our ignorance, proclaims our openness to conviction.

Race is the term that refers to a species or variety, depending on the situation—pendente lite. It’s a term that, while it may hide our ignorance, also shows our willingness to be convinced.

Of the prospective views of humanity, one has[63] been considered. But there are others of at least equal importance. Two, out of many, may serve as samples.

Of the potential views of humanity, one has[63] been considered. But there are others that are just as important. Two, out of many, can serve as examples.

1. The first is suggested by the following Table; taken from a fuller one in Mr. D. Wilson’s valuable Archæology and Prehistoric Annals of Scotland. It shows the relative proportions of a series of skulls of very great, with those of a series of moderate antiquity.

1. The first is suggested by the following Table; taken from a more detailed one in Mr. D. Wilson’s valuable Archaeology and Prehistoric Annals of Scotland. It shows the relative proportions of a series of skulls of very great age compared to those of a series of moderate antiquity.

The study of this—and it requires to be studied carefully—gives grounds for believing that the capacity of a skull may increase as the social condition improves; from which it follows that the physical organization of the less-favoured stocks may develope itself progressively,—and, pari passu, the mental power that coincides with it. This illustrates the nature of a certain ethnological question. But what if the two classes of skulls belong to different stocks; so that the owners of the one were not the progenitors of the proprietors of the other? Such a view (and it is not unreasonable) illustrates the extent to which it is complicated.

The study of this—and it needs to be examined closely—suggests that the size of a skull might increase as social conditions improve; which implies that the physical development of less-advantaged groups can evolve over time, along with the mental abilities that come with it. This sheds light on a specific ethnological question. But what if the two types of skulls come from different groups; so that the owners of one did not give rise to the owners of the other? This perspective (which isn't unreasonable) highlights how complicated the situation is.

[Transcriber’s Note: The measurements in the table are in inches and twelfths.]

[Transcriber’s Note: The measurements in the table are in inches and fractions of an inch.]

  Longi­tudinal diam­eter. Parietal diam­eter. Frontal diam­eter. Ver­tical diam­eter. Inter­mastoid arch. Inter­mastoid arch from upper root of zygo­matic process. Inter­mastoid lines. Ditto from upper root of zygo­matic process. Occip­ito­frontal arch. Ditto from occipital protu­berance to root of nose. Hori­zontal periphery. Relative capacity.
Very old.
1. 7·0 5·4½? 4·9? 4·10 13·11 11·5 3·6½ 4·8½ 13·9 12·0 20·4 32·2
2. 7·0 4·8 4·4 5·3 13·2 11·0 4·1 4·10 14·0 11·11 19·6 31·9
3. 6·11 5·3 3·11 5·0 ... 12·0 ... 4·8½ 14·4 11·4 19·0 30·11
4. 7·0 4·11 4·4 5·3 13·8 11·4½ 4·1 4·10 13·10 11·3 16·7½ 28·10½
5. 6·6 4·1? 4·11 4·2? 13·2 11·3 ... 4·8? 13·11 12·0 19·0 29·6
6. 7·3 5·4 4·6 5·2 14·3 11·9 4·4 5·0½ 14·8 12·3 20·8½ 33·1½
7. 7·5 5·2 4·5 5·2 14·3 12·0 3·7 4·10½ 14·3 12·3 20·7½ 33·2½
8. 7·9 5·6 4·9 ... ... 12·3 ... 5·6 15·6 ... 21·3 ...
9. 7·3 5·8 4·3½ 4·9 14·0 11·9 3·8½ 5·0 14·2 11·9 20·7 32·7
Moderately old.
17. 7·9 5·0 4·10 5·6 14·9 11·11 4·0 5·4 15·5 13·6 21·3 34·6
18. 7·6 5·1 4·6 5·1 14·8 11·3 3·11 5·3 14·6 12·11 20·4 32·11½
19. 7·3 5·3 4·5 5·4½ 14·5 12·4 3·11½ 4·9 14·9 12·9 20·10 33·5½
20. 7·5 5·6½ 5·0½ 5·6 14·11½ 12·3 4·0 ... 14·9 12·6 20·10 33·9
21. 7·3 5·6½ 4·4 5·6 14·8 12·0 4·1 5·3 14·5 12·10 20·2 32·11
22. 7·2 5·7 4·5 5·6 14·9 11·10 4·3 5·6 14·4 12·6 20·0 32·8
23. 7·3½ 5·7 4·6 5·2 15·0? 12·4? ... ... 14·8 12·6½ 19·10½ 32·4
24. 7·2 5·5 4·6 ... ... ... ... ... ... 12·10 20·7 ...
25. 7·8 5·6 4·3½ 5·3 14·4 11·8 4·7 5·6 14·6 12·7 20·11 33·10
26. 7·9 5·7 5·3 5·6 15·7 13·3 4·0½ 5·4 16·4 14·4 21·11 35·2
27. 7·11 5·5 4·9 ... ... 12·0 ... 5·1 15·5 13·9 21·6 ...

2. The second, like the first, shall be explained by extracts:—

2. The second, like the first, will be explained with excerpts:—


a. Mrs. ——, a neighbour of Mr. M’Combie, was twice married, and had issue by both husbands. The children of the first marriage were five in number; by the second, three. One of these three, a daughter, bears an unmistakeable resemblance to her mother’s first husband. What makes the likeness the more discernible is, that there was the most marked difference, in their features and general appearance, between the two husbands.

a. Mrs. ——, a neighbor of Mr. M’Combie, was married twice and had children with both husbands. She had five children from her first marriage and three from her second. One of the three, a daughter, looks strikingly similar to her mother’s first husband. The resemblance is even more noticeable because there was a significant difference in features and overall looks between the two husbands.


b. A young woman, residing in Edinburgh, and born of white (Scottish) parents, but whose mother some time previous to her marriage had a natural (Mulatto) child, by a negro-servant, in Edinburgh, exhibits distinct traces of the negro. Dr. Simpson, whose patient the young woman at one time was, has had no recent opportunities of satisfying himself as to the precise extent to which the negro character prevails in her features; but he recollects being struck with the resemblance, and noticed particularly that the hair had the qualities characteristic of the negro.

b. A young woman living in Edinburgh, born to white (Scottish) parents, has a mother who, before her marriage, had a child (of mixed race) with a Black servant in Edinburgh. This woman shows distinct features of African descent. Dr. Simpson, who once treated her, hasn't had recent chances to confirm just how much the African traits appear in her looks; however, he remembers being struck by the resemblance and specifically noticed that her hair had the qualities typical of African hair.


c. Mrs. ——, apparently perfectly free from scrofula, married a man who died of phthisis; she had one child by him, which also died of phthisis. She next married a person who was to all appearance equally healthy as herself, and had two children by him, one of which died of phthisis, the other of tubercular mesenteric disease—having, at the same time, scrofulous ulceration of the under extremity.

c. Mrs. ——, seemingly perfectly healthy and free from scrofula, married a man who died of tuberculosis; they had one child together, who also died of tuberculosis. She then married someone who appeared just as healthy as she was and had two children with him, one of whom died from tuberculosis and the other from tubercular mesenteric disease, while also suffering from scrofulous ulcers on their lower limbs.

There are the elements of a theory here; especially if they be taken along with certain phænomena, well-known to the breeders of race-horses—the theory being, that the mixture of the[66] distinctive characters of different divisions of mankind may be greater than the intermixture itself. I give no opinion on the data. I merely illustrate an ethnological question—one out of many.

There are the elements of a theory here; especially when considered alongside certain phenomena familiar to horse breeders—the theory being that the combination of the[66] distinctive traits of different groups of people may be more significant than the mixture itself. I don’t express any opinion on the data. I simply illustrate an ethnological question—one of many.

FOOTNOTES

[3] From the Greek word (ἦθος) ethos = character.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ From the Greek word (ἦθος) ethos = character.

[4] Called by Comte Sociology, a name half Latin and half Greek, and consequently too barbarous to be used, if its use can be avoided.

[4] Referred to by Comte as Sociology, a term that’s part Latin and part Greek, making it somewhat awkward to use, if there's a way to avoid it.

[5] Knox, Races of Men, pp. 73, 74.

[5] Knox, Races of Men, pp. 73, 74.

[6] On the Osteology of the Great Chimpanzee. By Professor Owen, in the Philosophical Transactions.

[6] On the Bone Structure of the Great Chimpanzee. By Professor Owen, in the Philosophical Transactions.

[7] Owen, Philosophical Transactions, Feb. 22, 1848.

[7] Owen, Philosophical Transactions, Feb. 22, 1848.

[8] From protos = first, and plastos = formed.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ From protos = first, and plastos = formed.

[9] From the Greek telos = an end.

From the Greek telos = an end.

CHAPTER III.

Methods—the science one of observation and deduction rather than experiment—classification—on mineralogical, on zoological principles—the first for Anthropology, the second for Ethnology—value of Language as a test—instances of its loss—of its retention—when it proves original relation, when intercourse—the grammatical and glossarial tests—classifications must be real—the distribution of Man—size of area—ethnological contrasts in close geographical contact—discontinuity and isolation of areas—oceanic migrations.

Methods—the scientific approach centered on observation and deduction instead of experimentation—classification—based on mineralogical and zoological principles—first for Anthropology, the second for Ethnology—the importance of Language as a measure—examples of its loss—of its retention—when it shows original relationships, when interactions occur—the grammatical and glossarial tests—classifications must be real—the distribution of humans—the size of the area—ethnological differences in close geographical proximity—discontinuity and isolation of areas—oceanic migrations.

In the Natural History of Man we must keep almost exclusively to the methods of deduction and observation; and in observation we are limited to one sort only, i. e. that simple and spontaneous kind where the object can be found if sought for, but cannot be artificially produced. In other words, there is no great room for experiment. The corpus is not vile enough for the purpose. Besides which, “even if we suppose unlimited power of varying the experiment (which is abstractedly possible), though no one but an oriental despot either has the power, or if he had would be disposed to exercise it, a still more essential condition is wanting—the power of performing any of the experiments with scientific accuracy[10].”[68] Experiment is nearly as much out of place in Ethnology and Anthropology as it is in Astronomy.

In the Natural History of Man, we need to primarily rely on deduction and observation methods. When it comes to observation, we can only use one type, i.e. the straightforward and natural kind where we can locate the object if we search for it, but we can't produce it artificially. In other words, there's not much opportunity for experiment. The corpus is not vile enough for that purpose. Moreover, “even if we assume we could change the experiment endlessly (which is theoretically possible), although no one except an eastern despot has the ability, or would even want to exercise it if they did, a crucial condition is still missing—the ability to conduct any experiments with scientific accuracy[10].”[68] Experimentation is almost as inappropriate in Ethnology and Anthropology as it is in Astronomy.

Psammetichus, to be sure, according to Herodotus, did as follows. He took children of a poor man, put them in the charge of a shepherd who was forbidden to speak in their presence, suckled them in a lone hut through a she-goat, waited for the age at which boys begin to talk, and then took down the first word they uttered. This was bekos, which when it was shown to mean in the Phrygian language bread, the Egyptians yielded the palm of antiquity to that rival.

Psammetichus, according to Herodotus, did the following. He took the children of a poor man, placed them under the care of a shepherd who was not allowed to speak in front of them, raised them in a secluded hut with the milk of a she-goat, waited until the boys were old enough to talk, and then recorded the first word they said. This word was bekos, which, when translated in the Phrygian language, means bread. The Egyptians then conceded that their culture was not the oldest after all.

Now this was an ethnological experiment; but then Psammetichus was an oriental despot; and the instance itself is, probably, the only one of its class—the only one, or nearly so—the only one which is a true experiment; since in order to be such there must be a definite and specific end or object in view.

Now this was an ethnological experiment; but Psammetichus was an eastern ruler; and this instance is likely the only one of its kind—the only one, or almost so—the only one that is a true experiment; because for it to be a true experiment, there must be a clear and specific goal or objective in mind.

We know the tradition about Newton and the apple. This, if true, was no experiment, but an observation. To have been the former, the tree should have been shaken for the purpose of seeing the fruit descend. There would then have been an end and aim—malice prepense, so to say.

We know the story about Newton and the apple. If it's true, it wasn’t an experiment but an observation. For it to have been an experiment, someone would have had to shake the tree to see the fruit fall. That would have given it a purpose—like a deliberate act, so to speak.

Hence the phænomena of the African slave-trade, of English emigration, and of other similar elements for observation are no experiments; since[69] it has not been Science that either the slaver or the settler ever thought about. Sugar or cotton, land or money, was what ran in their heads.

Hence, the phenomena of the African slave trade, English emigration, and other similar elements for observation are not experiments; since[69] it has never been science that the slaver or the settler considered. Sugar or cotton, land or money, was what occupied their minds.

The revolting operation by which the jealous Oriental labours to secure the integrity of his harem is in its end a scientific fact. It tells how much the whole system sympathises with the mutilation of one of its parts. But it is nothing for Science to either applaud or imitate. It is repeated by the sensual Italian for the sake of ensuring fine voices in the music-market; and Science is disgusted at its repetition. Even if done in her own name, and for her own objects, it would still be but an inhuman and intolerable form of zootomy.

The horrible practice that the jealous Eastern man uses to protect his harem ultimately reveals a scientific truth. It shows how the entire system reacts to the harm of one of its parts. However, it’s not something that Science should celebrate or replicate. The sensual Italian performs similar acts to secure beautiful voices in the music industry, and Science finds this practice repulsive. Even if done in her name and for her purposes, it would still just be a cruel and unacceptable form of animal dissection.

Still the trade in Africans, and the emigration of Englishmen are said to partake of the nature of a scientific experiment, even without being one. They are said to serve as such. So they do; yet not in the way in which they are often interpreted. A European regiment is decimated by being placed on the Gambia, or in Sierra Leone. The American Anglo-Saxon is said to have lost the freshness of the European—to have become brown in colour, and wiry in muscle. Perhaps he has. Yet what does this prove? Merely the effect of sudden changes; the results of distant transplantation; the imperfect character of those forms of acclimatization[70] which are not gradual. It was not in this way that the world was originally peopled. New climates were approached by degrees, step by step, by enlargement and extension of the circumference of a previously acclimated family. Hence the experience of the kind in question, valuable as it is in the way of Medical Police, is comparatively worthless in a theory as to the Migrations of Mankind. Take a man from Caucasus to the Gold Coast, and he either dies or takes a fever. But would he do so if his previous sojourn had been on the Gambia, his grandfather’s on the Senegal, his ancestor’s in the tenth degree on the Nile, and that ancestor’s ancestor’s on the Jordan—thus going back till we reached the first remote patriarch of the migration on the Phasis? This is an experiment which no single generation can either make or observe; yet less than this is no experiment at all, no imitation of that particular operation of Nature which we are so curious to investigate.

The trade in Africans and the emigration of Englishmen are said to resemble a scientific experiment, even though they might not actually be one. They are considered to serve that purpose, and they do, but not in the way people often interpret. A European regiment suffers casualties when stationed in places like Gambia or Sierra Leone. It's claimed that the American Anglo-Saxon has lost the vibrancy of his European roots—becoming darker in skin tone and more wiry in build. Maybe that's true. But what does that really prove? It's simply the result of sudden changes; the outcomes of distant relocation; the incomplete nature of those forms of acclimatization[70] that aren't gradual. This isn’t how the world was initially populated. New climates were gradually approached, step by step, by expanding and extending the reach of a family that was already acclimated. Therefore, the experiences being discussed, valuable as they are in terms of Medical Police, are fairly useless for a theory on the Migrations of Humanity. If you take a man from the Caucasus to the Gold Coast, he either dies or gets a fever. But would that happen if he had previously lived in Gambia, with his grandfather from Senegal, and his ancestors going back ten generations from the Nile, all the way to the first patriarch of the migration at the Phasis? This is an experiment no generation can fully conduct or observe; anything less isn’t really an experiment at all, nor does it mimic that particular process of Nature that we’re so eager to understand.

What follows applies to Ethnology. The first result we get from our observations is a classification, i. e. groups of individuals, families, tribes, nations, sub-varieties, varieties, and (according to some) of species connected by some common link, and united on some common principle. There is no want of groups of this kind; and many of them[71] are so natural as to be unsusceptible of improvement. Yet the nomenclature for their different divisions is undetermined, the values of many of them uncertain, and, above all, the principle upon which they are formed is by no means uniform. Whilst some investigators classify mankind on Zoological, others do so on what may be called Mineralogical, principles. This difference will be somewhat fully illustrated.

What follows applies to Ethnology. The first outcome from our observations is a classification, i.e. groups of individuals, families, tribes, nations, sub-varieties, varieties, and (according to some) species connected by a common link and united by a shared principle. There are plenty of groups like this; many of them[71] are so natural that they can't be improved. However, the naming for their different divisions is unclear, the significance of many of them is uncertain, and, above all, the principle by which they are formed is definitely not consistent. While some researchers classify humans based on Zoological criteria, others do so using what could be called Mineralogical criteria. This difference will be explored in more detail.

In Africa, as is well known, a great portion of the population is black-skinned; and with this black skin other physical characteristics are generally found in conjunction. Thus the hair is either crisp or woolly, the nose depressed, and the lips thick. As we approach Asia these criteria decrease; the Arab being fairer, better-featured and straighter-haired than the Nubian, and the Persian more so than the Arab. In Hindostan, however, the colour deepens; and by looking amongst the most moist and alluvial parts of the southern peninsula we find skins as dark as those of Africa, and hair crisp rather than straight. Besides this, the fine oval contour and regular features of the high-cast Hindus of the North become scarce, whilst the lips get thick, the skin harsh, and the features coarse.

In Africa, it's well known that a large part of the population has black skin, which is usually accompanied by other physical traits. The hair is typically either curly or woolly, the nose tends to be flat, and the lips are full. As we move towards Asia, these characteristics become less pronounced; Arabs usually have lighter skin, more refined features, and straighter hair compared to Nubians, and Persians are even more so than Arabs. In India, however, the skin tone becomes darker again. When we look in the most humid and fertile areas of the southern peninsula, we find people with skin as dark as those in Africa, and hair that is more curly than straight. Additionally, the fine oval shape and regular features of the high-caste Hindus in the North become less common, while thicker lips, rough skin, and coarse features become more apparent.

Further on—we come to the great Peninsula which contains the Kingdoms of Ava and Siam—[72]the Indo-Chinese or Transgangetic Peninsula. In many parts of this the population blackens again; and in the long narrow peninsula of Malacca, a large proportion of the older population has been described as blacks. In the islands we find them again; so much so that the Spanish authorities call them Negritos or Little Negroes. In New Guinea all is black; and in Australia and Van Diemen’s Land it is blacker still. In Australia the hair is generally straight; but in the first and last-named countries it is frizzy, crisped, or curling. This connects them with the Negroes of Africa; and their colour does so still more. At any rate we talk of the Australian Blacks, just as the Spaniards do of the Philippine Negritos. Moral characteristics connect the Australian and the Negro, much in the same manner as the physical ones. Both, as compared with the European, are either really deficient in intellectual capacity, or (at least) have played an unimportant part in the history of the world. Thus, several populations have come under the class of Blacks. Is this classification natural?

Further on, we come to the great Peninsula that includes the Kingdoms of Ava and Siam—[72]the Indo-Chinese or Transgangetic Peninsula. In many parts of this region, the population is predominantly dark-skinned; and in the long, narrow peninsula of Malacca, a large proportion of the older population has been described as blacks. We see them again in the islands; so much so that the Spanish authorities refer to them as Negritos or Little Negroes. In New Guinea, the population is entirely black; and in Australia and Van Diemen’s Land, it is even darker. In Australia, the hair is generally straight; but in New Guinea and Van Diemen’s Land, it is frizzy, crisp, or curly. This connects them to the Negroes of Africa, and their skin color does as well. At any rate, we refer to the Australian Blacks, just as the Spaniards do with the Philippine Negritos. Moral characteristics link the Australian and the Negro in much the same way as physical traits do. Both, compared to Europeans, are either genuinely lacking in intellectual capacity or (at least) have played a minor role in world history. Thus, several populations have been categorized as Blacks. Is this classification natural?

It shall be illustrated further. On the extremities of each of the quarters of the world, we find populations that in many respects resemble each other. In Northern Asia and Europe, the Eskimo, Samoeid, and Laplander, tolerant of the cold[73] of the Arctic Circle, are all characterized by a flatness of face, a lowness of stature, and a breadth of head. In some cases the contrast between them and their nearest neighbours to the south, in these respects, is remarkable. The Norwegian who comes in contact with the Lap is strong and well-made; so are many of the Red Indians who front the Eskimo.

It will be explained further. At the edges of each of the world's regions, we see populations that have many similarities. In Northern Asia and Europe, the Eskimo, Samoeid, and Laplander, who can handle the cold[73] of the Arctic Circle, all show traits like a flat face, short stature, and wide head. In some cases, the differences between them and their nearest neighbors to the south are striking. The Norwegian who meets the Laplander is strong and well-built; the same goes for many of the Native Americans who meet the Eskimo.

At the Cape of Good Hope something of the same sort appears. The Hottentot of the southern extremity of Africa is undersized, small-limbed, and broad-faced; so much so, that most writers, in describing him, have said that, in his conformation, the Mongolian type—to which the Eskimo belongs—Asiatic itself—re-appears in Africa. And then his neighbour the Kaffre differs from him as the Finlander does from the Lap.

At the Cape of Good Hope, something similar can be observed. The Hottentot of southern Africa is short, has small limbs, and a broad face; so much so that most writers describing him have noted that his build resembles the Mongolian type—similar to the Eskimo and other Asians—reappearing in Africa. Meanwhile, his neighbor, the Kaffre, is as different from him as a Finn is from a Laplander.

Mutatis mutandis, all this re-appears at Cape Horn; where the Patagonian changes suddenly to the Fuegian.

Mutatis mutandis, all this shows up again at Cape Horn; where the Patagonian suddenly shifts to the Fuegian.

But we in Europe are favoured; our limbs are well-formed and our skin fair. Be it so: yet there are writers who, seeing the extent to which the islanders of the Pacific are favoured also, and noting the degree to which European points of colour, size, and capacity for improvement, real or supposed, re-appear at the Antipodes, have[74] thrown the Polynesian and the Englishman in one and the same class.

But we in Europe are lucky; our bodies are well-shaped and our skin is light. That's true; however, there are writers who, seeing how the islanders of the Pacific are also favored, and observing how European traits of color, size, and potential for improvement—real or imagined—reappear in the Antipodes, have[74] grouped the Polynesian and the Englishman into the same category.

And so, perhaps, he is, if we are to judge by certain characteristics: if agreement in certain matters, wherein the intermediate populations differ, form the grounds upon which we make our groups, the Fuegians, Eskimo, and Hottentots form one class, and the Negroes and Australians another. But are these classes natural? That depends upon the questions to which the classification is subservient. If we wish to know how far moisture and coolness freshen the complexion; how far moisture and heat darken it; how far mountain altitudes affect the human frame; in other words, how far common external conditions develope common habits and common points of structure, nothing can be better than the groups in question.

And so, maybe he is, if we’re judging by certain traits: if agreement on certain issues, where the intermediate populations differ, forms the basis for our groups, then the Fuegians, Eskimos, and Hottentots are one class, and the Negroes and Australians are another. But are these classes natural? That depends on what questions the classification is intended to answer. If we want to find out how much moisture and coolness improve the complexion; how much moisture and heat darken it; how mountain altitudes affect the human body; in other words, how common external conditions develop shared habits and structural similarities, then these groups are quite useful.

But alter the problem: let us wish to know how certain areas were peopled, what population gave origin to some other, how the Americans reached America, whence the Britons came into England, or any question connected with the migrations, affiliations, and origin of the varieties of our species, and groups of this kind are valueless. They tell us something—but not what we want to know: inasmuch as our question now concerns blood, descent, pedigree, relationship. To tell an inquirer[75] who wishes to deduce one population from another that certain distant tribes agree with the one under discussion in certain points of resemblance, is as irrelevant as to tell a lawyer in search of the next of kin to a client deceased, that though you know of no relations, you can find a man who is the very picture of him in person—a fact good enough in itself, but not to the purpose; except (of course) so far as the likeness itself suggests a relationship—which it may or may not do.

But change the question: let’s explore how certain areas were populated, what groups gave rise to others, how the Americans came to America, where the Britons originated in England, or any question related to migrations, connections, and the origins of different varieties of our species. Studies like these are not useful. They provide some information—but not what we’re really looking for: since our question now focuses on ancestry, descent, lineage, and relationships. Telling someone[75] who wants to trace one population back to another that certain distant tribes share some similarities with the group in question is as irrelevant as telling a lawyer searching for the next of kin of a deceased client that although you know of no relatives, you can find someone who looks exactly like him—a fact that may be interesting, but not helpful; unless (of course) the resemblance itself implies a connection—which it might or might not.

Classes formed irrespective of descent are classes on the Mineralogical, whilst classes formed with a view to the same are classes on the Zoological, principle. Which is wanted in the Natural History of Man? The first for Anthropology; the second for Ethnology.

Classes formed regardless of background are based on the Mineralogical principle, while classes formed with a specific purpose in mind are based on the Zoological principle. Which one is needed in the Natural History of Man? The first for Anthropology; the second for Ethnology.

But why the antagonism? Perhaps the two methods may coincide. The possibility of this has been foreshadowed. The family likeness may, perhaps, prove a family connexion. True: at the same time each case must be tested on its own grounds. Hence, whether the African is to be grouped with the Australian, or whether the two classes are to be as far asunder in Ethnology as in Geography, depends upon the results of the special investigation of that particular connexion—real or supposed. It is sufficient to say that none of the instances quoted exhibit any such relationship;[76] though many a theory—as erroneous as bold—has been started to account for it.

But why is there such hostility? Maybe the two methods could actually align. This possibility has been hinted at before. The similarities might indicate a deeper connection. However, it’s essential to evaluate each case on its own merits. Therefore, whether the African should be grouped with the Australian or if the two categories should be as distant in Ethnology as they are in Geography relies on the outcomes of a detailed investigation of that specific connection—real or assumed. It’s enough to say that none of the examples provided show any such relationship;[76] although many theories—just as incorrect as they are daring—have been proposed to explain it.

It is for Ethnology, then, that classification is most wanted—more than for Anthropology; even as it is for Zoology that we require orders and genera rather than for Physiology. This is based upon certain distinctive characters; some of which are of a physical, others of a moral sort. Each falls into divisions. There are moral and intellectual phænomena which prove nothing in the way of relationship, simply because they are the effects of a common grade of civilizational development. What would be easier than to group all the hunting, all the piscatory, or all the pastoral tribes together, and to exclude from these all who built cities, milked cows, sowed corn, or ploughed land? Common conditions determine common habits.

It’s in Ethnology that we really need classification—more so than in Anthropology; just like in Zoology, we need orders and genera more than in Physiology. This is based on certain distinctive traits; some are physical, while others are moral. Each one can be divided further. There are moral and intellectual phenomena that don't indicate any relationship, simply because they are the results of a similar level of civilizational development. What could be easier than grouping all the hunting, fishing, or pastoral tribes together and excluding those who built cities, milked cows, planted crops, or farmed land? Shared conditions lead to shared habits.

Again, much that seems at first glance definite, specific, and characteristic, loses its value as a test of ethnological affinity, when we examine the families in which it occurs. In distant countries, and in tribes far separated, superstition takes a common form, and creeds that arise independently of each other look as if they were deduced from a common origin. All this makes the facts in what may be called the Natural History of the Arts or of Religion easy to collect, but difficult to[77] appreciate; in many cases, indeed, we are taken up into the rare and elevated atmosphere of metaphysics. What if different modes of architecture, or sculpture, or varieties in the practice of such useful arts as weaving and ship-building, be attributed to the same principle that makes a sparrow’s nest different from a hawk’s, or a honey-bee’s from a hornet’s? What if there be different instincts in human art, as there is in the nidification of birds? Whatever may be the fact, it is clear that such a doctrine must modify the interpretation of it. The clue to these complications—and they form a Gordian knot which must be unravelled, and not cut—lies in the cautious induction from what we know to what we do not; from the undoubted differences admitted to exist within undoubtedly related populations, to the greater ones which distinguish more distantly connected groups.

Once again, a lot that initially seems definite, specific, and distinctive loses its value as a measure of cultural connection when we look at the families in which it appears. In far-off countries and in tribes that are widely separated, superstitions often share common themes, and beliefs that develop independently can appear as if they stem from a shared origin. This makes gathering the information in what might be called the Natural History of the Arts or Religion straightforward, but it complicates its understanding; in many instances, we find ourselves delving into the rarefied realm of metaphysics. What if different styles of architecture, sculpture, or variations in practical arts like weaving and shipbuilding arise from the same principle that makes a sparrow's nest different from a hawk's, or a honeybee's from a hornet's? What if there are different instincts in human creativity, similar to those seen in bird nesting? Regardless of the truth, it’s clear that such a theory must change how we interpret it. The key to these complexities—and they form a tricky knot that needs to be untangled, not cut—lies in carefully inferring from what we know to what we don’t; from the undeniable differences recognized within clearly related populations, to the larger distinctions that separate groups that are more distantly related.

This has been sufficient to indicate the existence of certain moral characters which are really no characters at all—at least in the way of proving descent or affiliation; and that physical ones of the same kind are equally numerous may be inferred from what has already been written.

This has been enough to show the existence of certain moral traits that are actually not traits at all—at least not in terms of proving lineage or connection; and that physical traits of the same sort are just as common can be inferred from what has already been stated.

It is these elements of uncertainty so profusely mixed up with almost all the other classes of ethnological facts, that give such a high value, as an[78] instrument of investigation, to Language; inasmuch as, although two different families of mankind may agree in having skins of the same colour, or hair of the same texture, without, thereby, being connected in the way of relationship, it is hard to conceive how they could agree in calling the same objects by the same name, without a community of origin, or else either direct or indirect intercourse. Affiliation or intercourse—one of the two—this community of language exhibits. One to the exclusion of the other it does not exhibit. If it did so, it would be of greater value than it is. Still it indicates one of the two; and either fact is worth looking for.

It's these elements of uncertainty, so deeply intertwined with almost all other types of ethnological facts, that make Language such a valuable tool for investigation, as[78] even though two different groups of people may share the same skin color or hair texture, that doesn’t necessarily mean they are related. It's hard to imagine how they could agree on using the same words for the same things without having some kind of shared origin or direct or indirect contact with each other. This linguistic connection shows either affiliation or interaction—one or the other, but not both. If it showed both, it would be even more valuable than it is. Still, it indicates one of the two, and either fact is worth investigating.

The value of language has been overrated; chiefly, of course, by the philologists. And it has been undervalued. The anatomists and archæologists, and, above all, the zoologists, have done this. The historian, too, has not known exactly how to appreciate it, when its phænomena come in collision with the direct testimony of authorities; the chief instrument in his own line of criticism.

The importance of language has been exaggerated, mainly by linguists. At the same time, it has been overlooked by others. Anatomists, archaeologists, and especially zoologists have contributed to this undervaluation. Historians also struggle to fully appreciate it, especially when its phenomena conflict with direct evidence from authorities, which is their main tool for criticism.

It is overrated when we make the affinities of speech between two populations absolute evidence of connection in the way of relationship. It is overrated when we talk of tongues being immutable, and of languages never dying. On the other hand, it is unduly disparaged when an inch[79] or two of difference in stature, a difference in the taste in the fine arts, a modification in the religious belief, or a disproportion in the influence upon the affairs of the world, is set up as a mark of distinction between two tribes speaking one and the same tongue, and alike in other matters. Now, errors of each kind are common.

It's overrated when we consider the similarities in speech between two groups as solid proof of their connection in terms of relationships. It's overrated when we claim that languages are unchanging and that languages never die. On the flip side, it's unfairly downplayed when a small difference in height, a difference in taste in the fine arts, a change in religious beliefs, or an imbalance in influence over world affairs is highlighted as a distinguishing factor between two groups that speak the same language and are similar in other ways. Errors of both kinds are common.

The permanence of language as a sign of origin must be determined, like every thing else of the same kind, by induction; and this tells us that both the loss and retention of a native tongue are illustrated by remarkable examples. It tells both ways. In St. Domingo we have negroes speaking French; and this is a notable instance of the adoption of a foreign tongue. But the circumstances were peculiar. One tongue was not changed for another; since no Negro language predominated. The real fact was that of a mixture of languages—and this is next to no language at all. Hence, when French became the language of the Haytians, the usual obstacle of a previously existing common native tongue, pertinaciously and patriotically retained, was wanting. It superseded an indefinite and conflicting mass of Negro dialects, rather than any particular Negro language.

The permanence of language as a sign of origin has to be determined, like everything else of the same kind, through induction; and this shows us that both the loss and retention of a native language come with notable examples. It works both ways. In St. Domingo, we have Black people speaking French; and this is a significant case of adopting a foreign language. But the circumstances were unique. One language wasn’t replaced by another, as there wasn’t a dominant Black language. The reality was a mix of languages—which is almost like not having a language at all. So, when French became the language of the Haitians, the usual barrier of a well-established native language, held onto with pride and patriotism, was absent. It replaced a vague and conflicting assortment of Black dialects rather than any specific Black language.

In the southern parts of Central America the ethnology is obscure, especially for the Republics of San Salvador, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica. Yet if[80] we turn to Colonel Galindo’s account of them, we find the specific statement that aborigines still exist, and that their language is the Spanish; not any native Indian dialect. As similar assertions respecting the extinction and replacement of original languages have frequently proved incorrect, let us assume this to be an over-statement—though I have no definite grounds for considering it one. Over-statement though it may be, it still shows the direction in which things are going; and that is towards the supremacy of a European tongue.

In the southern parts of Central America, the study of cultures is unclear, particularly in the countries of San Salvador, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica. However, if[80] we look at Colonel Galindo’s account of these regions, we find a specific claim that indigenous people still exist and that their language is Spanish, not any native Indian dialect. Since similar claims about the extinction and replacement of original languages have often been proven wrong, we might consider this an exaggeration—even though I don't have solid reasons to think it is. Even if it’s an exaggeration, it still indicates the trend toward the dominance of a European language.

On the confines of Asia and Europe there is the nation, tribe or family of the Bashkirs. Their present tongue is the Turkish. It is believed, however, that originally it was the mother-tongue of the Majiars of Hungary.

On the border of Asia and Europe, there is a nation, tribe, or family called the Bashkirs. They currently speak Turkish. However, it's believed that their original language was the mother tongue of the Magyars from Hungary.

Again, the present Bulgarian is akin to the Russian. Originally, it was a Turk dialect.

Again, today's Bulgarian is similar to Russian. It originally came from a Turkic dialect.

Lastly—for I am illustrating, not exhausting, the subject—there died, in the year 1770, at Karczag in Hungary, an old man named Varro; the last man, in Europe, that knew even a few words of the language of his nation. Yet this nation was and is a great one; no less a one than that of the ancient Komanian Turks, some of whom invaded Europe in the eleventh century, penetrated as far as Hungary, settled there as conquerors,[81] and retained their language till the death of this same Varro. The rest of the nation remained in Asia; and the present occupants of the parts between the Caspian and the Aral are their descendants. Languages then may be lost; and one may be superseded by another.

Lastly—for I’m illustrating, not exhausting, the subject—an old man named Varro died in 1770 in Karczag, Hungary; he was the last person in Europe who knew even a few words of his nation’s language. Yet this nation was and is a significant one; it is none other than that of the ancient Komanian Turks, some of whom invaded Europe in the eleventh century, reached as far as Hungary, settled there as conquerors,[81] and kept their language until the death of Varro. The rest of the nation stayed in Asia, and the current inhabitants of the area between the Caspian Sea and the Aral Sea are their descendants. Languages can be lost; one can be replaced by another.

The ancient Etruscans as a separate substantive nation are extinct: so is their language, which we know to have been peculiar. Yet the Etruscan blood still runs in the veins of the Florentine and other Italians.

The ancient Etruscans, as a distinct nation, are gone: so is their unique language. However, Etruscan heritage still flows through the veins of Florentines and other Italians.

On the other hand, the pertinacity with which language resists the attempts to supersede it is of no common kind. Without going to Siberia, or America, the great habitats of the broken and fragmentary families, we may find instances much nearer home! In the Isle of Man the native Manks still remains; though dominant Norsemen and dominant Anglo-Saxons have brought their great absorbent languages in collision with it. In Malta, the labourers speak Arabic—with Italian, with English, and with a Lingua Franca around them.

On the other hand, the stubbornness with which language resists attempts to replace it is quite remarkable. Without needing to go to Siberia or America, the main places of the broken and fragmented languages, we can find examples much closer to home! In the Isle of Man, the native Manks language still exists, despite the dominance of Norse and Anglo-Saxon languages that have clashed with it. In Malta, the workers speak Arabic, along with Italian, English, and a Lingua Franca surrounding them.

In the western extremities of the Pyrenees, a language neither French nor Spanish is spoken; and has been spoken for centuries—possibly milleniums. It was once the speech of the southern[82] half of France, and of all Spain. This is the Basque of Biscay.

In the western part of the Pyrenees, a language that's neither French nor Spanish is spoken; and it has been for centuries—possibly even thousands of years. It used to be the language of the southern half of France and all of Spain. This is the Basque of Biscay.

In contact with the Turk on one side, and the Greek and the Slavonic on the other, the Albanian of Albania still speaks his native Skipetar.

In contact with the Turk on one side and the Greek and Slav on the other, the Albanian from Albania still speaks his native Skipetar.

A reasonable philologist makes similarity of language strong—very strong—primâ facie evidence in favour of community of descent.

A reasonable linguist finds that similar languages provide strong—very strong—primâ facie evidence for a shared ancestry.

When does it imply this, and when does it merely denote commercial or social intercourse? We can measure the phænomena of languages and exhibit the results numerically. Thus the percentage of words common to two languages may be 1, 2, 3, 4–98, 99, or any intermediate number. But, now comes the application of a maxim. Ponderanda non numeranda. We ask what sort of words coincide, as well as how many? When the names of such objects as fire, water, sun, moon, star, hand, tooth, tongue, foot, &c. agree, we draw an inference very different from the one which arises out of the presence of such words as ennui, fashion, quadrille, violin, &c. Common sense distinguishes the words which are likely to be borrowed from one language into another, from those which were originally common to the two.

When does it mean this, and when does it just refer to commercial or social interactions? We can analyze the features of languages and display the results in numbers. So, the percentage of words shared by two languages can be 1, 2, 3, 4–98, 99, or any number in between. But now we have to apply a principle: Ponderanda non numeranda. We need to ask not just how many words are shared, but also what kind of words they are. When words for basic objects like fire, water, sun, moon, star, hand, tooth, tongue, foot, etc. are similar, we draw a very different conclusion than when we find words like ennui, fashion, quadrille, violin, etc. Common sense helps us identify words that are likely borrowed from one language to another versus those that were originally shared between the two.

There are a certain amount of French words in English, i. e. of words borrowed from the French.[83] I do not know the percentage, nor yet the time required for their introduction; and, as I am illustrating the subject, rather than seeking specific results, this is unimportant. Prolong the time, and multiply the words; remembering that the former can be done indefinitely. Or, instead of doing this, increase the points of contact between the languages. What follows? We soon begin to think of a familiar set of illustrations; some classical and some vulgar—of the Delphic ship so often mended as to retain but an equivocal identity; of the Highlander’s knife, with its two new blades and three new handles; of Sir John Cutler’s silk-stockings degenerated into worsted by darnings. We are brought to the edge of a new question. We must tread slowly accordingly.

There are a number of French words in English, i.e. words borrowed from the French.[83] I’m not sure about the percentage or the time it took for them to be introduced; and since I’m illustrating the topic rather than looking for specific outcomes, that’s not really important. Extend the time and increase the number of words; just remember that the time can be extended indefinitely. Alternatively, instead of doing this, increase the connections between the languages. What happens next? We quickly start to think of a familiar set of examples; some classical and some everyday—like the Delphic ship that was so often repaired that it only vaguely retained its identity; or the Highlander’s knife, which had two new blades and three new handles; or Sir John Cutler’s silk stockings that became worsted through repeated repairs. We find ourselves facing a new question. We must proceed carefully.

In the English words call-est, call-eth (call-s), and call-ed, we have two parts; the first being the root itself, the second a sign of person, or tense. The same is the case with the word father-s, son-s, &c.; except that the -s denotes case; and that it is attached to a substantive, instead of a verb. Again, in wis-er we have the sign of a comparative; in wis-est that of a superlative degree. All these are inflexions. If we choose, we may call them inflexional elements; and it is convenient to do so; since we can then analyse words and contrast[84] the different parts of them: e. g. in call-s the call- is radical, the -s inflexional.

In the English words call-est, call-eth (call-s), and called, we have two parts; the first is the root itself, and the second indicates person or tense. The same applies to the word dad, son's, etc.; except that the -s indicates case; and it attaches to a noun, rather than a verb. Again, in wis-er we have the marker for a comparative; in wisest that of a superlative degree. All of these are inflexions. If we want, we can refer to them as inflexional elements; and it’s helpful to do so, as it allows us to analyze words and contrast[84] their different parts: e.g. in calls the call- is the root, and the -s is inflexional.

Having become familiarized with this distinction, we may now take a word of French or German origin—say fashion or waltz. Each, of course, is foreign. Nevertheless, when introduced into English, it takes an English inflexion. Hence we say, if I dress absurdly it is fashion’s fault; also, I am waltz-ing, I waltz-ed, he waltz-es—and so on. In these particular words, then, the inflexional part has been English; even when the radical was foreign. This is no isolated fact. On the contrary, it is sufficiently common to be generalized so that the grammatical part of language has been accredited with a permanence which has been denied to the glossarial or vocabular. The one changes, the other is constant; the one is immortal, the other fleeting; the one form, the other matter.

Once we understand this distinction, we can take a word of French or German origin—like fashion or waltz. Each of these words is foreign. However, when they come into English, they take on an English form. So we say, if I dress absurdly it is fashion’s fault; also, I am waltz-ing, I waltz-ed, he waltz-es—and so on. In these specific words, the grammatical part is English, even if the root is foreign. This isn't an isolated case. In fact, it's common enough to be generalized, showing that the grammatical part of language has a permanence that the glossarial or vocabular lacks. One changes, the other remains the same; one is eternal, the other temporary; one is form, the other is substance.

Now it is imaginable that the glossarial and grammatical tests may be at variance. They would be so if all our English verbs came to be French, yet still retained their English inflexions in -ed, -s, -ing, &c. They would be so if all the verbs were like fashion, and all the substantives like quadrille. This is an extreme case. Still, it illustrates the question. Certain Hindu languages are said to have nine-tenths of the vocables[85] common with a language called the Sanskrit—but none of their inflexions; the latter being chiefly Tamul. What, then, is the language itself? This is a question which divides philologists. It illustrates, however, the difference between the two tests—the grammatical and the glossarial. Of these, it is safe to say that the former is the more constant.

Now, it's possible that the gloss and grammar tests might not match. They would be mismatched if all our English verbs were to become French, while still keeping their English endings like -ed, -s, -ing, etc. They would also be mismatched if all the verbs were like fashion, and all the nouns were like quadrille. This is an extreme scenario. Still, it illustrates the point. Some Hindu languages are said to share nine-tenths of the vocabulary[85] with a language called Sanskrit—but they have none of its inflections; those are mostly Tamul. So, what exactly is the language itself? This is a question that splits linguists. However, it does highlight the difference between the two tests—the grammatical and the glossarial. Of these, it's safe to say that the former is the more stable.

Yet the philological method of investigation requires caution. Over and above the terms which one language borrows from another, and which denote intercourse rather than affinity, there are two other classes of little or no ethnological value.

Yet the philological method of investigation requires caution. In addition to the terms that one language borrows from another, which indicate interaction rather than a shared heritage, there are two other categories that have little to no ethnological significance.

  • 1. Coincidences may be merely accidental. The likelihood of their being so is a part of the Doctrine of Chances. The mathematician may investigate this: the philologist merely finds the data. Neither has been done satisfactorily, though it was attempted by Dr. T. Young.
  • 2. Coincidences may have an organic connexion. No one would say that because two nations called the same bird by the name cuckoo, the term had been borrowed by either one from the other, or by both from a common source. The true reason would be plain enough. Two populations gave a name on imitative principles, and imitated[86] the same object. Son and brother, sister and daughter—if these terms agree, the chances are that a philological affinity is at the bottom of the agreement. But does the same apply to papa and mama, identical in English, Carib, and perhaps twenty other tongues? No. They merely show that the infants of different countries begin with the same sounds.

Such—and each class is capable of great expansion—are the cases where philology requires caution. Another matter now suggests itself.

Such—and each class can expand significantly—are the situations where philology needs to be cautious. Another point now comes to mind.

To be valid a classification must be real; not nominal or verbal—not a mere book-maker’s arrangement. Families must be in definite degrees of relationship. This, too, will bear illustration. A man wants a relation to leave his money to: he is an Englishman, and by relation means nothing more distant than a third cousin. It is nothing to him if, in Scotland, a fifth cousinship is recognised. He has not found the relation he wants; he has merely found a greater amount of latitude given to the term. Few oversights have done more harm than the neglect of this distinction. Twenty years ago the Sanskrit, Sclavonic, Greek-and-Latin, and Gothic languages formed a class. This class was called Indo-Germanic. Its western limits were in Germany; its eastern in[87] Hindostan. The Celtic of Wales, Cornwall, Brittany, Ireland, Scotland, and the Isle of Man was not included in it. Neither was it included in any other group. It was anywhere or nowhere—in any degree of isolation. Dr. Prichard undertook to fix it. He did so—well and successfully. He showed that, so far from being isolated, it was connected with the Greek, German, and Sclavonic by a connexion with the Sanskrit, or (changing the expression) with the Sanskrit through the Sclavonic, German, and Greek—any or all. The mother-tongue from which all these broke was supposed to be in Asia. Dr. Prichard’s work was entitled the ‘Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations.’ Did this make the Celtic Indo-Germanic? It was supposed to do so. Nay, more—it altered the name of the class; which was now called, as it has been since, Indo-European. Inconveniently. A relationship was mistaken for the relationship. The previous tongues were (say) second cousins. The Celtic was a fourth or fifth. What was the result? Not that a new second cousin was found, but that the family circle was enlarged.

To be valid, a classification must be real; not nominal or verbal—not just a simple listing by some book-maker. Families need to have clear degrees of relationship. This can be illustrated. A man wants a relative to leave his money to: he is English and means nothing more distant than a third cousin. It doesn’t matter to him if, in Scotland, a fifth cousin is recognized. He hasn’t found the relation he wants; he has only found a wider interpretation of the term. Few oversights have caused more damage than overlooking this distinction. Twenty years ago, the Sanskrit, Slavic, Greek, Latin, and Gothic languages formed one group. This group was called Indo-Germanic. Its western boundary was in Germany; its eastern boundary was in[87] Hindostan. The Celtic languages of Wales, Cornwall, Brittany, Ireland, Scotland, and the Isle of Man were not included in this group. They weren’t part of any other group either. They were either everywhere or nowhere—completely isolated. Dr. Prichard took it upon himself to define it. He did so—effectively and successfully. He demonstrated that, far from being isolated, it was connected to the Greek, German, and Slavic languages through Sanskrit, or (using different wording) connected to Sanskrit via Slavic, German, and Greek—any or all. The original tongue from which all these derived was believed to be in Asia. Dr. Prichard's work was titled ‘Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations.’ Did this make Celtic Indo-Germanic? It was thought to do so. Furthermore, it changed the name of the classification, which has been called Indo-European since then. Unfortunately, A relationship was confused with the relationship. The previous languages were like (say) second cousins. The Celtic was a fourth or fifth. What was the outcome? Not that a new second cousin was found, but that the family circle was expanded.

What follows? Dr. Prichard’s fixation of the Celtic as a member of even the same clan with the German, &c. was an addition to ethnographical philology that many inferior investigators strove[88] to rival; and it came to be current belief—acted on if not avowed—that tongues as like the Celtic as the Celtic was to the German were Indo-European also. This bid fair to inundate the class—to make it prove too much—to render it no class at all. The Albanian, Basque, Etruscan, Lap, and others followed. The outlier of the group once created served as a nucleus for fresh accumulations. A strange language of Caucasus—the Irôn or Ossetic—was placed by Klaproth as Indo-Germanic; and that upon reasonable grounds, considering the unsettled state of criticism. Meanwhile, the Georgian, another tongue of those same mysterious mountains, wants placing. It has undoubted Ossetic—or Irôn—affinities. But the Ossetic—or Irôn—is Indo-European. So therefore is the Georgian. This is a great feat; since the Caucasian tongues and the Caucasian skulls now agree, both having their affinities with Europe—as they ought to have. But what if both the Irôn and Georgian are half Chinese, or Tibetan, i. e. are all but monosyllabic languages both in grammar and vocables? If such be the case, the term ‘Indo-European’ wants revising; and not only that—the principles on which terms are fixed and classes created want revising also. At the same time, the ‘Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations’ contains the most[89] definite addition to philology that the present century has produced; and the proper compliment to it is Mr. Garnett’s review of it in the ‘Quarterly;’ the first of a series of masterly and unsurpassed specimens of inductive philology applied to the investigation of the true nature of the inflexions of the Verb. But this is episodical.

What comes next? Dr. Prichard's belief that the Celtic was part of the same clan as the German, etc., added to ethnographical philology in a way that many lesser researchers tried[88] to imitate; and it became a widely held belief—acted upon if not openly stated—that languages similar to the Celtic, as the Celtic was to the German, were also Indo-European. This was likely to overwhelm the category—to make it too broad—to turn it into no category at all. The Albanian, Basque, Etruscan, Lap, and others followed. The outlier of the group, once established, served as a core for new additions. A strange language from the Caucasus—the Irôn or Ossetic—was classified by Klaproth as Indo-Germanic; and that was a reasonable stance, given the uncertain state of criticism. Meanwhile, the Georgian, another language from those same mysterious mountains, is still undetermined. It has definite Ossetic—or Irôn—connections. But since the Ossetic—or Irôn—is Indo-European, so must the Georgian be. This is a significant development, since the Caucasian languages and the Caucasian skulls now align, both showing connections to Europe—as they should. But what if both the Irôn and Georgian have traces of being half Chinese or Tibetan, i.e. are nearly monosyllabic languages in both grammar and vocabulary? If that’s true, the term ‘Indo-European’ needs to be reassessed; and not just that—the principles on which terms are defined and categories are created also need revision. At the same time, the ‘Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations’ holds the most[89] significant addition to philology that this century has seen; and the best compliment to it is Mr. Garnett’s review in the ‘Quarterly,’ the first in a series of outstanding and unmatched examples of inductive philology applied to the understanding of the true nature of the verb's inflections. But this is a side note.

The next instrument of ethnological criticism is to be found in the phænomena themselves of the dispersion and distribution of our species.

The next tool for ethnological criticism can be found in the phenomena of how our species spreads and distributes itself.

First as to its universality. In this respect we must look minutely before we shall find places where Man is not. These, if we find them at all, will come under one of two conditions; the climate will be extreme, or the isolation excessive. For instances of the first we take the Poles; and, as far as the Antarctic Circle is concerned, we find no inhabitants in the ice-bound regions—few and far between—of its neighbourhood; none south of 55° S. lat., or the extremity of the Tierra del Fuego. This, however, is peopled. We must remember, however, that in the Southern Ocean such regions as New South Shetland and Victoria Land are isolated as well as cold and frozen.

First, let's talk about its universality. In this regard, we need to closely examine things before we discover places where humans are not. If we find such places, they will likely fall into one of two categories: either the climate is extreme or the isolation is severe. For examples of the first, we look to the Poles; in terms of the Antarctic Circle, we find no inhabitants in the ice-covered areas—there are very few nearby, and none south of 55° S. latitude, or at the southern tip of Tierra del Fuego. However, this region is populated. It's important to note that in the Southern Ocean, areas like New South Shetland and Victoria Land are both isolated and cold.

The North Pole, however, must be approached within 25° before we lose sight of Man, or find him excluded from even a permanent habitation.[90] Spitzbergen is beyond the limits of human occupancy. Nova Zembla, when first discovered, was also uninhabited. So was Iceland. Here, however, it was the isolation of the island that made it so. A hardy stock of men, nearly related to ourselves, have occupied it since the ninth century; and continental Greenland is peopled as far as the 75th degree—though, perhaps, only as a summer residence.

The North Pole, however, must be approached within 25° before we lose sight of humans or find them completely absent from even a permanent home.[90] Spitzbergen is beyond the reach of human settlement. Nova Zembla, when it was first discovered, was also uninhabited. So was Iceland. Here, though, it was the isolation of the island that made it that way. A tough group of people, closely related to us, have lived there since the ninth century; and continental Greenland is inhabited up to the 75th degree—though, perhaps, only as a summer residence.

Far to the east of Nova Zembla and opposite to the country of the Yukahiri—a hardy people on the rivers Kolyma and Indijirka, and within the Arctic Circle—lies the island of New Siberia. I find from Wrangell’s Travels in Siberia that certain expatriated Yukahiri are believed to have fled thither. Have they lived or died? Have they reached the island? In case they have done so, and kept body and soul together, New Siberia is probably the most northern spot of the inhabited world.

Far to the east of Nova Zembla and across from the land of the Yukahiri—a resilient people living by the Kolyma and Indijirka rivers, within the Arctic Circle—lies the island of New Siberia. I read in Wrangell’s Travels in Siberia that some Yukahiri who left their homeland are thought to have escaped there. Are they alive or dead? Did they make it to the island? If they did, and managed to survive, New Siberia is likely the northernmost inhabited place on Earth.

How cold a country must be in order to remain empty of men, we have seen. Such localities are but few. None are too hot—unless, indeed, we believe the centre of Equatorial Africa to be a solitude.

How cold does a country have to be to stay empty of people? We've seen that there are only a few places like that. None are too hot—unless we think the center of Equatorial Africa is a deserted place.

In South America there is a great blank in the Maps. For many degrees on each side of the Upper Amazons lies a vast tract—said to be a[91] jungle—and marked Sirionos, the name of a frontier population. Yet the Sirionos are not, for one moment, supposed to fill up the vast hiatus. At the same time, there are few, or none, besides. Is this tract a drear unhumanized waste? It is said to be so—to be wet, woody, and oppressively malarious. Yet, this merely means that there is a forest and a swamp of a certain magnitude, and of a certain degree of impenetrability.

In South America, there’s a huge blank on the maps. For many degrees on either side of the Upper Amazon, there’s a vast area—thought to be a[91] jungle—and labeled Sirionos, the name of a border tribe. However, the Sirionos aren’t believed to occupy the vast emptiness. At the same time, there are few, if any, others. Is this area just a desolate, uninhabited wasteland? It's said to be that way—wet, wooded, and extremely unhealthy. But this just means there’s a forest and a swamp of a certain size and a certain level of inaccessibility.

Other such areas are unexplored—yet we presume them to be occupied; though ever so thinly: e. g. the interiors of New Guinea and Australia.

Other areas like this are unexplored—yet we assume they are inhabited; albeit very sparsely: e. g. the interiors of New Guinea and Australia.

That Greenland was known to the early Icelanders is well known. And that it was occupied when so first known is also certain. One of the geographical localities mentioned in an old Saga has an Eskimo word for one of its elements—Utibuks-firth = the firth of the isthmus; Utibuk in Eskimo meaning isthmus.

That Greenland was known to the early Icelanders is well established. It's also certain that it was inhabited when it was first recognized. One of the geographic locations mentioned in an old Saga has an Eskimo word for one of its features—Utibuks-firth = the firth of the isthmus; Utibuk in Eskimo means isthmus.

Of the islands originally uninhabited those which are, at one and the same time, large and near continents are Madeira and Iceland—the former being a lonely wood. The Canaries, though smaller and more isolated, have been occupied by the remarkable family of the Guanches. Add to these, Ascension, St. Helena, the Galapagos, Kerguelen’s Island, and a few others.

Of the originally uninhabited islands, those that are both large and close to continents are Madeira and Iceland—the former being a solitary woodland. The Canaries, although smaller and more isolated, have been settled by the notable Guanche family. Also, there are Ascension, St. Helena, the Galapagos, Kerguelen’s Island, and a few others.

Easter Island, a speck in the vast Pacific, and more than half way between Asia and America, exhibited both inhabitants and ruins to its first discoverers.

Easter Island, a tiny spot in the vast Pacific, and more than halfway between Asia and America, showed both people and ancient structures to its first explorers.

Such is the horizontal distribution of Man; i.e. his distribution according to the degrees of latitude. What other animal has such a range? What species? What genus or order? Contrast with this the localized habitats of the Orang-utan, and the Chimpanzee as species; of the Apes as genera; of the Marsupialia as orders.

Such is the horizontal distribution of humans; i.e. their distribution according to the degrees of latitude. What other animal has such a range? What species? What genus or order? In contrast, look at the specific habitats of the Orangutan and the Chimpanzee as species; of the Apes as genera; of the Marsupials as orders.

The vertical distribution is as wide. By vertical I mean elevation above the level of the sea. On the high table-land of Pamer we have the Kerghiz; summer visitants at least, where the Yak alone, among domesticated animals, lives and breathes in the rarefied atmosphere. The town of Quito is more than 10,000 feet above the sea; Walcheren is, perhaps, below the level of it.

The vertical distribution is quite broad. By vertical, I mean elevation above sea level. On the high plateau of Pamer, we find the Kerghiz; they are at least summer visitors where the Yak, among domesticated animals, thrives in the thin air. The town of Quito is over 10,000 feet above sea level; Walcheren is, maybe, below it.

Who expects uniformity of physiognomy or frame with such a distribution?

Who expects to find the same facial features or body type with such a variety?

The size of ethnological areas.—Comparatively speaking, Europe is pretty equally divided amongst the European families. The Slavonic populations of Bohemia, Silesia, Poland, Servia, and Russia may, perhaps, have more than their due—still the French, Italians, Spaniards, Portuguese, and Wallachians, all speaking languages of classical origin, have their share; and so has our own[93] Germanic or Gothic family of English, Dutch, Frisians, Bavarians, and Scandinavians. Nevertheless, there are a few families as limited in geographical area as subordinate in political importance. There are the Escaldunac, or Basques,—originally the occupants of all Spain and half France, now pent up in a corner of the Pyrenees—the Welsh of the Iberic Peninsula. There are, also, the Skipetar, or Albanians; wedged in between Greece, Turkey, and Dalmatia. Nevertheless, the respective areas of the European families are pretty equally distributed; and the land of Europe is like a lottery wherein all the prizes are of an appreciable value.

The size of ethnological areas.—In comparison, Europe is fairly evenly divided among its various ethnic groups. The Slavic populations in Bohemia, Silesia, Poland, Serbia, and Russia might have a bit more than their fair share—yet the French, Italians, Spaniards, Portuguese, and Wallachians, all of whom speak languages with classical roots, also hold their ground; and so does our own[93] Germanic or Gothic family, which includes the English, Dutch, Frisians, Bavarians, and Scandinavians. Still, there are a few groups that are limited both in geographical range and political significance. These include the Escaldunac, or Basques—who once inhabited all of Spain and half of France, now confined to a small area in the Pyrenees—and the Welsh of the Iberian Peninsula. Then there are the Skipetar, or Albanians, caught between Greece, Turkey, and Dalmatia. Overall, the geographic areas of the European ethnic groups are relatively evenly spread out; the land of Europe resembles a lottery where all the prizes hold considerable value.

The comparison with Asia verifies this. In immediate contact with the vast Turkish population centred in Independent Tartary, but spread over an area reaching, more or less continuously, from Africa to the Icy Sea (an area larger than the whole of Europe), come the tribes of Caucasus—Georgians, Circassians, Lesgians, Mizjeji, and Irôn; five well-defined groups, each falling into subordinate divisions, and some of them into subdivisions. The language of Constantinople is understood at the Lena. In the mountain range between the Caspian and the Black Sea, the mutually unintelligible languages are at least fifteen—perhaps more, certainly not fewer. Now, the extent[94] of land covered by the Turk family shows the size to which an ethnological area may attain; whilst the multiplicity of mutually unintelligible tongues of Caucasus shows how closely families may be packed. Their geographical juxtaposition gives prominence to the contrast.

The comparison with Asia confirms this. In direct contact with the large Turkish population centered in Independent Tartary, but spread across an area extending, more or less continuously, from Africa to the Arctic Ocean (an area larger than all of Europe), are the tribes of the Caucasus—Georgians, Circassians, Lesgians, Mizjeji, and Irôn; five distinct groups, each divided into smaller groups and some further into subdivisions. The language of Constantinople is understood as far as the Lena. In the mountain range between the Caspian and the Black Sea, there are at least fifteen mutually unintelligible languages—possibly more, definitely not fewer. Now, the extent[94] of land occupied by the Turk family illustrates how large an ethnological area can become; while the variety of mutually unintelligible languages of the Caucasus highlights how closely related families can be packed together. Their geographical proximity emphasizes the contrast.

At the first view, this contrast seems remarkable. So far from being so, it is of continual occurrence. In China the language is one and indivisible: on its south-western frontier the tongues are counted by the dozen—just as if in Yorkshire there were but one provincial dialect throughout; two in Lincolnshire; and twenty in Rutland.

At first glance, this contrast seems striking. In reality, it's a frequent occurrence. In China, the language is unified and singular: along its southwestern border, there are dozens of dialects—just like if in Yorkshire there was only one regional dialect throughout; two in Lincolnshire; and twenty in Rutland.

The same contrast re-appears in North America. In Canada and the Northern States the Algonkin area is measured by the degrees of latitude and longitude; in Louisiana and Alabama by the mile.

The same contrast reappears in North America. In Canada and the Northern States, the Algonkin area is measured by degrees of latitude and longitude; in Louisiana and Alabama, it’s measured by the mile.

The same in South America. One tongue—the Guarani—covers half the continent. Elsewhere, a tenth part of it contains a score.

The situation is similar in South America. One language—the Guarani—spans half the continent. In other areas, a tenth of it includes twenty different languages.

The same in Southern Africa. From the Line to the neighbourhood of the Cape all is Kaffre. Between the Gambia and the Gaboon there are more than twenty different divisions.

The same goes for Southern Africa. From the Line to the area near the Cape, it’s all Kaffre. Between the Gambia and the Gaboon, there are over twenty different regions.

The same in the North. The Berbers reach from the Valley of the Nile to the Canaries, and[95] from the Mediterranean to the parts about Borneo. In Borneo there are said to be thirty different languages.

The same is true in the North. The Berbers stretch from the Nile Valley to the Canary Islands, and[95] from the Mediterranean to areas around Borneo. In Borneo, it's said that there are thirty different languages.

Such are areas in size, and in relation to each other; like the bishoprics and curacies of our church, large and small, with a difficulty in ascertaining the average. However, the simple epithets great and small are suggestive; since the former implies an encroaching, the latter a receding population.

Such are the sizes of areas and how they relate to one another; like the large and small bishoprics and curacies of our church, making it hard to determine the average. However, the straightforward labels great and small are revealing; the former suggests an encroaching population, while the latter indicates a receding one.

A distribution over continents is one thing; a distribution over islands another. The first is easiest made when the world is young and when the previous occupants create no obstacles. The second implies maritime skill and enterprise, and maritime skill improves with the experience of mankind. One of the greatest facts of ethnological distribution and dispersion belongs to this class. All the islands of the Pacific are peopled by the members of one stock, or family—the Polynesian. These we find as far north as the Sandwich Islands, as far south as New Zealand, and in Easter Island half-way between Asia and America. So much for the dispersion. But this is not all: the distribution is as remarkable. Madagascar is an African rather than an Asiatic island; within easy sail of Africa; the exact island for an African population. Yet, ethnologically, it is Asiatic—the same family[96] which we find in Sumatra, Borneo, the Moluccas, the Mariannes, the Carolines, and Polynesia being Malagasi also.

A distribution across continents is one thing; a distribution across islands is another. The first is easiest to establish when the world is young and when previous residents create no barriers. The second requires maritime skill and initiative, which improve with human experience. One of the most significant facts about ethnic distribution and migration belongs to this category. All the islands of the Pacific are inhabited by members of one group or family—the Polynesians. We find them as far north as the Hawaiian Islands, as far south as New Zealand, and on Easter Island, which is halfway between Asia and America. That covers the dispersion. But that’s not the whole story: the distribution is just as striking. Madagascar is more of an African island than an Asian one; it's within easy sailing distance of Africa—perfect for an African population. Yet, ethnologically, it is Asian—the same family[96] that we see in Sumatra, Borneo, the Moluccas, the Mariannes, the Carolines, and Polynesia, which includes the Malagas.

Contrast between contiguous populations.—Ethnological resemblance by no means coincides with geographical contiguity. The general character of the circumpolar families of the Arctic Circle is that of the Laplander, the Samoeid, and the Eskimo. Yet the zone of population that encircles the inhospitable shores of the Polar Sea is not exclusively either Lap or Samoeid—nor yet Eskimo. In Europe, the Laplander finds a contrast on each side. There is the Norwegian on the west; the Finlander on the east. We can explain this. The former is but a recent occupant; not a natural, but an intruder. This we infer from the southern distribution of the other members of his family—who are Danish, German, Dutch, English, and American. For the same reason the Icelander differs from the Greenlander. The Finlander, though more closely allied to the Lap than the Norwegian—belonging to the same great Ugrian family of mankind—is still a southern member of his family; a family whose continuation extends to the Lower Volga, and prolongations of which are found in Hungary. East of the Finlander, the Russian displaces the typically circumpolar Samoeid; whilst at the mouth of the Lena we have[97] the Yakuts—Turk in blood, and tongue, and, to a certain extent, in form also.

Contrast between neighboring populations.—Ethnological similarity doesn't always match up with geographical proximity. The common traits of the circumpolar families in the Arctic Circle are those of the Laplander, the Samoid, and the Eskimo. However, the population zone surrounding the harsh shores of the Polar Sea isn't solely composed of Laplanders, Samoids, or Eskimos. In Europe, the Laplander contrasts with different groups on either side. To the west, there's the Norwegian; to the east, the Finn. We can justify this. The Norwegian is a recent inhabitant; he's not native but an outsider. We deduce this from where the other members of his group typically live—like the Danish, German, Dutch, English, and American. For the same reason, the Icelander is different from the Greenlander. The Finn, while more closely related to the Laplander than the Norwegian—being part of the same larger Ugrian family of humanity—is nonetheless a southern member of that family, which stretches down to the Lower Volga, with branches extending into Hungary. To the east of the Finn, the Russian replaces the typically circumpolar Samoid; while at the mouth of the Lena, we have[97] the Yakuts—Turkic in heritage, language, and to some extent, appearance as well.

In America the circumpolar population is generally Eskimo. Yet at one point, we find even the verge of the Arctic shore occupied by a population of tall, fine-looking athletes, six feet high, well-made, and handsome in countenance. These are the Digothi Indians, called also Loucheux. Their locality is the mouth of the McKenzie River; but their language shows that their origin is further south—i. e. that they are Koluches within the Eskimo area.

In America, the circumpolar population is mainly Eskimo. However, at one point, we find the edge of the Arctic shore inhabited by a group of tall, striking athletes, around six feet tall, well-built, and attractive. These are the Digothi Indians, also known as Loucheux. They are located at the mouth of the Mackenzie River, but their language indicates that their roots are further south—that is, they are Koluches within the Eskimo region.

In Southern Africa we have the Hottentot in geographical proximity to the Kaffre, yet the contrast between the two is considerable. Similar examples are numerous. What do they denote? Generally, but not always, they denote encroachment and displacement; encroachment which tells us which of the two families has been the stronger, and displacement which has the following effect. It obliterates those intermediate and transitional forms which connect varieties, and so brings the more extreme cases of difference in geographical contact, and in ethnological contrast; hence encroachment, displacement, and the obliteration of transitional forms are terms required for the full application of the phænomena of distribution as an instrument of ethnological criticism.

In Southern Africa, we find the Hottentot close to the Kaffre, but the differences between them are significant. There are many similar instances. What do they indicate? Generally, though not always, they indicate encroachment and displacement; encroachment shows which of the two groups is stronger, and displacement has the following consequence: it wipes out those intermediate and transitional forms that connect different varieties, highlighting the more extreme cases of difference in geographical proximity and cultural contrast. Therefore, encroachment, displacement, and obliteration of transitional forms are necessary terms for fully understanding the phenomena of distribution as a tool for ethnological analysis.

Continuity and isolation.—In Siberia there are two isolated populations—the Yakuts on the Lower Lena, and the Soiot on the Upper Yenesey. The former, as aforesaid, are Turk; but they are surrounded by nations other than Turk. They are cut off from the rest of the stock.

Continuity and isolation.—In Siberia, there are two isolated populations—the Yakuts on the Lower Lena and the Soiot on the Upper Yenesey. The Yakuts, as mentioned earlier, are Turkic, but they're surrounded by non-Turkic nations. They are separated from the rest of their ethnic group.

The Soiot in like manner are surrounded by strange populations. Their true relations are the Samoeids of the Icy Sea; but between these two branches of the stock there is a heterogeneous population of Turks and Yeneseians—so-called.

The Soiot are similarly surrounded by unusual groups of people. Their true connections are with the Samoeids of the Icy Sea; however, between these two groups, there is a diverse population of Turks and so-called Yeneseians.

The great Iroquois family of America is separated into two parts—one northern and one southern. Between these lie certain members of the Algonkin class. Like the Soiot, and the Northern Samoeids, the two branches of the Iroquois are separated.

The great Iroquois family of America is split into two parts—one northern and one southern. In between them are certain members of the Algonkin group. Like the Soiot and the Northern Samoeids, the two branches of the Iroquois are divided.

The Majiars of Hungary are wholly enclosed by non-Hungarian populations; and their nearest kinsmen are the Voguls of the Uralian Mountains, far to the north-east of Moscow.

The Magyars of Hungary are completely surrounded by non-Hungarian populations, and their closest relatives are the Voguls of the Ural Mountains, located far to the northeast of Moscow.

This shows that ethnological areas may be either uninterrupted or interrupted; continuous or discontinuous; unbroken or with isolated fragments; and a little consideration will show, that wherever there is isolation there has been displacement. Whether the land has risen or the sea encroached is another question. We know why the[99] Majiars stand separate from the other Ugrian nations. They intruded themselves into Europe within the historical period, cutting their way with the sword; and the parts between them and their next of kin were never more Majiar than they are at the present moment.

This shows that ethnological areas can either be continuous or broken; they can be steadfast or have isolated fragments. A little thought will reveal that wherever there is isolation, there has been displacement. Whether the land has risen or the sea has moved in is another matter. We understand why the[99] Majiars are separate from the other Ugrian nations. They entered Europe during historical times, carving their path with violence, and the areas between them and their closest relatives have never been more Majiar than they are now.

But we know no such thing concerning the Iroquois; and we infer something quite the contrary. We believe that they once held all the country that now separates their two branches, and a great deal more beside. But the Algonkins encroached; partially dispossessing, and partially leaving them in occupation.

But we don't know anything like that about the Iroquois; instead, we believe the opposite. We think they once controlled all the land that now divides their two branches, and a lot more beyond that. However, the Algonquins pushed in, partly taking over and partly allowing the Iroquois to stay.

In either case, however, there has been displacement; and the displacement is the inference from the discontinuity.

In either case, however, there has been displacement; and the displacement is the conclusion drawn from the discontinuity.

But we must remember that true discontinuity can exist in continents only. The populations of two islands may agree, whilst that of a whole archipelago lying between them may differ. Yet this is no discontinuity; since the sea is an unbroken chain, and the intervening obstacle can be sailed round instead of crossed. The nearest way from the continent of Asia to the Tahitian archipelago—the nearest part of Polynesia—is viâ New Guinea, New Ireland, and the New Hebrides. All these islands, however, are inhabited by a different division of the Oceanic population. Does[100] this indicate displacement? No! It merely suggests the Philippines, the Pelews, the Carolines, the Ralik and Radak groups, and the Navigators’ Isles, as the route; and such it almost certainly was.

But we need to keep in mind that true discontinuity can only exist in continents. The populations of two islands may share similarities, while the population of an entire archipelago between them may differ. However, this doesn't create a discontinuity; the sea forms an unbroken chain, and the obstacle can be navigated around instead of having to cross it. The shortest route from the continent of Asia to the Tahitian archipelago—the closest part of Polynesia—is via New Guinea, New Ireland, and the New Hebrides. Nonetheless, all these islands are home to different groups of the Oceanic population. Does[100] this indicate displacement? No! It simply points to the Philippines, the Pelews, the Carolines, the Ralik and Radak groups, and the Navigators’ Isles as the route; and that was likely the way it was.

FOOTNOTE

[10] Mill (vol. ii.), speaking of the allied subject of the Moral History of Man.

[10] Mill (vol. ii.) discusses the related topic of the Moral History of Humanity.

CHAPTER IV.

Details of distribution—their conventional character—convergence from the circumference to the centre—Fuegians; Patagonian, Pampa, and Chaco Indians—Peruvians—D’Orbigny’s characters—other South American Indians—of the Missions—of Guiana—of Venezuela—Guarani—Caribs—Central America—Mexican civilization no isolated phænomenon—North American Indians—Eskimo—apparent objections to their connection with the Americans and Asiatics—Tasmanians—Australians—Papuás—Polynesians—Micronesians—Malagasi—Hottentots—Kaffres—Negroes—Berbers—Abyssinians—Copts—the Semitic family—Primary and secondary migrations.

Details of distribution—their usual nature—movement from the outskirts to the center—Fuegians; Patagonian, Pampa, and Chaco Indians—Peruvians—D'Orbigny’s classifications—other South American Indians—from the Missions—of Guiana—of Venezuela—Guarani—Caribs—Central America—Mexican civilization is not an isolated phenomenon—North American Indians—Eskimos—seeming objections to their connection with the Americans and Asiatics—Tasmanians—Australians—Papuás—Polynesians—Micronesians—Malagasy—Hottentots—Kaffirs—Negroes—Berbers—Abyssinians—Copts—the Semitic family—Primary and secondary migrations.

If the inhabited world were one large circular island; if its population were admitted to have been diffused over its surface from some single point; and if that single point were at one and the same time unascertained and requiring investigation, what would be the method of our inquiries? I suppose that both history and tradition are silent, and that the absence of other data of the same kind force us upon the general probabilities of the case, and a large amount of à priori argument.

If the inhabited world were one big circular island; if its people spread out from a single point; and if that point was both unknown and needed exploration, how would we go about our inquiries? I guess that both history and tradition are quiet, and that the lack of other data of the same type pushes us to rely on the general probabilities of the situation, along with a fair amount of à priori reasoning.

We should ask what point would give us the existing phænomena with the least amount of migration; and we should ask this upon the simple[102] principle of not multiplying causes unnecessarily. The answer would be—the centre. From the centre we can people the parts about the circumference without making any line of migration longer than half a diameter; and without supposing any one out of such numerous lines to be longer than the other. This last is the chief point—the point which more especially fixes us to the centre as a hypothetical birth-place; since, the moment we say that any part of the circumference was reached by a shorter or longer line than any other, we make a specific assertion, requiring specific arguments to support it. These may or may not exist. Until, however, they have been brought forward, we apply the rule de non apparentibus, &c., and keep to our conventional and provisional point in the centre—remembering, of course, its provisional and conventional character, and recognising its existence only as long as the search for something more real and definite continues.

We should consider what position would give us the current phenomena with the least amount of movement; and we should base this on the straightforward principle of not adding causes unnecessarily. The answer would be—the center. From the center, we can populate the areas around the edge without making any migration path longer than half a diameter; and without assuming any one of those numerous paths is longer than the others. This last point is crucial—it specifically ties us to the center as a hypothetical origin; because, as soon as we claim that any part of the edge was reached by a shorter or longer path than another, we make a specific statement that needs specific evidence to back it up. This evidence may or may not exist. Until such evidence is presented, we apply the rule de non apparentibus, &c., and stick to our conventional and temporary point in the center—keeping in mind, of course, its temporary and conventional nature, and acknowledging its validity only as long as we keep searching for something more real and definite.

In the earth as it is, we can do something of the same kind; taking six extreme points as our starting-places, and investigating the extent to which they converge. These six points are the following:—

In the world as it is, we can do something similar; starting with six extreme points and looking into how much they converge. These six points are:—

  • 1. Tierra del Fuego.
  • 2. Tasmania (Van Diemen’s Land).[103]
  • 3. Easter Island—the furthest extremity of Polynesia.
  • 4. The Cape of Good Hope, or the country of the Saabs (Hottentots).
  • 5. Lapland.
  • 6. Ireland.

From these we work through America, Australia, Polynesia, Africa, and Europe, to Asia—some part of which gives us our conventional, provisional, and hypothetical centre.

From these, we traverse America, Australia, Polynesia, Africa, and Europe, leading us to Asia—part of which provides our conventional, provisional, and hypothetical center.

I. From Tierra del Fuego to the north-eastern parts of Asia.—The Fuegians of the island have so rarely been separated from the Patagonians of the continent that there are no recognised elements of uncertainty in this quarter, distant as it is. Maritime habits connect them with their northern neighbours on the west; and that long labyrinth of archipelagoes which runs up to the southern border of Chili is equally Fuegian and Patagonian. Here we are reminded of the habits of some of the Malay tribes, under a very different sky, and amongst the islets about Sincapore—of the Bajows, or sea-gipsies, boatmen whose home is on the water, and as unfixed as that element; wanderers from one group to another; fishermen rather than traders; not strong-handed enough to be pirates, and not industrious enough to be cultivators. Such skill as the Fuegian shows at all, he shows[104] in his canoe, his paddles, his spears, his bow, his slings, and his domestic architecture. All are rude—the bow-strings are made exclusively of the sinews of animals, his arrows headed with stone. Of wood there is little, and of metal less; and, low as is the latitude, the dress, or undress, is said to make a nearer approach to absolute nakedness than is to be found in many of the inter-tropical countries.

I. From Tierra del Fuego to the northeastern parts of Asia.—The Fuegians from the island have rarely been apart from the Patagonians on the continent, so there are no recognized elements of uncertainty in this area, despite its distance. Their maritime habits link them to their northern neighbors to the west, and the long network of archipelagos leading up to the southern border of Chile is both Fuegian and Patagonian. This reminds us of the lifestyles of some Malay tribes under a very different sky, such as the Bajows, or sea-gypsies, who live on the water and are as unanchored as the sea itself; they move from one group of islands to another, acting more as fishermen than traders; not fierce enough to be pirates, nor diligent enough to be farmers. The Fuegian's skills, when apparent, are seen in his canoe, paddles, spears, bow, slings, and his basic shelters. All of these are crude—the bowstrings are made solely from animal sinews, and his arrows have stone tips. There’s little wood and even less metal available; and despite the low latitude, the attire, or lack thereof, is said to approach complete nakedness more closely than what's found in many tropical countries.

In size they fall short of the continental Patagonians; in colour and physical conformation they approach them very closely. The same broad and flattened face occurs in both, reminding some writers of the Eskimo, others of the Chinuk. Their language is certainly referable to the Patagonian class, though, probably, unintelligible to a Patagonian.

In size, they are smaller than the continental Patagonians; in terms of skin color and physical features, they are quite similar. Both have the same broad and flat faces, which some writers compare to the Eskimo and others to the Chinuk. Their language definitely belongs to the Patagonian category, although it is likely unintelligible to a Patagonian.

Within the island itself there are differences; degrees of discomfort; and degrees in its effects upon the bodily frame. At the eastern extremity[11] the population wore the skins of land-animals, and looked like hunters rather than fishers and sealers. Otherwise, as a general rule, the Fuegians are boatmen.

Within the island, there are differences; varying levels of discomfort; and differing effects on the body. At the eastern tip[11], the people wore the skins of land animals and resembled hunters more than fishers and sealers. Generally, however, the Fuegians are boatmen.

Not so their nearest kinsmen. They are all horsemen; and in their more northern localities the most formidable ones in the world—Patagonians[105] of considerable but exaggerated stature, Pampa Indians between Buenos Ayres and the southern Andes, and, higher up, the Chaco Indians of the water-system of the river Plata. To these must be added two other families—one on the Pacific and one on the Atlantic—the Araucanians of Chili, and the Charruas of the lower La Plata.

Not so with their closest relatives. They are all horseback riders, and in their northern regions, they are some of the most formidable in the world—Patagonians[105] of considerable but exaggerated height, Pampa Indians between Buenos Aires and the southern Andes, and further north, the Chaco Indians from the river Plata watershed. Two more groups should be included—one on the Pacific and one on the Atlantic—the Araucanians of Chile and the Charruas of the lower La Plata.

Except in the impracticable heights of the Andes of Chili, and, as suggested above, in the island of Tierra del Fuego, the same equestrian habits characterize all these populations; and, one and all, the same indomitable and savage independence. Of the Chaco Indians, the Tonocote are partially settled, and imperfectly Christianized; but the Abiponians—very Centaurs in their passionate equestrianism—the Mbocobis, the Mataguayos, and others, are the dread of the Spaniards at the present moment. The resistance of the Araucanians of Chili has given an epic[12] to the country of their conquerors.

Except in the challenging heights of the Andes in Chile, and as mentioned earlier, in the island of Tierra del Fuego, the same horseback riding habits define all these groups; and across the board, they share the same fierce and untamed independence. Among the Chaco Indians, the Tonocote have settled to some extent and have been partially converted to Christianity; however, the Abiponians—truly like Centaurs in their intense horsemanship—the Mbocobis, the Mataguayos, and others, inspire fear in the Spaniards right now. The resistance of the Araucanians in Chile has created an epic[12] for the land of their conquerors.

Of the Charruas every man was a warrior; self-relying, strong, and cruel; with his hand against the Spaniard, and with his hand against the other aborigines. Many of these they exterminated, and, too proud to enter into confederations, always fought single-handed. In 1831, the President of Uraguay ordered their total destruction, and they[106] were cut down, root and branch; a few survivors only remaining.

Of the Charruas, every man was a warrior; independent, tough, and ruthless; always opposing the Spaniards and the other indigenous people. They wiped out many of these groups, and too proud to form alliances, they always fought alone. In 1831, the President of Uruguay ordered their complete destruction, and they[106] were eliminated entirely; only a few survived.

Minus the Fuegians, this division is pre-eminently natural; yet the Fuegians cannot be disconnected from it. As a proof of the physical differences being small, I will add the description of a naturalist—D’Orbigny—who separates them. They evidently lie within a small compass.

Minus the Fuegians, this division is distinctly natural; however, the Fuegians can't be excluded from it. To demonstrate that the physical differences are minimal, I will include the description of a naturalist—D'Orbigny—who categorizes them. They clearly fall within a narrow range.

  • a. Araucanian branch of the Ando-Peruvians.—Colour light olive; form massive; trunk somewhat disproportionately long; face nearly circular; nose short and flat; lips thin; physiognomy sombre, cold.
  • b. Pampa branch of the Pampa Indians.—Colour deep olive-brown, or maroon; form Herculean; forehead vaulted; face large, flat, oblong; nose short; nostrils large; mouth wide; lips large; eyes horizontal; physiognomy cold, often savage.

D’Orbigny is a writer by no means inclined to undervalue differences. Nevertheless he places the Peruvians and the Araucanians in the same primary division. This shows that, if other characters connect them, there is nothing very conclusive in the way of physiognomy against their relationship. I think that certain other characters do connect them—language most especially. At the same time, there is no denying important contrasts.[107] The civilization of Peru has no analogue beyond the Tropics; and if we are to consider this as a phænomenon per se, as the result of an instinct as different from those of the Charrua as the architectural impulses of the bee and the hornet, broad and trenchant must be our lines of demarcation. Yet no such lines can be drawn. Undoubted members of the Quichua stock of the Inca Peruvians (architects and conquerors, as that particular branch was) are but ordinary Indians—like the Aymaras. Nay, the modern Peruvians when contrasted with their ancestors are in the same category. The present occupants of the parts about Titicaca and Tiaguanaco wonder at the ruins around them, and confess their inability to rival them just as a modern Greek thinks of the Phidian Jupiter and despairs. Again, the gap is accounted for—since most of those intervening populations which may have exhibited transitional characters have become either extinct, or denationalized. Between the Peruvians and Araucanians, the Atacamas and Changos are the only remaining populations—under 10,000 in number, and but little known.

D'Orbigny is a writer who certainly doesn't underestimate differences. However, he categorizes the Peruvians and the Araucanians in the same main group. This indicates that, while other traits connect them, there isn't anything very definitive in terms of facial features against their connection. I believe that there are indeed certain traits that do link them—especially language. At the same time, it’s undeniable that there are significant differences. [107] The civilization of Peru has no equivalent outside of the Tropics; and if we consider this as a phenomenon per se, resulting from an instinct as distinct from that of the Charrua as the architectural behaviors of the bee and the hornet, our distinctions must be clear and cutting. Yet no such clear lines can be drawn. Undoubtedly, members of the Quichua lineage of the Inca Peruvians (the architects and conquerors of that specific group) are just ordinary Indians—similar to the Aymaras. Furthermore, modern Peruvians, when compared to their ancestors, fall into the same category. Today's residents around Titicaca and Tiaguanaco marvel at the ruins nearby and admit their inability to match them, just as a modern Greek reflects on the Phidian Jupiter and feels despair. Moreover, the gap can be explained—since most of the intervening populations that might have shown transitional traits have either disappeared or lost their national identity. Between the Peruvians and Araucanians, the Atacamas and Changos are the only remaining populations—below 10,000 in number, and not well-known.

Nevertheless, an unequivocally allied population of the Peruvian stock takes us from 28° S. lat. to the Equator. Its unity within itself is undoubted; and its contrast with the next nearest[108] families is no greater than the displacements which have taken place around, and our own ignorance in respect to parts in contact with it.

Nevertheless, a clearly united population of Peruvian origin stretches from 28° S latitude to the Equator. Its internal unity is undeniable; and its difference from the closest[108] families is no greater than the changes that have occurred around it and our own lack of knowledge regarding the areas that interact with it.

Of all the populations of the world, the Peruvian is the most vertical in its direction. Its line is due north and south; its breadth but narrow. The Pacific is at one side, and the Andes at the other. One is well-nigh as definite a limit as the other. When we cross the Cordilleras the Peruvian type has changed.

Of all the populations in the world, the Peruvian is the most vertical in its layout. Its stretch runs directly north and south, while its width is quite narrow. The Pacific Ocean is on one side, and the Andes Mountains are on the other. Each serves as a nearly equal boundary. When we cross the mountains, the Peruvian type has transformed.

The Peruvians lie between the Tropics. They cross the Equator. One of their Republics—Ecuador—even takes its name from its meridian. But they are also mountaineers; and, though their sun is that of Africa, their soil is that of the Himalaya. Hence, their locality presents a conflict, balance, or antagonism of climatologic influences; and the degrees of altitude are opposed to those of latitude.

The Peruvians are located between the Tropics and cross the Equator. One of their countries—Ecuador—even gets its name from its longitude. However, they are also mountaineers; and while their sun is like that of Africa, their soil resembles that of the Himalayas. As a result, their location exhibits a conflict, balance, or clash of climatic influences, and the elevation levels contrast with the latitudinal ones.

Again, their line of migration is at a right angle with their Equatorial parallel—that is, if we assume them to have come from North America. The bearing of this is as follows:—The town of Quito is about as far from Mexico due north, as it is from French Guiana due west. Now if we suppose the line of migration to have reached Peru from the latter country, the great-great-ancestors of the Peruvians would be people as[109] inter-tropical as themselves, and the influences of climate would coincide with the influences of descent; whereas if it were North America from which they originated, their ancestors of a corresponding generation would represent the effect of a climate twenty-five degrees further north—these, in their turn, being descended from the occupants of the temperate, and they from those of the frigid zone. The full import of the relation of the lines of migration—real or hypothetical—to the degrees of latitude has yet to be duly appreciated. To say that the latter go for nothing because the inter-tropical Indian of South America is not as black as the negro, is to compare things that resemble each other in one particular only.

Again, their migration path is at a right angle to their Equatorial parallel—that is, if we assume they came from North America. Here's why that matters: The town of Quito is about as far from Mexico to the north as it is from French Guiana to the west. Now, if we assume the migration line came to Peru from the latter country, the ancestors of the Peruvians would be people as[109] inter-tropical as they are, and the effects of the climate would match with their ancestry. However, if they originated from North America, their ancestors from a similar generation would have experienced a climate twenty-five degrees further north—those ancestors, in turn, would be descended from people in the temperate zone, and they from those in the frigid zone. The full significance of the connection between migration paths—whether real or hypothetical—and latitude degrees still needs to be fully understood. To argue that latitude doesn’t matter just because the inter-tropical Indian of South America isn’t as dark as the African is to compare things that are only similar in one way.

It is Peru where the ancient sepulchral remains have complicated ethnology. The skulls from ancient burial-places are preternaturally flattened. Consider this natural; and you have a fair reason for the recognition of a fresh species of the genus Homo. But is it legitimate to do so? I think not. That the practice of flattening the head of infants was a custom once as rife and common in Peru as it is in many other parts of both North and South America at the present day, is well known. Then why not account for the ancient flattening thus? I hold that the writers who[110] hesitate to do this should undertake the difficult task of proving a negative: otherwise they multiply causes unnecessarily.

It’s in Peru where the ancient burial remains have made ethnology complicated. The skulls from old burial sites are unusually flattened. If you take this as something natural, you could reasonably argue for acknowledging a new species of the genus Homo. But is that really justified? I don’t think so. It’s well-known that the practice of flattening infants’ heads was a custom that was once widespread in Peru, just as it is in many other areas of North and South America today. So why not explain the ancient flattening this way? I believe that the writers who[110] hesitate to do this should take on the challenging job of proving a negative: otherwise, they’re just creating unnecessary complications.

Two stocks of vast magnitude take up so large a proportion of South America, that though they are not in immediate geographical contact with the Peruvians, they require to be mentioned next in order here. They are mentioned now in order to enable us to treat of other and smaller families. These two great stocks are the Guarani and the Carib; whilst the classes immediately under notice are—

Two large groups occupy such a significant portion of South America that, even though they aren't directly adjacent to the Peruvians, they need to be addressed here. We're discussing them now to help us talk about other and smaller families. These two major groups are the Guarani and the Carib; while the categories we're focusing on are—

The remaining South Americans who are neither Carib nor Guarani.—This division is artificial; being based upon a negative character; and it is geographical rather than ethnological. The first branch of it is that which D’Orbigny calls Antisian, and which he connects at once with the Peruvians Proper; both being members of that primary division to which he referred the Araucanians—the Araucanians being the third branch of the Ando-Peruvians; the two others being the—

The other South Americans who aren't Carib or Guarani.—This distinction is artificial; it’s based on a lack of specific characteristics and is more about geography than ethnicity. The first group is what D'Orbigny refers to as Antisian, which he immediately links to the Peruvians Proper; both belong to the main category he associated with the Araucanians—the Araucanians being the third group of the Ando-Peruvians; the other two groups are the—

  • a. Peruvian branch.—Colour deep olive-brown; form massive; trunk long in proportion to the limbs; forehead retreating; nose aquiline; mouth large; physiognomy sombre:—Aymara and Quichua Peruvians.
  • b. Antisian branch.—Colour varying from a[111] deep olive to nearly white; form not massive; forehead not retreating; physiognomy lively, mild:—Yuracarés, Mocéténès, Tacanas, Maropas, and Apolistas.

The Yuracarés, Mocéténès, Tacanas, Maropas, and Apolistas, are Antisien; and their locality is the eastern slopes of the Andes[13], between 15° and 18° S. lat. Here they dwell in a thickly wooded country, full of mountain streams, and their corresponding valleys. One portion of them at least is so much lighter-skinned than the Peruvians, as to have taken its name from its colour—Yurak-kare = white man.

The Yuracarés, Mocéténès, Tacanas, Maropas, and Apolistas are Antisien; they are located on the eastern slopes of the Andes[13], between 15° and 18° S. latitude. They live in a densely wooded area filled with mountain streams and their respective valleys. At least a portion of them is significantly lighter-skinned than the Peruvians, which is why they have a name derived from their color—Yurak-kare = white man.

To the west of the Antisians lie the Indians of the Missions of Chiquito and Moxos, so called because they have been settled and Christianized. The physical characters of these also are D’Orbigny’s. The division, however, he places in the same group with the Patagonians.

To the west of the Antisians are the Indians of the Missions of Chiquito and Moxos, named for having been settled and Christianized. Their physical characteristics also align with D'Orbigny’s. However, he categorizes them in the same group as the Patagonians.

  • a. Chiquito branch.—Colour light olive; form moderately robust; mouth moderate; lips thin; features delicate; physiognomy lively:—Indians of the Mission of Chiquitos.
  • b. Moxos branch.—Form robust; lips thickish; eyes not bridés; physiognomy mild:—Indians of the Mission of Moxos.

And now we are on the great water-system of[112] the Amazons; with the united effects of heat and moisture. They are not the same as in Africa. There are no negroes here. The skin is in some cases yellow rather than brown; in some it has a red tinge. The stature, too, is low; not like that of the negro, tall and bulky. It is evident that heat is not everything; and that it may have an inter-tropical amount of intensity without necessarily affecting the colour beyond a certain degree. As to differences between the physical conditions of Brazil and Guiana on one side, and those of the countries we have been considering on the other, they are important. The condition of both the soil and climate determines to agriculture. This gives us a contrast to the Pampa Indians; whilst, in respect to the Peruvians, there is no longer the Andes with its concomitants; no longer the variety of climate within the same latitude, the abundance of building materials, and the absence of rivers. Boatmen, cultivators, and foresters—i. e. hunters of the wood rather than of the open prairie—such are the families in question. Into groups of small classificational value they divide and subdivide indefinitely more than the few investigators have suggested; indeed, D’Orbigny throws them all into one class.

And now we find ourselves in the vast water system of[112] the Amazons, experiencing the combined effects of heat and humidity. These conditions are different from those in Africa. There are no Black people here. Some individuals have yellow skin instead of brown, while others have a reddish tint. The average height is also shorter, unlike the tall and robust physique of Black people. It's evident that heat isn’t the only factor, and it can have a tropical intensity without significantly changing skin color. The differences between the physical conditions of Brazil and Guiana, compared to the regions we've discussed, are significant. The state of the soil and climate directly impacts agriculture. This contrasts with the Pampa Indians; however, regarding the Peruvians, the Andes are no longer present, along with its related factors, the variety of climates we find at the same latitude, the abundance of building materials, and the lack of rivers. The people here are boatmen, farmers, and foresters—essentially hunters of the forest rather than of the open grasslands. They divide and subdivide into numerous small groups, far exceeding the few categories suggested by researchers; in fact, D'Orbigny classifies them all into one category.

The tribes of the Orinoco form the last section of Indians, which are neither Guarani nor Caribs;[113] and this brief notice of their existence clears the ground for the somewhat fuller account of the next two families.

The tribes of the Orinoco are the final group of Indigenous peoples who are neither Guarani nor Caribs;[113] and this short overview of their existence sets the stage for a more detailed description of the next two families.

The Guarani alone cover more land than all the other tribes between the Amazons, the Andes, and the La Plata put together: but it is not certain that their area is continuous. In the Bolivian province of Santa Cruz de la Sierra, and in contact with the Indians of the Missions and the Chaco, we find the Chiriguanos and Guarayos—and these are Guarani. Then as far north as the equator, and as far as the river Napo on the Peruvian frontier, we find the flat-head Omaguas, the fluviatile mariners (so to say) of the Amazons; and these are Guarani as well.

The Guarani alone take up more land than all the other tribes combined between the Amazon, the Andes, and the La Plata: however, it's uncertain if their territory is connected. In the Bolivian province of Santa Cruz de la Sierra, near the Indians of the Missions and the Chaco, we find the Chiriguanos and Guarayos—and these are Guarani too. Then, all the way north to the equator and the Napo River on the Peruvian border, we encounter the flat-head Omaguas, who are like the river navigators of the Amazon; and they are also Guarani.

The bulk, however, of the stock is Brazilian; indeed, Brazilian and Guarani have been sometimes used as synonyms. There are, however, other Guarani in Buenos Ayres; there are Guarani on the boundaries of Guiana; and there are Guarani at the foot of the Andes. But amidst the great sea of the Guarani populations, fragments of other families stand out like islands; and this makes it likely that the family in question has been aggressive and intrusive, has effected displacements, and has superseded a number of transitional varieties.

The majority of the stock is Brazilian; in fact, Brazilian and Guarani have sometimes been used interchangeably. However, there are other Guarani in Buenos Aires; there are Guarani on the borders of Guiana; and there are Guarani at the base of the Andes. But within the vast ocean of Guarani populations, fragments of other families stand out like islands; this suggests that the family in question has been aggressive and intrusive, causing displacements, and has replaced several transitional varieties.

The Caribs approach, without equalling, the Guarani, in the magnitude of their area. This[114] lies mostly in Guiana and Venezuela. The chief population of Trinidad is, that of the Antilles was, Carib. The Caribs, the Inca Peruvians, the Pampa horsemen, and the Fuegian boatmen represent the four extremes of the South American populations.

The Caribs come close, but don't quite match, the Guarani in terms of their area. This[114] is mainly found in Guiana and Venezuela. The main population of Trinidad is, and that of the Antilles was, Carib. The Caribs, the Inca Peruvians, the Pampa horsemen, and the Fuegian boatmen represent the four extremes of the South American populations.

In some of the Brazilian tribes, the oblique eye of the Chinese and Mongolians occurs.

In some Brazilian tribes, people have eyes that are similar in shape to those of the Chinese and Mongolians.

In order to show the extent to which a multiplicity of small families may not only exist, but exist in the neighbourhood of great ethnological areas, I will enumerate those tribes of the Missions, Brazil, Guiana, and Venezuela, for which vocabularies have been examined, and whereof the languages are believed, either from the comparison of specimens, or on the strength of direct evidence, to be mutually unintelligible; premising that differences are more likely to be exaggerated than undervalued, and that the number of tribes not known in respect to their languages is probably as great again as that of the known ones.

To illustrate how many small families can not only exist but also thrive near large ethnological regions, I will list the tribes from the Missions, Brazil, Guiana, and Venezuela, for which vocabularies have been analyzed. The languages of these tribes are thought to be mutually unintelligible, based on comparisons of samples or direct evidence. It is important to note that differences are likely to be overstated rather than underestimated, and the number of tribes whose languages are unknown is probably at least as high as that of those we do know.

A. Between the Andes, the Missions, and the 15′ and 17′ S. L. come the Yurakares; whose language is said to differ from that of the Mocéténès, Tacana, and Apolistas, as much as these differ amongst themselves.

A. Between the Andes, the Missions, and 15° and 17° S. L. are the Yurakares; their language is said to be as different from that of the Moceténès, Tacana, and Apolistas as these groups' languages are from each other.

B. In the Missions come—1. The Moxos. 2. The Movima. 3. The Cayuvava. 4. The[115] Sapiboconi—these belonging to Moxos. In Chiquitos are—1. The Covareca. 2. The Curuminaca. 3. The Curavi. 4. The Curucaneca. 5. The Corabeca. 6. The Samucu.

B. In the Missions come—1. The Moxos. 2. The Movima. 3. The Cayuvava. 4. The[115] Sapiboconi—these are part of the Moxos. In Chiquitos are—1. The Covareca. 2. The Curuminaca. 3. The Curavi. 4. The Curucaneca. 5. The Corabeca. 6. The Samucu.

C. In Brazil, the tribes, other than Guarani, of which I have seen vocabularies representing mutually unintelligible tongues, are—

C. In Brazil, the tribes, other than the Guarani, for which I have seen vocabularies that show they speak different, unintelligible languages, are—

  • 1. The Botocudo, fiercest of cannibals.
  • 2. The Goitaca, known to the Portuguese as Coroados or Tonsured.
  • 3. The Camacan with several dialects.
  • 4. The Kiriri and Sabuja.
  • 5. The Timbira.
  • 6. The Pareci, the predominant population of the Mata Grosso.
  • 7. The Mundrucu, on the southern bank of the Amazons between the rivers Mauhé and Tabajos.
  • 8. The Muru.
  • 9, 10, 11. The Yameo, Maina, and Chimano between the Madera and the Ucayale.
  • 12. The Coretu, the only one out of forty tribes known to us by a vocabulary, for the parts between the left bank of the Amazons and the right of the Rio Negro.

D. Of French, Spanish, and Dutch Guiana I know but little. Upon British Guiana a bright light has been thrown by the researches of Sir[116] R. Schomburgk. Here, besides numerous well-marked divisions of the Carib group, we have—

D. I know very little about French, Spanish, and Dutch Guiana. However, Sir[116] R. Schomburgk's research has shed a lot of light on British Guiana. Here, in addition to many clearly defined sections of the Carib group, we have—

  • 1. The Warows, arboreal boatmen—boatmen because they occupy the Delta of the Orinoco, and the low coast of Northern Guiana—and arboreal because the floods drive them up into the trees for a lodging. In physical form the Warows are like their neighbours; but their language has been reduced to no class, and their peculiar habits place them in strong contrast with most other South Americans. They are the Marshmen of a country which is at once a delta and a forest.
  • 2. The Taruma.
  • 3. The Wapisiana, with the Atúrai, Daúri, and Amaripas as extinct, or nearly extinct, sections of them—themselves only a population of four hundred.

E. Venezuela means the water-system of Orinoco, and here we have the mutually unintelligible tongues of—

E. Venezuela refers to the water system of the Orinoco, and here we find the languages that are completely unintelligible to each other—

  • 1. The Salivi, of which the Aturi are a division—the Aturi known from Humboldt’s description of their great sepulchral cavern on the cataracts of the Orinoco; where more than six hundred bodies were preserved in woven bags or baskets—some mummies, some skeletons, some varnished with odoriferous resins, some painted with arnotto, some bleached white, some naked.[117] This custom re-appears in parts of Guiana. The Salivi have undergone great displacement; since there is good reason for believing that their language was once spoken in Trinidad.
  • 2. The Maypures.
  • 3. The Achagua.
  • 4. The Yarura, to which the Betoi is allied; and possibly—

The Ottomaka.—These are the dirt-eaters. They fill their stomach with an unctuous clay, found in their country; and that, whether food of a better sort be abundant or deficient.

The Ottomaka.—These are the dirt-eaters. They fill their stomachs with a rich clay found in their land, regardless of whether better food is plentiful or scarce.

There is plenty of difference here; still where there is difference in some points there is so often agreement in others that no very decided difficulties are currently recognized as lying against the doctrine of the South Americans being specifically connected. When such occur, they are generally inferences from either the superior civilization of the ancient Peruvians or from the peculiarity of their skulls. The latter has been considered. The former seems to be nothing different in kind from that of several other American families—the Muysca of New Grenada, the Mexican, and the Maya further northwards. But this may prove too much; since it may merely be a reason for isolating the Mexicans, &c. Be it so. The question can stand over for the present.

There are quite a few differences here; however, where there are differences in some areas, there is often agreement in others, so no significant challenges are really seen as opposing the idea that South Americans are specifically connected. When challenges do arise, they usually come from either the advanced civilization of the ancient Peruvians or the unique shape of their skulls. The latter has been examined. The former seems to be similar to that of several other American groups—the Muysca of New Grenada, the Mexicans, and the Maya further north. But this could be taking it too far; it might just be a reason to separate the Mexicans, etc. That's fine. The question can be put on hold for now.

Something has now been seen of two classes of phænomena which will appear and re-appear in the sequel—viz. the great difference in the physical conditions of such areas as the Fuegian, the Pampa, the Peruvian, and the Warows, and the contrast between the geographical extension of such vast groups as the Guarani, and small families like the Wapisiana, the Yurakares, and more than twenty others.

Something has now been observed regarding two types of phenomena that will appear and reappear later on—namely, the significant differences in the physical conditions of regions like Fuegia, the Pampas, Peru, and the Warows, along with the contrast between the geographical spread of large groups such as the Guarani and smaller families like the Wapisiana, the Yurakares, and over twenty others.

There is a great gap between South and Central America: nor is it safe to say that the line of the Andes (or the Isthmus of Darien) gives the only line of migration. The islands that connect Florida and the Caraccas must be remembered also.

There is a significant gap between South and Central America: it’s also not accurate to claim that the Andes (or the Isthmus of Darien) is the only migration route. The islands linking Florida and Caracas need to be considered as well.

The natives of New Grenada are but imperfectly known. In Veragua a few small tribes have been described. In Costa Rica there are still Indians—but they speak, either wholly or generally, Spanish. The same is, probably, the case in Nicaragua. The Moskito Indians are dashed with both negro and white blood, and are Anglicized in respect to their civilization—such as it is. Of the West Indian Islanders none remain but the dark-coloured Caribs of St. Vincents. In Guatimala, Peruvianism re-appears; and architectural remains testify an industrial development—agriculture, and life in towns. The intertropical Andes have an Art of their own; essentially the[119] same in Mexico and Peru; seen to the best advantage in those two countries, yet by no means wanting in the intermediate districts; remarkable in many respects, but not more remarkable than the existence of three climates under one degree of latitude.

The indigenous people of New Grenada are not very well understood. In Veragua, a few small tribes have been documented. In Costa Rica, there are still Indigenous people, but they mostly or entirely speak Spanish. The same is likely true for Nicaragua. The Moskito Indians have both African and European ancestry, and their culture reflects that influence—whatever that may be. Among the West Indian Islanders, only the dark-skinned Caribs of St. Vincent remain. In Guatemala, there are signs of Peruvian influence, and architectural remnants indicate an advanced level of industrial development—agriculture and urban living. The intertropical Andes have their own unique art; essentially the same as seen in Mexico and Peru; most prominently displayed in those two countries, but definitely present in the areas in between; notable in many ways, but not more so than the fact that three different climates exist within just one degree of latitude.

Mexico, like Peru, has been isolated—and that on the same principle. Yet the Ægyptians of the New World cannot be shown to have exclusively belonged to any one branch of its population. In Guatimala and Yucatan—where the ruins are not inferior to those of the Astek[14] country—the language is the Maya, and it is as unreasonable to suppose that the Asteks built these, as to attribute the Astek ruins to Mayas. It is an illegitimate assumption to argue that, because certain buildings were contained within the empire of Montezuma, they were therefore Astek in origin or design. More than twenty other nations occupied that vast kingdom; and in most parts of it, where stone is abundant, we find architectural remains.

Mexico, like Peru, has been isolated—and that for similar reasons. However, the Egyptians of the New World can't be shown to have solely belonged to any one group within its population. In Guatemala and Yucatán—where the ruins are just as impressive as those in the Aztec country—people speak Maya. It's just as unreasonable to think that the Aztecs built these as it is to say that the Aztec ruins were made by the Mayans. It's a flawed assumption to claim that just because certain buildings were part of Montezuma’s empire, they must be Aztec in origin or design. Over twenty other nations inhabited that vast kingdom; and in most areas, where stone is abundant, we find architectural remains.

Architecture, cities, and the consolidation of empire which they determine, keep along the line of the Andes. They also stand in an evident ratio[120] to the agricultural conditions of the soil and climate. The Chaco and Pampa habits which stood so much in contrast with the industrial civilization of Peru, and so coincided with the open prairie character of the country, re-appear in Texas. They increase in the great valley of the Mississippi. Nevertheless the Indians of Florida, the Carolinas, Tennessee, Kentucky, Virginia, and the old forests were partially agricultural. They were also capable of political consolidation. Powhattan, in Virginia, ruled over kings and sub-kings even as Montezuma did. Picture-writing—so-called—of which much has been said as a Mexican characteristic, is being found every day to be commoner and commoner amongst the Indians of the United States and Canada.

Architecture, cities, and the expansion of empires that they influence follow along the Andes. They also clearly relate to the agricultural conditions of the land and climate. The traditions of the Chaco and Pampa, which contrasted sharply with Peru's industrial civilization and matched the open prairie nature of the region, re-emerge in Texas. They become more prominent in the vast Mississippi Valley. However, the Native Americans in Florida, the Carolinas, Tennessee, Kentucky, Virginia, and the old forests practiced some agriculture. They were also capable of political organization. Powhatan in Virginia ruled over kings and sub-kings, just like Montezuma. The so-called picture-writing, which has often been considered a unique Mexican trait, is increasingly being found to be more common among Native Americans in the United States and Canada.

In an alluvial soil the barrow replaces the pyramid. The vast sepulchral mounds of the Valley of the Mississippi are the subjects of one of the valuable works[15] of the present time.

In alluvial soil, the barrow takes the place of the pyramid. The large burial mounds in the Mississippi Valley are the focus of one of the valuable works[15] of our time.

The Natchez, known to the novelist from the romance of Chateaubriand, are known to the ethnologist as pre-eminent amongst the Indians of the Mississippi for their Mexican characteristics. They flattened the head, worshiped the sun, kept up an undying fire, recognized a system of caste, and sacrificed human victims. Yet to identify them[121] with the Asteks, to assume even any extraordinary intercourse, would be unsafe. Their traditions, indeed, suggest the idea of a migration; but their language contradicts their traditions. They are simply what the other natives of Florida were. I see in the accounts of the early Appalachians little but Mexicans and Peruvians minus their metals, and gems, and mountains.

The Natchez, famous to the novelist from Chateaubriand's romance, are recognized by ethnologists as standout among the Indians of the Mississippi for their Mexican traits. They practiced head flattening, worshiped the sun, maintained a perpetual fire, had a caste system, and performed human sacrifices. However, linking them[121] to the Aztecs or assuming any significant interaction would be risky. Their traditions hint at migration, but their language contradicts these traditions. They are simply what the other natives of Florida were. In the accounts of the early Appalachians, I see little more than Mexicans and Peruvians minus their metals, gems, and mountains.

The other generalities of North America are those of Brazil, Peru, and Patagonia repeated. The Algonkins have an area like the Guarani, their coast-line only extending from Labrador to Cape Hatteras. The Iroquois of New York and the Carolinas—a broken and discontinuous population—indicate encroachment and displacement; they once, however, covered perhaps as much space as the Caribs. The Sioux represent the Chaco and Pampa tribes. Their country is a hunting-ground, with its relations to the northern Tropic and the Arctic Circle, precisely those of the Chaco and Pampas to the Southern and Antarctic.

The other general features of North America are similar to those of Brazil, Peru, and Patagonia. The Algonquin people have an area comparable to the Guarani, their coastline stretching from Labrador to Cape Hatteras. The Iroquois in New York and the Carolinas—a fragmented and scattered population—show signs of encroachment and displacement; however, they used to occupy about as much land as the Caribs. The Sioux represent the tribes of the Chaco and Pampa. Their territory is a hunting ground, related to the northern Tropic and the Arctic Circle, just as the Chaco and Pampas are related to the Southern and Antarctic regions.

The western side of the Rocky Mountains is more Mexican than the eastern; just as Chili is more Peruvian than Brazil.

The western side of the Rocky Mountains is more like Mexico than the eastern side; just like Chile is more similar to Peru than to Brazil.

I believe that if the Pacific coast of America had been the one first discovered and fullest described, so that Russian America, New Caledonia, Queen Charlotte’s Archipelago, and Nutka Sound,[122] had been as well known as we know Canada and New Brunswick, there would never have been any doubts or difficulties as to the origin of the so-called Red Indians of the New World; and no one would ever have speculated about Africans finding their way to Brazil, or Polynesians to California. The common-sense primâ facie view would have been admitted at once, instead of being partially refined on and partially abandoned. North-eastern Asia would have passed for the fatherland to North-western America, and instead of Chinese and Japanese characteristics creating wonder when discovered in Mexico and Peru, the only wonder would have been in the rarity of the occurrence. But geographical discovery came from another quarter, and as it was the Indians of the Atlantic whose history first served as food for speculation, the most natural view of the origin of the American population was the last to be adopted—perhaps it has still to be recognized.

I believe that if the Pacific coast of America had been the first to be discovered and described in detail, so that places like Russian America, New Caledonia, Queen Charlotte’s Archipelago, and Nutka Sound,[122] were as well-known as Canada and New Brunswick, there would never have been any doubts or issues about the origin of the so-called Red Indians of the New World. No one would have speculated about Africans reaching Brazil or Polynesians arriving in California. The common-sense primâ facie view would have been accepted immediately, rather than being partially refined and partially discarded. North-eastern Asia would have been seen as the homeland of North-western America, and instead of being amazed by the Chinese and Japanese traits found in Mexico and Peru, the only surprise would have been how rare they were. But geographical discovery came from a different direction, and since it was the Indians of the Atlantic whose history first sparked speculation, the most straightforward view of the origin of the American population was the last to be accepted—perhaps it still hasn’t been fully acknowledged.

The reason for all this lies in the following fact. The Eskimo, who form the only family common to the Old and the New World, stand in a remarkable contrast to the unequivocal and admitted American aborigines of Labrador, Newfoundland, Canada, the New England States, New York, and the other well-known Indians in general.[123] Size, manners, physical conformation, and language, all help to separate the two stocks. But this contrast extends only to the parts east of the Rocky Mountains. On the west of them there is no such abruptness, no such definitude, no such trenchant lines of demarcation. The Athabascan dialects of New Caledonia and Russian America are notably interspersed with Eskimo words, and vice versâ. So is the Kolúch tongue of the parts about New Archangel. As for a remarkable dialect called the Ugalents (or Ugyalyackhmutsi) spoken by a few families about Mount St. Elias, it is truly transitional in character. Besides this, what applies to the languages applies to the other characteristics as well.

The reason for all this comes down to this fact: the Eskimos, who are the only group shared between the Old and New Worlds, stand in stark contrast to the clear and recognized American natives of Labrador, Newfoundland, Canada, the New England States, New York, and other well-known Native American tribes in general.[123] Size, customs, physical features, and language all contribute to distinguishing the two groups. However, this contrast only applies to the areas east of the Rocky Mountains. To the west of them, there isn't such a sharp difference, no clear-cut divisions. The Athabascan dialects of New Caledonia and Russian America are notably mixed with Eskimo words, and vice versa. The Kolúch language spoken around New Archangel follows this trend. As for a distinctive dialect known as Ugalents (or Ugyalyackhmutsi), spoken by a few families near Mount St. Elias, it is truly transitional in nature. Moreover, what holds true for the languages also applies to other characteristics.

The lines of separation between the Eskimo and the non-Eskimo Americans are as faint on the Pacific, as they are strong on the Atlantic side of the continent.

The differences between the Eskimo and non-Eskimo Americans are just as subtle on the Pacific side as they are pronounced on the Atlantic side of the continent.

What accounts for this? The phænomenon is by no means rare. The Laplander, strongly contrasted with the Norwegian on the west, graduates into the Finlander on the east. The relation of the Hottentot to the Kaffre has been already noticed. So has the hypothesis that explains it. One stock has encroached upon another, and the transitional forms have been displaced. In the particular case before us, the encroaching[124] tribes of the Algonkin class have pressed upon the Eskimo from the south; and just as the present Norwegians and Swedes now occupy the country of a family which was originally akin to the Laps of Lapland (but with more southern characters), the Micmacs and other Red Men have superseded the southerly and transitional Eskimo. Meanwhile, in North-western America no such displacement has taken place. The families still stand in situ; and the phænomena of transition have escaped obliteration.

What explains this? The phenomenon is not rare at all. The Laplander, who is very different from the Norwegian to the west, transitions into the Finn to the east. The relation between the Hottentot and the Kaffre has already been mentioned. So has the theory that explains it. One group has encroached on another, and the transitional forms have been pushed out. In the case we are looking at, the encroaching tribes of the Algonkin class have moved in on the Eskimo from the south; and just as the current Norwegians and Swedes now occupy the land of a group that was originally related to the Laps of Lapland (but with more southern traits), the Micmacs and other Native Americans have replaced the southern and transitional Eskimo. Meanwhile, in North-western America, no such displacement has happened. The groups still remain in place; and the phenomena of transition have not been erased.

Just as the Eskimo graduate in the American Indian, so do they pass into the populations of North-eastern Asia—language being the instrument which the present writer has more especially employed in their affiliation. From the Peninsula of Aliaska to the Aleutian chain of islands, and from the Aleutian chain to Kamskatka is the probable course of the migration from Asia to America—traced backwards, i.e. from the goal to the starting-point, from the circumference to the centre.

Just as the Eskimo graduate in American Indian culture, they also integrate into the populations of Northeastern Asia—language being the tool that I have particularly used for their connection. The likely path of migration from Asia to America runs from the Alaska Peninsula to the Aleutian Islands, and from the Aleutian Islands to Kamchatka—tracing backwards, i.e. from the end point to the beginning, from the outside to the center.

Then come two conflicting lines. The Aleutians may have been either Kamskadales or Curile Islanders. In either language there is a sufficiency of vocables to justify either notion. But this is a mere point of minute ethnology when compared with the broader one which has just preceded it.[125] The Japanese and Corean populations are so truly of the same class with the Curile islanders, and the Koriaks to the north of the sea of the Okhotsk are so truly Kamskadale, that we may now consider ourselves as having approached our conventional centre so closely as to be at liberty to leave the parts in question for the consideration of another portion of the circumference—another extreme point of divergence.

Then there are two conflicting ideas. The Aleutians could have been either Kamskadales or Curile Islanders. In either language, there are enough words to support both ideas. But this is just a minor detail of ethnology compared to the broader point that has just been made.[125] The Japanese and Korean populations are really quite similar to the Curile Islanders, and the Koriaks north of the Sea of Okhotsk closely resemble the Kamskadales, so we can now consider ourselves to have reached our conventional center closely enough that we can set aside the areas in question to look at another part of the circumference—another extreme point of divergence.

II. From Van Diemen’s Land to the South-Eastern parts of Asia.—The aborigines of Van Diemen’s Land, conveniently called Tasmanians, have a fair claim, when considered by themselves, to be looked upon as members of a separate species. The Australians are on a level low enough to satisfy the most exaggerated painters of a state of nature; but the Tasmanians are, apparently, lower still. Of this family but a few families remain—occupants of Flinders’ Island, whither they have been removed by the Van Diemen’s Land Government. And here they decrease; but whether from want of room or from intermarriage is doubtful. The effects of neither have been fairly investigated. From the Australians they differ in the texture of their hair—the leading diagnostic character. The Tasmanian is shock-headed, with curled, frizzy, matted and greased locks. None of their dialects are intelligible to any Australian, and the commercial intercourse[126] between the two islands seems to have been little or none. Short specimens of four mutually unintelligible dialects are all that I have had the opportunity of comparing. They belong to the same class with those of Australia, New Guinea, and the Papua islands; and this is all that can safely be said about them.

II. From Van Diemen’s Land to the South-Eastern parts of Asia.—The aboriginal people of Van Diemen’s Land, commonly known as Tasmanians, have a reasonable basis to be regarded as a distinct group. The Australians exist at a level that could meet the most extreme depictions of a state of nature; however, the Tasmanians seem to be even less advanced. Only a few families from this group remain—residents of Flinders’ Island, where they have been relocated by the government of Van Diemen’s Land. Their numbers are dwindling; it's uncertain whether that's due to lack of space or intermarriage. The impacts of either cause haven’t been thoroughly examined. They differ from the Australians in their hair texture—the most notable distinguishing feature. Tasmanians have wild, curly, frizzy, tangled, and oiled hair. None of their dialects can be understood by any Australians, and there appears to have been little to no trade between the two islands. I've only had the chance to compare short examples of four dialects that are unintelligible to each other. These dialects are in the same category as those from Australia, New Guinea, and the Papua islands; that’s about all that can be confidently stated regarding them.

It is an open question whether the Tasmanians reached Van Diemen’s Land from South Australia, from Timor, or from New Caledonia—the line of migration having, in this latter case, wound round Australia, instead of stretching across it. Certain points of resemblance between the New Caledonian and Tasmanian dialects suggest this refinement upon the primâ facie doctrine of an Australian origin; and the texture of the hair, as far as it proves anything, goes the same way.

It’s still unclear whether the Tasmanians came to Van Diemen’s Land from South Australia, Timor, or New Caledonia—the migration route, in this last scenario, would have circled around Australia rather than crossing it directly. Some similarities between the New Caledonian and Tasmanian dialects indicate this possibility, adding nuance to the basic idea of an Australian origin. Additionally, the hair texture seems to support this view as well.

Australia is radically and fundamentally the occupancy of a single stock; the greatest sign of difference between its numerous tribes being that of language. Now this is but a repetition of the philological phænomena of America. The blacker and ruder population of Timor represents the great-great ancestors of the Australians; and it was from Timor that Australia was, apparently, peopled. I feel but little doubt on the subject. Timor itself is connected with the Malayan peninsula by a line of dark-coloured, rude, and fragmentary populations, to be found in Ombay and[127] Floris at the present moment, and inferred to have existed in Java and Sumatra before the development of the peculiar and encroaching civilization of the Mahometan Malays.

Australia is fundamentally the home of a single group of people; the main difference among its various tribes is their languages. This is similar to the language patterns seen in America. The darker and more primitive population of Timor represents the ancient ancestors of the Australians, and it seems that Australia was populated from Timor. I have little doubt about this. Timor is connected to the Malay Peninsula by a series of dark-skinned, primitive, and scattered populations found in Ombay and[127] Floris today, and it's believed they existed in Java and Sumatra before the rise of the distinctive and expanding civilization of the Muslim Malays.

It is in the Malayan peninsula that another line of migration terminates. From New Caledonia to New Guinea a long line of islands—Tanna, Mallicollo, Solomon’s Isles, &c.—is occupied by a dark-skinned population of rude Papuas, with Tasmanian rather than Australian hair, i.e. with hair which is frizzy, crisp, curled, or mop-headed, rather than straight, lank, or only wavy. This comes from New Guinea; New Guinea itself comes from the Eastern Moluccas; i.e. from their darker populations. These are of the same origin with those of Timor; though the lines of migration are remarkably distinct. One is from the Moluccas to New Caledonia viâ New Guinea; the other is viâ Timor to Australia.

It is in the Malay Peninsula that another migration path ends. From New Caledonia to New Guinea, a long chain of islands—Tanna, Mallicollo, Solomon Islands, etc.—is inhabited by a dark-skinned population of primitive Papuans, with hair that resembles Tasmanian more than Australian hair, meaning their hair is frizzy, crisp, curled, or looks like a mop, rather than straight, lank, or just wavy. This originates from New Guinea; New Guinea itself comes from the Eastern Moluccas; in other words, from their darker populations. These groups share the same origins as those in Timor, although the migration routes are notably different. One path goes from the Moluccas to New Caledonia via New Guinea; the other goes via Timor to Australia.

Both these migrations were early; earlier than the occupancy of Polynesia. The previous occupancy of Australia and New Guinea proves this; and the greater differences between the different sections of the two populations do the same.

Both of these migrations happened early; earlier than the settlement of Polynesia. The earlier occupation of Australia and New Guinea supports this, and the greater differences among the various parts of the two populations confirm it as well.

III. From Easter Island to the South-Eastern parts of Asia.—The northern, southern, and eastern extremities of Polynesia are the Sandwich Islands, New Zealand, and Easter Island respectively.[128] These took their occupants from different islands of the great group to which they belong; of which the Navigators’ Islands were, probably, the first to be peopled. The Radack, Ralik, Caroline, and Pelew groups connect this group with either the Philippines or the Moluccas; and when we reach these, we arrive at the point where the Papuan and Polynesian lines diverge. Just as the Papuan line overlapped or wound round Australia, so do the Micronesians and Polynesians form a circuit round the whole Papuan area.

III. From Easter Island to the Southeastern Parts of Asia.—The northern, southern, and eastern ends of Polynesia are the Sandwich Islands, New Zealand, and Easter Island, respectively.[128] These islands were settled by people from different islands in the larger group they belong to; the Navigators' Islands were likely the first to be inhabited. The Radack, Ralik, Caroline, and Pelew groups link this island group with either the Philippines or the Moluccas, and when we reach these, we arrive at the point where the Papuan and Polynesian paths split. Just as the Papuan path wrapped around Australia, the Micronesians and Polynesians form a circuit around the entire Papuan region.

As the languages, both of Polynesia and Micronesia, differ from each other far less than those of New Guinea, the Papuan Islands, and Australia, the separation from the parent stock is later. It is, most probably, through the Philippines that this third line converges towards the original and continental source of all three. This is the south-eastern portion of the Asiatic Continent, or the Indo-Chinese Peninsula.

As the languages of Polynesia and Micronesia are much more similar to each other than those of New Guinea, the Papuan Islands, and Australia, their separation from the original source happened later. Most likely, it is through the Philippines that this third lineage connects back to the original continental source of all three. This is the southeastern part of the Asian continent, or the Indo-Chinese Peninsula.

The Malay of the Malayan Peninsula is an inflected tongue as opposed to the Siamese of Siam, which belongs to the same class as the Chinese, and is monosyllabic. This gives us a convenient point to stop at.

The Malay language of the Malayan Peninsula is an inflected language, unlike Siamese from Siam, which is similar to Chinese and is monosyllabic. This provides us with a good stopping point.

In like manner the Corean and Japanese tongues, with which we broke off the American line of migration, were polysyllabic; though the Chinese,[129] with which they came in geographical contact, was monosyllabic.

In a similar way, the Korean and Japanese languages, which we separated from the American migration line, were polysyllabic; while Chinese, [129] which they encountered geographically, was monosyllabic.

The most remarkable fact connected with the Oceanic stock is the presence of a certain number of Malay and Polynesian words in the language of an island so distant as Madagascar; an island not only distant from the Malayan Peninsula, but near to the Mozambique coast of Africa—an ethnological area widely different from the Malay.

The most striking fact related to the Oceanic stock is the presence of several Malay and Polynesian words in the language of an island as far away as Madagascar; an island that is not only distant from the Malayan Peninsula but also near to the Mozambique coast of Africa—an ethnological area that is very different from the Malay.

Whatever may be the inference from this fact—and it is one upon which many very conflicting opinions have been founded—its reality is undoubted. It is admitted by Mr. Crawfurd, the writer above all others who is indisposed to admit the Oceanic origin of the Malagasi, and it is accounted for as follows:—“A navigation of 3000 miles of open sea lies between them[16], and a strong trade-wind prevails in the greater part of it. A voyage from the Indian Islands to Madagascar is possible, even in the rude state of Malayan navigation; but return would be wholly impossible. Commerce, conquests, or colonization, are, consequently, utterly out of the question, as means of conveying any portion of the Malayan language to Madagascar. There remains, then, but one way in which this could have taken place—the fortuitous arrival on the shores of Madagascar of[130] tempest-driven Malayan praus. The south-east monsoon, which is but a continuation of the south-east trade-wind, prevails from the tenth degree of south latitude to the equator, its greatest force being felt in the Java Sea, and its influence embracing the western half of the island of Sumatra. This wind blows from April to October, and an easterly gale during this period might drive a vessel off the shores of Sumatra or Java, so as to make it impossible to regain them. In such a situation she would have no resource but putting before the wind, and making for the first land that chance might direct her to; and that first land would be Madagascar. With a fair wind and a stiff breeze, which she would be sure of, she might reach that island, without difficulty, in a month. * * * The occasional arrival in Madagascar of a shipwrecked prau might not, indeed, be sufficient to account for even the small portion of Malayan found in the Malagasi; but it is offering no violence to the manners or history of the Malay people, to imagine the probability of a piratical fleet, or a fleet carrying one of those migrations of which there are examples on record, being tempest-driven, like a single prau. Such a fleet, well equipped, well stocked, and well manned, would not only be fitted for the long and perilous voyage, but reach Madagascar in a better[131] condition than a fishing or trading boat. It may seem, then, not an improbable supposition, that it was through one or more fortuitous adventures of this description, that the language of Madagascar received its influx of Malayan.”

Whatever the implications of this fact may be—and it has led to a lot of conflicting opinions—its reality is beyond doubt. Mr. Crawfurd, who is particularly skeptical about the Oceanic origins of the Malagasi, acknowledges it and explains as follows: “There is a 3,000-mile stretch of open sea between them[16], and a strong trade wind blows across most of it. Traveling from the Indian Islands to Madagascar is feasible, even with the basic navigation techniques of the Malays; however, making the return journey is completely impossible. Therefore, trade, conquests, or colonization cannot be considered viable methods for bringing any of the Malayan language to Madagascar. The only remaining possibility is the chance arrival of Malayan praus blown onto the shores of Madagascar by storms. The south-east monsoon, an extension of the south-east trade wind, occurs from the tenth degree of south latitude to the equator, where its strongest effects are seen in the Java Sea and it influences the western part of Sumatra. This wind blows from April to October, and an eastward gale during this time could push a vessel away from the shores of Sumatra or Java, making it impossible to get back. In that case, the ship would have no option but to head out to sea, aiming for any land that luck might lead them to; and that first land would be Madagascar. With a favorable wind and a strong breeze—both of which would be likely—they could reach the island within a month. ** The occasional arrival of a shipwrecked prau in Madagascar might not fully explain even the small amount of Malayan influence in the Malagasi, but it’s not unreasonable to think about the possibility of a pirate fleet or a fleet involved in one of the migrations documented could also be caught in a storm, like a single prau. Such a fleet, well-equipped, stocked, and crewed, would be better prepared for a long and dangerous journey and would likely arrive in Madagascar in a better state than a fishing or trading boat. It then seems plausible that one or more fortunate incidents of this nature allowed the Malayan language to influence Madagascar.”

As a supplement to the remarks of Mr. Crawfurd, I add the following account from Mr. M. Martin:—“Many instances have occurred of the slaves in Mauritius seizing on a canoe, or boat, at night-time, and with a calabash of water and a few manioc, or Cassada roots, pushing out to sea and endeavouring to reach across to Madagascar or Africa, through the pathless and stormy ocean. Of course they generally perish, but some succeed. We picked up a frail canoe within about a hundred miles of the coast of Africa; it contained five runaway slaves, one dying in the bottom of the canoe, and the others nearly exhausted. They had fled from a harsh French master at the Seychelles, committed themselves to the deep without compass or guide, with a small quantity of water and rice, and trusting to their fishing-lines for support. Steering by the stars, they had nearly reached the coast from which they had been kidnapped, when nature sank exhausted, and we were just in time to save four of their lives. So long as the wanderers in search of home were able to do so, the days were[132] numbered by notches on the side of the canoe, and twenty-one were thus marked when met with by our vessel.”

As an addition to Mr. Crawfurd's comments, I want to share the following account from Mr. M. Martin:—“There have been many cases of slaves in Mauritius taking a canoe or boat at night and, with a calabash of water and a few manioc or cassava roots, heading out to sea in hopes of reaching Madagascar or Africa across the vast and stormy ocean. Unfortunately, most of them usually perish, but some do make it. We found a fragile canoe about a hundred miles off the coast of Africa; it held five runaway slaves, one of whom was dying at the bottom of the canoe, while the others were almost completely exhausted. They had escaped from a cruel French master at the Seychelles, venturing into the ocean without a compass or guide, with just a small amount of water and rice, relying on their fishing lines for help. Navigating by the stars, they had almost arrived back to the coast from which they had been kidnapped when they collapsed from exhaustion. We arrived just in time to save four of their lives. As long as they could, these wanderers counting the days until they returned home kept track by making notches on the side of the canoe, and there were twenty-one marks when we encountered them.”

These extracts have been given for the sake of throwing light upon the most remarkable Oceanic migration known—for migration there must have been, even if it were so partial as Mr. Crawfurd makes it; migration which may make the present Malagasi Oceanic or not, according to the state in which they found the island at their arrival. If it were already peopled, the passage across the great Indian Ocean is just as remarkable as if it were, till then, untrodden by a human foot. The only additional wonder in this latter case would be the contrast between the Africans who missed an island so near, and the Malays who discovered one so distant.

These excerpts are provided to shed light on the most notable Oceanic migration known—there had to be migration, even if it's as limited as Mr. Crawfurd suggests; migration that could determine whether the current Malagasi are Oceanic or not, depending on the conditions they encountered when they arrived on the island. If it was already inhabited, crossing the vast Indian Ocean is just as impressive as if it had been untouched by humans up to that point. The only additional wonder in the latter scenario would be the contrast between the Africans who overlooked such a nearby island and the Malays who found one so far away.

Individually, I differ from Mr. Crawfurd in respect to the actual differences between the Malay and the Malagasi, with the hesitation and respect due to his known acquirements in the former of these languages; but I differ more and more unhesitatingly from him in the valuation of them as signs of ethnological separation; believing, not only that the two languages are essentially of the same family, but that the descent, blood, or pedigree of the Malagasi is as Oceanic as their language.

Individually, I have a different opinion from Mr. Crawfurd regarding the actual differences between the Malay and the Malagasi languages, with the caution and respect warranted by his well-known expertise in the former of these languages; however, I increasingly and confidently disagree with him in how we value these languages as indicators of ethnic separation. I believe that the two languages are fundamentally from the same family and that the heritage, ancestry, or lineage of the Malagasi is as Oceanic as their language.

IV. From the Cape of Good Hope to the South-western parts of Asia.—The Hottentots of the Cape have a better claim than any other members of the human kind to be considered as a separate species. Characteristics apparently differential occur on all sides. Morally, the Hottentots are rude; physically, they are undersized and weak. In all the points wherein the Eskimo differs from the Algonkin, or the Lap from the Fin, the Hottentot recedes from the Kaffre. Yet the Kaffre is his nearest neighbour. To the ordinary distinctions, steatomata on the nates and peculiarities in the reproductive organs have been superadded.

IV. From the Cape of Good Hope to the Southwestern Parts of Asia.—The Hottentots of the Cape have a stronger case than any other group of people to be seen as a separate species. There are noticeable differences all around. Morally, the Hottentots are considered crude; physically, they are small and frail. In every way that the Eskimo differs from the Algonkin or the Lap from the Fin, the Hottentot is distinct from the Kaffre. Yet the Kaffre is his closest neighbor. On top of the usual distinctions, there are unique features like fat deposits on the buttocks and specific traits in the reproductive system.

Nevertheless, a very scanty collation gives the following philological similarities; the Hottentot dialects[17] being taken on the one side and the other African languages[18] on the other. I leave it to the reader to pronounce upon the import of the table; adding only the decided expression of my own belief that the coincidences in question are too numerous to be accidental, too little onomatopœic[134] to be organic, and too widely as well as too irregularly distributed to be explained by the assumption of intercourse or intermixture.

Nevertheless, a very limited comparison shows the following linguistic similarities: the Hottentot dialects[17] on one side and other African languages[18] on the other. I leave it to the reader to decide the significance of the table, adding only my firm belief that the similarities in question are too numerous to be coincidental, too little onomatopoeic[134] to be organic, and too spread out as well as too irregularly distributed to be explained by the idea of interaction or mixing.

English sun.
Saab t’koara.
Hottentot sorre.
Corana sorob.
Agow quorah.
Somauli ghurrah.
Kru guiro.
Kanga jiro.
Wawn jirri.
English tongue.
Corana tamma.
Bushman t’inn.
Fertit timi.
English neck.
Bushman t’kau.
Darfur kiu.
English hand.
Corana t’koam.
Shilluck kiam.
English tree.
Corana peikoa.
Bushman t’hauki.
Shilluck yuke.
English mountain.
Corana teub.
Falasha duba.
English ear.
Corana t’naum.
Bullom naimu.
English star.
Corana kambrokoa.
Kossa rumbereki.
English bird.
Bushman t’kanni.
Mandingo kuno.
English sleep.
Corana t’kchom.
Bushman t’koing.
Susu kima.
Howssa kuana.
English fire.
Corana taib.
Congo tubia.
Somauli dub.
Bushman t’jih.
Fot diu.
Ashantee ojia.
English neck.
Bushman t’kau.
Makua tchico.
English die.
Corana t’koo.
Bushman tkuki.
Makua ocoa = dead.
English good.
Corana t’kain.
Bushman teteini.
Makua oni-touny.
English foot.
Corana t’nah.
Hottentot t’noah.
Makua nyahai.
English drink.
Corana t’kchaa.
Howssa sha.
English star.
Bushman tkoaati.
Bagnon hoquooud.
Fulah kode.
English child.
Corana t’kob.
Bushman t’katkoang.
Bagnon colden.
Timmani kalent.
Bullom tshant.
English tree.
Bushman t’huh.
Seracolé, &c. ite.
English foot.
Corana t’keib.
Bushman t’koah.
Sereres akiaf.
Waag Agau tsab.

Unless we suppose Southern Africa to have been the cradle of the human species, the population of the Cape must have been an extension of that of the Southern Tropic, and the Tropical family itself have been originally Equatorial. What does this imply? Even this—that those streams of population upon which the soil, climate, and other physical influences of South Africa acted, had themselves been acted on by the intertropical and equatorial influences of the Negro countries. Hence the human stock upon which the physical conditions had to act, was as peculiar as those conditions themselves. It was not in the same predicament with the intertropical South Americans. Between these and the hypothetical centre in Asia there was the Arctic Circle and the Polar latitudes—influences that in some portion of the line of migration must have acted on their ancestors’ ancestors.

Unless we assume that Southern Africa was the birthplace of humanity, the population of the Cape must have come from the Southern Tropic, and that Tropical family must have originally been from the Equator. What does this mean? It means that the populations affected by the soil, climate, and other physical factors of South Africa had also been influenced by the intertropical and equatorial conditions of the African regions. Therefore, the human population that these physical conditions impacted was as unique as the conditions themselves. This group was not in the same situation as the intertropical South Americans. Between them and the supposed center in Asia were the Arctic Circle and the Polar regions—factors that must have affected their ancestors during part of their migration.

It was nearer the condition of the Australians. Yet the equatorial portion of the line of migration[136] of these latter had been very different from that of the Kaffres and the Hottentots. It was narrow in extent, and lay in fertile islands, cooled by the breezes and evaporation of the ocean, rather than across the arid table-land of Central Africa—the parts between the Gulf of Guinea and the mouth of the river Juba.

It was closer to the situation of the Australians. However, the equatorial section of the migration path[136] of these groups was quite different from that of the Kaffirs and the Hottentots. It was limited in scope, situated in fertile islands, refreshed by ocean breezes and evaporation, rather than traversing the dry plateau of Central Africa—specifically the areas between the Gulf of Guinea and the mouth of the Juba River.

Between the Hottentots and their next neighbours to the north there are many points of difference. Admitting these to a certain extent, I explain them by the assumption of encroachment, displacement, and the abolition of those intermediate and transitional tribes which connected the northern Hottentots with the southern Kaffres.

Between the Hottentots and their neighbors to the north, there are many differences. Recognizing these to some degree, I explain them by suggesting encroachment, displacement, and the disappearance of the intermediate and transitional tribes that linked the northern Hottentots with the southern Kaffres.

And here I must remark, that the displacement itself is no assumption at all, but an historical fact; since within the last few centuries the Amakosa Kaffres alone have extended themselves at the expense of different Hottentot tribes, from the parts about Port Natal to the head-waters of the Orange River.

And here I must point out that the displacement itself is not an assumption but a historical fact; over the last few centuries, the Amakosa Kaffres have expanded at the expense of various Hottentot tribes, from the areas around Port Natal to the sources of the Orange River.

It is only the transitional character of the annihilated populations that is an assumption. I believe it—of course—to be a legitimate one; otherwise it would not have been made.

It’s just the transitional nature of the destroyed populations that’s an assumption. I definitely think it’s a valid one; otherwise, it wouldn’t have been made.

On the other hand I consider it illegitimate to assume, without inquiry, so broad and fundamental a distinction between the two stocks as to[137] attribute all points of similarity to intercourse only—none to original affinity. Yet this is done largely. The Hottentot language contains a sound which I believe to be an in-aspirated h, i. e. a sound of h formed by drawing in the breath, rather than by forcing it out—as is done by the rest of the world. This is called the click. It is a truly inarticulate sound; and as the common h is found in the language as well, the Hottentot speech presents the remarkable phenomenon of two inarticulate sounds, or two sounds common to man and the lower animals. As a point of anthropology this may be of value: in ethnology it has probably been misinterpreted.

On the flip side, I find it unreasonable to assume, without investigation, such a broad and fundamental distinction between the two groups as to[137] attribute all similarities solely to interaction—none to original connections. Yet this is often the case. The Hottentot language includes a sound that I believe to be an in-aspirated h, meaning a sound of h made by drawing in the breath, rather than by forcing it out—as the rest of the world does. This is referred to as the click. It is a genuinely inarticulate sound; and since the regular h is also present in the language, Hottentot speech showcases the remarkable occurrence of two inarticulate sounds, or two sounds common to humans and lower animals. As an anthropological point, this may hold significance: in ethnology, it has likely been misunderstood.

It is found in one Kaffre dialect. What are the inferences? That it has been adopted from the Hottentot by the Kaffre; just as a Kaffre gun has been adopted from the Europeans. This is one of them.

It is found in one Kaffre dialect. What can we infer? That it has been borrowed from the Hottentot by the Kaffre, just like a Kaffre gun has been borrowed from Europeans. This is one of those examples.

The other is that the sound in question is less unique, less characteristic, and less exclusively Hottentot than was previously believed.

The other point is that the sound in question is less unique, less characteristic, and less exclusively Hottentot than was previously thought.

Now this is certainly not one whit less legitimate than the former; yet the former is the commoner notion. Perhaps it is because it flatters us with a fresh fact, instead of chastening us by the correction of an over-hasty generalization.

Now this is definitely not any less valid than the earlier idea; however, the earlier one is the more common belief. Maybe it's because it flatters us with a new fact, instead of humbling us by correcting an overly quick generalization.

Again—the root t-k (as in tixo, tixme, utiko) is[138] at once Hottentot and Kaffre. It means either a Deity or an epithet appropriate to a Deity. Surely the doctrine that the Kaffres have simply borrowed part of their theological vocabulary from the Hottentots is neither the only nor the most logical inference here.

Again—the root t-k (as in tixo, tixme, utiko) is[138] both Hottentot and Kaffre. It refers to either a Deity or a term suitable for a Deity. Clearly, the idea that the Kaffres have simply borrowed some of their theological terms from the Hottentots is not the only nor the most reasonable conclusion here.

The Kaffre area is so large that it extends on both sides of Africa to the equator; and the contrast which it supplies when compared with the small one of the Hottentots is a repetition of the contrasts already noticed in America.

The Kaffre region is so vast that it stretches across both sides of Africa to the equator; and the difference it presents when compared to the much smaller Hottentots’ area is a reflection of the contrasts we've already seen in America.

The peculiarities of the Kaffre stock are fully sufficient to justify care and consideration before we place them in the same class either with the true Negros, or with the Gallas, Nubians, Agows, and other Africans of the water-system of the Nile. Yet they are by no means of that broad and trenchant kind which many have fancied them. The undoubted Kaffre character of the languages of Angola, Loango, the Gaboon, the Mozambique and Zanzibar coasts is a fact which must run through all our criticism. If so, it condemns all those extreme inferences which are drawn from the equally undoubted peculiarities of the Kaffres of the Cape. And why? Because these last are extreme forms; extreme, rather than either typical, or—what is more important—transitional.

The unique traits of the Kaffre people clearly warrant careful thought before we categorize them alongside true Negros or the Gallas, Nubians, Agows, and other Africans from the Nile's water system. However, they aren't as broadly defined or sharply distinct as many have imagined. The clear Kaffre influence seen in the languages of Angola, Loango, the Gaboon, and the Mozambique and Zanzibar coasts is something we need to consider in our analysis. If this is the case, it undermines all those extreme conclusions that have been drawn from the equally clear peculiarities of the Kaffres at the Cape. And why is that? Because the latter represent extreme forms; they are extreme, rather than typical or, more importantly, transitional.

Let us, however, look to them. What find we[139] then? Until the philological evidence in favour of the community of origin of the intertropical Africans of Congo on the west, and of Inhambame, Sofala, the Mozambique, &c. on the east, was known, no one spoke of the natives in any of those countries as being anything else but Negro, or thought of enlarging upon such differences as are now found between them and the typical Black.

Let’s take a look at them. What do we find[139] then? Until the linguistic evidence supporting the shared origins of the intertropical Africans from Congo in the west and from Inhambame, Sofala, Mozambique, etc., in the east was discovered, no one referred to the natives in any of those regions as anything other than Black, or thought to elaborate on the differences that are now recognized between them and the typical Black community.

Even in respect to the languages, there are transitional dialects in abundance. In Mrs. Kilham’s tables of 31 African languages, the last is a Kongo vocabulary, all the rest being Negro. Now this Kongo vocabulary, which is truly Kaffre, differs from the rest so little more than the rest do from each other, that when I first saw the list, being then strongly prepossessed by the opinion that the Kaffre stock of tongues was, to a great extent, a stock per se, I could scarcely believe that the true Kongo and Kaffre language was represented; so I satisfied myself that it was so, by a collation with other undoubted vocabularies, before I admitted the inference. And this is only one fact out of many[19].

Even regarding the languages, there are plenty of transitional dialects. In Mrs. Kilham’s tables of 31 African languages, the last one is a Kongo vocabulary, while the others are all Negro. This Kongo vocabulary, which is genuinely Kaffre, differs from the other languages just slightly, much like how the other languages differ from each other. When I first looked at the list, I was convinced that the Kaffre languages formed a distinct group, and I could hardly believe that both the true Kongo and Kaffre languages were represented. I needed to compare it with other well-known vocabularies before I accepted that conclusion. And this is just one fact among many[19].

Again—the Negros themselves are referable to an extreme rather than a normal type; and so far are they from being co-extensive with the Africans, that it is almost exclusively along the[140] valleys of rivers that they are to be found. There are none in the extra-tropical parts of Northern, none in the corresponding parts of Southern Africa; and but few on the table-lands of even the two sides of the equator. Their areas, indeed, are scanty and small; one lies on the Upper Nile, one on the Lower Gambia and Senegal, one on the Lower Niger, and the last along the western coast, where the smaller rivers that originate in the Kong Mountains form hot and moist alluvial tracts.

Again—the Black people themselves are more of an extreme type than a typical one; and they are so far from being co-extensive with the Africans that they are mostly found along the[140] valleys of rivers. There are none in the extra-tropical areas of Northern Africa, none in the corresponding regions of Southern Africa; and only a few on the plateaus on both sides of the equator. Their areas are indeed limited and small; one exists on the Upper Nile, one on the Lower Gambia and Senegal, one on the Lower Niger, and the last along the western coast, where the smaller rivers that come from the Kong Mountains create hot and humid alluvial plains.

From whatever other Africans the Negros are to be separated, they are not to be disconnected from the Kaffres, the chief points of contact and transition being the parts about the Gaboon.

From any other Africans the Black people are to be separated, they are not to be disconnected from the Kaffirs, with the main points of contact and transition being the areas around the Gaboon.

Neither are the Kaffres to be too trenchantly cut off from the remarkable families of the Sahara, the range of Atlas, and the coasts of the Mediterranean—families which it is convenient to take next in order; not because this is the sequence which most closely suits either their geography or their ethnology, but because the criticism which has lately been applied to them best helps us in the criticism of the present affiliations.

Neither are the Kaffirs to be too sharply separated from the notable families of the Sahara, the Atlas Mountains, and the Mediterranean coasts—families that we should examine next; not because this is the order that best fits either their geography or their ethnicity, but because the recent critiques applied to them will help us in evaluating the current connections.

On the confines of Egypt, in the oasis of Siwah, we find the most eastern members of the great Berber, Amazirgh, or Kabyle family; and we find them as far west as the Canary Isles, of which[141] they were the occupants as long as a native population occupied them at all. Members of the same stock were the ancient subjects of Jugurtha, Syphax, and Masinissa. Mr. Francis Newman, who has paid more attention to the speech of the Berber tribes than any Englishman (perhaps than any European), has shown that it deserves the new and convenient name of Sub-Semitic—a term to be enlarged on.

On the borders of Egypt, in the oasis of Siwah, we find the most eastern members of the great Berber, Amazirgh, or Kabyle family; and they are present as far west as the Canary Islands, where[141] they were the inhabitants as long as there was any native population. Those of the same lineage were the ancient subjects of Jugurtha, Syphax, and Masinissa. Mr. Francis Newman, who has studied the language of the Berber tribes more than any other Englishman (possibly more than any European), has demonstrated that it deserves the new and useful label of Sub-Semitic—a term to be elaborated on.

Let us take a language in its first state of inflection, when passing from the monosyllabic form of the Chinese and its allied tongues, it just begins to incorporate with its hitherto unmodified nouns and verbs, certain prepositions denoting relation, certain adverbs denoting time, and certain pronouns of person or possession; by means of all which it gets equivalents to the cases, tenses and persons of the more advanced forms of speech.

Let’s look at a language in its early stage of change, when moving from the monosyllabic structure of Chinese and similar languages, it starts to blend in with its previously unaltered nouns and verbs, certain prepositions that indicate relationship, certain adverbs that signify time, and certain pronouns for people or ownership; through these, it gains equivalents to the cases, tenses, and persons of more developed forms of communication.

This is the germ of Conjugation and Declension; of the Accidents of Grammar. Let us, however, go farther. Over and above the simple juxtaposition and incipient incorporation of these previously separable and independent particles, let there be certain internal ones; those, for instance, which convert the English Present Tenses fall and speak into the Preterites fell and spoke—or something of the same sort.

This is the basis of Conjugation and Declension; the Accidents of Grammar. However, let's dive deeper. Besides the simple placement and initial merging of these once separate and independent parts, there are certain internal ones; for example, those that change the English Present Tenses fall and speak into the Past Tenses fell and spoke—or something similar.

Farther still. Let such changes of accent as[142] occur when we form an adjective like tyránnical, from a substantive like týrant, be superadded.

Farther still. Let such changes of accent as[142] happen when we create an adjective like tyrannical from a noun like tyrant be added.

The union of such processes as these will undoubtedly stamp a remarkable character upon the language in which they appear.

The combination of these processes will surely leave a significant mark on the language they are expressed in.

But what if they go farther? or what, if without actually going farther, the tongues which they characterize find expositors who delight in giving them prominence, and also exaggerate their import? This is no hypothetical case.

But what if they go further? Or what if, without actually going further, the tongues they describe find speakers who enjoy highlighting them and also exaggerating their significance? This isn't just a hypothetical situation.

A large proportion of roots almost necessarily contain three consonants: e. g. bread, stone, &c., pronounced bred, stôn, &c. This is one fact.

A large proportion of roots almost necessarily contain three consonants: e.g. bread, stone, &c., pronounced bred, stôn, &c. This is one fact.

In many languages there is an inability to pronounce two consonants belonging to the same syllable, in immediate succession; an inability which is met by the insertion of an intervening vowel. The Finlander, instead of Krist, must say either Ekristo or Keristo. This principle, in English, would convert bred into bered or ebred, and stôn into estôn or setôn. This is another fact.

In many languages, people struggle to pronounce two consonants from the same syllable in a row, so they insert a vowel in between. For example, a Finnish speaker would say either Ekristo or Keristo instead of Krist. Applying this principle in English would change bred to bered or ebred, and stôn to estôn or setôn. This is another fact.

These two and the preceding ones should now be combined. A large proportion of roots containing three consonants may induce a grammarian to coin such a term as triliteralism, and to say that this triliteralism characterizes a certain language.

These two, along with the previous ones, should now be combined. A significant number of roots with three consonants might lead a grammarian to create a term like triliteralism, and to argue that this triliteralism defines a particular language.

Then, as not only these consonants are separated from one another by intervening vowels,[143] but as the vowels themselves are subject to change, (these changes acting upon the accentuation,) the triliteralism becomes more important still. The consonants look like the framework or skeleton of the words, the vowels being the modifying influences. The one are the constants, the other the variants; and triliteral roots with internal modifications becomes a philological byword which is supposed to represent a unique phenomenon in the way of speech, rather than the simple result of two or three common processes united in one and the same language.

Then, since these consonants are separated from each other by intervening vowels,[143] and since the vowels themselves can also change (with these changes affecting the stress), the importance of triliteralism becomes even greater. The consonants serve as the framework or skeleton of the words, while the vowels act as the modifying influences. One set represents the constants, and the other the variants; and triliteral roots with internal modifications has become a linguistic term that is believed to describe a unique feature of speech, rather than just the straightforward outcome of two or three common processes combined within a single language.

But the force of system does not stop here. Suppose we wished to establish the paradox that the English was a language of the sort in question. A little ingenuity would put us up to some clever legerdemain. The convenient aspirate h—like the bat in the fable of the birds and beasts at war—might be a consonant when it was wanted to make up the complement of three, and a vowel when it was de trop. Words like pity might be made triliteral (triconsonantal) by doubling the tt; words like pitted, by ejecting it. Lastly, if it were denied that two consonants must necessarily be separated by a vowel, it would be an easy matter to say that between such sounds as the n and r in Henry, the b and r in bread, the r and b in curb, there was really a very short vowel; and that[144] Henĕry, bĕred, curŭb, were the true sounds; or that, if they were not so in the nineteenth century, they were two thousand years ago.

But the power of the system doesn't stop here. Imagine we wanted to establish the paradox that English is the kind of language in question. With a bit of creativity, we could come up with some clever tricks. The handy letter h—like the bat in the fable of the birds and beasts at war—could be a consonant when it was needed to complete a set of three and a vowel when it was too much. Words like pity could be made trilateral (triconsonantal) by doubling the tt; words like pitted, by getting rid of it. Finally, if it were argued that two consonants don’t have to be separated by a vowel, it wouldn’t be hard to claim that between sounds like n and r in Henry, the b and r in bread, and the r and b in curb, there was actually a very short vowel; and that Henĕry, bĕred, curŭb were the true sounds; or that, if they weren’t in the nineteenth century, they were two thousand years ago.

Now let all this be taught and believed, and who will not isolate the language in which such remarkable phenomena occur?

Now let all this be taught and accepted, and who wouldn't want to examine the language in which such amazing events take place?

All this is taught and believed, and consequently there is a language, or rather a group of languages, thus isolated.

All of this is taught and believed, and as a result, there is a language, or more accurately, a collection of languages that are thus isolated.

But the isolation does not stop with the philologist. The anatomist and the historian support it as well. The nations who speak the language in question are in the neighbourhood of Blacks, but without being Blacks themselves; and they are in contact with rude Pagans; themselves being eminently monotheistic. Their history also has been an influential one, morally and materially as well; whilst the skulls are as symmetrical as the skull of the famous Georgian female of our first chapter, their complexions fair or ruddy, and their noses so little African as to emulate the eagle’s beak in prominent convexity. All this exaggerates the elements of isolation.

But the isolation doesn’t end with the philologist. The anatomist and the historian contribute to it too. The nations speaking the language in question are near Black communities but aren’t Black themselves; they interact with rough Pagans while being strongly monotheistic. Their history has also been significant, both morally and materially; while their skulls are as symmetrical as the one of the famous Georgian woman mentioned in our first chapter, their complexions are fair or ruddy, and their noses are so far from being African that they resemble an eagle’s beak in their prominent convex shape. All this just emphasizes the elements of isolation.

The class or family thus isolated, which—as stated above—has a real existence, has been conveniently called Semitic; a term comprising the twelve tribes of Israel and the modern Jews so far as they are descended from them, the Syrians[145] of ancient, and, partially, of modern Syria, the Mesopotamians, the Phœnicians, the Assyrians, the Babylonians, the Arabs, and certain populations of Æthiopia or Abyssinia.

The isolated class or family mentioned earlier, which truly exists, has been conveniently referred to as Semitic; this term includes the twelve tribes of Israel and modern Jews who are descended from them, as well as the ancient and some modern Syrians[145], Mesopotamians, Phoenicians, Assyrians, Babylonians, Arabs, and certain groups from Ethiopia or Abyssinia.

Further facts, real or supposed, have contributed to isolate this remarkable and important family. The Africans who were nearest to them, both in locality and civilization—the Ægyptians of the Pharaohnic empire, builders of the pyramids, and writers in hieroglyphics—have ceased to exist as a separate substantive nation. Their Asiatic frontagers, on the other hand, were either Persians or Armenians.

Further facts, whether true or not, have helped to set this remarkable and important family apart. The Africans who were closest to them, both in terms of location and civilization—the Egyptians of the Pharaonic empire, who built the pyramids and wrote in hieroglyphics—no longer exist as a distinct nation. In contrast, their Asiatic neighbors were either Persians or Armenians.

Everything favoured isolation here. The Jew and Ægyptian were in strong contrast from the beginning, and all our earliest impressions are in favour of an over-valuation of their differences. As for the Persian, he was so early placed in a different class—a class which, from the fact of its being supposed to contain the Germans, Greeks, Latins, Slavonians, and Hindus as well, has been called Indo-European—that he had a proper and peculiar position of his own; and something almost as stringent in the way of demarcation applied to the Armenian. Where, then, were the approaches to the Semitic family to be found?

Everything encouraged separation here. The Jew and Egyptian were clearly different from the start, and all our initial impressions leaned towards overestimating their differences. As for the Persian, he was quickly classified separately—a classification that was thought to include Germans, Greeks, Latins, Slavonians, and Hindus, and was called Indo-European—so he had his own distinct and unique position; something similarly strict applied to the Armenian. So, where could we find connections to the Semitic family?

Attempts were made to connect them with the Indo-Europeans; I think unsuccessfully. Of[146] course there was a certain amount of relationship of some kind; but it by no means followed that this established the real affiliations. There was a connexion; but not the connexion. The reasons for this view lay partly in certain undoubted affinities with the Persians, and partly in the fact of the Jew, Syrian and Arab skulls, and the Jew, Syrian and Arab civilizations coming under the category of Caucasian.

Attempts were made to link them to the Indo-Europeans; I think it was unsuccessful. Of[146] course, there was some kind of relationship; however, it didn’t necessarily mean that this proved the real connections. There was a connection, but not the connection. The reasoning behind this perspective was partly due to certain clear similarities with the Persians, and partly because the Jews, Syrians, and Arabs, along with their civilizations, fall under the category of Caucasian.

Consciously or unconsciously, most writers have gone on this hypothesis—naturally, but inconsiderately. Hence the rough current opinion has been, that if the Semitic tribes were in any traceable degree of relationship with the other families of the earth, that relationship must be sought for amongst the Indo-Europeans.

Consciously or unconsciously, most writers have operated on this assumption—naturally, but without much thought. As a result, the general opinion has been that if the Semitic tribes had any identifiable relationship with other groups in the world, it must be found among the Indo-Europeans.

The next step was to raise the Semitic class to the rank of a standard or measure for the affinities of unplaced families; and writers who investigated particular languages more readily inquired whether such languages were Semitic, than what the Semitic tongues were themselves. Unless I mistake the spirit in which many admirable investigations have been conducted, this led to the term Sub-Semitic. Men asked about the amount of Semitism in certain families as if it were a substantive and inherent property, rather than what Semitism itself consisted in.

The next step was to elevate the Semitic class to the standard for comparing unclassified families; writers who looked into specific languages were more likely to ask if those languages were Semitic than to inquire what the Semitic languages actually were. If I'm not misinterpreting the spirit in which many excellent studies have been carried out, this gave rise to the term Sub-Semitic. People questioned the degree of Semitism in certain families as if it were a concrete, inherent quality, rather than exploring what Semitism really entailed.

And now Sub-Semitic tongues multiplied; since Sub-Semitism was a respectable thing to predicate of the object of one’s attention.

And now Sub-Semitic languages increased, since Sub-Semitism was a valid thing to say about whatever you were focusing on.

The ancient Ægyptian was stated to be Sub-Semitic—Benfey and others having done good work in making it so.

The ancient Egyptian was said to be Sub-Semitic—Benfey and others have done a good job proving it.

Mr. Newman did the same with the Berber. Meanwhile the anatomists acted much like the philologists, and brought the skulls of the old Ægyptians in the same class with those of the Jews and Arabs, so as to be Caucasian.

Mr. Newman did the same with the Berber. Meanwhile, the anatomists behaved similarly to the philologists and categorized the skulls of the ancient Egyptians alongside those of the Jews and Arabs, classifying them as Caucasian.

But the Caucasians had been put in a sort of antithesis to the Negros; and hence came mischief. Whatever may be the views of those able writers who have investigated the Sub-Semitic Africans, when pressed for definitions, it is not too much to say that, in practice, they have all acted as if the moment a class became Semitic, it ceased to be African. They have all looked one way; that being the way in which good Jews and Mahometans look—towards Mecca and Jerusalem. They have forgotten the phænomena of correlation. If Cæsar is like Pompey, Pompey must be like Cæsar. If African languages approach the Hebrew, the Hebrew must approach them. The attraction is mutual; and it is by no means a case of Mahomet and the mountain.

But Caucasians were placed in opposition to Black people, and this caused problems. No matter what knowledgeable writers who have studied Sub-Semitic Africans say, when it comes down to definitions, it's fair to say they've all acted as if once a group becomes Semitic, it stops being African. They've all focused in one direction—the same direction that good Jews and Muslims look—toward Mecca and Jerusalem. They've overlooked the idea of correlation. If Caesar is like Pompey, then Pompey must be like Caesar. If African languages are similar to Hebrew, then Hebrew must also be similar to them. The connection is mutual; it’s definitely not just a case of Muhammad and the mountain.

I believe that the Semitic elements of the Berber,[148] the Coptic and the Galla are clear and unequivocal; in other words, that these languages are truly Sub-Semitic.

I believe that the Semitic aspects of the Berber, [148] the Coptic, and the Galla are clear and obvious; in other words, these languages are genuinely Sub-Semitic.

In the languages of Abyssinia, the Gheez and Tigré, admitted, as long as they have been known at all, to be Semitic, graduate through the Amharic, the Falasha, the Harargi, the Gafat, and other languages which may be well studied in Dr. Beke’s valuable comparative tables[20], into the Agow tongue, unequivocally indigenous to Abyssinia; and through this into the true Negro classes.

In the languages of Abyssinia, Gheez and Tigré are recognized as Semitic, as far back as anyone knows. They develop into Amharic, Falasha, Harargi, Gafat, and other languages that can be thoroughly examined in Dr. Beke’s useful comparative tables[20], and then into the Agow language, which is clearly native to Abyssinia; and from there into the true Negro groups.

But unequivocal as may be the Semitic elements of the Berber, Coptic and Galla, their affinities with the tongues of Western and Southern Africa are more so. I weigh my words when I say, not equally, but more. Changing the expression for every foot in advance which can be made towards the Semitic tongues in one direction, the African philologist can go a yard towards the Negro ones in the other[21].

But while the Semitic influences on Berber, Coptic, and Galla are clear, their connections to the languages of Western and Southern Africa are even stronger. I choose my words carefully when I say, not equally, but more. For every step forward that can be taken towards the Semitic languages in one direction, the African language scholar can make even greater strides towards the Negro languages in the other[21].

Of course, the proofs of all this in full detail would fill a large volume; indeed, the exhaustion of the subject and the annihilation of all possible and contingent objections would fill many. The position, however, of the present writer is not so much that of the engineer who has to force his water up to a higher uphill by means of pumps, as it is that of the digger and delver who merely clears away artificial embankments which have hitherto prevented it finding its own level according to the common laws of nature. He has little fear from the results of separate and independent investigation, when a certain amount of preconceived notions have been unsettled.

Of course, the full evidence for all this would take up a large book; in fact, covering the subject completely and addressing all potential objections would require many. However, the current writer's role is less like that of an engineer who has to pump water uphill and more like that of a miner who simply removes the obstacles that have kept it from settling naturally according to the basic laws of nature. He isn’t too concerned about the outcomes of individual and independent research, especially when some preconceived ideas have been challenged.

To proceed with the subject—the convergence of the lines of migration in Africa is broken or unbroken, clear or indistinct, continuous or irregular, to much the same extent, and much in a similar manner, with those of America. The moral contrasts which were afforded by the Mexicans and Peruvians reappear in the case of the Ægyptians and the Semitidæ. As to the Hottentots—they, perhaps, are more widely separated from their next of kin than any Americans, the Eskimo not being excepted; so much so, that if the phænomena of their language be either denied[150] or explained away, they may pass for a new species.

To address the topic—the patterns of migration in Africa are either broken or continuous, clear or unclear, regular or irregular, much like those in America. The moral differences seen in the Mexicans and Peruvians also show up in the Egyptians and the Semitics. As for the Hottentots—they might be more distantly related to their closest relatives than any Americans, including the Eskimos; so much so that if the features of their language are either denied[150] or explained away, they could be considered a separate species.

Now if the reader have attended to the differences between the Ethnological and the Anthropological principles of classification, he must have inferred the necessity of certain differences of nomenclature, since it is hardly likely that the terms which suit the one study will exactly fit the other. And such is really the case. If the word Negro mean the combination of woolly hair, with a jetty skin, depressed nose, thick lips, narrow forehead, acute facial angle, and prominent jaw, it applies to Africans as widely different from each other as the Laplander is from the Samoeid and Eskimo, or the Englishman from the Finlander. It applies to the inhabitants of certain portions of different river-systems, independent of relationship—and vice versâ. The Negros of Kordofan are nearer in descent to the Copts and Arabs than are the lighter-coloured and more civilized Fulahs. They are also nearer to the same than they are to the Blacks of the Senegambia. If this be the case, the term has no place in Ethnology, except so far as its extensive use makes it hard to abandon. Its real application is to Anthropology, wherein it means the effect of certain influences upon certain intertropical Africans, irrespective of descent, but not irrespective of physical condition.[151] As truly as a short stature and light skin coincide with the occupancy of mountain ranges, the Negro physiognomy coincides with that of the alluvia of rivers. Few writers are less disposed to account for ethnological differences by reference to a change of physical conditions rather than original distinction of species than Dr. Daniell; nevertheless, he expressly states that when you leave the low swamps of the Delta of the Niger for the sandstone country of the interior, the skin becomes fairer, and black becomes brown, and brown yellow.

Now, if the reader has noticed the differences between the Ethnological and Anthropological principles of classification, they must have recognized the need for different terminology since it's unlikely that the terms suitable for one field will perfectly match the other. And that’s genuinely the case. If the term Negro refers to a combination of woolly hair, dark skin, a flat nose, thick lips, a narrow forehead, a sharp facial angle, and a prominent jaw, it applies to Africans who are as diverse from each other as a Laplander is from a Samoeid and Eskimo, or an Englishman is from a Finnish person. It pertains to people from specific parts of different river systems, independent of their relationships—and vice versa. The Negroes of Kordofan are closer in ancestry to the Copts and Arabs than the lighter-skinned and more civilized Fulahs are. They are also closer to the Copts and Arabs than they are to the Blacks of Senegambia. If this is true, the term has no place in Ethnology, except to the extent that its widespread use makes it difficult to drop. Its actual application is in Anthropology, where it reflects the impact of certain influences on specific groups of intertropical Africans, regardless of ancestry but not disregarding physical condition.[151] Just as shorter stature and lighter skin are associated with living in mountainous regions, the Negro physiognomy is associated with the alluvial regions of rivers. Few writers are less inclined to explain ethnological differences as a result of changing physical conditions rather than original species distinctions than Dr. Daniell; nevertheless, he clearly states that when you move from the low swamps of the Niger Delta to the sandstone areas of the interior, the skin becomes lighter, black turns to brown, and brown turns to yellow.

Of the African populations most immediately in contact with the typical Negro of the western coast, the fairest are the Nufi (conterminous with the Ibos of the Lower Niger) and the Fulahs who are spread over the highlands of Senegambia, as far in the interior as Sakatú, and as far south as the Nufi frontier.

Of the African populations that are closest to the typical Black communities of the western coast, the lightest-skinned are the Nufi (who live alongside the Ibos of the Lower Niger) and the Fulahs, who are found throughout the highlands of Senegambia, extending as far inland as Sakatú and as far south as the Nufi border.

On the other hand, the darkest of the fairer families are the Tuaricks of Wadreag, who belong to the Berber family, and the Sheyga Arabs of Nubia.

On the other hand, the darkest of the lighter-skinned families are the Tuaricks of Wadreag, who belong to the Berber ethnic group, and the Sheyga Arabs of Nubia.

The Nubians themselves, or the natives of the Middle Nile between Ægypt and Sennaar, are truly transitional in features between the Ægyptians and the Blacks of Kordofan. So they are[152] in language and apparently in civilizational development.

The Nubians, or the locals of the Middle Nile region between Egypt and Sudan, show a clear blend of characteristics between the Egyptians and the Black people of Kordofan. They are[152] similar in language and seemingly in their level of civilizational development.

The best measure of capacity, in this respect, on the part of those Africans who have been less favoured by external circumstances and geographical position than the ancient Ægyptians, is to be found amongst the Mandingos and Fulahs, each of which nations has adopted the Mahometan religion and some portion of the Arabic literature along with it. Of large towns there are more in Negro Africa than there has ever been in Mongolia and Tartary. Yet the Tartars are neither more nor less than Turks like those of Constantinople, and the Mongolians are closely connected with the industrial Chinese.

The best way to measure the capacity of Africans who have faced more challenges due to external factors and geography compared to the ancient Egyptians is to look at the Mandingos and Fulahs. Both of these groups have embraced the Muslim religion and adopted some Arabic literature along with it. There are more large towns in Negro Africa than there have ever been in Mongolia and Tartary. Yet, the Tartars are essentially Turks, similar to those in Constantinople, and the Mongolians have a strong connection to the industrial Chinese.

That the uniformity of languages throughout Africa is greater than it is either in Asia or Europe, is a statement to which I have not the least hesitation in committing myself.

That the consistency of languages across Africa is greater than in either Asia or Europe is something I confidently stand by.

And now, having brought the African migration—to which I allot the Semitic populations of Arabia, Syria, and Babylonia—from its extremity at the Cape to a point so near the hypothetical centre as the frontiers of Persia and Armenia, I leave it for the present.

And now, having traced the African migration—which I include the Semitic populations of Arabia, Syria, and Babylonia—from its farthest point at the Cape to a location close to the theoretical center at the borders of Persia and Armenia, I will leave it for now.


The English of England are not the earliest[153] occupants of the island. Before them were the ancient Britons. Were these the earliest occupants? Who were the men by whose foot Britain, till then the home of the lower animals alone, was first trodden? This is uncertain. Why may not the Kelts have stood in the same relation to some rude Britons still more primitive, that the Anglo-Saxons did to the Kelts? Perhaps they really did so. Perhaps, even the rude and primitive tribes thus assumed had aborigines who looked upon them as intruders, themselves having in their turn been interlopers. The chief objection against thus multiplying aboriginal aborigines is the rule de non apparentibus, &c.

The English of England are not the first[153] occupants of the island. Before them were the ancient Britons. Were they the first occupants? Who were the people that first set foot in Britain, which until then was home only to lower animals? This is uncertain. Could the Celts have had a similar relationship to some even more primitive Britons as the Anglo-Saxons did to the Celts? Maybe they did. It’s possible that these so-called primitive tribes had their own original inhabitants who considered them intruders, having themselves been interlopers at one time. The main issue with suggesting so many layers of original inhabitants is the rule de non apparentibus, &c.

But Britain is an island. Everything relating to the natural history of the useful arts is so wholly uninvestigated, that no one has proposed even to approximate the date of the first launch of the first boat; in other words, of the first occupancy of a piece of land surrounded by water. The whole of that particular continent in which the first protoplasts saw light, may have remained full to overflowing before a single frail raft had effected the first human migration.

But Britain is an island. Everything about the natural history of useful arts is so completely unexplored that no one has even suggested a date for when the first boat was launched; in other words, when the first people settled on a piece of land surrounded by water. That entire continent, where the first humans came into existence, may have been overflowing with life before a single fragile raft made the first human migration.

Britain may have remained a solitude for centuries and milleniums after Gaul had been full. I do not suppose this to have been the case; but, unless we imagine the first canoe to have been built[154] simultaneously with the demand for water-transport, it is as easy to allow that a long period intervened between that time and the first effort of seamanship as a short one. Hence, the date of the original populations of islands is not in the same category with that of the dispersion of men and women over continents.

Britain might have stayed isolated for centuries and millennia after Gaul was fully settled. I don't think this is how things happened; however, unless we assume that the first canoe was built[154] at the same time there was a need for water transport, it's just as easy to believe that a long time passed between that moment and the first attempts at seafaring as it is to believe a short time did. Therefore, the timeline of the original inhabitants of islands is not on the same level as the timeline of men and women spreading out across continents.

On continents, we must assume the extension from one point to another to have been continuous—and not only this, but we may assume something like an equable rate of diffusion also. I have heard that the American population moves bodily from east to west at the rate of about eleven miles a year.

On continents, we should assume that the stretch from one point to another has been continuous—and not just that, but we can also assume a roughly steady rate of spread. I’ve heard that the American population shifts as a whole from east to west at about eleven miles a year.

As I use the statement solely for the sake of illustrating my subject, its accuracy is not very important. To simplify the calculation, let us say ten. At this rate a circle of migration of which the centre was (say) in the Altai range, would enlarge its diameter at the rate of twenty miles a year—i.e. ten miles at one end of the radius and ten at the other.

As I'm using the statement just to illustrate my point, its accuracy isn’t crucial. To make the calculations easier, let’s say ten. At this rate, a migration circle with its center (for example) in the Altai range would increase its diameter by twenty miles each year—i.e. ten miles on one end of the radius and ten on the other.

Hence a point a thousand miles from the birth-place of the patriarchs of our species would receive its first occupants exactly one hundred years after the original locality had been found too limited. At this rate a very few centuries would people the Cape of Good Hope, and fewer still[155] Lapland, the parts about Cape Comorin, the Malayan Peninsula, and Kamskatka—all parts more or less in the condition of extreme points[22].

Hence, a location a thousand miles away from where our ancestors originated would get its first inhabitants exactly one hundred years after the original area was found to be too small. At this pace, it would take only a few centuries to populate the Cape of Good Hope, and even less time for places like Lapland, the area around Cape Comorin, the Malayan Peninsula, and Kamchatka—all of which are essentially at the edges of the world.

Now as long as any continental extremities of the earth’s surface remain unoccupied—the stream (or rather the enlarging circle of migration) not having yet reached them—the primary migration is going on; and when all have got their complement, the primary migration is over. During this primary migration, the relations of man, thus placed in movement, and in the full, early and guiltless exercise of his high function of subduing the earth, are in conflict with physical obstacles, and with the resistance of the lower animals only. Unless—like Lot’s wife—he turn back upon the peopled parts behind him, he has no relations with his fellow-men—at least none arising out of the claim of previous occupancy. In other words—during the primary migration—the world that lay before our progenitors was either brute or inanimate.

Now, as long as any continental areas of the earth's surface are still unoccupied—the stream (or rather the expanding circle of migration) not having reached them—the primary migration is happening; and when everyone has settled, the primary migration is done. During this primary migration, the relationships of humans, who are in motion and fully engaged in their natural role of conquering the earth, are only challenged by physical obstacles and the resistance of lower animals. Unless—like Lot’s wife—he looks back at the populated areas behind him, he has no connections with other people—at least not any that come from the claim of previous ownership. In other words, during the primary migration, the world that lay ahead of our ancestors was either wild or lifeless.

But before many generations have passed away, all becomes full to overflowing; so that men must enlarge their boundaries at the expense of their fellows. The migrations that now take place are secondary. They differ from the primary in many respects. They are slower, because the resistance is that of Humanity to Humanity; and they are violent, because dispossession is the object. They are partial, abortive, followed by the fusion of different populations; or followed by their extermination—as the case may be. All, however, that we have now to say about them is the fact of their difference from the primary one.

But before many generations pass, everything becomes so abundant that people have to expand their borders at the expense of others. The migrations happening now are secondary. They are different from the primary migrations in many ways. They happen more slowly because the resistance comes from people against people; and they are violent, as the aim is dispossession. These migrations are often partial, unsuccessful, and can lead to the mixing of different populations, or their extermination, depending on the situation. What we need to note about them is simply how they differ from the primary migration.

Concerning the secondary migrations we have a considerable amount of knowledge. History tells us of some; ethnological induction suggests others. The primary one, however, is a great mystery. Yet it is one which is continually talked about.

Concerning the secondary migrations, we have a lot of information. History provides us with some examples, and ethnological reasoning highlights others. The primary migration, though, remains a huge mystery. Still, it’s a topic that comes up often.

I mention it now, (having previously enlarged upon it,) for the sake of suggesting a question of some importance in practical Ethnology. It is the one suggested by the remarks upon the aborigines of Britain. When are we sure that the population of any part of a continent is primaryi.e. descended[157] from, or representative of, the first occupants? Never. There are plenty of cases where, from history, from the phænomena of contrast, and from other ethnological arguments, we are quite satisfied that it is not so; but none where the evidence is conclusive the other way. At the same time, the doctrine de non apparentibus cautions us against assuming displacements unnecessarily.

I bring it up now, having discussed it before, to raise an important question in practical Ethnology. This question comes from the observations about the indigenous people of Britain. How can we be sure that the population of any area of a continent is primaryi.e. descended[157] from or representative of the original inhabitants? We can’t. There are many instances where, based on history, contrasting phenomena, and other ethnological evidence, we can be sure that it is not the case; but there are none where the evidence conclusively supports the opposite. At the same time, the principle de non apparentibus warns us against making unnecessary assumptions about displacements.

However, where we have, in addition to the absence of the signs of previous occupancy, an extreme locality, (i.e. a locality at the farthest distance, in a given direction, from the hypothetical centre,) we have primâ facie evidence in favour of the population representing a primary migration. Thus:—

However, when we have, in addition to the lack of signs of previous occupancy, an extreme location, (i.e. a location at the furthest distance in a specific direction from the hypothetical center,) we have prima facie evidence supporting the idea that the population represents a primary migration. Thus:—

  • 1, 2. The Hottentots and Laplanders amongst the families of the Continent are probably primary.
  • 3. The Irish Gaels are the same amongst islanders.
  • 4, 5. America and the Oceanic area appear to be primary in respect to the populations of the Continent of Asia; though within their own areas the displacements have been considerable.

FOOTNOTES

[11] Pickering, Races of Men, p. 19.

[11] Pickering, Races of Men, p. 19.

[12] The Araucana of Ercilla.

The Araucana from Ercilla.

[13] D’Orbigny, Homme Américain.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ D’Orbigny, American Man.

[14] Astek means the Mexicans of the valley of Mexico who spoke the Astek language. Mexican, as applied to the kingdom conquered by Cortez, is a political rather than an ethnological term.

[14] Astek refers to the Mexicans living in the Valley of Mexico who spoke the Astek language. The term Mexican, used for the kingdom conquered by Cortés, is more of a political term than an ethnic one.

[15] Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, vol. i.

[15] Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, vol. i.

[16] The Indian Islands and Madagascar.

The Indian Ocean Islands and Madagascar.

[17] Viz. the Korana, Saab, Hottentot, and Bushman.

[17] Such as the Korana, Saab, Hottentot, and Bushman.

[18] The Agow, Somauli, and the rest; some being spoken very far north, as the Agow and Seracolé. This list has already been published by the author in his Report on Ethnological Philology (Transactions of the Association for the Advancement of Science, 1847).

[18] The Agow, Somauli, and others; some are spoken much further north, like the Agow and Seracolé. This list has already been published by the author in his Report on Ethnological Philology (Transactions of the Association for the Advancement of Science, 1847).

[19] A table showing this is to be found in the Transactions of the British Association for 1847, &c., pp. 224–228.

[19] A table showing this can be found in the Transactions of the British Association for 1847, etc., pp. 224–228.

[20] Transactions of the Philological Society, No. 33.

[20] Transactions of the Philological Society, No. 33.

[21] A short table of the Berber and Coptic, as compared with the other African tongues, may be seen in the Classical Museum, and in the Transactions of the British Association, &c. for 1846. In the Transactions of the Philological Society is a grammatical sketch of the Tumali language, by Dr. L. Tutshek of Munich. Now the Tumali is a truly Negro language of Kordofan; whilst in respect to the extent to which its inflections are formed by internal changes of vowels and accents, it is fully equal to the Semitic tongues of Palestine and Arabia.

[21] A brief comparison of the Berber and Coptic languages with other African languages can be found in the Classical Museum and in the Transactions of the British Association, etc., from 1846. The Transactions of the Philological Society includes a grammatical overview of the Tumali language by Dr. L. Tutshek of Munich. The Tumali language is genuinely a Negro language of Kordofan; and in terms of how its inflections are shaped by internal changes in vowels and accents, it is fully comparable to the Semitic languages of Palestine and Arabia.

[22] Nothing is said about Cape Horn; as America in relation to Asia is an island. It is also, perhaps, unnecessary to repeat that both the rate and the centre are hypothetical—either or both may or may not be correct. That which is not hypothetical is the approximation to an equability of rate in the case of continents. It is difficult to conceive any such conditions, as those which deferred the occupancy of islands like Madagascar and Iceland, by emigrants from Africa or Greenland, for an indefinite period, keeping one part of Africa or Greenland empty whilst another was full. Hence, the equability in question is a mere result of the absence, on continents, of any conditions capable of arresting it for an indefinite period. The extent to which it may be interfered with by other causes is no part of the present question.

[22] Nothing is mentioned about Cape Horn; it's like America in relation to Asia being an island. It might also be unnecessary to reiterate that both the rate and the center are just theoretical—either or both could be right or wrong. What is not theoretical is the approach to an equability of rate in the case of continents. It’s hard to imagine the conditions that would delay the settlement of islands like Madagascar and Iceland by people from Africa or Greenland for an extended time, leaving one part of Africa or Greenland unpopulated while another was crowded. Therefore, the equability in question is simply a result of the lack, on continents, of any conditions that could pause it for an indefinite period. The extent to which it might be influenced by other factors isn’t part of this discussion.

CHAPTER V.

The Ugrians of Lapland, Finland, Permia, the Ural Mountains and the Volga—area of the light-haired families—Turanians—the Kelts of Ireland, Scotland, Wales, Gaul—the Goths—the Sarmatians—the Greeks and Latins—difficulties of European ethnology—displacement—intermixture—identification of ancient families—extinction of ancient families—the Etruscans—the Pelasgi—isolation—the Basks—the Albanians—classifications and hypotheses—the term Indo-European—the Finnic hypothesis.

The Ugrians from Lapland, Finland, Permia, the Ural Mountains, and the Volga—regions of light-haired families—Turanians—the Celts of Ireland, Scotland, Wales, and Gaul—the Goths—the Sarmatians—the Greeks and Romans—challenges in European ethnology—migration—intermixing—identifying ancient families—extinction of ancient families—the Etruscans—the Pelasgians—isolation—the Basques—the Albanians—classifications and theories—the term Indo-European—the Finnic hypothesis.

V. From Lapland to North-western Asia.—That the Norwegian of Norway stands in remarkable contrast to the Lap of Finmark has already been stated. There is nothing wonderful in this. The Norwegian is a German from the south, and, consequently, a member of an intrusive population.

V. From Lapland to North-western Asia.—It's already been pointed out how the Norwegian from Norway is quite different from the Laplander of Finmark. This isn't surprising. The Norwegian is a German from the south and, therefore, part of an incoming population.

The extent to which a similar contrast exists between the Lap and Finlander is more remarkable; since both belong to the same family. Of this family the Laps are an extreme branch both in respect to physical conformation and geographical position. The term most conveniently used to designate the stock in question is Ugrian. In Asia the Voguls, Ostiaks, Votiaks, Tsheremis, Morduins, and other tribes are Ugrian.

The similarity between the Laps and Finns is even more striking since they both belong to the same family. In this family, the Laps represent an extreme branch in terms of both physical characteristics and geographical location. The term that is most commonly used to refer to this group is Ugrian. In Asia, the Voguls, Ostiaks, Votiaks, Tsheremis, Morduins, and other tribes are considered Ugrian.

The Laps are generally speaking swarthy in complexion, black-haired and black-eyed; and so[159] are the Majiars of Hungary. The other Ugrians, however, are remarkable for being, to a great extent, a blonde population. The Tshuvatsh have a light complexion with black and somewhat curly hair, and grey eyes. The Morduins fall into two divisions, the Ersad and Mokshad; of which the former are more frequently red-haired than the latter. The Tsheremiss are light-haired; the Voguls and Ostiaks often red-haired; the Votiaks the most red-haired people in the world. Of course, with this we have blue or grey eyes and fair skins.

The Laps are generally dark-skinned, with black hair and black eyes; the same goes for the Majiars of Hungary. However, the other Ugrians are notable for being mostly a blonde population. The Tshuvatsh have a light complexion with black, slightly curly hair and gray eyes. The Morduins are divided into two groups, the Ersad and Mokshad, with the former often having red hair more than the latter. The Tsheremiss are light-haired; the Voguls and Ostiaks often have red hair; and the Votiaks are the most red-haired people in the world. Naturally, this comes with blue or gray eyes and fair skin.

Few writers seem ever to have considered the exceptional character of this physiognomy: indeed, it is unfortunate that no term like blanco (or branco), denoting men lighter-coloured than the Spaniards and Portuguese, in the same way that Negro denotes those who are darker, has been evolved. It is, probably, too late for it being done now. At any rate, complexions like those of the fair portion of the people of England are quite as exceptional as faces of the hue of the Gulf-of-Guinea Blacks.

Few writers seem to have ever thought about the unique nature of this appearance: unfortunately, there isn’t a term like blanco (or branco) to describe people lighter-skinned than the Spaniards and Portuguese, similar to how Negro identifies those who are darker. It's probably too late for that to change now. In any case, complexions like those of the fair segment of the English population are just as rare as the faces of people from the Gulf of Guinea.

Like the Negro, the White-skin is chiefly found within certain limits; and like Negro the term White is anthropological rather than ethnological, i. e. the physiognomy in question is spread over different divisions of our species, and by no means coincides with ethnological relationship.

Like Black people, White people are mostly found within certain boundaries; and like Black, the term White is based on anthropology rather than ethnology, i.e. the physical characteristics in question can be found across different groups of our species and do not necessarily align with ethnological connections.

Nine-tenths of the fair-skinned populations of the world are to be found between 30° and 65° N. lat., and west of the Oby. Nine-tenths of them also are to be found amongst the following four families:—1. The Ugrian. 2. The Sarmatian. 3. The Gothic. 4. The Keltic.

Nine-tenths of the light-skinned populations of the world are located between 30° and 65° N. latitude, west of the Oby River. Nine-tenths of them also belong to the following four families: 1. The Ugrian. 2. The Sarmatian. 3. The Gothic. 4. The Celtic.

The physical conditions which most closely coincide with the geographical area of the blonde branches of the blonde families require more study than they have found. From the parts to north and south it is distinguished by the palpably intelligible differences of latitude. The parts to the east of it differ less evidently; nevertheless, they are steppes and table-lands rather than tracts of comparatively low forests. The blonde area is certainly amongst the moister parts of the world[23].

The physical conditions that most closely match the geographical area of the blonde branches of the blonde families need more research than they've received. To the north and south, it's marked by clear differences in latitude. The areas to the east show less obvious variation; however, they consist more of steppes and plateaus than low forests. The blonde region is definitely one of the wetter parts of the world[23].

That the Ugrians graduate into the Turks of Tartary and Siberia—themselves a division of a class containing the great Mongolian and Tungusian branches—has been admitted by most writers; Schott having done the best work with the philological part of the question.

That the Ugrians evolved into the Turks of Tartary and Siberia—who are part of a larger class that includes the major Mongolian and Tungus branches—has been acknowledged by most authors; Schott has done the best work on the linguistic aspects of the issue.

Gabelentz has, I am informed, lately shown that the Samoeid tongues come within the same class;—[161]a statement which, without having seen his reasons, I am fully prepared to admit.

Gabelentz has recently demonstrated, as I've been told, that the Samoeid languages belong to the same category;—[161] a claim that, although I haven't seen his evidence, I am completely ready to accept.

Now what applies to the Samoeids[24] applies to two other classes as well:—

Now what applies to the Samoeids[24] also applies to two other classes:—

  • 1. The Yeniseians[24] on the Upper Yenisey; and
  • 2. The Yukahiri[24] on the Kolyma and Indijirka.

This gives us one great stock, conveniently called Turanian, whereof—

This gives us one great stock, conveniently called Turanian, whereof—

  • 1. The Mongolians—
  • 2. The Tungusians—of which the Mantshús are the best known representatives—
  • 3. The Ugrians, falling into the Lap, Finlandic, Majiar and other branches;—along with
  • 4. The Hyperboreans, or Samoeids, Yeniseians, and Yukahiri—are branches.

And this stock takes us from the North Cape to the Wall of China.

And this stock takes us from the North Cape to the Great Wall of China.

VI. From Ireland to the Western parts of Asia.—The rule already referred to, viz. that an island must always be considered to have been peopled from the nearest part of the nearest land of a more continental character than itself, unless reason can be shown to the contrary, applies to the population of Ireland; subject to which view, the point of emigration from Great Britain must have been the parts about the Mull of Cantyre; and the[162] point of immigration into Ireland must have been the province of Ulster, and the parts that are nearest to Scotland.

VI. From Ireland to the Western parts of Asia.—The rule mentioned earlier, stating that an island is usually populated from the nearest part of the nearest land that is more continental in nature, unless proven otherwise, applies to the population of Ireland. Based on this, the point of emigration from Great Britain must have been around the Mull of Cantyre; and the point of immigration into Ireland must have been the province of Ulster, particularly the areas closest to Scotland.

Upon this doctrine I see no reason whatever to refine, since the unequivocal fact of the Scotch and Irish Gaelic being the same language confirms it. Here, however, as in so many other cases, the opinions and facts by no means go together; and the notion of Scotland having been peopled from Ireland, and Ireland from some other country, is a common one. The introduction of the Scots of Scotland from the west, when examined, will be found to rest almost wholly on the following extract from Beda:—“procedente tempore, tertiam Scottorum nationem in parte Pictorum recepit, qui duce Reudâ de Hiberniâ progressi, amicitiâ vel ferro sibimet inter eos has sedes quas hactenus habent vindicârunt; à quo videlicet duce, usque hodie Dalreudini vocantur: nam eorum linguâ Daal partem significat.

I see no reason to refine this doctrine, since the clear fact that Scottish and Irish Gaelic are the same language confirms it. However, like in many other cases, opinions and facts don’t align; the idea that Scotland was populated from Ireland, and Ireland from another country, is a common belief. The introduction of the Scots from Scotland in the west, when examined, mostly relies on the following excerpt from Bede:—“At the right time, the third nation of the Scots joined the Picts, who, led by Reuda from Ireland, claimed these territories through friendship or force; from this leader, they are still called the Dalreudini today: in their language, Daal means part.

Now, as this was written about the middle of the eighth century, there are only two statements in it that can be passed for contemporary evidence, viz. the assertion that at the time of Beda a portion of Scotland was called the country of the Dalreudini; and that in their language daal meant part. The Irish origin, then, is grounded upon either an inference or a tradition; an inference or[163] a tradition which, if true, would prove nothing as to the original population of either country; since, the reasoning which applies to the relation between the peninsula of Malacca and the island of Sumatra applies here. There, the population first passed from the peninsula to the island, and then back again—reflected so to say—from the island to the peninsula. Mutatis mutandis this was the case with Scotland and Ireland, provided that there was any migration at all.

Now, since this was written around the middle of the eighth century, there are only two claims in it that can be considered contemporary evidence: the claim that during Beda's time, part of Scotland was known as the country of the Dalreudini; and that in their language, daal meant part. The Irish origin, then, is based on either an inference or a tradition; an inference or [163] a tradition that, if accurate, wouldn’t prove anything about the original population of either country; since the reasoning that applies to the relationship between the Malay Peninsula and the island of Sumatra applies here. There, the population first moved from the peninsula to the island and then back again—so to speak—reflected from the island to the peninsula. Mutatis mutandis this was the case with Scotland and Ireland, assuming any migration occurred at all.

Upon this point the evidence of Beda may or may not be sufficient for the historian. It is certainly unsatisfactory to the ethnologist.

Upon this point, Beda's evidence may or may not be enough for the historian. It is definitely unsatisfactory for the ethnologist.

In saying this, I by no means make the disparaging insinuation that the historian is unduly credulous, or that the ethnologist is a model of caution. Neither assertion would be true. The ethnologist, however, like a small capitalist, cannot afford so much credit as his fellow-labourer in the field of Man. He is like a traveller, who, leaving home at the twilight of the evening, must be doubly cautious when he comes to a place where two roads meet. If he take the wrong one, he has nothing but the long night before him; and his error grows from bad to worse. But the historian starts with the twilight of the dawn; so that the further he goes the clearer he finds his way, and the easier he rectifies any previous false[164] turnings. To argue from cause to effect is to journey in the dim light of the early morn till we reach the blazing noon. To argue from effect to cause is to change the shades of evening for the gloom of night.

By saying this, I’m not suggesting that the historian is overly gullible or that the ethnologist is a paragon of caution. Neither of those claims is true. The ethnologist, however, like a small business owner, doesn’t have the same leeway as his colleague studying humanity. He’s like a traveler who, leaving home at dusk, must be extra careful when he reaches a fork in the road. If he chooses the wrong path, he faces nothing but a long night ahead, and his mistake only worsens. But the historian starts with the break of dawn; the further he travels, the clearer his path becomes, and it’s easier for him to correct any earlier wrong turns. To deduce from cause to effect is to journey in the dim light of early morning until we reach the bright noon. To deduce from effect to cause is to exchange the dusk for the darkness of night.

As Scotland is to Ireland, so is Gaul to England. From the Shannon to the Loire and Rhine, the stock is one; one, but not indivisible—the British branch (containing the Welsh) and the Gaelic (containing the Scotch) forming its two primary sections.

As Scotland is to Ireland, so is Gaul to England. From the Shannon to the Loire and Rhine, the lineage is the same; the same, but not unified—the British branch (including the Welsh) and the Gaelic branch (including the Scots) make up its two main sections.

Next to the Kelts come the Goths; the term Gothic being a general designation taken from a particular people. Germany is the native land of these; just as Gaul was of the Kelts. Hence, they lie to the north of that family, as well as to the west of it. Intrusive above all the other populations of the earth, the branches of the Gothic tribes have brought themselves in contact and collision with half the families of the world. First, they encroached upon the Kelts, and, for a time, the tide of conquest fluctuated. It was the Rhine which was the disputed frontier—disputed as much in Cæsar’s time as our own. Next, they revenged themselves on the aggressions of Rome; so that the Ostro-goths conquered Italy, and the Visi-goths Spain. Then came the Franks of France, and the Anglo-Saxons of England. In the ninth[165] and tenth centuries the edges of the German swords turned another way, and Mecklenburg, Pomerania, Prussia, and part of Courland, Silesia, Lusatia, and Saxony were wrested from the Sarmatians, lying to the west and south-west.

Next to the Celts are the Goths; the term Gothic is a general name derived from a specific group of people. Germany is their homeland, just as Gaul is for the Celts. Therefore, they are located to the north of that group, as well as to the west. Pushing into various regions around the world, the Gothic tribes have interacted and clashed with many different societies. Initially, they expanded into Celtic territory, resulting in a back-and-forth of conquest. The Rhine served as the contested border—just as it was during Caesar's time as it is today. Then, they retaliated against Roman expansion; this led to the Ostrogoths conquering Italy and the Visigoths taking Spain. After that came the Franks of France and the Anglo-Saxons of England. In the ninth[165] and tenth centuries, the focus of the German swords shifted, and regions like Mecklenburg, Pomerania, Prussia, parts of Courland, Silesia, Lusatia, and Saxony were seized from the Sarmatians to the west and southwest.

It is not unusual to raise the two divisions of the great Sarmatian stock to the rank of separate substantive groups—independent of each other, though intimately allied. In this case Lithuania, Livonia, and Courland contain the smaller division, which is conveniently and generally called the Lithuanic; the population being agricultural, scanty, limited to the country in opposition to the towns, and unimportant in the way of history; a population, which in the tenth and eleventh centuries was cruelly conquered under the plea of Christianity by the German Knights of the Sword—rivals in rapacity and bloodshed to their equivalents of the Temple and St. John—a population which, at the present moment, lies like iron between the hammer and the anvil, between Russia and Prussia; and which, for one brief period only, under the Jagellons, exercised the equivocal rights of a dominant and encroaching family—for one brief period only within the true historical æra. How far it may have done more at an earlier epoch remains to be considered.

It's not uncommon to elevate the two divisions of the large Sarmatian group to the status of separate and distinct entities—each independent, yet closely connected. In this context, Lithuania, Livonia, and Courland represent the smaller division, often referred to as the Lithuanic; this population is primarily agricultural, sparse, confined to rural areas as opposed to towns, and holds little historical significance. In the tenth and eleventh centuries, they were brutally conquered in the name of Christianity by the German Knights of the Sword—who were as ruthless and bloody as their counterparts from the Temple and St. John. Today, this population finds itself caught in a precarious situation, trapped between Russia and Prussia; and only for a brief time, under the Jagellons, did they wield the questionable power of a dominant and encroaching family—just a short time within the true historical era. Whether they accomplished more during earlier periods is still up for debate.

The other branch is the Slavonic; comprising[166] the Russians, the Servians, the Illyrians, the Slovenians of Styria and Carinthia, the Slovaks of Hungary, the Tsheks of Bohemia, and the Lekhs (or Poles) of Poland, Mazovia, and Gallicia. A great deal is said about the future prospects of this stock; the doctrine of certain able historians being, that as they are the youngest of nations—a term somewhat difficult to define—and have played but a small part in the world’s history hitherto, they have a grand career before them; a prospect more glorious than that of the Romano-Keltic French, or the Germanic English of the Old and New World. I doubt the inference, and I doubt the fact on which it rests. But of this more anon. The Sarmatian Slavono-Lithuanians are the fourth great family of Europe. They certainly lie in the line of migration which peopled Ireland from Asia.

The other branch is the Slavonic; comprising[166] the Russians, the Serbians, the Illyrians, the Slovenes of Styria and Carinthia, the Slovaks of Hungary, the Czechs of Bohemia, and the Lechs (or Poles) of Poland, Mazovia, and Galicia. A lot is said about the future prospects of this group; some skilled historians believe that since they are the youngest of nations—a term that's somewhat tricky to define—and have played a minor role in world history so far, they have a bright future ahead of them; a prospect more glorious than that of the Romano-Celtic French or the Germanic English from the Old and New Worlds. I question this conclusion, and I doubt the premise it’s based on. But more on that later. The Sarmatian Slavono-Lithuanians are the fourth major family of Europe. They definitely fall in line with the migration that populated Ireland from Asia.

South of these lie two branches of a fresh stock, divided from each other, and presenting the difficult phænomenon of geographical discontinuity conjoined with ethnological affinity. Separated from the most southern Slavonians by the two intrusive populations of the Wallachians and the Majiars, and by the primitive family of the Albanians, come—

South of these are two branches of a new population, separated from each other, creating the challenging phenomenon of geographical separation paired with ethnic similarity. Cut off from the southernmost Slavs by the two intervening groups of the Wallachians and Magyars, along with the original group of Albanians, come—

  • a. The Greeks—and separated from the Slavonians of Carinthia and Bohemia by intrusive[167] Germans at the present moment, and by the mysterious Etruscans in ancient times, come—
  • b. The Italians.—We may call these two families Latin or Hellenic instead of Greek and Italian, if we choose; and as the distribution of nations is best studied during the earliest periods of their history, the former terms are the better.

Before we can consider the classification of these four families—Ugrian, Kelt, Gothic, and Græco-Latin—some fresh observations and certain new facts are requisite.

Before we can look into the classification of these four families—Ugrian, Kelt, Gothic, and Græco-Latin—we need some new observations and certain recent facts.

The ethnology of Europe is undoubtedly more difficult than that of any of the three other quarters of the globe—perhaps more so than that of all the world besides. It has not the character of being so—but so it is. The more we know the more we may know. Illustrated as is Europe by the historian and the antiquarian, it has its dark holes and corners made all the more visible from the illumination.

The study of European ethnology is definitely more challenging than that of any of the other three parts of the world—maybe even more challenging than studying the entire globe. It doesn’t seem like it should be, but it really is. The more we learn, the more there is to uncover. Even though Europe is well-documented by historians and researchers, it still has its hidden gaps and obscure areas that stand out even more because of the knowledge we have.

In the first place, the very fact of its being the home of the great historical nations has made it the scene of unparalleled displacements; for conquest is the great staple of history, and conquest and displacement are correlative terms. A greater portion of Europe can be shown to be held by either mixed or conquering nations than is to be found elsewhere—not that this absolutely proves the encroachments[168] to have been greater; but that gives prominence to the greater degree in which they have been recorded. Hence, where in other parts of the world we shut up our papers and say de non apparentibus, &c., in Europe we are forced upon the obscurest investigations, and the subtlest trains of reasoning.

First of all, the fact that it is the home of significant historical nations has made it a place of unmatched displacements; after all, conquest is a major theme in history, and conquest and displacement are closely related concepts. A larger part of Europe can be shown to be inhabited by either mixed or conquering nations compared to other places—not that this necessarily proves the encroachments[168] were greater; but it highlights how much more they have been documented. Therefore, while in other parts of the world we can close our files and say de non apparentibus, & etc., in Europe we are compelled to delve into the most obscure inquiries and the most intricate lines of reasoning.

How great is this displacement? The history of only a few out of many of the conquering nations tells us a pregnant story in this respect. It shows us what has taken place within the comparatively brief span of the historical period. What lies beyond this it only suggests.

How significant is this change? The history of just a few of the conquering nations provides a powerful story in this regard. It reveals what has happened within the relatively short time of the historical period. What lies beyond this is only hinted at.

The Ugrians with one exception have ever suffered from the encroachments of others rather than been encroachers themselves. But the exception is a remarkable one.

The Ugrians, with one exception, have always experienced the encroachments of others instead of being the ones to encroach. But that exception is quite noteworthy.

It is that of the Majiars of Hungary, who, whatever claims they may set up for an extraction more illustrious than the one which they share with the Laplanders and Ostiaks, are unequivocally Ugrians—no Circassians, as has been vainly fancied, and no descendants from the Huns of Attila, as has been more reasonably supposed. This latter, however, is a supposition invalidated by the high probability of the warriors of the Scourge of God having been Turk.

It is about the Magyars of Hungary, who, despite any claims they might make about having a more distinguished ancestry than the one they share with the Laplanders and Ostyaks, are clearly Ugrians—definitely not Circassians, as some have mistakenly believed, and not descendants of Attila's Huns, as has been more reasonably thought. However, this latter idea is challenged by the strong probability that the warriors of the Scourge of God were actually Turkic.

Be this, however, as it may, their advent into[169] Europe is no earlier than the tenth century, the country which they left having been the present domain of the Bashkirs.

Be this as it may, their arrival into[169] Europe is no earlier than the tenth century, the country they left having been the current territory of the Bashkirs.

The amount of displacement effected by the Kelts is difficult to determine. We hear of them in so many places that the family seems to be ubiquitous. Utterly disbelieving the Cimmerii of the Cimmerian Bosphorus to have been Keltic, and doubtful about both the Scordisci of the ancient Noricum, and the Celtiberians of ancient Spain, I am inclined to limit the Keltic area at its maximum extension, to Venice westwards, and to the neighbourhood of Rome southwards. But this is not enough. They may have been aboriginal in parts which they seem to have invaded as immigrants. This complicates the question and makes it as hard to ascertain the extent of their encroachments on others, as the extent to which others have encroached on them—a point for further notice.

The amount of displacement caused by the Celts is hard to determine. We hear about them in so many places that their presence seems everywhere. Completely disbelieving that the Cimmerians of the Cimmerian Bosphorus were Celtic, and uncertain about both the Scordisci of ancient Noricum and the Celtiberians of ancient Spain, I’m inclined to restrict the Celtic area at its maximum extension to the region west of Venice and the area around Rome to the south. But that’s not enough. They might have been native in some parts that they seem to have invaded as immigrants. This complicates the issue and makes it just as difficult to figure out how much they encroached on others as it is to determine how much others have encroached on them—a point for further discussion.

The Goths have ever extended their frontier—a frontier which I believe to have once reached no farther than the Elbe[25]. From thence to the Niemen they have encroached at the expense of the Sarmatians—Slavonic or Lithuanic as the case may be.

The Goths have always pushed their borders—borders that I think once only reached as far as the Elbe[25]. From there to the Niemen, they have expanded at the cost of the Sarmatians—whether they are Slavic or Lithuanian.

In the time of Tacitus[25] it is highly probable that there were no Goths north of the Eyder.[170] Since then, however, Denmark, Sweden, and Norway have been wrested from earlier occupants and become Scandinavian.

In Tacitus's time[25] it's very likely that the Goths didn't live north of the Eyder.[170] Since then, though, Denmark, Sweden, and Norway have been taken from their previous inhabitants and turned Scandinavian.

The Ugrian family originally extended as far south as the Valdai Mountains. This part of their area is now Russian.

The Ugrian family originally stretched all the way down to the Valdai Mountains. This region is now part of Russia.

The conquests of Rome have given languages derived from the Latin to Northern Italy, the Grisons, France, Spain and Portugal, Wallachia and Moldavia.

The conquests of Rome have provided languages derived from Latin to Northern Italy, the Grisons, France, Spain, Portugal, Wallachia, and Moldavia.

This brings us to another question, that of—

This brings us to another question, which is—

Intermixture.—It is certain that the language of England is of Anglo-Saxon origin, and that the remains of the original Keltic are unimportant. It is by no means so certain that the blood of Englishmen is equally Germanic. A vast amount of Kelticism, not found in our tongue, very probably exists in our pedigrees.

Intermixture.—It's clear that the language of England comes from Anglo-Saxon roots, and that the traces of the original Celtic language are minimal. However, it's not as certain that the heritage of English people is solely Germanic. A significant amount of Celtic influence, which isn't reflected in our language, likely exists in our ancestry.

The ethnology of France is still more complicated. Many writers make the Parisian a Roman on the strength of his language; whilst others make him a Kelt on the strength of certain moral characteristics combined with the previous Kelticism of the original Gauls.

The study of the different cultures in France is even more complex. Some authors consider the Parisian to be Roman based on their language; meanwhile, others view them as Celtic due to certain moral traits linked to the Celtic heritage of the original Gauls.

Spanish and Portuguese, as languages, are derivatives from the Latin. Spain and Portugal, as countries, are Iberic, Latin, Gothic, and Arab in different proportions.

Spanish and Portuguese, as languages, come from Latin. Spain and Portugal, as countries, have a mix of Iberian, Latin, Gothic, and Arab influences in various amounts.

Italian is modern Latin all the world over: yet[171] surely there must be much Keltic blood in Lombardy, and much Etruscan intermixture in Tuscany.

Italian is modern Latin everywhere: yet[171] there must be a lot of Celtic blood in Lombardy, and significant Etruscan mixing in Tuscany.

In the ninth century every man between the Elbe and the Niemen spoke some Slavonic dialect. They now nearly all speak German. Surely the blood is less exclusively Gothic than the speech.

In the ninth century, every man between the Elbe and the Niemen spoke some Slavonic dialect. Now, almost all of them speak German. Clearly, the blood is less exclusively Gothic than the language.

I have not fallen in with any evidence which induces me to consider the great Majiar invasion of Hungary as anything other than a simple military conquest. If so—and the reasoning applies to nine conquests out of ten—the female half of the ancestry of the present speakers of the Majiar language must have been the women of the country. These were Turk, Slavonic, Turko-Slavonic, Romano-Slavonic, and many other things besides—anything, in short, but Majiar.

I haven't come across any evidence that makes me think the major Magyar invasion of Hungary was anything but a straightforward military takeover. If that's the case—and this reasoning holds true for nine out of ten conquests—the female ancestors of today's speakers of the Magyar language must have been the women from that region. They were Turk, Slavic, Turko-Slavic, Romano-Slavic, and much more—anything, basically, but Magyar.

The Grisons language is of Roman origin.

The Grisons language comes from Roman roots.

So is the Wallachian of Wallachia and Moldavia.

So is the Wallachian from Wallachia and Moldavia.

Nevertheless, in each country, the original population must be, more or less, represented in blood by the present.

Nevertheless, in each country, the original population must, more or less, be represented in blood by the present.

This is enough to show what is meant by intermixture of blood, the extent to which it demands a special investigation of its own, and the number of such investigations required in the ethnology of Europe. Indeed, it is the subject of a special department of the science, conveniently called minute ethnology.

This is enough to demonstrate what is meant by the mixing of blood, the extent to which it requires a separate investigation, and the number of such investigations needed in the study of European ethnology. In fact, it's the focus of a specific area of the field, conveniently referred to as minute ethnology.

Identification of ancient nations, tribes, and families.—If there were no such thing as migration and displacement, the study of the ancient writers would be an easy matter. As it is, it is a very difficult one. Nine-tenths of the names of Herodotus, Strabo, Cæsar, Pliny, Tacitus, and similar writers on ethnology and geography, are not to be found in the modern maps; or, if found, occur in new localities. Such is the case with the name of our own nation, the Angli, who are now known as the people of Engl-land; whereas, in the eyes of Tacitus they were Germans. Others have not only changed place, but have become absolutely extinct. This is, of course, common enough. Again, the name itself may have changed, though the population to which it applies may have remained the same, or name and place may have each changed.

Identification of ancient nations, tribes, and families.—If there were no such thing as migration and displacement, studying ancient writers would be straightforward. As it stands, it’s quite challenging. Most of the names from Herodotus, Strabo, Cæsar, Pliny, Tacitus, and other writers on ethnology and geography don’t appear on modern maps; or, if they do, they appear in different locations. This is the case with our own nation, the Angli, who are now called the people of Engl-land; however, Tacitus viewed them as Germans. Some groups have not only moved but have completely disappeared. This is quite common. Additionally, the name itself might have changed, even if the population it refers to has stayed the same, or both the name and the location might have changed.

All this creates difficulties, though not such as should deter us from their investigation. At the same time, the criticism that must be applied is of a special and peculiar sort. One of the more complex questions with which it has to deal is the necessary but neglected preliminary of determining the language in which this or that geographical or ethnological name occurs; which is by no means an off-hand process. When Tacitus talks of Germans, or Herodotus of Scythians, the terms[173] Scythian and German may or may not belong to the language of the people thus designated; in other words, they may or may not be native names—names known to the tribes to which the geographer applies them.

All this creates challenges, but they shouldn’t stop us from investigating. At the same time, the criticism we need to apply is somewhat unique. One of the more complicated questions we need to address is the necessary but often overlooked step of determining the language in which this or that geographical or ethnological name appears; which is definitely not a simple task. When Tacitus mentions Germans, or Herodotus refers to Scythians, the terms Scythian and German may or may not be part of the language of the people they refer to; in other words, they might or might not be native names—names that the tribes themselves recognize.

Generally such names are not native—a statement which, at first, seems hazardous; since the primâ facie view is in favour of the name by which a particular nation is known to its neighbours, being the name by which it characterizes itself. Do not our neighbours call themselves Français, whilst we say French, and are not the names identical? In this particular case they are; but the case is an exceptional one. Contrast with it that of the word Welsh. Welsh and Wales are the English names of the Cymry—English, but by no means native; English, but as little Welsh (strictly speaking) as the word Indian, when applied to the Red Men of America, is American.

Generally, such names are not native—a claim that may initially seem risky; since the primâ facie perspective supports that the name a particular nation uses to identify itself is the name that neighboring countries would recognize it by. Don't our neighbors refer to themselves as Français, while we call them French, and aren't those names identical? In this specific case, they are; but this is an exception. Compare that with the word Welsh. Welsh and Wales are the English names for the Cymry—they're English, but definitely not native; English, but in the same way that the term Indian, when applied to the Indigenous peoples of America, is American.

Welsh is the name by which the Englishman denotes his fellow-citizens of the Principality. The German of Germany calls the Italians by the same designation; the same by which he knows the Wallachians also—since Wallachia and Wales and Welschland are all from the same root. What an error would it be to consider all these three countries as identical, simply because they were so in name! Yet if that name were native, such would[174] be the inference. As it is, however, the chief link which connects them is their common relation to Germany (or Germanic England); a link which would have been wholly misinterpreted had we overlooked the German origin of the term, and erroneously referred it to the languages of the countries whereto it had its application.

Welsh is how the Englishman refers to his fellow citizens of the Principality. The German from Germany uses the same term for the Italians; it's the same term he uses for the Wallachians as well—since Wallachia, Wales, and Welschland all come from the same root. It would be a mistake to think of these three countries as the same just because they share a name! However, if that name were native, that might[174] be a valid conclusion. Nonetheless, the main connection between them is their shared relationship to Germany (or Germanic England); a connection that would be completely misunderstood if we ignored the German origin of the term and incorrectly related it to the languages spoken in the countries to which it applies.

An extract from Klaproth’s ‘Asia Polyglotta’ shall further illustrate this important difference between the name by which a nation is known to itself, and the name by which it is known to its geographer. A certain population of Siberia calls itself Nyenech or Khasovo. But none of its neighbours so call it. On the contrary, each gives it a different appellation.

An excerpt from Klaproth’s ‘Asia Polyglotta’ will further highlight this significant difference between the name a nation uses for itself and the name it is known by to its geographer. A certain group in Siberia refers to itself as Nyenech or Khasovo. However, none of its neighbors refer to it that way. Instead, each one uses a different name.

The Obi-Ostiaks call it Jergan-Yakh.
Tungúsians Dyândal.
Syranians Yarang.
Woguls Yarran-Kum.
Russians Samöeid.

What if some ancient tribe were thus polyonymous? What if five different writers of antiquity had derived their information from the five different nations of its neighbours? In such a case there would have been five terms to one object; none of them belonging to the language for which they were used.

What if some ancient tribe had multiple names? What if five different writers from the past got their information from the five neighboring nations? In that case, there would be five names for one thing, and none of them would belong to the language they were used in.

The name, then, itself of each ancient population[175] requires a preliminary investigation. And these names are numerous—more so in Europe than elsewhere.

The name of each ancient population[175] requires some initial investigation. And there are many of these names—more in Europe than in other places.

The importance of the populations to which such names apply is greater in Europe than elsewhere. It is safe to say this; because there is a reason for it. From its excessive amount of displacement, Europe is that part of the world where there are the best grounds for believing in the previous existence of absolutely extinct families, or rather in the absolute extinction of families previously existing. There are no names in Asia that raise so many problems as those of the European Pelasgi and Etrurians.

The significance of the populations associated with these names is greater in Europe than in other places. This can be confidently stated because there is a rationale behind it. Due to its high levels of displacement, Europe is the area of the world where there is the strongest reason to believe in the complete extinction of families that once existed. There are no names in Asia that pose as many questions as the European Pelasgi and Etrurians.

The changes and complications involved in the foregoing observations (and they are but few out of many) are the results of comparatively recent movements; of conquests accomplished within the last twenty-five centuries; of migrations within (or nearly within) the historical period. Those truly ethnological phænomena which belong to the distribution itself of the existing families of Europe are, at least, of equal importance.

The changes and complications from the previous observations (and they are just a few out of many) are the results of relatively recent movements; of conquests achieved in the last twenty-five centuries; of migrations during (or almost during) the historical period. The truly ethnological phenomena that relate to the distribution itself of the current families of Europe are, at the very least, equally important.

The most marked instances of philological isolation are European; the two chief specimens being the Basque and Albanian languages.

The most notable examples of philological isolation are European; the two main examples being the Basque and Albanian languages.

The Basque language of the Pyrenees has the same relation to the ancient language of the[176] Spanish Peninsula that the present Welsh has to the old speech of Britain. It represents it in its fragments; fragments, whereof the preservation is due to the existence of a mountain stronghold for the aborigines to retire to. Now so isolated is this same Basque that there is no language in the world which is placed in the same class with it—no matter what the magnitude and import of that class may be.

The Basque language from the Pyrenees relates to the ancient language of the [176] Spanish Peninsula just as modern Welsh relates to the old language of Britain. It survives in its fragments; these fragments have been preserved thanks to a mountain stronghold where the native people could take refuge. Today, the Basque language is so isolated that there is no other language in the world that belongs to the same category as it—regardless of how significant that category may be.

The Albanian is just as isolated. As different from the Greek, Turkish and Slavonic tongues of the countries in its neighbourhood, as the Basque is from the French, Spanish and Breton, it is equally destitute of relations at a distance. It is unclassed—at least its position as Indo-European is doubtful.

The Albanian is just as isolated. It’s as different from the Greek, Turkish, and Slavic languages of the nearby countries as Basque is from French, Spanish, and Breton, and it also lacks connections with distant languages. It is unclassified—at least its status as Indo-European is uncertain.

What the Pelasgian and old Etruscan tongues were is uncertain. They were probably sufficiently different from the languages of their neighbourhood for the speakers of them to be mutually unintelligible. Beyond this, however, they may have been anything or nothing in the way of isolation. They may have been as peculiar as the Basque and Albanian. They may, on the other hand, have been just so unlike the Greek and Latin as to have belonged to another class—the value of that class being unascertained. Again, that class may or may not have existing representatives amongst the tongues[177] at present existing. I give no opinion on this point. I only give prominence to the isolation of the Basque and Albanian. We know these last to be so different from each other, and from all other tongues, as to come under none of the recognized divisions in the way of ethnographical philology and its classifications.

What the Pelasgian and ancient Etruscan languages were is unclear. They were probably distinct enough from the surrounding languages that their speakers couldn’t understand each other. Beyond that, they might have been anything or nothing in terms of isolation. They may have been as unique as Basque and Albanian. On the other hand, they may have been just different enough from Greek and Latin to belong to another category—the value of that category being unknown. Similarly, that category may or may not have representatives among the languages[177] that exist today. I don’t have an opinion on this matter. I just want to highlight the isolation of Basque and Albanian. We know that these two are so distinct from each other and from all other languages that they don’t fit into any of the recognized categories in ethnological linguistics and its classifications.

Indo-Germanic.—This brings us to the term Indo-Germanic; and the term Indo-Germanic brings us to the retrospect of the European populations—all of which, now in existence, have been enumerated, but all of which have not been classified.

Indo-Germanic.—This leads us to the term Indo-Germanic; and the term Indo-Germanic leads us to look back at the European populations—all of which have been listed, but not all have been categorized.

I. The Ugrians are a branch of the Turanians.

I. The Ugrians are a group within the Turanians.

The Turanians form either a whole class or the part of one, according to the light in which we view them; in other words, the group has one value in philology, and another in anatomy. This is nothing extraordinary. It merely means that their speech has more prominent characters than their physical conformation.

The Turanians make up either a whole class or part of one, depending on how we look at them; in other words, the group holds one significance in language studies and another in anatomy. This isn't unusual. It simply means that their language has more noticeable features than their physical structure.

I proceed, however, to our specification:—

I’ll keep sharing our details:—

  • a. The Turanians in respect to their physical conformation are a branch of the Mongolians; the Chinese, Eskimo and others, being members of similar and equivalent divisions.
  • b. In respect to their language, they are the[178] highest group recognized, a group subordinate to none other.

To change the expression of this difference, the anatomical naturalist of the Human Species has in the word Mongolian a term of generality to which the philologist has not arrived.

To express this difference, the anatomical naturalist of the Human Species has a broad term in the word Mongolian that the philologist has not reached.

II. The Greeks and Latins—the Sarmatians—and the Germans are referrible to a higher group; a group of much the same value as the Turanian.

II. The Greeks and Latins—the Sarmatians—and the Germans belong to a higher category; a category that is similarly significant as the Turanian.

The characteristics of this group are philological.

The traits of this group are linguistic.

  • a. The numerals of the three great divisions are alike.
  • b. A large per-centage of the names of the commoner objects are alike.
  • c. The signs of case in nouns, and of person in verbs, are alike.

So wide has been the geographical extent of the populations speaking languages thus connected (languages which separated from the common mother-tongue subsequent to the evolution of both the cases of nouns and the persons of verbs), that the literary language of India belongs to the class in question. Hence, when this fact became known, and when India passed for the eastern and Germany for the western extremity of[179] the great area of this great tongue, the term Indo-Germanic became current.

So vast has been the geographical reach of the populations that speak these connected languages (languages that diverged from a common ancestor after both noun cases and verb forms had developed) that the literary language of India falls into this category. Consequently, when this became known, and when India was recognized as the eastern end and Germany as the western end of[179] the wide area of this significant language, the term Indo-Germanic became widely used.

But its currency was of no long duration. Dr. Prichard showed that the Keltic tongues had Indo-Germanic numerals, a certain per-centage of Indo-Germanic names for the commoner objects, and Indo-Germanic personal terminations of verbs. Since then, the Keltic has been considered as a fixed language, with a definite place in the classification of the philologist; and the term Indo-European[26], expressive of the class to which, along with the Sarmatian, the Gothic, and the Classical tongues of Greece and Italy, it belongs, has superseded the original compound Indo-Germanic.

But its significance didn't last long. Dr. Prichard demonstrated that the Celtic languages had Indo-European numerals, a certain percentage of Indo-European names for everyday objects, and Indo-European personal endings on verbs. Since then, Celtic has been seen as a stable language, fitting into the philologist's classification; and the term Indo-European[26], which represents the group that includes Sarmatian, Gothic, and the Classical languages of Greece and Italy, has replaced the original term Indo-Germanic.

We now know what is meant by Indo-European; a term of, at least, equal generality with the term Turanian.

We now understand what is meant by Indo-European; a term that is, at least, as general as the term Turanian.

  • a. In physical conformation the Indo-Europeans are a branch of the higher division so improperly and inconveniently called Caucasian.
  • b. In language they are the highest group hitherto recognized, a group subordinate to none other.

And we have also improved our measure of the isolation of the—

And we have also improved how we measure the isolation of the—

III. Basques.—Anatomically these are Caucasian so-called. Philologically, they are the only[180] members of the group to which they belong, and that group is the highest recognized. They are like a species in natural history, which is the only one of its genus, the genus being the only one of its order, and the order being so indeterminate as to have no higher class to which it is subordinate.

III. Basques.—Anatomically, they are classified as Caucasian. Linguistically, they are the only[180] members of their group, which is considered the highest recognized. They resemble a species in natural history that is the sole representative of its genus, with that genus being the only one in its order, and the order being so undefined that it doesn't fall under any higher class.

IV. The Albanians are in the same predicament.

IV. The Albanians are in the same situation.

This is the state of classification which pre-eminently inspires us with the ambition of making higher groups; higher groups in philology, since in anatomy we have them ready-made—i. e. expressed by the terms Mongolian and Caucasian. The school which has made the most notable efforts in this way is the Scandinavian. In England it is, perhaps, better appreciated than in Germany, and in Germany better than in France.

This is the state of classification that primarily drives us to create broader categories; broader categories in philology, since in anatomy we already have them established—i.e. represented by the terms Mongolian and Caucasian. The school that has made the most significant efforts in this regard is the Scandinavian one. In England, it is perhaps more valued than in Germany, and in Germany more than in France.

I think it had great truth in fragments. It will first be considered on its philological side. Rask—the greatest genius for comparative philology that the world has seen—exhibited the germs of it in his work on the Zendavesta. Herein his hypothesis was as follows. The geologist will follow him with ease. Just as the later formations, isolated and unconnected of themselves, lie on an earlier, and comparatively continuous, substratum of secondary, palæozoic or primary antiquity, so do the populations speaking Celtic, Gothic, Slavonic, and Classical languages. Conquerors and[181] encroachers wherever they came in contact with stocks alien to their own, they made, at an early period of history, nine-tenths of Europe and part of Asia their own. But before them lay an aboriginal population—before them in the way of time. This consisted of tribes, more or less related to each other, which filled Europe from the North Cape to Cape Comorin and Gibraltar—progenitors of the Laplanders on the north, and the progenitors of the Basques of the Pyrenees on the south—all at one time continuous. This time was the period anterior to the invasion of the oldest of the above-mentioned families. More than this—Hindostan was similarly peopled; and, by assumption, the parts between Northern Hindostan and Europe.

I think it contains significant truths in pieces. First, let’s look at its linguistic aspect. Rask—the greatest mind in comparative linguistics the world has ever seen—showed the beginnings of this in his work on the Zendavesta. His hypothesis was as follows. The geologist will easily follow his thought. Just like later formations, which are isolated and disconnected, sit on top of an earlier, more continuous layer of secondary, Paleozoic, or primary age, so do the populations that speak Celtic, Gothic, Slavic, and Classical languages. Conquerors and encroachers, whenever they came into contact with groups different from their own, claimed nine-tenths of Europe and part of Asia early in history. But ahead of them was an indigenous population—ahead of them in terms of time. This population consisted of tribes that were more or less related to each other and stretched across Europe from the North Cape to Cape Comorin and Gibraltar—ancestors of the Laplanders in the north and the Basques in the Pyrenees in the south—all once connected. This was the time before the invasion of the earliest of the families mentioned above. Furthermore, Hindustan was similarly inhabited; and, by implication, so were the areas between Northern Hindustan and Europe.

Such the theory. Now let us look to the present distribution. Almost all Europe is what is called Indo-European, i.e. Celtic, Gothic, Slavonic, or Classical. But it is not wholly so. In Scandinavia we have the Laps; in Northern Russia the Finns; on the junction of Spain and France the Basques. These are fragments of the once continuous Aborigines—separated from each other by Celts, Goths, and Slavonians. Then, as to India. In the Dekhan we have a family of languages called the Tamul—isolated also. Between each of these points the population is homogeneous as[182] compared with itself; heterogeneous as compared with the tribes just enumerated. But there was once a continuity—even as the older rocks in geology are connected, whilst the newer ones are dissociated.

Here's the theory. Now let's consider the current distribution. Almost all of Europe is what we call Indo-European, meaning Celtic, Gothic, Slavonic, or Classical. But it’s not entirely that way. In Scandinavia, we have the Laps; in Northern Russia, the Finns; and at the border of Spain and France, the Basques. These are remnants of the once continuous indigenous peoples—separated from each other by Celts, Goths, and Slavs. Now, regarding India. In the Dekhan region, we have a group of languages known as Tamul, which are also isolated. Between each of these points, the population is homogeneous compared to itself; heterogeneous when compared to the tribes just mentioned. But there was once a continuity—just like the older rocks in geology are connected, while the newer ones are not.

Such was the hypothesis of Rask; an hypothesis to which he applied the epithet Finnic—since the Finn of Finland was the type and sample of these early, aboriginal, hypothetically continuous, and hypothetically connected tongues. The invasion, however, of the stronger Indo-Europeans broke them up. Be it so. It was a grand guess; even if wrong, a grand and a suggestive one. Still it was but a guess. I will not say that no details were worked out. Some few were indicated.

Such was Rask's hypothesis; one he called Finnic—since the Finn from Finland was the model and example of these early, native, supposedly continuous, and supposedly related languages. However, the invasion by the more powerful Indo-Europeans disrupted them. So be it. It was an impressive guess; even if it was incorrect, it was still significant and thought-provoking. Yet, it was still just a guess. I won't say that no details were developed. A few were mentioned.

Points which connected tongues so distant as the Tamul and the Finn were noticed—but more than this was not done. Still, it was a doctrine which, if it were proved false, was better than a large per-centage of the true ones. It taught inquirers where to seek the affinities of apparently isolated languages; and it bade them pass over those in the neighbourhood and look to the quarters where other tongues equally isolated presented themselves.

Points that connected languages as distant as Tamil and Finnish were observed—but nothing more than that was accomplished. Still, it was a theory which, even if proven wrong, was better than many of the truths out there. It guided researchers on where to find connections between seemingly isolated languages; and it encouraged them to overlook those nearby and focus on areas where other equally isolated languages appeared.

I have mentioned Rask as the apostle of it. Arndt, I am told, was the originator. The countrymen, however, of Rask have been those who have most acted on it.

I have mentioned Rask as its advocate. I've heard that Arndt was the one who started it. However, Rask's fellow countrymen have been the ones who have really put it into action.

But they took up the weapon at the other end. It is the anatomists and archæologists of Scandinavia who have worked it most. The Celts have a skull of their own just as they have a language. So have the Danes, Swedes, Norwegians, Germans, Dutch, and Englishmen. Never mind its characteristics. Suffice, that it was—or was supposed to be—different from that of the Finns and Basques. So had the Hindús—different from that of the Tamuls. Now the burial-places of the present countries of the different Gothic populations contain skulls of the Gothic character only up to a certain point. The very oldest stand in contrast with the oldest forms but one. The very oldest are Lap, Basque, and Tamul. Surely this—if true—confirms the philological theory. But is it true? I am not inclined to change the terms already used. It is a grand and a suggestive guess.

But they took up the weapon on the other side. It’s the anatomists and archaeologists of Scandinavia who have studied it the most. The Celts have a skull of their own just like they have a language. So do the Danes, Swedes, Norwegians, Germans, Dutch, and English. Never mind the details. All that matters is that it was—or was thought to be—different from that of the Finns and Basques. The Hindus had one too—different from the Tamils. Now the burial sites in the current countries of the different Gothic populations contain skulls of the Gothic type only up to a certain extent. The very oldest ones contrast with the oldest forms except for one. The very oldest are Lap, Basque, and Tamil. Surely this—if it’s true—supports the philological theory. But is it true? I’m not inclined to change the terms already used. It’s a grand and suggestive guess.

More than this it is not necessary to say at present; since any further speculation in respect to the migration (or migrations) which peopled Europe from the hypothetical centre in Asia is premature. The ethnology of Asia is necessary as a preliminary.

More than this, there's no need to say right now; any further guesses about the migration (or migrations) that populated Europe from the supposed center in Asia are too early. Understanding the ethnology of Asia is essential as a starting point.

FOOTNOTES

[23] When ethnological medicine shall have become more extensively studied than it is, it will probably be seen that the populations of the area in question are those which are most afflicted by scrofula.

[23] As ethnological medicine becomes more widely studied, it will likely be recognized that the people in the area in question are the ones most affected by scrofula.

[24] A table showing this is printed in the author’s ‘Varieties of Man,’ pp. 270–272.

[24] A table demonstrating this is included in the author’s ‘Varieties of Man,’ pp. 270–272.

[25] Both these points are worked out in detail in the Author’s Taciti Germania, with ethnological notes.

[25] Both of these points are explained in detail in the Author’s Taciti Germania, with ethnological notes.

[26] For a criticism on this term see pp. 8689.

[26] For a critique on this term, see pp. 8689.

CHAPTER VI.

The Monosyllabic Area—the Tʻhay—the Môn and Khô—Tables—the Bʻhot—the Chinese—Burmese—Persia—India—Tamulian family—the Brahúi—the Dioscurians—the Georgians—Irôn—Mizjeji—Lesgians—Armenians—Asia Minor—Lycians—Carians—Paropamisans—Conclusion.

The Monosyllabic Area—the T'hay—the Mon and Kho—Tables—the B'hot—the Chinese—Burmese—Persia—India—Tamulian family—the Brahui—the Dioscurians—the Georgians—Iran—Mijjeji—Lesgians—Armenians—Asia Minor—Lycians—Carians—Paropamisans—Conclusion.

Our plan is now to take up the different lines of migration at the points where they were respectively broken off. This was at their different points of contact with Asia. The first line was—

Our plan is now to revisit the various migration routes at the points where they were separately interrupted. This was at their different points of contact with Asia. The first line was—

I. The American.—In affiliating the American with the Asiatic, the ethnologist is in the position of an irrigator, who supplies some wide tract of thirsty land with water derived from a higher level, but kept from the parts below by artificial embankments. These he removes; his process being simple but effectual, and wholly independent of the clever machinery of pumps, water-wheels, and similar branches of hydraulics. The obstacle being taken away, gravitation does the rest.

I. The American.—By connecting the American with the Asiatic, the ethnologist acts like an irrigator who brings water from a higher source to a dry area, but initially holds it back with barriers. Once he removes those barriers, the process is straightforward yet effective, relying entirely on the natural flow of water instead of complex machines like pumps or waterwheels. With the obstacle gone, gravity takes care of the rest.

The over-valuation of the Eskimo peculiarities is the great obstacle in American ethnology. When these are cut down to their due level, the connexion between America and Asia is neither more nor less than one of the clearest we have.[185] It is certainly clearer than the junction of Africa and north-western Asia; not more obscure than that between Oceanica and the Transgangetic Peninsula; and incalculably less mysterious than that which joins Asia to Europe.

The exaggerated importance placed on Eskimo traits is a major barrier in American ethnology. When these traits are evaluated accurately, the connection between America and Asia becomes one of the clearest links we have. It is definitely clearer than the connection between Africa and northwest Asia; no more unclear than that between Oceania and the Transgangetic Peninsula; and far less mysterious than the link between Asia and Europe.[185]

Indeed, there is no very great break, either philologically or anatomically, until we reach the confines of China. Here, the physical conformation keeps much the same: the language, however, becomes monosyllabic.

Indeed, there is not a significant break, either in language or anatomy, until we reach the borders of China. Here, the physical structure remains largely the same: however, the language becomes monosyllabic.

Now many able writers lay so much stress upon this monosyllabic character, as to believe that the separation between the tongues so constituted and those wherein we have an increase of syllables with a due amount of inflexion besides, is too broad to be got over. If speech were a mineral, this might, perhaps, be true. But speech grows, and if one philological fact be more capable of proof than another, it is that of a monosyllabic and uninflected tongue being a polysyllabic and inflected one in its first stage of development—or rather in its non-development.

Now many skilled writers emphasize this one-syllable aspect so much that they believe the gap between these kinds of languages and those with more syllables and inflections is too wide to bridge. If language were a mineral, this might hold true. But language evolves, and if there's one linguistic fact that's well-supported, it's that a language made up of single syllables and lacking inflection can transform into a multi-syllable, inflected one in its early stages of development—or rather, in its non-development.

The Kamskadale, the Koriak, the Aino-Japanese, and the Korean are the Asiatic languages most like those of America. Unhesitatingly as I make this assertion—an assertion for which I have numerous tabulated vocabularies as proof—I am by no means prepared to say that one-tenth part of[186] the necessary work has been done for the parts in question; indeed, it is my impression that it is easier to connect America with the Kurile Isles and Japan, &c., than it is to make Japan and the Kurile Isles, &c., Asiatic. The group which they form belongs to an area where the displacements have been very great. The Kamskadale family is nearly extinct. The Koreans, who probably occupied a great part of Mantshuria, have been encroached on by both the Chinese and the Mantshús. The same has been the case with the Ainos of the lower Amúr. Lastly, the whole of the northern half of China was originally in the occupancy of tribes who were probably intermediate to their Chinese conquerors, the Mantshús and the Koreans.

The Kamskadale, Koriak, Aino-Japanese, and Korean languages are the Asian languages most similar to those of America. While I'm confident in this statement—backed by many detailed vocabularies as evidence—I'm not ready to claim that even a fraction of[186] the necessary research has been completed for these areas; in fact, I believe it's easier to connect America with the Kurile Islands and Japan, etc., than to categorize Japan and the Kurile Islands, etc., as Asian. The group they create is part of an area where changes have been extensive. The Kamskadale family is almost extinct. The Koreans, who likely occupied a large part of Manchuria, have been pushed out by both the Chinese and the Manchus. The same situation applies to the Ainos of the lower Amur River. Lastly, the entire northern half of China was originally inhabited by tribes that were probably intermediate between their Chinese conquerors, the Manchus, and the Koreans.

That the philological affinities necessary for making out the Asiatic origin of the Americans lie anywhere but on the surface of the language, I confess. Of the way whereby they should be looked for, the following is an instance.

That the language connections needed to understand the Asian origins of Americans are not obvious, I admit. Here's an example of how they should be sought.

The Yukahiri is an Asiatic language of the Kolyma and Indijirka. Compare its numerals with those of the other tribes in the direction of America. They differ. They are not Koriak, not Kamskadale, by no means Eskimo; nor yet Kolúch. Before we find the name of a single Yukahiri unit reappearing in other languages, we[187] must go as far south along the western coast of America as the parts about Vancouver’s Island. There we find the Hailtsa tongue—where malúk = two. Now the Yukahiri term for two is not malúk. It is a word which I do not remember. Nevertheless, malúk = two does exist in the Yukahiri. The word for eight is malúk × the term for four (2 × 4).

The Yukahiri is an Asian language spoken in the Kolyma and Indijirka regions. Compare its numbers with those of other tribes heading towards America. They are different. They are neither Koriak nor Kamskadale, definitely not Eskimo; and not Kolúch either. Before we find a single Yukahiri number showing up in other languages, we must travel as far south along the western coast of America as the areas around Vancouver Island. There we discover the Hailtsa language—where malúk = two. Now, the Yukahiri word for two is not malúk. It’s a word I can’t recall. Still, malúk = two does exist in Yukahiri. The word for eight is malúk × the term for four (2 × 4).

This phænomenon would be repeated in English if our numerals ran thus:—1. one; 2. pair; 4. four; 8. two-fours; in which case all arguments based upon the correspondence or non-correspondence of the English numerals with those of Germany and Scandinavia would be as valid as if the word two were the actual name of the second unit. Indeed, in one respect they would be more so. The peculiar way in which the Hailtsa malúk reappears in the Yukahiri is conclusive against the name being borrowed. Whether it is accidental is quite another question. This depends upon the extent to which it is a single coincidence, or one out of many. All that is attempted, at present, is to illustrate the extent to which resemblances may be disguised, and the consequent care requisite for detecting them[27].

This phenomenon would be repeated in English if our numerals looked like this:—1. one; 2. pair; 4. four; 8. two-fours; in which case all arguments based on the correspondence or lack of correspondence of the English numerals with those of Germany and Scandinavia would be as valid as if the word two were actually the name of the second unit. In fact, in one way they would be even more valid. The unique way the Hailtsa malúk reappears in the Yukahiri definitely argues against the name being borrowed. Whether it is accidental is a completely different question. This depends on whether it is a single coincidence or one of many. What is being attempted right now is to show how much resemblances can be disguised, and the need for careful detection of them[27].

II. The connexion between Oceanica and South-eastern Asia.—The physical conformation of the[188] Malays is so truly that of the Indo-Chinese, that no difficulties lie in this department. The philological ones are a shade graver. They involve the doubt already suggested in respect to the relations between a monosyllabic tongue like the Siamese, and a tongue other than monosyllabic like the Malay.

II. The connection between Oceania and Southeast Asia.—The physical shape of the Malays is remarkably similar to that of the Indo-Chinese, so there are no issues in this area. The linguistic ones are a bit more serious. They raise the question already mentioned about the relationship between a monosyllabic language like Siamese and a language that is not monosyllabic like Malay.

This brings us to the great area of the monosyllabic tongues itself. Geographically, it means China, Tibet, the Transgangetic Peninsula, and the Sub-Himalayan parts of northern India, such as Nepal, Sikkim, Assam, the Garo country, and other similar localities.

This leads us to the significant region of the monosyllabic languages themselves. Geographically, it refers to China, Tibet, the Transgangetic Peninsula, and the Sub-Himalayan regions of northern India, including Nepal, Sikkim, Assam, the Garo country, and other similar areas.

Politically, it means the Chinese, Nepalese, Burmese and Siamese empires, along with several British-Indian and independent tribes.

Politically, it refers to the Chinese, Nepalese, Burmese, and Siamese empires, alongside various British-Indian and independent tribes.

The chief religion is Buddhism; the physical conformation unequivocally Mongolian.

The main religion is Buddhism; the physical appearance is clearly Mongolian.

The transition from mono-syllabic to poly-syllabic has never created much difficulty with myself: nor do I think it will do so with any writer who considers the greater difficulties involved in the denial of it. What these are will become apparent when we look at the map of Asia, and observe the tongues which come in contact with those of the class in question. Then it will become clear that unless we allow it to form a connecting link, it not only stands alone itself, but isolates other families. Thus, it is only through the Transgangetic Peninsula that the Oceanic family can be connected with the Indian; a connexion which rests on grounds sufficiently good to have induced careful writers[28] to believe the affiliation to be direct and immediate. It is only through this same Transgangetic Peninsula plus Tibet and China that the great Siberian families—Turanian and Japanese—can be similarly connected with the Oceanic. Yet such a connexion[190] really exists, though, from its indirect character, it is but partially recognised. Nevertheless, it is recognised (often, perhaps, unconsciously) by every inquirer who hesitates about separating the Malay from the Mongol.

The shift from mono-syllabic to poly-syllabic has never been a challenge for me, and I don’t think it will be for any writer who acknowledges the bigger issues that come with denying it. What those issues are will become clear when we look at a map of Asia and notice the languages that interact with the ones in question. It will then be evident that unless we let it serve as a link, it not only stands alone but also isolates other language families. Therefore, the only way the Oceanic family can be linked to the Indian is through the Transgangetic Peninsula; a connection strong enough to lead careful writers[28] to believe that the relationship is direct and immediate. This same Transgangetic Peninsula, along with Tibet and China, is also how the major Siberian families—Turanian and Japanese—can be similarly connected to the Oceanic family. Yet, such a connection[190] does exist, though its indirect nature means it is only partially recognized. Still, it is recognized (often, perhaps, unconsciously) by anyone who hesitates to separate the Malay from the Mongol.

A difficulty of far greater magnitude arises from the following considerations:—There are two principles upon which languages may be classified. According to the first, we take two or more languages as we find them, ascertain certain of their characteristics, and then inquire how far these characteristics coincide. Two or more languages, thus taken, may agree in having a large per-centage of grammatical inflexions, in which case they would agree in certain positive characters. On the other hand, two or more languages may agree in the negative fact of having a small and scanty vocabulary, and an inflexional system equally limited.

A much bigger challenge comes from the following points: There are two ways to classify languages. The first approach involves looking at two or more languages as they are, identifying some of their features, and then checking how similar those features are. If the languages we examine have a high percentage of grammatical inflections, they would share certain positive traits. Conversely, two or more languages might share the negative trait of having a small and limited vocabulary, along with an equally restricted inflectional system.

The complication here suggested lies in a fact of which a little reflection will show the truth, viz. that negative points of similarity prove nothing in the way of ethnological connexion; whence, as far as the simplicity of their respective grammars is concerned, the Siamese, Burmese, Chinese and Tibetan may be as little related to each other, or to a common mother-tongue, as the most unlike languages of the whole world of Speech.

The complication here suggested comes from a fact that a bit of reflection will reveal: negative points of similarity prove nothing in terms of ethnic connection; therefore, in terms of how simple their grammars are, the Siamese, Burmese, Chinese, and Tibetan languages may be just as unrelated to each other or to a common ancestor language as the most different languages in the entire world of speech.

Again—it by no means follows that because all the tongues of the family in question are comparatively destitute of inflexion, they are all in the same class. A characteristic of the kind may arise from two reasons; non-development, or loss. There is a stage anterior to the evolution of inflexions, when each word has but one form, and when relation is expressed by mere juxtaposition, with or without the superaddition of a change of accent. The tendencies of this stage are to combine words in the way of composition, but not to go further. Every word retains, throughout, its separate substantive character, and has a meaning independent of its juxtaposition with the words with which it combines.

Once again—it doesn’t necessarily mean that because all the languages in the family mentioned are relatively lacking in inflection, they are all in the same category. This characteristic might come about for two reasons: either non-development or loss. There is a stage before the development of inflections when each word has only one form, and when relationships are expressed simply by placement, with or without a change in accent. The tendencies of this stage are to combine words in a compound manner, but not to go beyond that. Every word retains its individual substantive quality throughout and has a meaning that stands alone, regardless of its placement with other words.

But there is also a stage subsequent to such an evolution, when inflexions have become obliterated and when case-endings, like the i in patr-i, are replaced by prepositions (in some cases by postpositions) like the to in to father; and when personal endings, like the o in voc-o, are replaced by pronouns, like the I in I call. Of the first of these stages, the Chinese is the language which affords the most typical specimen that can be found in the present late date of languages—late, considering that we are looking for a sample of its earliest forms. Of the last of these stages the[192] English of the year 1851 affords the most typical specimen that can be found in the present early date of language—early, considering that we are looking for a sample of its latest forms.

But there is also a stage after such an evolution, when inflections have disappeared and case endings, like the i in patr-i, are replaced by prepositions (in some cases by postpositions) like the to in to father; and when personal endings, like the o in voc-o, are replaced by pronouns, like the I in I call. Of the first of these stages, Chinese is the language that provides the most typical example found in the current late date of languages—late, considering that we are looking for a sample of its earliest forms. Of the last of these stages, the [192] English of the year 1851 provides the most typical example found in the current early date of language—early, considering that we are looking for a sample of its latest forms.

Hence—

Thus—

  • a. How far the different monosyllabic tongues are all in the same stage—is one question.
  • b. Whether this stage be the earlier or the later one—is another; and—
  • c. Whether they are connected by relationship as well as in external form—is a third.

In answer to this, it is safe to say (a.) that they are all uninflected, because inflexions have yet to be evolved; not because they have been evolved and lost—as is the case with the English, a language which stands at one end of the scale, just as the Chinese does at the other.

In response to this, it is safe to say (a.) that they are all uninflected because inflections have yet to develop; not because they have developed and been lost—as is the case with English, a language that stands at one end of the scale, just as Chinese does at the other.

(b.) They are, also, all connected by a bonâ fide ethnological relationship; as can be shown by numerous tables; the Chinese and Tibetans being, apparently, the two extremes, in the way of difference.

(b.) They are all connected by a genuine ethnological relationship, as can be demonstrated by numerous tables; the Chinese and Tibetans seem to represent the two extremes in terms of differences.

As for their geographical distribution, it is a blank-and-prize lottery, with large and small areas in juxtaposition and contrast, just as has been the case in America and in Africa; the Sub-Himalayan parts of British India, Sikkim[193] and Nepâl, and the Indo-Burmese frontier (or the country about Assam and Munipúr) being the tracts where the multiplicity of mutually unintelligible tongues within a limited district is greatest.

Regarding their geographical distribution, it resembles a lottery, featuring both large and small areas placed next to each other, similar to patterns seen in America and Africa. The Sub-Himalayan regions of British India, Sikkim[193], Nepal, and the Indo-Burmese border (which includes the regions around Assam and Manipur) are the areas where the variety of completely different languages within a small region is most pronounced.

Again—whenever the latter distribution occurs we have either a mountain-fastness, political independence, or the primitive pagan creed—generally all three.

Again—whenever this distribution happens, we have either a mountain stronghold, political independence, or the basic pagan belief—usually all three.

The population speaking a monosyllabic language which is in the most immediate contact with the continental tribes of the Oceanic stock, is the Southern Siamese. This reaches as far as the northern frontier of Kedah (Quedah), about 8° N. L. Everything north of this is monosyllabic; with the exception of a Malay settlement (probably, though not certainly, of recent origin) on the coast of Kambogia.

The group that speaks a monosyllabic language and is closest to the continental tribes of the Oceanic stock is the Southern Siamese. This area extends up to the northern border of Kedah (Quedah), which is about 8° N. L. Everything north of this is monosyllabic, except for a Malay settlement on the coast of Kambogia that is probably, though not definitely, of recent origin.

Now the great stock to which the Siamese belong is called Tʻhay. Its direction is from north to south, coinciding with the course of the great river Menam; beyond the head-waters of which the Tʻhay tribes reach as far as Assam. Of these northern Tʻhay, the Khamti are the most numerous; and it is important to know that as many as 92 words out of 100 are common to this dialect and to the classical Siamese of Bankok.

Now the main group that the Siamese belong to is called Tʻhay. It stretches from north to south, following the path of the great river Menam; beyond its sources, the Tʻhay tribes extend all the way to Assam. Among these northern Tʻhay, the Khamti are the largest in number; and it's important to note that about 92 out of 100 words are shared between this dialect and the classical Siamese of Bangkok.

Again, the intermediate tribes of the Upper and[194] Middle Menam—the Lau—speak a language as unequivocally Siamese as the Khamti. If so, the Tʻhay tongue, widely extended as it is in the particular direction from north to south, is a tongue falling into but few dialects; the inference from which is, that it has spread within a comparatively recent period. Consequently, it has encroached upon certain other populations and effected certain displacements.

Again, the intermediate tribes of the Upper and[194] Middle Menam—the Lau—speak a language that is just as clearly Siamese as the Khamti. If that’s the case, the Tʻhay language, which is widespread from north to south, has few dialects; this suggests that it has spread fairly recently. As a result, it has taken over parts of certain other populations and caused some changes in their distribution.

I think that even in the minuter details that now suggest themselves we can see our way; so far, at least, as to determine in which direction the movement took place—whether it were from north to south or from south to north.

I believe that even in the smaller details that come to mind, we can discern our path; at least to the extent that we can identify the direction of the movement—whether it was from north to south or from south to north.

Few classes of tongues can be better studied for ethnological purposes than the monosyllabic. A paper of Buchanan’s, and another of Leyden’s, are amongst the most valuable articles of the Asiatic Researches. One of Mr. Brown’s in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal gives us numerous tabulated vocabularies for the Burmese, Assamese and Indian frontiers. Mr. Hodgson and Dr. Robertson have done still more for the same parts. Lastly, the chief southern dialects, which have been less studied, are tabulated in the second volume of ‘Crawfurd’s Embassy to Siam.’

Few types of languages can be studied for ethnological purposes better than monosyllabic ones. A paper by Buchanan and another by Leyden are among the most valuable contributions to the Asiatic Researches. One of Mr. Brown's pieces in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal provides numerous organized vocabularies for the Burmese, Assamese, and Indian frontiers. Mr. Hodgson and Dr. Robertson have contributed even more for those regions. Finally, the main southern dialects, which have received less attention, are listed in the second volume of ‘Crawfurd’s Embassy to Siam.’

Upon looking over these, we find specimens of[195] the two tongues which lie east and west of the southern Siamese; the first being the Khô language of Kambogia, and the second the Môn of Pegu. Each of these is spoken over a small area; indeed the Môn, which is, at present, nearly limited to the Delta of the Irawaddi, is fast giving way before the encroaching dialects of the Burmese class, whilst the Khô of Kambogia is similarly limited to the lower part of the Mekhong, and is hemmed in by the Siamese, the Lau, and the Anamitic of Cochin China.

Upon reviewing these, we find examples of[195] the two languages spoken to the east and west of southern Siam; the first is the Khô language of Cambodia, and the second is the Môn of Pegu. Each of these languages is spoken in a small area; in fact, the Môn, which is currently almost confined to the Delta of the Irawaddi, is quickly being replaced by the encroaching dialects of the Burmese family, while the Khô of Cambodia is likewise restricted to the lower part of the Mekong and is surrounded by the Siamese, the Lao, and the Anamitic of Cochinchina.

Now, separated as they are, the Môn and Khô are liker to each other than either is to the interjacent Siamese; the inference from this being that at one time they were connected by transitional and intermediate dialects, aboriginal to the lower Menam, but now displaced by the Siamese of Bankok introduced from the parts to the northwards.

Now, since they are separated, the Môn and Khô are more alike than either is to the Siamese in between; this suggests that at one time they were connected by transitional and intermediate dialects native to the lower Menam, but these have now been replaced by the Siamese from Bangkok, which was brought in from the northern regions.

If this be the case, the monosyllabic tongue most closely allied to those of the Malayan Peninsula (which are not monosyllabic) is not the present Siamese, but the language which the present Siamese displaced.

If that's the case, the monosyllabic language most similar to those of the Malayan Peninsula (which are not monosyllabic) is not the current Siamese, but the language that the current Siamese replaced.

How far this view is confirmed by any special affinities between the Malay dialects with the Môn and Khô is more than I can say. The examination, however, should be made.

How much this perspective is supported by any specific connections between the Malay dialects and Môn and Khô is more than I can determine. However, the investigation should be conducted.

The southern Tʻhay dialects are not only less like the Môn and Khô than is expected from their locality, but the northern ones are less like those of the Indo-Burmese frontier and Assam than the geographical contiguity prepares us to surmise; since the per-centage of words common to the Khamti and the other dialects of Munipur and Assam is only as follows[29].

The southern Tʻhay dialects are not only less similar to Môn and Khô than we would expect based on their location, but the northern dialects are also less similar to those of the Indo-Burmese border and Assam than we might anticipate given their geographic closeness. The percentage of shared words between the Khamti dialect and the other dialects of Manipur and Assam is only as follows[29].

Siamese. Khamti.
0 1 per cent. with the Aka.
0 1 Abor.
3 5 Mishimi.
6 8 Burmese.
8 8 Karien.
3 3 Singpho.
10 10 Jili.
1 3 Garo.
3 3 Munipúri.
1 1 Songphu.
0 0 Kapwi.
1 1 Koreng.
0 0 Maram.
0 0 Kamphung.
0 0 Luhuppa.
0 0 North Tankhul.
0 0 Central Tankhul.
0 0 South Tankhul.
0 0 Khoibu.
0 0 Maring.

This shows that their original locality is to be sought in an eastern as well as in a northern direction.

This shows that their original location should be sought in both an eastern and a northern direction.

If the Tʻhay dialects are less like the Burmese than most other members of their class, they are more like the Bʻhot of Tibet.

If the T'hay dialects are less similar to Burmese than most others in their group, they are more similar to the B'hot dialect of Tibet.

English boat.
Ahom ru.
Khamti hu.
Lau heic.
Siamese reng.
W. Tibetan[30] gru.
S. Tibetan[30] kua.
English bone.
Khamti nuk.
Lau duk.
Siamese ka-duk.
S. Tibetan ruko.
English crow.
Ahom ka.
Khamti ka.
Lau ka.
Siamese ka.
W. Tibetan kha-ta.
English ear.
Khamti (3) hú.
W. Tibetan sá.
S. Tibetan amcho.
English egg.
Ahom khrai.
Khamti khai.
Lau khai.
Siamese khai.
English father.
Ahom (3) po.
W. Tibetan phá.
S. Tibetan pálá.
English fire.
Ahom (3) fai.
W. Tibetan má.
S. Tibetan mé.
English flower.
Ahom blok.
Khamti mok.
Lau dok.
Siamese dokmai.
W. Tibetan me-tog.
S. Tibetan men-tok.
English foot.
Ahom tin.
W. Tibetan rkang-pa.
S. Tibetan kango.
English hair.
Ahom phrum.
Khamti phom.
Lau phom.
Siamese phom.
W. Tibetan skra.
—— spu.
S. Tibetan ta.
—— kra.
English head.
Ahom ru.
Khamti ho.
Lau ho.
Siamese hoa.
W. Tibetan mgo.
S. Tibetan go.
English moon.
Siamese tawan.
W. Tibetan zlava.
S. Tibetan dawa.
English mother.
Ahom (4) me.
Tibetan ama.
English night.
Khamti (3) khün.
W. Tibetan m tshan-mo.
S. Tibetan chen-mo.
English oil.
Ahom man grá.
Khamti nam.
—— man.
Lau (2) nam.
—— man.
S. Tibetan num.
English road.
Ahom (2) táng.
Siamese tháng.
W. Tibetan lami.
S. Tibetan lani.
English salt.
Ahom klu.
Khamti ku.
Lau keu.
—— keou.
Siamese kleua.
English skin.
Ahom plek.
W. Tibetan pag-spa.
S. Tibetan pag-pa.
English tooth.
Ahom khiu.
Khamti khiu.
Lau khiau.
Siamese khiau.
Tibetan só.
English tree.
Ahom tun.
Khamti tun.
Lau tón.
Siamese tón.
W. Tibetan l. jon-shing.
S. Tibetan shin dong.
English three.
Ahom (3) sam.
W. Tibetan q-sum.
S. Tibetan sum.
English four.
Ahom (3) si.
W. Tibetan bzhi.
S. Tibetan zhyi.
English five.
Ahom (3) ha.
W. Tibetan hna.
S. Tibetan gna.
English six.
Ahom ruk.
Siamese (3) hok.
W. Tibetan druk.
S. Tibetan thú.
English nine.
Ahom (3) kau.
W. Tibetan d-gu.
S. Tibetan guh.
English in, on.
Ahom nu.
Khamti nau.
Lau neu.
Tibetan la, na.
English now.
Ahom tinai.
Khamti tsang.
Lau leng.
W. Tibetan deng-tse.
S. Tibetan thanda.
English to-morrow.
Ahom sang-manai.
Tibetan sang.
English drink.
Siamese deum.
W. Tibetan pthung.
S. Tibetan thung.
English sleep.
Ahom (2) non.
W. Tibetan nyan.
S. Tibetan nyé.
English laugh.
Ahom khru.
Khamti khó.
Lau khóa.
Siamese hoaro.
W. Tibetan bgad.
S. Tibetan fgá.

[30] S. means the spoken, W. the written Tibetan. The collation has been made from a table of Mr. Hodgson’s in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. The Ahom is a Tʻhay dialect.

[30] S. stands for the spoken Tibetan, while W. refers to the written Tibetan. The comparison has been drawn from a table by Mr. Hodgson in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. The Ahom is a Tʻhay dialect.

The Bʻhot itself is spoken over a large area with but little variation. We anticipate the inference. It is an intrusive tongue, of comparatively recent diffusion. What has been its direction? From east to west rather than from west to east; at least such is the deduction from its similarity to the Tʻhay, and from the multiplicity of dialects—representatives of a receding population—in the Himalayas of Nepâl and Sikkim. This, however, is a point on which I speak with hesitation.

The Bʻhot language is spoken over a wide area with minimal variation. We can guess the implication. It’s a language that has spread relatively recently. What’s its direction of spread? It’s moved from east to west rather than from west to east; at least that’s the conclusion drawn from its similarity to the Tʻhay and the many dialects—representatives of a diminishing population—in the Himalayas of Nepal and Sikkim. However, I’m uncertain about this point.

Dialects of the Bʻhot class are spoken as far westward as the parts about Cashmír and the watershed of the Indus and Oxus. This gives us the greatest extent eastwards of any unequivocally monosyllabic tongue.

Dialects of the Bʻhot class are spoken as far west as the areas around Kashmir and the watersheds of the Indus and Oxus rivers. This marks the greatest eastern reach of any clearly monosyllabic language.

The Chinese seem to have effected displacements as remarkable for both breadth and length as the Tʻhay were for length. We get at their original locality by the exhaustive process. On the northern and western frontier they keep encroaching[200] at the present moment—at the expense of the Mantshús and Mongolians. For the provinces of Chansi, Pe-tche-li, Chantung, Honan, &c., indeed, for four-fifths of the whole empire, the uniformity of speech indicates a recent diffusion. In Setshuen and Yunnan the type changes probably from that of the true Chinese to the Tibetan, Tʻhay and Burmese. In Tonkin and Cochin the language is like but different—like enough to be the only monosyllabic language which is placed by any one in the same section with the Chinese, but different enough to make this position of it a matter of doubt with many. Putting all this together, the south and south-eastern provinces of China appear to be the oldest portions of the present area.

The Chinese seem to have made significant changes that are impressive both in scope and duration, much like the Tʻhay were notable for their longevity. We uncover their original location through a detailed process. On the northern and western borders, they continue to expand at the moment—taking over land from the Mantshús and Mongolians. In the provinces of Chansi, Pe-tche-li, Chantung, Honan, etc., in fact, for about four-fifths of the entire empire, the uniformity of language suggests it has spread recently. In Setshuen and Yunnan, the language type likely shifts from that of the true Chinese to Tibetan, Tʻhay, and Burmese. In Tonkin and Cochin, the language is similar yet distinct—similar enough to be recognized as the only monosyllabic language that some place in the same category as Chinese, but different enough that its classification is debated by many. Overall, it seems that the southern and southeastern provinces of China are the oldest parts of the current territory.

In fixing upon these as the parent provinces, the evidence of ethnology on the one side, and that of the mass of tradition and inference which passes under the honourable title of Chinese history on the other, disagree. This latter is as follows:—

In choosing these as the original provinces, the evidence from ethnology on one side and the extensive tradition and reasoning that fall under the esteemed label of Chinese history on the other are at odds. The latter is as follows:—

At some period anterior to 550 B.C., the first monarch with whom the improvement of China began, and whose name was Yao, ruled over a small portion of the present empire, viz. its north-west district; and the first nations that he fought against were the Yen and Tsi, in Pe-tche-li and Shantong respectively.

At some time before 550 B.C., the first king who started the progress of China, named Yao, ruled over a small part of what is now the country, specifically its north-west region. The first groups he battled were the Yen and Tsi, located in Pe-tche-li and Shantong, respectively.

Later still, Honan was conquered.

Later, Honan was conquered.

B.C. 550. All to the south of the Ta-keang was barbarous; and the title of King of Chinese was only Vang or prince, not Hoang-te or Emperor.

B.C. 550. Everything south of the Ta-keang was uncivilized; and the title of King of the Chinese was only Vang or prince, not Hoang-te or Emperor.

At this time Confucius lived. Amongst other things he wrote the Tschan-tsen, or Annals of his own time.

At this time, Confucius lived. Among other things, he wrote the Tschan-tsen, or Annals of his own time.

B.C. 213. Shi-hoang-ti, the first Emperor of all China, built the great wall, colonized Japan, conquered the parts about Nankin, and purposely destroyed all the previously existing documents upon which he could lay hand.

B.C. 213. Shi-hoang-ti, the first Emperor of all China, built the Great Wall, established colonies in Japan, conquered areas near Nanjing, and intentionally destroyed all existing documents he could find.

B.C. 94. Sse-mats-sian lived. What Shi-hoang-ti missed in the way of records, Sse-mats-sian preserved, and, as such, passes for the Herodotus China.

B.C. 94. Sse-mats-sian lived. What Shi-hoang-ti lacked in records, Sse-mats-sian preserved, and, as such, is regarded as the Herodotus of China.

A destruction of the earlier records, with a subsequent reconstruction of the history which they are supposed to have embodied, is always suspicious; and when once the principle of reconstruction is admitted, no value can be attached to the intrinsic probability of a narration. It may be probable. It may be true. It cannot, however, be historical unless supported by historical testimony; since, if true, it is a guess; and if probable, a specimen of the tact of the inventor. At best, it can but be a tradition or an inference, the basis of which may be a certain amount of fact—little or great according to the temperament of the investigator.

The destruction of earlier records, followed by a reconstruction of the history they supposedly contained, is always suspicious. Once the idea of reconstruction is accepted, no real value can be placed on the likelihood of a narrative. It might be probable. It might be true. However, it can't be considered historical unless it has historical evidence to back it up; because if it is true, it's just a guess, and if it's probable, it's just a reflection of the inventor's skills. At best, it can only serve as a tradition or an inference, based on some amount of fact—either a little or a lot, depending on the biases of the investigator.

Now, in the previous notice of the history of Chinese civilization, we have placed its claims to a high antiquity under as favourable a point of view as is allowable. They bear the appearance of truth—so much so, that if we had reason to believe that there were any means of recording them at so early an epoch as 600 years B.C., and of preserving them to so late a one as the year ’51, scepticism would be impertinent. But this is not the case. An historical fact must be taken upon evidence, not upon probabilities; and to argue the antiquity of a civilization like the Chinese from the antiquity of its history, and afterwards to claim an historical value for remote traditions on the strength of an early civilization, is to argue in a circle.

Now, in the previous overview of the history of Chinese civilization, we have presented its claims to a very old origin in the most favorable way possible. They seem credible—so much so that if we had any reason to believe there were ways to document them as early as 600 years B.C., and to keep those records intact until the year ’51, skepticism would be unwarranted. But that’s not the case. An historical fact must be supported by evidence, not just likelihood; and to suggest that the long history of a civilization like China validates its ancient status, and then to assert that early traditions are historically valuable based on that ancient civilization, is circular reasoning.

Without saying that all argument upon the antiquity of the Chinese Empire is of this sort, it may fairly be said that much of it has been so—so much as to make Confucius as mythological a character as Minos, and to bring the earliest reasonable records to an epoch subsequent to the introduction of Buddhism from India. Even this antiquity is only probable.

Without claiming that all discussions about the ancient history of the Chinese Empire are like this, it can be fairly stated that many of them are—enough to make Confucius as legendary a figure as Minos, and to push the earliest credible records to a time after Buddhism was brought in from India. Even this ancient history is only likely.

A square block of land between the Ganges and Upper Irawaddi is occupied by one dominant, and upwards of thirty subordinate sections of one and the same population—the Burmese. Some of these are mountaineers, and have retreated before[203] the Indians from the south and west—encroachers upon the originally Burmese countries of Assam, Chittagong and Sylhet. Others are themselves intruders, or (what is much the same) consolidators of conquered countries. Such are the Avans of the Burmese Empire, properly so called, who seem to have followed the course of the Irawaddi, displacing not only small tribes akin to themselves, but the Môn of Pegu, as well. Lastly, the Kariens emulate the Tʻhay in the length of their area and in its north-and-south direction, being found in the southern part of the Tenasserim Provinces (in 11° N. L.) and on the very borders of China (in 23° N. L.).

A square piece of land between the Ganges and Upper Irawaddi is occupied by one dominant group and over thirty subordinate sections of the same population—the Burmese. Some of these are mountain dwellers who have fled from the Indians coming from the south and west—invaders of the originally Burmese territories of Assam, Chittagong, and Sylhet. Others are intruders themselves or, in a similar vein, consolidators of conquered lands. These are the Avans of the Burmese Empire, who have tracked the route of the Irawaddi, pushing out not only smaller tribes related to them but also the Môn of Pegu. Finally, the Kariens stretch out like the Tʻhay in their extensive area and north-south direction, found in the southern part of the Tenasserim Provinces (at 11° N. L.) and right on the borders of China (at 23° N. L.).

No great family has its distribution so closely coincident with a water-system as the one in question. The plateau of Mongolia and the Himalayas are its boundaries. It occupies the whole[31] of all the rivers which rise within these limits, and fall into either the Bay of Bengal or the Chinese Sea; whereas (with the exception of the Himalayan portions of the Indus and the Ganges) it occupies none of the others. The lines of migration with the Indo-Chinese populations have generally followed the water-courses of the Indo-Chinese rivers; and civilization has chiefly flourished along their valleys. Yet, as these lead to an ocean[204] interrupted by no fresh continent, the effect of their direction has been to isolate the nations who possess them. I imagine that this has much more to do with peculiarities of the Chinese civilization than aught else. Had the Hoang-ho fallen into a sea like the Mediterranean, the Celestial Empire would, probably, have given and taken in the way of social and political influence, have acted on the manners of the world at large, and have itself been reacted on. Differences should only be attributed to so indefinite and so impalpable a force as race when all other things are equal.

No prominent family has its distribution so closely tied to a water system as the one we're discussing. The borders are defined by the plateau of Mongolia and the Himalayas. It encompasses all the rivers that flow within these boundaries and empty into either the Bay of Bengal or the Chinese Sea; whereas, with the exception of the Himalayan sections of the Indus and the Ganges, it includes none of the other rivers. The migration paths of the Indo-Chinese populations have generally followed the waterways of the Indo-Chinese rivers, and civilization has mainly thrived along their valleys. However, since these rivers lead to an ocean that isn't interrupted by any new continents, their direction has resulted in isolating the nations that possess them. I think this has a lot to do with the unique aspects of Chinese civilization more than anything else. If the Hoang-ho had flowed into a sea like the Mediterranean, the Celestial Empire would likely have both given and received social and political influence, impacting the behaviors of the world at large and being impacted in return. Differences should be attributed to something as vague and intangible as race only when all other factors are equal.

Upon the principle of taking the questions in the order of complexity, so as to dispose of the simplest first, I pass over, for the present, the connexion between Africa and South-Western Asia, and take the easier of the two European ones.

Upon the principle of addressing questions in order of complexity, starting with the simplest, I will set aside, for now, the connection between Africa and South-Western Asia, and focus on the easier of the two European ones.

The Turanians.—The line which, beginning at Lapland, and, after exhibiting the great Turanian affiliations, ends at the wall of China, comprising the Ugrians, Samoeids[32], Yeniseians[32], Yukahiri[32], Turks, Mongols, and Tungusians[33], is connected with the area of the monosyllabic languages in different degrees of clearness according to the criterion employed. The physical conformation is[205] nearly identical. The languages differ—the Turanian, like the Oceanic and the American, being inflected and polysyllabic[34]. With this difference, the complexities of the affiliation begin and end. Their amount has been already suggested.

The Turanians.—The line that starts in Lapland and, after showcasing the major Turanian connections, ends at the Great Wall of China includes groups like the Ugrians, Samoeids[32], Yeniseians[32], Yukahiri[32], Turks, Mongols, and Tungusians[33]. This line is linked to the area of monosyllabic languages, with varying degrees of clarity depending on the criteria used. The physical features are[205] almost identical. The languages vary—the Turanian language, like the Oceanic and American languages, is inflected and polysyllabic[34]. Other than this difference, the complexities of the relationships begin and end. The extent of these relationships has already been indicated.

A great part of Northern Europe, Independent Tartary, Siberia, Mongolia, Tibet, China, and the Transgangetic Peninsula, has now been disposed of. Nevertheless, India, Persia, Asia Minor, and Caucasus remain; in size inconsiderable, in difficulty great—greatly difficult because the points of contact between Europe and Asia, and Africa and Asia, fall within this area; greatly difficult because the displacements have been enormous; greatly difficult because, besides displacement, there has been intermixture as well. Lest any one undervalue the displacement, let him look at Asia Minor, which is now Turk, which has been Roman, Persian and Greek, and which has no single unequivocal remnant of its original population throughout its whole length and breadth. Yet, great as this is, it is no more than what we expect à priori. What families are and have been more encroaching than the populations hereabouts—Turks from the north, Arabs from the south, and Persians from the east? The[206] oldest empires of the world lie here—and old empires imply early consolidation; early consolidation, premature displacement. Then come the phænomena of intermixture. In India there is a literary language of considerable age, and full of inflexions. Of these inflexions not one in ten can be traced in any modern tongue throughout the whole of Asia. Yet they are rife and common in many European ones. Again, the words of this same language, minus its inflexions, are rife and common in the very tongues where the inflexions are wanting; in some cases amounting to nine-tenths of the language. What is the inference from this? Not a very clear one at any rate.

A large part of Northern Europe, Independent Tartary, Siberia, Mongolia, Tibet, China, and the Transgangetic Peninsula has been accounted for. However, India, Persia, Asia Minor, and the Caucasus remain; they are relatively small in size but extremely challenging—very difficult because the regions where Europe meets Asia, and Africa meets Asia, are located here; very difficult because the changes have been vast; very difficult because, in addition to displacement, there has also been mixing. To avoid underestimating the impact of this displacement, one only needs to look at Asia Minor, which is now Turkish, but has been Roman, Persian, and Greek, and has no single clear remnant of its original population throughout its entire expanse. Yet, as significant as this is, it's no more than what we would expect à priori. What groups have been more invasive than the populations in this area—Turks from the north, Arabs from the south, and Persians from the east? The[206] oldest empires of the world are found here—and ancient empires suggest early consolidation; early consolidation leads to premature displacement. Then we see the phenomena of mixing. In India, there is a literary language that is quite old and full of inflections. None of these inflections can be traced in even one out of ten modern languages across Asia. Yet, they are prevalent in many European languages. Moreover, the words of this same language, minus its inflections, are common in the very languages that lack these inflections, in some cases making up about 90% of the language. What can we conclude from this? The conclusion is not very clear at all.

Africa has but one point of contact with Asia, i.e. Arabia. It is safe to say this, because, whether we carry the migration over the Isthmus of Suez or the Straits of Babel-Mandeb, the results are similar. The Asiatic stock, in either case, is the same—Semitic. But Europe, in addition to its other mysteries, has two; perhaps three. One of these is simple enough—that of the Lap line and the Turanian stock. But the others are not so. It is easy to make the Ugrians Asiatic; but by no means easy to connect the other Europeans with the Ugrians. The Sarmatians, nearest in geography, have never been very successfully affiliated[207] with them. Indeed, so unwilling have writers been to admit this relationship, that the Finnic hypothesis, with all its boldness, has appeared the better alternative. Yet the Finnic hypothesis is but a guess. Even if it be not so, it only embraces the Basks and Albanians; so that the so-called Indo-Europeans still stand over.

Africa has only one connection with Asia, namely, Arabia. It's safe to say this because whether we consider migration across the Isthmus of Suez or the Straits of Bab-el-Mandeb, the outcomes are similar. The Asian background in either case is the same—Semitic. However, Europe, with its other mysteries, has two, maybe three. One is straightforward—the Lap line and the Turanian stock. But the others are more complex. It’s easy to classify the Ugrians as Asians, but linking other Europeans to the Ugrians is not so simple. The Sarmatians, who are geographically closest, have never been convincingly connected to them. In fact, writers have been so reluctant to accept this relationship that the Finnic hypothesis, despite its boldness, has come to seem like a better option. However, the Finnic hypothesis is merely a guess. Even if that’s not the case, it only includes the Basques and Albanians, leaving the so-called Indo-Europeans unaccounted for.

For reasons like these, the parts forthcoming will be treated with far greater detail than those which have preceded; with nothing like the detail of minute ethnology, but still slowly and carefully.

For reasons like these, the upcoming sections will be covered in much greater detail than the ones that came before; not with the precision of minute ethnology, but still slowly and thoughtfully.

All that thus stands over for investigation is separated from the area already disposed of by that line of mountains which is traced from the Garo Hills in the north-east of Bengal to the mouth of the Kuban in the Black Sea. First come the Eastern Himalayas, which, roughly speaking, may be said to divide the Indian kingdoms and dependencies from the Chinese Empire. They do not do so exactly, but they do so closely enough for the present purpose.

All that remains for investigation is isolated from the area already covered by the mountain range running from the Garo Hills in northeastern Bengal to the mouth of the Kuban River in the Black Sea. First are the Eastern Himalayas, which can broadly be described as separating the Indian kingdoms and territories from the Chinese Empire. They don't do this exactly, but it's close enough for our current purposes.

They may also be said, in the same way, to divide the nations of the Hindu from those of more typically Mongolian conformation.

They can also be described, in the same way, as separating the nations of the Hindu from those of a more typical Mongolian appearance.

They may also be said, in the same way, to divide the Indian tongues from the monosyllabic.

They can also be said, in the same way, to separate the Indian languages from the monosyllabic ones.

On the north side of this range, languages undoubtedly, monosyllabic are spoken as far westwards[208] as Little Tibet. On the south there are Hindu characteristics both numerous and undoubted as far in the same direction as Cashmír.

On the north side of this range, it's clear that monosyllabic languages are spoken all the way west to Little Tibet. On the south, there are many definite Hindu traits extending in the same direction to Cashmír.

Then comes a change. To the north and west of Cashmír is a Kohistan, or mountain-country, which will soon require being described in detail. The line, however, which we are at present engaged upon is that of the northern boundary of the Valley of the Kabúl River, the mountains between Cabul and Herat, and the continuation of the same ridge from Herat to the south-eastern corner of the Caspian. North of this we have—roughly speaking—the Uzbek and Turcoman Turks; south of it, the Afghans and Persians Proper. Bokhara, however, is Persian, and the Kohistan in question is not Turk—whatever else it may be.

Then comes a change. To the north and west of Cashmír is a Kohistan, or mountain country, which will soon need a detailed description. However, the focus right now is on the northern boundary of the Valley of the Kabul River, the mountains between Kabul and Herat, and the continuation of that same ridge from Herat to the southeastern corner of the Caspian. North of this, we have—broadly speaking—the Uzbek and Turcoman Turks; south of it, the Afghans and Persians Proper. However, Bokhara is Persian, and the Kohistan in question is not Turk—whatever else it may be.

To proceed—this line runs nearly parallel to the southern shore of the Caspian. Of the provinces to the north of it, Asterabad is partly Turk and partly Persian; Mazenderan and Ghilan, Persian. From Ghilan northwards and westwards, the valleys of the Cyrus and Araxes form the chief exception—but, saving these, all is mountain and mountaineership. Indeed, it is Ararat and Armenia which lie on our left, and the vast and vague Caucasus which rears itself in front.

To continue—this line runs almost parallel to the southern shore of the Caspian Sea. The provinces to the north of it include Asterabad, which is partly Turkish and partly Persian; Mazenderan and Ghilan are Persian. From Ghilan going north and west, the valleys of the Cyrus and Araxes are the main exceptions—other than that, it’s all mountains and mountain regions. In fact, Ararat and Armenia are to our left, and the expansive and unclear Caucasus looms in front of us.

The simplest ethnology of the parts between this range, the Semitic area, and the sea, is that of[209] the Persian province of Khorasan. With Persia we are so much in the habit of connecting ideas of Eastern pomp and luxury, that we are scarcely able to give it its true geographical conditions of general sterility. Yet it is really a desert with oases—a desert with oases for the far greater part of its area. And of all its provinces few are more truly so than Khorasan. Here we have a great elevated central table-land; pre-eminently destitute of rivers; and with but few towns. Of these Yezd is the chief in interest: the head-quarters of remains of the old fire-worship: Yezd the city of the Parsees, more numerous there than in all the others in Persia besides. Perhaps, too, it is the ethnological centre of the Persian stock; since in a westerly direction they extend to Kurdistan, and in a north-eastern one as far as Badukshan and Durwaz on the source of the Oxus.

The simplest ethnology of the areas between this range, the Semitic region, and the sea, pertains to the[209] Persian province of Khorasan. We usually associate Persia with ideas of Eastern grandeur and luxury, so we hardly acknowledge its actual geographical reality of overall barrenness. In truth, it is mainly a desert with oases—largely a desert with oases throughout most of its territory. Of all its provinces, few are as truly representative of this as Khorasan. Here we find a vast elevated central plateau that is notably lacking in rivers and has only a few towns. Among these, Yezd stands out as the most significant: the center of ancient fire-worship, Yezd is the city of the Parsees, who are more numerous there than in all other places in Persia combined. It may also be the ethnological center of the Persian people, as they extend westward into Kurdistan and northeastward as far as Badukshan and Durwaz at the source of the Oxus.

The northern frontier is Turcoman, where the pastoral robbers of the parts between Bokhara and the Caspian encroach, and have encroached.

The northern border is Turcoman, where the pastoral bandits from the area between Bokhara and the Caspian Sea invade and have invaded.

As far south as Shurukhs they are to be found; and east of Shurukhs they are succeeded by the Hazarehs—probably wholly, certainly partially, of Mongolian blood.

As far south as Shurukhs, they can be found; and east of Shurukhs they are followed by the Hazarehs—likely entirely, definitely partially, of Mongolian descent.

Abbasabad on the north-west is a Georgian colony. On the line between Meshed and Herat are several Kurd colonies. In Seistan we have[210] Persians; but further south there are Biluch and Brahúi. Due east the Afghans come in.

Abbasabad in the northwest is a Georgian settlement. Along the route between Meshed and Herat, there are several Kurdish communities. In Seistan, we have[210] Persians; but further south, there are Baloch and Brahui. To the due east, the Afghans arrive.

Kerman is also Persian; and that to a greater degree than Khorasan. Fars is the same; yet west of Fars the population changes, and Arabian elements occur. They increase in Khuzistan; and in Irak Arabi we, at one and the same time, reach the rich alluvia of the Tigris and Euphrates and a doubtful frontier. Whether this was originally Arab or Persian is a matter of doubt.

Kerman is also Persian, and even more so than Khorasan. Fars is the same; however, west of Fars, the population shifts, and Arabian influences appear. These influences grow stronger in Khuzistan, and in Irak Arabi, we simultaneously encounter the fertile soil of the Tigris and Euphrates and a questionable border. It's unclear whether this area was originally Arab or Persian.

From Irak we must subtract Laristan, and the Baktyari Mountains, as well as the whole north-western half. Hamadan is the ancient Ecbatana; the ancient Ecbatana was Median—but that the Medes and Persians were as closely allied in blood as we suppose them to have been in their unalterable laws, is by no means a safe assumption. The existence of a third language in the arrow-headed inscriptions yet awaits a satisfactory explanation.

From Iraq, we need to exclude Laristan and the Baktyari Mountains, along with the entire northwestern half. Hamadan is the ancient Ecbatana; the ancient Ecbatana was Median—but assuming that the Medes and Persians were as closely related by blood as we think they were in their unchanging laws isn't a guaranteed assumption. The existence of a third language in the cuneiform inscriptions still needs a clear explanation.

On the other hand, Mazenderan is wholly Persian; and so is Ghilan Proper. The Talish, however, to the north of that province, are, possibly, of another stock. Asterabad, as stated above, is a frontier province.

On the other hand, Mazenderan is completely Persian, and so is Ghilan Proper. However, the Talish people, located to the north of that province, may be from a different ancestry. As mentioned before, Asterabad is a border province.

I think that there is good reason for believing Ajerbijan to have been, originally, other than Persian.

I believe there’s a strong reason to think that Ajerbijan was originally not Persian.

In Balkh and Bokhara, the older—but not[211] necessarily the oldest—population appears to be Persian under recently immigrant Uzbek masters. Beyond these countries, the Persians reappear as the chief population, i.e. in Badukshan and Durwaz.

In Balkh and Bokhara, the older—but not[211] necessarily the oldest—population seems to be Persian under newly arrived Uzbek rulers. Outside of these areas, the Persians are again the main population, i.e. in Badukshan and Durwaz.

Here the proper Persian population ends—but not either wholly or abruptly.

Here, the proper Persian population comes to an end—but not completely or suddenly.

Three modifications of it occur—

Three changes happen—

  • 1. In Biluchistan to the south-east.
  • 2. In Kurdistan to the west.
  • 3. In Afghanistan to the east.

Besides which, there are Persians encroaching upon the Armenian and Caucasian area in Shirvan, Erivan, and Karabagh—in all of which countries, as well as in Ajerbijan, I believe it to have been intrusive.

Besides that, there are Persians moving into the Armenian and Caucasian regions in Shirvan, Erivan, and Karabagh—places where, as well as in Azerbaijan, I think they have been intruding.

The Biluch.—East and south-east of the proper Persians of Kerman come the Biluch, of Biluchistan. There is certainly a change of type here. Physically, the country is much like the table-land of Kerman. India, however, is approached; so that the Biluch are frontier tribes. To a certain extent they are encroachers. We find them in Sind, in Múltan, and in the parts between the Indus and the Sulimani Mountains, and in the middle part of the Sulimani Mountains themselves. They style themselves Usul or The Pure, a term which implies either displacement or[212] intermixture in the parts around. Their language is a modified (many call it a bad) Persian. Philologically, however, it may be the older and more instructive dialect—though I have no particular reasons for thinking it so. Hindu features of physiognomy now appear. So do Semitic elements of polity and social constitution. We have tribes, clans, and families; with divisions and sub-divisions. We have a criminal law which puts us in mind of the Levites. We have classes which scorn to intermarry; and this suggests the idea of caste. Then we have pastoral habits as in Mongolia. The religion, however, is Mahometan, so that if any remains of the primitive Paganism, available for the purposes of ethnological classification, still exist, they lie too far below the surface to have been observed.

The Biluch.—To the east and southeast of the true Persians of Kerman are the Biluch from Biluchistan. There’s definitely a noticeable difference in type here. The landscape is similar to the Kerman plateau, but it’s getting closer to India, which makes the Biluch frontier tribes. In some ways, they are encroachers. You’ll find them in Sind, in Múltan, and in the areas between the Indus and the Sulimani Mountains, as well as in the central part of the Sulimani Mountains themselves. They refer to themselves as Usul or The Pure, a term suggesting either displacement or[212] mixing in the surrounding areas. Their language is a modified form of Persian (some call it a bad version). Linguistically, however, it might be an older and more valuable dialect—though I don’t have any specific reasons to believe that. Hindu physical traits are now apparent, along with Semitic influences in their political and social structures. We see tribes, clans, and families, with various divisions and subdivisions. They have a criminal law reminiscent of the Levites. There are social classes that refuse to intermarry, hinting at the idea of caste. Additionally, they have pastoral lifestyles like those in Mongolia. Their religion is Islam, so if there are any remnants of the original Paganism that could aid in ethnological classification, they are buried too deeply to have been noticed.

Captain Postans distinguishes the Biluch from the Mekrani of Mekran; but of this latter people I know no good description. They are, probably, Kerman Persians. The hill-range between Jhalawan and Sind is occupied by a family which has commanded but little notice; yet is it one of the most important in the world, the Brahúi.

Captain Postans differentiates the Biluch from the Mekrani of Mekran; however, I don't have a good description of the latter group. They are likely Kerman Persians. The mountain range between Jhalawan and Sind is home to a family that hasn't received much attention; however, it is one of the most significant in the world, the Brahúi.

The Kurds.—A line drawn obliquely across Persia from Biluchistan towards the north-west brings us to another frontier population; a population conterminous with the Semitic Arabs of[213] Mesopotamia, and the unplaced Armenians. These are mountaineers—the Kurds of Kurdistan. Name for name, they are the Carduchi of the Anabasis. Name for name, they are the Gordyæi. Name for name, they are, probably, the Chaldæi and Khasd-im—a fact which engenders a difficult complication, since the Chaldæi in the eyes of nine writers out of ten—though not in those of so good an authority as Gesenius—are Semitic. The Kurd area is pre-eminently irregular in outline. It is equally remarkable for its physical conditions. It is a range of mountains—just the place wherein we expect to find old and aboriginal populations rather than new and intrusive ones. On the other hand, however, the Kurd form of the Persian tongue is not remarkable for the multiplicity and difference of its dialects—a fact which suggests the opposite inference. Kurds extend as far south as the northern frontier of Fars, as far north as Armenia, and as far west as the head-waters of the Halys. Have they encroached? This is a difficult question. The Armenians are a people who have generally given way before intruders; but the Arabs are rather intruders than the contrary. The Kurd direction is vertical, i.e. narrow rather than broad, and from north to south (or vice versâ) rather than from east to west (or vice versâ), a direction common enough where[214] it coincides with the valley of a river, but rare along a mountain-chain. Nevertheless it reappears in South America, where the Peruvian area coincides with that of the Andes.

The Kurds.—A line drawn diagonally across Persia from Biluchistan toward the northwest leads us to another frontier population; a population that shares borders with the Semitic Arabs of [213] Mesopotamia, and the displaced Armenians. These are mountaineers—the Kurds of Kurdistan. By name, they are the Carduchi from the Anabasis. By name, they are the Gordyæi. By name, they are probably the Chaldæi and Khasd-im—a fact that creates a complex situation, since the Chaldæi are viewed as Semitic by nine out of ten writers—though not by an authority as reputable as Gesenius. The Kurd region is notably irregular in shape. It is also striking for its physical conditions. It consists of a range of mountains—exactly where we would expect to find old and indigenous populations rather than new and invading ones. On the other hand, however, the Kurdish version of the Persian language isn't known for having a lot of different dialects—a detail that suggests the opposite idea. Kurds stretch as far south as the northern border of Fars, as far north as Armenia, and as far west as the upper waters of the Halys. Have they expanded their territory? This is a challenging question. The Armenians are a group that has typically yielded to outsiders; however, the Arabs are more intruders than the opposite. The Kurdish direction is vertical, i.e. narrow rather than broad, and extends from north to south (or vice versa) more than from east to west (or vice versa), a direction that is quite common when it aligns with a river valley, but unusual along a mountain range. Nevertheless, it appears again in South America, where the Peruvian region aligns with that of the Andes.

The Afghans.—The Afghan area is very nearly the water-system of the river Helmund. The direction in which it has become extended is east and north-east; in the former it has encroached upon Hindostan, in the latter upon the southern members of a class that may conveniently be called the Paropamisan. In this way (I think) the Valley of the Cabul River has become Afghan. Its relations to the Hazareh country are undetermined. Most of the Hazarehs are Mongolian in physiognomy. Some of them are Mongolian in both physiognomy and language. This indicates intrusion and intermixture—intrusion and intermixture which history tells us are subsequent to the time of Tamerlane. Phænomena suggestive of intrusion and intermixture are rife and common throughout Afghanistan. In some cases—as in that of Hazarehs—it is recent, or subsequent to the Afghan occupation; in others, it is ancient and prior to it.

The Afghans.—The Afghan region closely corresponds to the water system of the Helmund River. It has expanded mainly to the east and northeast; to the east, it has encroached upon Hindostan, and to the northeast, it has affected the southern areas of a group that can conveniently be referred to as the Paropamisan. This means that the Valley of the Cabul River has become part of Afghanistan. Its relationship with the Hazareh region is unclear. Most Hazarehs have Mongolian features. Some are Mongolian in both appearance and language. This points to a mixing of cultures—these changes, according to history, happened after the time of Tamerlane. Signs of cultural blending and mixing are widespread throughout Afghanistan. In some instances—as with the Hazarehs—it is recent, occurring after the Afghan occupation; in others, it is ancient and predates it.

Bokhara.—I have not placed the division containing the Tajiks of Balkh, Kúnduz, Durwaz, Badukshan, and Bokhara, on a level with that containing the Afghans, Kurds and Biluch, because[215] I am not sure of its value. Probably, however, it is in reality as much a separate substantive class as any of the preceding. Here the intrusion has been so great, the political relations have been so separate, and the intermixed population is so heterogeneous as for it to have been, for a long time, doubtful whether the people of Bokhara were Persian or Turk. Klaproth, however, has shown that they belong to the former division, though subject to the Uzbek Turks. If so, the present Tajiks represent the ancient Bactrians and Sogdians—the Persians of the valley and water system of the Oxus. But what if these were intruders? I have little doubt about the word Oxus (Ok-sus) representing the same root as the Yak in Yaxsartes (Yak-sartes), and the Yaik, the name of the river flowing into the northern part of the Caspian. Now this is the Turanian name for river, a name found equally in the Turk, Uguari, and Hyperborean languages. At any rate, Bokhara is on an ethnological frontier.

Bokhara.—I haven't put the group that includes the Tajiks of Balkh, Kúnduz, Durwaz, Badukshan, and Bokhara on the same level as the one with the Afghans, Kurds, and Biluch, because[215] I'm not confident about its value. However, it likely represents a distinct and substantive class, just like the others mentioned. The intermixing has been significant, the political connections have been very separate, and the diverse population has made it unclear for a long time whether the people of Bokhara are Persian or Turk. Klaproth has pointed out that they belong to the former group, even though they are under the Uzbek Turks. If that's the case, the current Tajiks are the descendants of the ancient Bactrians and Sogdians—the Persians of the Oxus region and its waterways. But what if these were outsiders? I have little doubt that the word Oxus (Okay) comes from the same root as Yak in Yaxsartes (Yak-sartes) and Yaik, which is the name of the river flowing into the northern part of the Caspian Sea. This is the Turanian term for river, a term that can also be found in Turkic, Uguari, and Hyperborean languages. In any case, Bokhara is on an ethnological frontier.

But Bactria and Sogdiana were Persian at the time of Alexander’s successors; they were Persian at the very beginning of the historical period. Be it so. The historical period is but a short one, and there is no reason why a population should[216] not encroach at one time and be itself encroached upon at another.

But Bactria and Sogdiana were Persian during the time of Alexander’s successors; they were Persian right from the start of the historical period. That’s fine. The historical period is brief, and there's no reason a population shouldn’t expand at one point and then be pushed back at another.

All the parts enumerated, and all the divisions, are so undoubtedly Persian, that few competent authorities deny the fact. The most that has ever been done is to separate the Afghans. Sir W. Jones did this. He laid great stress upon certain Jewish characteristics, had his head full of the Ten Tribes, and was deceived in a vocabulary of their languages. Mr. Norris also is inclined to separate them, but on different grounds. He can neither consider the Afghan language to be Indo-European, nor the Persian to be otherwise. His inference is true, if his facts are. But what if the Persian be other than Indo-European? In that case they are both free to fall into the same category.

All the parts mentioned and all the divisions are so clearly Persian that few qualified experts dispute it. The most that's been done is to separate the Afghans. Sir W. Jones did this. He emphasized certain Jewish traits, was focused on the Ten Tribes, and was misled by vocabulary from their languages. Mr. Norris also wants to separate them, but for different reasons. He cannot see the Afghan language as Indo-European, nor the Persian as something else. His conclusion is valid if his facts are accurate. But what if Persian is not Indo-European? In that case, they can both easily fit into the same category.

But the complexities of the Persian population are not complete. There is the division between the Tajiks and the Iliyats; the former being the settled occupants of towns and villages speaking Persian, the others pastoral or wandering tribes speaking the Arab, Kurd, and Turk languages. That Tajik is the same word as the root Taoc, in Taoc-ene, a part of the ancient country of Persis (now Fars), and, consequently, in a pre-eminent Persian locality, is a safe conjecture. The inference,[217] however, that such was the original locality of the Persian family is traversed by numerous—but by no means insuperable—difficulties. In respect to their chronological relations, the general statement may be made, that wherever we have Tajiks and Iliyats together, the former are the older, the latter the newer population. Hence it is not in any Iliyat tribe that we are to look for any nearer approach to the aborigines than what we find in the normal population. They are the analogues of the Jews and gipsies of Great Britain rather than of the Welsh—recent grafts rather than parts of the old stock. In Afghanistan this was not so clearly the case. Indeed, the inference was the other way.

But the complexities of the Persian population are not fully understood. There’s a divide between the Tajiks and the Iliyats; the former are the settled residents of towns and villages who speak Persian, while the latter are pastoral or nomadic tribes that speak Arabic, Kurdish, and Turkic languages. The term Tajik shares the same root as Taoc, in Taoc-ene, a region of the ancient country of Persis (now Fars), making it a reasonable assumption that it originated from a prominent Persian area. The conclusion, [217] however, that this was the original location of the Persian family faces several challenges—but these are not insurmountable. In terms of their chronological relationships, we can generally say that wherever Tajiks and Iliyats coexist, the Tajiks are the older population, while the Iliyats are the more recent arrivals. Therefore, we shouldn't expect to find any closer connection to the original inhabitants among any Iliyat tribe than what exists in the mainstream population. They are more like the Jews and gypsies of Great Britain than the Welsh—recent additions rather than part of the original lineage. In Afghanistan, this distinction wasn’t as clear-cut. In fact, the reverse inference was more accurate.

The antiquities and history of Persia are too well-known to need more than a passing allusion. The creed was that of Zoroaster; still existent, in a modified (perhaps a corrupted, perhaps an improved) form, in the religion of the modern Parsis. The language of the Zoroastrian Scriptures was called Zend. Now the Zend is Indo-European—Indo-European and highly inflected. The inflexions, however, in the modern Persian are next to none; and of those few it is by no means certain that they are Zend in origin. Nevertheless, the great majority of modern Persian words are Zend. What does this mean? It means that the philologist[218] is in a difficulty; that the grammatical structure points one way and the vocabulary another. This difficulty will meet us again.

The ancient history and artifacts of Persia are so well-known that they only require a brief mention. The belief system was that of Zoroaster; it still exists today, albeit in a modified (possibly corrupted, possibly improved) form in the religion of the modern Parsis. The language of the Zoroastrian Scriptures was known as Zend. Zend is Indo-European—Indo-European and heavily inflected. However, modern Persian has very few inflections; and of those few, it’s not certain that they come from Zend. Still, the vast majority of modern Persian words are indeed Zend. What does this mean? It means that the philologist[218] faces a challenge; the grammatical structure suggests one thing while the vocabulary suggests another. We will encounter this challenge again.

India.—In the time of Herodotus, and even earlier, India was part of the Persian empire. Yet India was not Persia. It was no more Persia in the days of Darius than it is English now. The original Indian stock was and is peculiar—peculiar in its essential fundamentals, but not pure and unmodified. The vast extent to which this modification implies encroachment and intermixture is the great key to nine-tenths of the complexities of the difficult ethnology of Hindostan. Whether we look to the juxtaposition of the different forms of Indian speech, the multiform degrees of fusion between them, the sections and sub-sections of their creeds—legion by name,—the fragments of ancient paganism, the differences of skin and feature, or the institution of caste, intrusion followed by intermixture, and intermixture in every degree and under every mode of manifestation, is the suggestion.

India.—During the time of Herodotus, and even earlier, India was part of the Persian empire. However, India was not Persia. It was no more Persia in the days of Darius than it is English now. The original Indian population was and still is unique—distinct in its fundamental traits, but not pure or unchanging. The extensive modifications indicate encroachment and mixing, which is the key to understanding most of the complexities in the challenging ethnology of Hindostan. Whether we examine the variety of Indian languages, the different levels of blending among them, the sections and sub-sections of their beliefs—countless in number—the remnants of ancient paganism, the variations in skin color and features, or the caste system, what stands out is the pattern of intrusion followed by mixing, and mixing in every form and manifestation.

And now we have our duality—viz. the primitive element and the foreign one—the stock and the graft. Nothing is more certain than that the graft came from the north-west. Does this necessarily mean from Persia? Such is the current opinion; or, if not from Persia, from some of[219] those portions of India itself nearest the Persian frontier. There are reasons, however, for refining on this view. Certain influences foreign to India may have come through Persia, without being Persian. The proof that a particular characteristic was introduced into India viâ Persia is one thing: the proof that it originated in Persia is another. They have often, however, been confounded.

And now we have our duality—namely, the original element and the foreign one—the base and the addition. It’s clear that the addition came from the northwest. Does this necessarily mean from Persia? That’s the common belief; or, if not from Persia, then from some of[219] the areas of India closest to the Persian border. However, there are reasons to refine this perspective. Certain influences that are not native to India may have come through Persia, without actually being Persian. Proving that a specific characteristic was introduced to India via Persia is one thing; proving that it originated in Persia is something different. Yet, these have often been confused.

In the south of India the foreign element is manifested less than in the north; so that it is the south of India which exhibits the original stock in its fullest form. Its chief characteristics are referable to three heads, physical form, creed, and language. In respect to the first, the southern Indian is darker than the northern—cæteris paribus, i. e. under similar external conditions; but not to the extent that a mountaineer of the Dekhan is blacker than a Bengali from the delta of the Ganges. Descent, too, or caste influences colour, and the purer the blood the lighter the skin. Then the lips are thicker, the nose less frequently aquiline, the cheek-bones more prominent, and the eyebrows less regular in the southrons. The most perfect form of the Indian face gives us regular and delicate features, arched eyebrows, an aquiline nose, an oval contour, and a clear brunette complexion. All this is Persian.

In the south of India, the influence of foreign elements is less pronounced than in the north, making the southern regions reflect the original population more clearly. Its main characteristics can be categorized into three areas: physical appearance, beliefs, and language. Regarding physical appearance, people from southern India tend to have darker skin compared to those from the north—cæteris paribus, i. e. under similar external conditions; but not to the extent that a mountain dweller from the Dekhan is darker than a Bengali from the Ganges delta. Ancestry and caste also play a role in skin color, where the purer the lineage, the lighter the skin. Additionally, people from the south typically have thicker lips, less frequently aquiline noses, more prominent cheekbones, and less regular eyebrows. The most ideal Indian facial features are regular and delicate, with arched eyebrows, an aquiline nose, an oval face shape, and a clear brunette complexion. All of this is influenced by Persian traits.

Depart from it and comparisons suggest themselves. If the lips thicken and the skin blackens, we think of the Negro; if the cheek-bones stand out and if the eye—as it sometimes does—become oblique, the Mongol comes into our thoughts.

Depart from it and comparisons arise. If the lips thicken and the skin darkens, we think of Black people; if the cheekbones are prominent and if the eye—sometimes—becomes slanted, we think of Mongolians.

The original Indian creeds are best characterized by negatives. They are neither Brahminic nor Buddhist.

The original Indian beliefs are best described by what they’re not. They are neither Brahminic nor Buddhist.

The language, for the present, is best brought under the same description. No man living considers it to be Indo-European.

The language, for now, is best described in the same way. No one alive thinks of it as Indo-European.

In proportion as any particular Indian population is characterized by these three marks, its origin, purity, and indigenous nature become clearer—and vice versâ. Hence, they may be taken in the order of their outward and visible signs of aboriginality.

As any specific Indian population shows these three traits, its origin, purity, and native quality become clearer—and vice versâ. Therefore, they can be considered based on their external and visible signs of being indigenous.

First come—as already stated—the Southrons of the Continent[35]; and first amongst these the mountaineers. In the Eastern Ghauts we have the Chenchwars, between the Kistna and the Pennar; in the Western the Cohatars, Tudas, Curumbars, Erulars, and numerous other hill-tribes; all agreeing in being either imperfect Brahminists or Pagans, and in speaking and languages akin to the Tamul of the coast of Coromandel; a language[221] which gives its name to the class, and introduces the important philological term Tamulian. The physical appearance of these is by no means so characteristic as their speech and creed. The mountain habitats favour a lightness of complexion. On the other, it favours the Mongol prominence of the cheek-bones. Many, however, of the Tudas have all the regularity of the Persian countenance—yet they are the pure amongst the pure of the native Tamulian Indians.

First, as already mentioned, come the Southrons from the Continent[35]; and first among these are the mountain people. In the Eastern Ghauts, we have the Chenchwars, located between the Kistna and the Pennar; in the Western Ghauts, the Cohatars, Tudas, Curumbars, Erulars, and many other hill tribes. They all tend to be either incomplete Brahmins or Pagans and speak languages similar to the Tamul of the Coromandel coast; a language[221] that gives its name to the category and introduces the important linguistic term Tamulian. Their physical appearance is not as distinctive as their language and beliefs. The mountain environments promote a lighter complexion, which also accentuates the Mongol features like prominent cheekbones. However, many Tudas display the regular features of Persian facial structure—yet they are among the purest of the native Tamulian Indians.

In the plains the language is Tamulian, but the creed Brahminic; a state of evidence which reaches as far north as the parts about Chicacole east, and Goa west.

In the plains, the language is Tamulian, but the belief system is Brahminic; this situation extends as far north as the areas around Chicacole to the east and Goa to the west.

In the South, then, are the chief samples of the true Tamulian aborigines of Indian; the characteristics of whom have been preserved by the simple effect of distance from the point of disturbance. Distance, however, alone has been but a weak preservative. The combination of a mountain-stronghold has added to its efficiency.

In the South, we find the main examples of the true Tamulian aborigines of India, whose traits have been maintained mainly because of their remoteness from the area of disruption. However, distance alone has been a weak protector. The added strength of being in a mountain stronghold has made it more effective.

In Central India one of these safeguards is impaired. We are nearer to Persia; and it is only in the mountains that the foreign elements are sufficiently inconsiderable to make the Tamulian character of the population undoubted and undeniable. In the Mahratta country and in Gondwana, the Ghonds, in Orissa the Kols, Khonds,[222] and Súrs, and in Bengal the Rajmahali mountaineers are Tamulian in tongue and Pagan in creed—or, if not Pagan, but imperfectly Brahminic. But, then, they are all mountaineers. In the more level country around them the language is Mahratta, Udiya, or Bengali.

In central India, one of these protections is weakened. We are closer to Persia, and it's only in the mountains where the foreign influences are small enough that the Tamulian identity of the population is clear and undeniable. In the Mahratta region and in Gondwana, the Ghonds; in Orissa, the Kols, Khonds, and Súrs; and in Bengal, the Rajmahali mountain dwellers all speak Tamulian and follow a Pagan belief system—or, if not Pagan, then only partially Brahminic. However, they are all mountain people. In the flatter areas around them, the languages spoken are Mahratta, Udiya, or Bengali.

Now the Mahratta, Udiya[36] and Bengali are not unequivocally and undeniably Tamulian. They are so far from it, that they explain what was meant by the negative statement as to the Tamulian tongues not being considered Indo-European. This is just what the tongues in question have been considered. Whether rightly or wrongly is not very important at present. If rightly, we have a difference of language as primâ facie—but not as conclusive—evidence of a difference of stock. If wrongly, we have, in the very existence of an opinion which common courtesy should induce us to consider reasonable, a practical exponent of some considerable difference of some sort or other—of a change from the proper Tamulian characteristics to something else so great in its degree as to look like a difference in kind. With the Bengali—and to a certain extent with the other two populations—the foreign element approaches its maximum, or (changing the expression) the evidence of Tamulianism is at its minimum.[223] Yet it is not annihilated. The physical appearance of the Mahratta, at least, is that of the true South Indian. Even if the language be other than Tamulian, the Hindús of northern India may still be of the same stock with those of Mysore and Malabar, in the same way that a Cornishman is a Welshman—i. e. a Briton who has changed his mother-tongue for the English.

Now the Mahratta, Udiya[36] and Bengali are not clearly and definitely Tamulian. They are so far from it that they clarify what was meant by the negative statement about the Tamulian languages not being considered Indo-European. This is just what the languages in question have been seen as. Whether this is right or wrong isn't very important right now. If it's right, we have a language difference as primâ facie—but not as conclusive—evidence of a difference in heritage. If it's wrong, we have, in the existence of an opinion that common courtesy should lead us to view as reasonable, a practical indicator of some significant difference of some kind—of a shift from the true Tamulian characteristics to something else so considerable in its degree that it appears to be a difference in kind. With the Bengali—and to some extent with the other two groups—the foreign element reaches its maximum, or to put it another way, the evidence of Tamulianism is at its minimum.[223] Yet it is not completely gone. The physical appearance of the Mahratta, at least, resembles that of true South Indians. Even if the language is different from Tamulian, the Hindús of northern India may still share the same heritage with those from Mysore and Malabar, just as a Cornishman is a Welshman—i. e. a Briton who has switched his mother-tongue to English.

Intermediate to the Khonds and the Bengali, in respect to the evidence of their Tamulian affinities, are the mountaineers of north-western India. Here, the preservative effects of distance are next to nothing. Those, however, of the mountain-fastnesses supply the following populations—Berdars, Ramusi, Wurali, Paurias, Kulis, Bhils, Mewars, Moghis, Minas, &c. &c., speaking languages of the same class with the Mahratta, Udiya, and Bengali, but all imperfectly Brahminic in creed.

Intermediate between the Khonds and the Bengali, regarding the evidence of their Tamulian connections, are the mountain people of north-western India. Here, the protective effects of distance are almost nonexistent. However, the mountain strongholds give rise to the following groups: Berdars, Ramusi, Wurali, Paurias, Kulis, Bhils, Mewars, Moghis, Minas, and others, who speak languages similar to Mahratta, Udiya, and Bengali, but all have an incomplete Brahminic belief system.

The other important languages of India in the same class with those last-mentioned, are the Guzerathi of Guzerat, the Hindú of Oude, the Punjabi of the Punjab, and several others not enumerated—partly because it is not quite certain how we are to place them[37], partly because they[224] may be sub-dialects rather than separate substantive forms of speech. They take us up to the Afghan, Biluch, and Tibetan frontier.

The other important languages of India that are in the same category as those mentioned earlier include Gujarati from Gujarat, Hindi from Awadh, Punjabi from Punjab, and several others not listed—partly because it's not entirely clear where to classify them[37], and partly because they[224] might be sub-dialects rather than distinct languages. They extend to the Afghan, Baloch, and Tibetan border.

These have been dealt with. But there is one population, belonging to these selfsame areas, with which we have further dealings, Bilúchistan has been described; but not in detail. The Bilúch that give their name to the country have been noticed as Persian. But the Bilúch are as little the only and exclusive inhabitants of it, as the English are of Great Britain. We have our Welsh, and the Bilúch have their Brahúi.

These have been addressed. However, there’s one group from these very regions that we need to discuss further. Bilúchistan has been mentioned, but not in detail. The Bilúch people, after whom the country is named, have been recognized as Persian. But the Bilúch are just as much not the only inhabitants there as the English are not the only ones in Great Britain. We have our Welsh, and the Bilúch have their Brahúi.

Again—the range of mountains that forms the western watershed of the Indus is not wholly Afghan. It is Bilúch as well. But it is not wholly Bilúch. The Bilúch reach to only a certain point southwards. The range between the promontory of Cape Montze and the upper boundary of Kutch Gundava is Brahúi. There is no such word as Brahúistan; but it would be well if there were.

Again—the mountain range that makes up the western watershed of the Indus isn’t entirely Afghan. It’s also Bilúch. But it’s not completely Bilúch either. The Bilúch extend only to a certain point south. The range between the cape of Montze and the upper boundary of Kutch Gundava is Brahúi. There’s no term like Brahúistan, but it would be great if there were.

Now the language of the Brahúi belongs to the Tamulian family. The affinity by no means lies on the surface—nor is it likely that it should. The nearest unequivocally Tamulian dialect on the same side of India is as far south as Goa—such as exist further to the north being either central or eastern. Supposing, then, the original continuity, how great must have been the[225] displacement; and if the displacement have been great, how easily may the transitional forms have disappeared, or, rather, how truly must they once have been met with!

Now the Brahúi language is part of the Tamulian family. The connection isn't obvious—nor is it expected to be. The closest clearly Tamulian dialect on the same side of India is located as far south as Goa—any that exist further north are either central or eastern. Assuming the original continuity, how significant must the[225] displacement have been; and if the displacement was substantial, how easily might the transitional forms have vanished, or rather, how common must they have once been!

However, the Brahúi affinities by no means lie on the surface. The language is known from one of the many valuable vocabularies of Leach. Upon this, no less a scholar than Lassen commented. Without fixing it, he remarked that the numerals were like those of Southern India. They are so, indeed; and so is a great deal more; indeed the collation of the whole of the Brahúi vocabularies with the Tamul and Khond tongues en masse makes the Brahúi Tamulian.

However, the connections of the Brahúi are not obvious. The language is documented in one of the many important vocabularies by Leach. On this, a scholar like Lassen made a comment. Without going into detail, he noted that the numerals resembled those of Southern India. They do, indeed; and so does much more. In fact, comparing all of the Brahúi vocabularies with the Tamul and Khond languages en masse suggests that Brahúi is Tamulian.

Is it original or intrusive? All opinion—valeat quantum—goes against it being the former. The mountain-fastness in which it occurs goes the other way.

Is it original or intrusive? It's all opinion—valeat quantum—that goes against it being the former. The mountain stronghold where it happens suggests otherwise.


Our sequence is logical rather than geographical, i. e. it takes localities and languages in the order in which they are subservient to ethnological argument rather than according to their contiguity. This justifies us in making a bold stride, in passing over all Persia, and in taking next in order—Caucasus, with all its conventional reminiscences and suggestions.

Our sequence is based on logic rather than geography, i.e. we address localities and languages in the order that supports our ethnological argument rather than based on their proximity. This allows us to make a significant leap by skipping over all of Persia and instead moving on to the Caucasus, along with all its traditional memories and implications.

The languages of Caucasus fall into a group,[226] which, for reasons already given, would be inconveniently called Caucasian, but which may conveniently be termed Dioscurian[38]. This falls into the following five divisions:—1. The Georgians; 2. the Irôn; 3. the Mizjeji; 4. the Lesgians; and 5. the Circassians.

The languages of the Caucasus belong to a group,[226] which, for the reasons already mentioned, would awkwardly be called Caucasian, but can more conveniently be referred to as Dioscurian[38]. This group is divided into five categories: 1. The Georgians; 2. the Irôn; 3. the Mizjeji; 4. the Lesgians; and 5. the Circassians.

1. The Georgians.—It is the opinion of Rosen that the central province of Kartulinia, of which Tiflis is the capital, is the original seat of the Georgian family; the chief reasons lying in the fact of that part of the area being the most important. Thus, the language is called Kartulinian; whilst the provinces round about Kartulinia are considered as additions or accessions to the Georgian domain, rather than as integral and original portions of it—a fact which makes the province in question a sort of nucleus. Lastly, the Persian and Russian names, Gurg-istan and Gr-usia, by which the country is most widely known, point to the valley of the Kur.

1. The Georgians.—Rosen believes that the central province of Kartulinia, with Tiflis as its capital, is the original home of the Georgian people. This belief is mainly based on the importance of this area. Consequently, the language is referred to as Kartulinian; the provinces surrounding Kartulinia are viewed as additions to the Georgian territory rather than essential original parts of it, which makes this province a sort of nucleus. Finally, the Persian and Russian names, Gurg-istan and Gr-usia, by which the country is most commonly known, point to the valley of the Kur.

To all this I demur. The utmost that is proved thereby is the greater political prominence of the occupants of the more favoured parts of the country; as the middle course of the Kur really is.

To all this, I disagree. The most that proves anything is the greater political importance of the people living in the more privileged areas of the country; like the central region of the Kur does.

Of the two sides of the watershed that separates the rivers of the Black Sea[39] from those of the Caspian[40], it is the western which has the best claim to be considered the original habitat of the Georgians. Here it is that the country is most mountainous, and the mountains most abrupt. Hence it is, too, that a population would have both the wish and power to migrate towards the plains rather than vice versâ.

Of the two sides of the watershed that separates the rivers of the Black Sea[39] from those of the Caspian[40], the western side has the strongest claim to be considered the original habitat of the Georgians. This area is the most mountainous, with steep mountains. As a result, the population here would be more inclined and able to move toward the plains rather than the other way around.

More weighty still is the evidence derived from the dialects. The Kartulinian is spoken over more than half the whole of Georgia: whereas, for the parts not Kartulinian, we hear of the following dialects:—

More significant is the evidence from the dialects. The Kartulinian is spoken in more than half of Georgia, while in the areas not Kartulinian, we hear about the following dialects:—

  • 1. The Suanic, on the head-waters of the small rivers between Mingrelia, and the southern parts of the Circassian area—the Ingur, the Okoumiskqual, &c. This is the most northern section of the Georgian family.
  • 2, 3. The Mingrelian and the Imiritian.
  • 4, 5. The Guriel and Akalzike in Turkish Georgia.
  • 6. The Lazic.—This is the tongue of the most western dialects. The hills which form the northern boundary of the valley of the Tsorokh are the Lazic locality; and here the diversity has attained its maximum. Small as is the Lazic[228] population, every valley has its separate variety of speech.

I believe, then, that in Central Caucasus the Kartulinian Georgians have been intrusive; and this is rendered probable by the character of the populations to the north and east of them. Between Georgia and Daghestan we have, in the pre-eminently inaccessible parts of the eastern half of Caucasus[41], two fresh families, different from each other, different from the Lesgians, and different from the Circassians.

I believe that in the Central Caucasus, the Kartulinian Georgians have been intrusive. This is likely supported by the nature of the populations to their north and east. Between Georgia and Daghestan, we have, in the extremely hard-to-reach areas of the eastern half of the Caucasus[41], two new families that are distinct from one another, different from the Lesgians, and different from the Circassians.

With such reasons for believing the original direction of the Georgian area to have been westernly, we may continue the investigation. That they were the occupants of a considerable portion of the eastern half of the ancient Pontus, is probable from the historical importance of the Lazi in the time of Justinian, when a Lazic war disturbed the degenerate Romans of Constantinople. It is safe to carry them as far west as Trebizond. It is safe, too, to carry them farther. One of the commonest of the Georgian terminations is the syllable -pe or -bi, the sign of the plural number; a circumstance which gives the town of Sino-pe a Georgian look—Sinope near the promontory of Calli-ppi.

With these reasons for believing that the original direction of the Georgian region was to the west, we can continue our investigation. It's likely they occupied a significant portion of the eastern part of ancient Pontus, as evidenced by the historical significance of the Lazi during the time of Justinian, when a Lazic war troubled the weakened Romans of Constantinople. We can confidently trace them as far west as Trebizond, and even further. One of the most common Georgian endings is the syllable -pe or -bi, which indicates plural; this makes the town of Sino-pe appear distinctly Georgian—Sinope near the promontory of Calli-ppi.

2. The Irôn.—To the north-west of Tiflis we have the towns of Duchet and Gori, one on the Kur itself, and one on a left-hand feeder of it. The mountains above are in the occupation of the Irôn or Osetes. In Russian Georgia they amount to about 28,000. The name Irôn is the one they give themselves; Oseti is what they are called by the Georgians. Their language contains so great a per-centage of Persian words or vice versâ, that it is safe to put them both in the same class. This has, accordingly, been done—and a great deal more which is neither safe nor sound has been done besides.

2. The Irôn.—To the northwest of Tbilisi, we find the towns of Duchet and Gori, one located on the Kur River itself, and the other on a left tributary of it. The mountains above are inhabited by the Irôn or Osetes. In Russian Georgia, their population is about 28,000. They refer to themselves as Irôn, while the Georgians call them Oseti. Their language has a significant number of Persian words, or vice versa, which justifies putting them in the same category. This has been done, along with a lot more that is neither justified nor sensible.

3. The Mizjeji.—Due east of the mountaineer Irôn come the equally mountaineer Mizjeji, a family numerically small, but falling into divisions and subdivisions. Hence, it has a pre-eminent claim to be considered aboriginal to the fastnesses in which it is found. The parts north of Telav, to the north-east of Tiflis, form the Mizjeji area. It is a small one—the Circassians bound it on the north, and on the east—

3. The Mizjeji.—Directly east of the mountain-dwelling Irôn are the equally mountainous Mizjeji, a numerically small family, but divided into several branches and sub-branches. Therefore, it has a strong claim to being considered native to the secluded regions where it resides. The area north of Telav, to the northeast of Tiflis, constitutes the Mizjeji territory. It’s a small area—on the north, it’s bordered by the Circassians, and on the east—

4. The Lesgians of Eastern Caucasus or Daghestan, next to the Circassians the most independent family of Caucasus. None falls into more divisions and subdivisions: e.g.

4. The Lesgians of Eastern Caucasus or Daghestan, next to the Circassians, represent one of the most independent groups in the Caucasus. They are divided into many different subgroups: e.g.

  • a. The Marulan or Mountaineers (from Marul = mountain) speak a language called the Avar, of[230] which the Anzukh, Tshari, Andi, Kabutsh, Dido and Unsoh are dialects.
  • b. The Kasi-kumuk.
  • c. The Akush.
  • d. The Kura of South Daghestan.

The displacements of the Irôn and Mizjeji—and from the limited area of their occupancies, displacement is a legitimate inference—must have been chiefly effected by the Georgians alone; that of the Lesgians seems referable to a triple influence. That the Talish to the north of Ghilan are Lesgians who have changed their native tongue for the Persian, is a probable suggestion of Frazer’s. If correct, it makes the province of Shirvan a likely part of the original Lesgian area—encroachment having been effected by the Armenians, Persians, and Georgians.

The movements of the Irôn and Mizjeji—and given the limited area they occupied, displacement is a valid conclusion—must have primarily been caused by the Georgians alone; the situation with the Lesgians appears to involve three influencing factors. The idea that the Talish to the north of Ghilan are Lesgians who have switched to speaking Persian is a plausible suggestion from Frazer. If this is true, it suggests that the Shirvan province could be part of the original Lesgian territory, with encroachment occurring due to the Armenians, Persians, and Georgians.

5. The Circassians occupy the northern Caucasus from Daghestan to the Kuban; coming in contact with the Slavonians and Tartars, for the parts between the Sea of Azov and the Caspian. As both these are pre-eminent for encroachment, the earlier contact was, probably, that of the most northern members of the Circassian family, and the southern Ugrians. The divisions and subdivisions of the Circassian family are both numerous and strongly marked.

5. The Circassians live in the northern Caucasus from Daghestan to the Kuban; interacting with the Slavs and Tatars in the areas between the Sea of Azov and the Caspian. Since both groups are known for their invasions, the first interactions were likely between the northernmost members of the Circassian family and the southern Ugrians. The divisions and subdivisions within the Circassian family are both many and clearly defined.

The Armenians.—Except amongst the mountaineer[231] Irôn and Mizjeji, there are Armenians over the whole of Russian Caucasus—mixed, for the most part, with Georgians. They are sojourners rather than natives. In Shirvan, Karabagh, and Karadagh they are similarly mixed with Persians and Turks. In this case, however, the Armenian population is probably the older; so that we are approaching the original nucleus of the family. In Erivan there are more Armenians than aught else; and in Kars and Erzerúm they attain their maximum. In Diarbekr the frontier changes, and the tribes which now indent the Armenian area are the Semitic Arabs and Chaldani of Mesopotamia, and the Persian Kurds of Kurdistan.

The Armenians.—Aside from the mountainous areas of Irôn and Mizjeji, you can find Armenians all over the Russian Caucasus—mostly mixed with Georgians. They are more like travelers than locals. In Shirvan, Karabagh, and Karadagh, they also mix with Persians and Turks. In this case, however, the Armenian population is likely the older one, indicating we are getting closer to the original core of the group. In Erivan, there are more Armenians than anything else, and in Kars and Erzerúm, their numbers peak. In Diarbekr, the boundaries shift, and the tribes that now border the Armenian region are the Semitic Arabs and Chaldani from Mesopotamia, along with the Persian Kurds from Kurdistan.

A great deal has been said about the extent to which the Armenian language differs from the Georgian, considering the geographical contact between the two. True it is that the tongues are in contact now, and so they probably were 2000 years ago. Yet it by no means follows that they were always so. The Georgian has encroached, the Irôn retreated; a fact which makes it likely that, at a time when there was no Georgian east of Imiritia, the Osetic of Tshildir and the Armenian of Kars met on the Upper Kur. The inference drawn from the relations between the Môn, Khô, and Tʻhay tongues is repeated here,[232] inasmuch as the Irôn and Armenian are more alike than the Armenian and Georgian. As a rough measure of the likeness, I may state the existence of the belief that both are Indo-European.

A lot has been discussed about how different the Armenian language is from Georgian, especially considering the proximity of the two. It's true that the languages are in contact now, and they probably were 2000 years ago as well. However, that doesn't mean they have always been this way. The Georgian language has expanded, while the Irôn has diminished; this suggests that, at a time when there was no Georgian east of Imiritia, the Osetic language of Tshildir and the Armenian of Kars came together on the Upper Kur. The comparison drawn from the relationships between the Môn, Khô, and Tʻhay languages applies here too,[232] since Irôn and Armenian are more similar than Armenian and Georgian. As a rough measure of this similarity, I can mention that there is a belief that both are Indo-European.

Asia Minor.—From Armenia the transition is to Asia Minor. One of the circumstances which give a pre-eminent interest and importance to the ethnology of Asia Minor is the certainty of the original stock being, at the present moment, either wholly extinct, or so modified and changed as to have become a problem rather than a fact. There is neither doubt nor shadow of doubt as to this—since it is within the historical period that this transformation has taken place. It is within the historical period that the Osmanli Turks, spreading, more immediately from the present country of Turkestan, but remotely from the chain of the Altaic Mountains, founded the kingdom of Roum under the Seljukian kings, and as a preliminary to the invasion and partial occupation of Europe, made themselves masters of the whole country limited by Georgia, Armenia, Mesopotamia, and Syria on the east and south, and by the Euxine, the Bosporus, the Propontis, the Hellespont, and the Ægean Sea westwards. Since then, whatever may be the blood, the language has been Turk. This is, of course, primâ facie evidence of the stock being Turk also. Nor are there any very cogent reasons[233] on the other side. The physiognomy is generally described as Turk, and the habits and customs as well.

Asia Minor. — From Armenia, the transition leads to Asia Minor. One of the key factors that makes the study of the ethnic groups in Asia Minor particularly interesting and significant is the certainty that the original population is either completely extinct or has been so altered and changed that it has become a problem rather than a fact. There is no doubt, absolutely none, about this—since this transformation has occurred during the historical period. During this historical period, the Osmanli Turks, spreading more directly from what is now Turkestan but originally from the chain of the Altaic Mountains, established the kingdom of Roum under the Seljukian kings. This was a precursor to their invasion and partial occupation of Europe, where they took control of the entire region bordered by Georgia, Armenia, Mesopotamia, and Syria to the east and south, and by the Euxine, the Bosporus, the Propontis, the Hellespont, and the Aegean Sea to the west. Since then, regardless of the blood, the language has been Turkish. This, of course, serves as primâ facie evidence that the original stock is also Turkish. Furthermore, there aren't any very strong reasons on the other side. The physical features are generally described as Turkish, and the habits and customs reflect this as well.

Such is what we get from the general traveller—and a more minute ethnology than this has not yet been applied. What will be the result, when a severer test is applied, is another question. It is most probable that points of physiognomy, fragmentary traditions and superstitions, old customs, and peculiar idiotisms in the way of dialect, will point to a remnant of the older stock immediately preceding it. In such a case, the ethnological question becomes complicated—since the present Turks will be then supposed to have mixed with the older natives, rather than to have replaced them in toto: so that the phænomena will rather be those exhibited in England (where the proportion of the older Celtic and the newer Anglo-Saxon is an open question) than those of the United States of America, where the blood is purely European, and where the intermixture of the aboriginal Indian—if any—goes for nothing.

This is what we get from the general traveler—and a more detailed study of the people hasn’t been done yet. What will happen when a stricter test is applied is another matter. It’s likely that characteristics of appearance, scattered traditions and superstitions, old customs, and unique quirks in language will indicate a remnant of the earlier population right before it. In this situation, the question of ethnicity becomes more complex—since the present Turks will then be seen as having mixed with the older locals, rather than completely replacing them in toto: so the situation will resemble that in England (where the ratio of the older Celtic population to the newer Anglo-Saxon is still up for debate) rather than that of the United States, where the ancestry is entirely European, and any mixing with the original Indian population—if it exists—has little significance.

Of the occupants of Asia Minor previous to the Osmanli Turks we can ascertain the elements, but not the proportions which they bore to each other.

Of the people living in Asia Minor before the Osmanli Turks, we can identify the different groups, but we can’t determine their proportions in relation to one another.

  • 1. There was an element supplied by the Byzantine[234] Greek population—itself pre-eminently mixed and heterogeneous.
  • 2. There was an element supplied by the purer Greek population of Greece Proper and the Islands.
  • 3. There were, perhaps, traces of the old Greek populations of Æolia, Doris, and Ionia.
  • 4. There was an extension of the Armenian population from the east.
  • 5. Of the Georgian from the north-east.
  • 6. Of the Semitic from the south-east.
  • 7. There was also Arab and Syriac intermixture consequent on the propagation of Mahometanism.
  • 8. There were also remnants of a Proper Roman population introduced during the time of the Republic and Western Empire, e.g. of the sort that the Consulate of Cicero would introduce into Cilicia.
  • 9. There were also remnants of the Persian supremacy, e.g. of a sort which would be introduced when it was a Satrapy of Tissaphernes or Pharnabazus.
  • 10. Lastly, there would be traces of the Macedonian Greeks; whose impress would be stamped upon it during the period which elapsed between the fall of Darius and that of Antiochus.

All this suggests numerous questions—but they are questions of minute rather than general ethnology.[235] The latter takes us to the consideration of the populations of the frontier. Here we find—

All this raises a lot of questions—but they are questions of specific rather than general ethnology.[235] The latter leads us to think about the populations of the frontier. Here we find—

  • 1. Georgians.
  • 2. Armenians.
  • 3. Semites of Mesopotamia and Syria.
  • 4. Greeks of the Ægean Islands.
  • 5. Bulgarians, and Turks of Thrace.

Of these, the last are recent intruders; so that the real ethnology to be considered is that of ancient Thrace. Unfortunately this is as obscure as that of Asia Minor itself.

Of these, the last are recent arrivals; so the actual ethnology to consider is that of ancient Thrace. Unfortunately, this is just as unclear as that of Asia Minor itself.

The Greeks of the Ægean are probably intrusive; the other three are ancient occupants of their present areas.

The Greeks of the Aegean are likely newcomers; the other three have been living in their current regions for a long time.

Now, in arguing upon the conditions afforded by this frontier, it is legitimate to suppose that each of the populations belonging to it had some extension beyond their present limits, in which case the à-priori probabilities would be that—

Now, in discussing the conditions provided by this frontier, it's reasonable to assume that each of the populations associated with it extended beyond their current boundaries, in which case the à-priori probabilities would be that—

  • 1. On the north-west there was an extension of the Thracian population.
  • 2. On the north-east, of the Georgian.
  • 3. On the east, of the Armenian.
  • 4. On the south, of the Syrian and Mesopotamian.

Now, the population of Asia Minor may have been a mere extension of the populations of the frontiers—one or all.

Now, the population of Asia Minor might have just been an extension of the populations on the frontiers—either one or all of them.

But it also may have been separate and distinct from any of them.

But it might also have been separate and different from any of them.

In this case, we are again supplied with an alternative.

In this case, we are once again provided with an alternative.

  • 1. The population may have been one—just as that of Germany is one.
  • 2. The population may have fallen in several—nay, numerous divisions—so that the so-called races may have been one, two, three, four, or even more.

Dealing with these questions, we first ask what are the reasons for supposing the population—whether single or subdivided—of Asia to have been peculiar, i.e. different from that of the frontier areas—Georgia, Thrace, Armenia, Mesopotamia and Syria?

Dealing with these questions, we first ask what the reasons are for believing the population—whether single or divided—of Asia to have been peculiar, i.e. different from that of the border areas—Georgia, Thrace, Armenia, Mesopotamia, and Syria?

This is answered at once by the evidence of the Lycian Inscriptions, which prove the Lycian, at least, to have been distinct from all or any of the tongues enumerated.

This is answered immediately by the evidence of the Lycian Inscriptions, which show that the Lycian was, at the very least, separate from any of the languages listed.

The following extracts, however, from Herodotus carry us farther:—

The following excerpts from Herodotus take us further:—

“The Lycians were originally out of Crete; since, in the old times, it was the Barbarians who held the whole of Crete. When, however, there was a difference in Crete, in respect to the kingdom, between the sons of Europa, Minos and Sarpedon, and when Minos got the best in the[237] disturbance, he (Minos) expelled both Sarpedon himself and his faction; and these, on their expulsion, went to that part of Asia which is the Milyadic land. For that country which the Lycians now inhabit was in the old times Milyas; and the Milyæ were then called Solymi. For a time Sarpedon ruled over them. They called themselves by the name which they brought with them; and even now, the Lycians are called by the nations that dwell around them, Termilæ. But when Lycus, the son of Pandion, driven away from Athens, and like Sarpedon, by his brother (Ægeus), came to the Termilæ under Sarpedon, they, thence, in the course of time, were called, after the name of Lycus, Lycians. The usages are partly Cretan, partly Carian. One point, however, they have peculiar to themselves, and one in which they agree with no other men. They name themselves after their mothers, and not from their fathers: so that if any one be asked by another who he is, he will designate himself as the son of his mother, and number up his mother’s mothers. Again, if a free woman marry a slave, the children are deemed free; whereas, if a man be even in the first rank of citizens, and take either a strange wife or a concubine, the children are dishonoured.”

“The Lycians originally came from Crete; in ancient times, it was the Barbarians who controlled all of Crete. However, when there was a conflict in Crete regarding the throne between the sons of Europa, Minos and Sarpedon, Minos emerged victorious in the[237] dispute. He expelled Sarpedon and his group; after their expulsion, they moved to the region of Asia known as the Milyadic land. The area where the Lycians now live was formerly called Milyas; and the Milyæ were then referred to as Solymi. For a time, Sarpedon ruled over them. They used the name they brought with them, and even today, the Lycians are referred to by the surrounding nations as Termilæ. When Lycus, the son of Pandion, was driven from Athens by his brother (Ægeus) and made his way to the Termilæ under Sarpedon, they eventually came to be known as Lycians, after Lycus. Their customs are partly Cretan and partly Carian. However, they have one unique practice that sets them apart from all others. They identify themselves by their mothers' names rather than their fathers': so if someone is asked who he is, he will refer to himself as his mother’s son and list his mother’s mothers. Additionally, if a free woman marries a slave, their children are considered free; whereas if a high-ranking citizen marries a foreign woman or takes a concubine, their children are viewed as dishonored.”

Whilst Asia Minor was being conquered for[238] Persia, under the reign of Cyrus, by Harpagus, the Carians made no great display of valour; with the exception of the citizens of Pedasus. These gave Harpagus considerable trouble; but, in time, were vanquished. Not so the Lycians.—“The Lycians, as Harpagus marched his army towards the Xanthian plain, retreated before him by degrees, and fighting few against many, showed noble deeds: but being worsted and driven back upon the town, they collected within the citadel their wives, and children, and goods, and servants. They then set light to the citadel to burn it down. This being done, they took a solemn oath, and making a sally died to a man, sword in hand. But of those Lycians who now called themselves Xanthians, the majority are, except eighty hearths, strangers (ἐπήλυδες). These eighty hearths (families) were then away from the country. And so they escaped. Thus it was that Harpagus took Xanthus. In like manner he took Caunus. For the Caunians resemble the Lycians in most things.

While Asia Minor was being conquered for[238] Persia under Cyrus's rule by Harpagus, the Carians didn’t show much courage; except for the citizens of Pedasus. They caused Harpagus a lot of trouble, but eventually, they were defeated. The Lycians, however, were different. As Harpagus marched his army toward the Xanthian plain, the Lycians gradually retreated, fighting bravely even when outnumbered. Eventually, they were forced back to their town, where they gathered their wives, children, possessions, and servants in the citadel. They then set the citadel on fire to destroy it. After doing this, they made a solemn vow and charged out, fighting to the last man with swords in hand. Now, most of those Lycians who call themselves Xanthians are actually strangers (transients), with only eighty families remaining in the country. So, they managed to escape. That’s how Harpagus took Xanthus. He took Caunus in a similar way. For the Caunians are similar to the Lycians in many respects.

And now we have a second fact, the following, viz.—that what the Lycians were the Caunians were also.

And now we have a second fact, the following, namely—that what the Lycians were, the Caunians were also.

1. The Caunians.—According to the special evidence of Herodotus, the Caunians had two peculiar customs—one, to make no distinction between age and sex at feasts, but to drink and junket promiscuously[239]—the other, to show their contempt of all strange foreign gods by marching in armour to the Calyndian mountains, and beating the air with spears, in order to expel them from the boundaries of the Caunian land. Still the Caunians were Lycian.

1. The Caunians.—According to the specific accounts of Herodotus, the Caunians had two unusual customs—first, they made no distinction between age and gender at celebrations, freely drinking and feasting together[239]—second, they showed their disdain for all foreign gods by marching in armor to the Calyndian mountains and waving their spears in the air to drive them out of Caunian territory. Still, the Caunians were Lycian.

Were any other nations thus Lycian? Caunian? Lyco-Caunian? or Cauno-Lycian? since the particular designation is unimportant.

Were any other nations like Lycian? Caunian? Lyco-Caunian? or Cauno-Lycian? since the specific name doesn’t matter.

The Carians.—The language of the Carians and the Caunians was the same; since Herodotus writes—The Caunian nation has either adapted itself to the Carian tongue, or the Carian to Caunian.

The Carians.—The Carians and the Caunians spoke the same language; as Herodotus notes—The Caunian nation has either adapted to the Carian language, or the Carian to Caunian.

2. On the other hand, the worship of the national Eponymus was different. The Lydians and Mysians share in the worship of the Carian Jove. These do so. As many, however, of different nations (ἔθνος) as have become identical in language with the Carians do not do so.

2. On the other hand, the worship of the national Eponymus was different. The Lydians and Mysians share in the worship of the Carian Jove. They participate in this. However, many others from different nations (ethnos) who have adopted the same language as the Carians do not join in.

And here comes a difficulty—one part of the facts connects, the other disconnects the Carians from the Lycians. The language goes one way, the customs another.

And here's a problem—one aspect of the evidence links the Carians to the Lycians, while another separates them. The language supports one connection, but the customs suggest a different one.

But this is not the only complication introduced by the Carian family. The whole question of their origin is difficult, and that of their affinities is equally so. It was from the islands to[240] the continent, rather than from the continent to the islands, that the Carians spread themselves; and they did this as subjects of Minos, and under the name of Leleges. As long as the system of Minos lasted, these Carian Leleges paid no tribute; but furnished, when occasion required, ships and sailors instead. And this they did effectually, inasmuch as the Carian was one of the most powerful nations of its day, and, besides that, ingenious in warlike contrivances. Of such contrivances three were adopted by the Greeks, and recognised as the original invention of the Carians. The first of these was the crest for the helmet; the second, the device for the shield; the third, the handle for the shield. Before the Carians introduced this last improvement, the fighting-man hung his buckler by a leathern thong, either on his neck or his left shoulder. Such was the first stage in the history of Carian Leleges, who were insular rather than continental, and Lelegian rather than Carian. It lasted for many years after the death of Minos; but ended in their being wholly ejected from the islands, and exclusively limited to the continent, by the Dorians and Ionians of Greece.

But this isn't the only complication brought about by the Carian family. The whole question of where they came from is tricky, and figuring out their connections is just as hard. The Carians spread from the islands to the continent, instead of the other way around, doing so as subjects of Minos and under the name of Leleges. As long as Minos's rule lasted, these Carian Leleges didn’t pay any tribute; instead, they provided ships and sailors whenever needed. They did this effectively, as the Carians were one of the most powerful nations of their time and were inventive in military technology. The Greeks adopted three such innovations, which they recognized as the original inventions of the Carians. The first was the crest for helmets; the second was the device for shields; and the third was the handle for shields. Before the Carians introduced this last improvement, a fighter would hang his shield by a leather strap, either around his neck or on his left shoulder. This was the initial phase in the history of the Carian Leleges, who were more insular than continental, and more Lelegian than Carian. This phase lasted many years after Minos's death but eventually ended with the Dorians and Ionians of Greece completely driving them out of the islands and confining them to the continent.

This would connect the—

This would link the—

  • 1. Carians with the aboriginal islanders of the Ægean—these being Leleges.[241]
  • 2. Also with the Caunians.
  • 3. Also with the Lycians. Unfortunately, the evidence is not unqualified. It is complicated by—

The native tradition.—The Carian race is not insular, but aboriginal to the continent; bearing from the earliest times the name it bears at the present time. As a proof of this, the worship of the Carian Jupiter is common to two other, unequivocally continental nations—the Lydians and the Mysians. All three have a share in a temple at Mylasa, and each of the three is descended from one of three brothers—Car, Lydus, or Mysus—the respective eponymi of Caria, Lydia, and Mysia.

The native tradition.—The Carian people aren't isolated; they're indigenous to the continent and have carried the same name since ancient times. Evidence of this is the worship of Carian Jupiter, which is shared by two other distinctly continental nations—the Lydians and the Mysians. All three have a shared temple in Mylasa, and each of the three descends from one of three brothers—Car, Lydus, or Mysus—who are the namesakes of Caria, Lydia, and Mysia, respectively.

All this is not written for the sake of any inference; but to illustrate the difficulties of the subject. A new series of facts must now be added—or rather two new ones.

All of this isn't written to draw any conclusions; it's meant to highlight the complexities of the topic. We now need to add a new set of facts—or rather, two new ones.

  • 1. There are special statements in the classics that the Phrygian, Armenian, and Thracian languages were the same.
  • 2. One of the three languages of the arrow-headed inscriptions has yet to be identified with any existing tongue.

The reader is in possession of a fair amount of complications. They can easily be increased.

The reader has quite a few complications. These can easily be increased.

Instead of enlarging on them, I suggest the following doctrine:—

Instead of elaborating on them, I propose the following principle:—

  • 1. That, notwithstanding certain conflicting statements, the populations of Mysia, Lydia, Caria, and part of Lycia, were closely allied.
  • 2. That a language akin to the Armenian was spoken as far westwards as eastern Phrygia.
  • 3. That some third population, either subject to Persia or in alliance with it, spoke the language of the Lycian inscriptions—properly distinguished by Mr. Forbes and others from the ancient Lycian of the Milyans—which last may have been Semitic.
  • 4. That the third language of arrow-headed inscriptions, supposing its locality to have been Media, may have indented the north-eastern frontier.
  • 5. That, besides the Greek, two intrusive languages may have been spoken in the north-west and south-western parts respectively, viz.—
    • a. The Thracian of the opposite coast of the Bosporus.
    • b. The Lelegian of the islands.

Of these, the former was, perhaps, Sarmatian, whilst the latter may have borne the same relation to the Carian as the Malay of Sumatra does to that of the Orang Binúa of the Malayan Peninsula.

Of these, the first was probably Sarmatian, while the second may have had a similar relationship to the Carian as the Malay of Sumatra does to the Orang Binúa of the Malayan Peninsula.

It may be added, that the similarity of the name Thekhes, the mountain from which the 10,000 Greeks saw the sea, to the Turk Tagh,[243] suggests the likelihood of Turk encroachments having existed as early as the time of Artaxerxes.

It can be noted that the similarity of the name Thekhes, the mountain from which the 10,000 Greeks spotted the sea, to the Turkish Tagh,[243] indicates that Turkish invasions may have been happening as early as the time of Artaxerxes.

Lastly—The termination -der, in Scaman-der (a bilingual appellation) and Mæan-der, indicates Persian intrusion of an equally early date.

Lastly—The termination -der, in Scaman-der (a bilingual name) and Mæan-der, shows Persian influence from a similarly early time.

Of the glosses collected by Jablonsky, none are illustrated by any modern language, except the following:—

Of the notes gathered by Jablonsky, none are shown in any modern language, except for the following:—

English axe.
Lydian labr-ys.
Armenian dabar.
Persian tawar.
Kurd teper.
English fire.
Phrygian pyr.
Armenian pur.
Afghan wur, or.
Kurd ûr.
Greek, &c. fire, fire, &c.
English dog.
Phrygian kyn.
Armenian shun.
Sanskrit shune.
Lettish suns.
English bread.
Phrygian bekos.
Armenian khaz.
Akush kaz.
English water.
Phrygian hydôr.
Armenian tshur.
Greek, &c. water, water, &c.

There is no denying that these affinities are Indo-European rather than aught else, and that they are Armenian as well—an objection to several of the views laid down in the preceding pages which I have no wish to conceal. However, all questions of this kind are a balance of conflicting difficulties. As a set-off to this, take the following table, where the Armenian affinities are Turk, Dioscurian, and Siberian also.

There’s no denying that these connections are more Indo-European than anything else, and that they’re also Armenian—this challenges several of the points made in the previous pages, which I’m not trying to hide. However, all questions like this involve weighing conflicting issues. To balance this, consider the following table, where the Armenian connections also include Turk, Dioscurian, and Siberian.

English man.
Scythian oior.
Uigur er.
Kasan ir.
Baskir ir.
Nogay ir.
Tobolsk ir.
Yeneseian eri.
Teleut eri.
Kasach erin.
Casikumuk ioori.
Armenian air.

The watershed of the Oxus and Indus.—We are in the north-eastern corner of Persia. The Púshta-Khur mountain, like many other hills of less magnitude, contains the sources of two rivers, different in their directions—of the Oxus that falls into the Sea of Aral; and of the right branch of the Kúner, a feeder of the Cabúl river—itself a member of the great water-system of the Indus. Its south-western prolongation gives us the corresponding watershed. This is a convenient point for the study of a difficult but interesting class of mountaineers, who may conveniently be called Paropamisans from the ancient name of the Hindu-kúsh. Their northern limits are the heights in question. Southwards they reach the Afghan frontier in the Kohistan of Cabúl. Eastward they come in contact with India. There is no better way of taking them in detail than that of following the water-courses, and remembering the watersheds of the rivers.

The watershed of the Oxus and Indus.—We are in the northeastern corner of Persia. The Púshta-Khur mountain, like many other smaller hills, is the source of two rivers that flow in different directions—one is the Oxus, which empties into the Sea of Aral, and the other is the right branch of the Kúner, which feeds the Cabúl river, part of the larger water system of the Indus. Its southwestern extension gives us the corresponding watershed. This is a great spot to study a challenging but fascinating group of mountain people, who can be referred to as Paropamisans after the ancient name for the Hindu-kúsh. Their northern boundary is the peaks we mention. To the south, they reach the Afghan border in the Kohistan of Cabúl. To the east, they border India. The best way to explore them in detail is by following the river systems and keeping in mind the watersheds of the rivers.

I. The Oxus.—At the very head-waters of the Oxus, and in contact with the Kirghiz Turks of Pamer, comes the small population of Wokhan, speaking a language neither Turk nor Persian—[245]at least not exactly Persian; and, next to Wokhan, Shughnan, where the dialect (possibly the language) seems to change. Roshan, next (along the Oxus) to Shughnan, seems to be in the same category. Durwaz, however, is simply Tajik. All are independent, and all Mahometan.

I. The Oxus.—At the very source of the Oxus River, close to the Kirghiz Turks of Pamer, is a small population of Wokhan, who speak a language that is neither Turkic nor fully Persian—[245] at least not exactly Persian; and, right next to Wokhan, is Shughnan, where the dialect (possibly the language) seems to shift. Roshan, which comes next along the Oxus, appears to belong to the same group. However, Durwaz is simply Tajik. They are all independent and all Muslim.

II. The Indus.—1. The Indus.—The Gilghit[42] river feeds the Indus—two other feeders that join it from the east being called the Hunz and the Burshala, Nil, or Nagar. The population of each of these rivers is agricultural, and is, accordingly, called Dunghar, a Hindu, but no native term. Their Rajah is independent; their religion a very indifferent Mahometanism. On the Gilghit and the parts below its junction with the Hunz and Nagar rivers, the dialect (perhaps the language) seems to change, and the people are known as Dardoh (or Dards) and Chilass Dardoh—the Daradæ of the Greek and the Daradas of the Sanskrit writers. These, too, are imperfect Mahometans. The Dards and Dunghers carry us as far as Little Tibet (Bultistan) and the Cashmírian frontiers.

II. The Indus.—1. The Indus.—The Gilghit[42] river feeds the Indus—two other tributaries that join it from the east are called the Hunz and the Burshala, Nil, or Nagar. The communities along each of these rivers are agricultural and are referred to as Dunghar, which is a Hindu term but not a native one. Their Rajah is independent; their religion is a rather indifferent form of Islam. On the Gilghit and the areas downstream from where it meets the Hunz and Nagar rivers, the dialect (perhaps even the language) appears to shift, and the people are known as Dardoh (or Dards) and Chilass Dardoh—the Daradæ of the Greeks and the Daradas of Sanskrit texts. These groups also practice an incomplete form of Islam. The Dards and Dunghers take us as far as Little Tibet (Bultistan) and the borders of Cashmere.

2. The Jhelum.—This is the river of the famous valley of Cashmír—the population whereof (with some hesitation) I consider Paropamisan.

2. The Jhelum.—This is the river in the famous valley of Kashmir—the people there (with some uncertainty) I think of as Paropamisan.

3. The Cabul River.—1. The Kúner.—The eastern watershed of the Upper Kúner is common to the Gilghit river. The population is closely akin to the Dardoh and Dungher; its area being Upper and Lower Chitral, its language the Chitrali, its religion Shia Mahometanism.

3. The Cabul River.—1. The Kúner.—The eastern watershed of the Upper Kúner is shared with the Gilghit River. The population is closely related to the Dardoh and Dungher groups; its area includes Upper and Lower Chitral, its language is Chitrali, and its religion is Shia Islam.

South of the Chitral, on the middle Kúner, the creed changes, and we have the best known of the Paropamisans, the Kaffres of Kafferistan, reaching as far westwards and northwards as Kunduz and Badukshan—the Kaffres, or Infidels, so called by their Mahometan neighbours, because they still retain their primitive paganism.

South of the Chitral, on the middle Kúner, the beliefs change, and we come across the most well-known group among the Paropamisans, the Kaffres of Kafferistan, extending as far west and north as Kunduz and Badukshan—the Kaffres, or Infidels, a term used by their Muslim neighbors, because they still hold onto their ancient pagan traditions.

Now when we approach the Cabúl river itself, the direction of which, from west to east, is nearly at right angles with the Kúner, the characteristics of the Dardoh, Chitrali, and Kaffre populations decrease—in other words, the area is irregular, and the populations themselves either partially isolated or intermixed. Thus, along the foot of the mountains north of the Cabúl river and west of the Kúner comes the Lughmani country; the language being by no means identical with the Kafir, and the Kafir paganism being reduced to an imperfect Mahometan—némchú Mussulman, or half Mussulman, being the term applied to the speakers of the Lughmani tongue of the valley of the Nijrow and the parts about it.

Now when we reach the Cabúl River itself, which flows from west to east almost at a right angle to the Kúner, the features of the Dardoh, Chitrali, and Kaffre populations start to fade. In other words, the area is irregular, and the populations are either somewhat isolated or mixed together. So, along the base of the mountains north of the Cabúl River and west of the Kúner lies the Lughmani country; the language here is definitely not the same as Kafir, and the Kafir's pagan beliefs are largely diluted into an incomplete form of Islam—némchú Mussulman, or half Mussulman, which is the term used for the speakers of the Lughmani language in the valley of Nijrow and the surrounding areas.

The Der, Tirhye, and Pashai vocabularies of Leach all represent Paropamisan forms of speech spoken by small and, more or less, fragmentary populations.

The Der, Tirhye, and Pashai vocabularies of Leach all represent Paropamisan languages spoken by small and somewhat fragmented communities.

The valley of the Lundye has, almost certainly, been within a recent period, Paropamisan. Thus is it that Elphinstone writes of its chief occupants:—“The Swatís, who are also called Deggauns, appear to be of Indian origin. They formerly possessed a kingdom extending from the western branch of the Hydaspes to near Jellabahad. They were gradually confined to narrower limits by the Afghan tribes; and Swaut and Búnér, their last seats, were reduced by the Eusofzyis in the end of the fifteenth century. They are still very numerous in those countries.” By Indian I believe a population akin to that of Cashmeer is denoted—I do not say intended. Another extract carries us further still:—“The Shulmauni formerly inhabited Shulmaun, on the banks of the Korrum. They afterwards moved to Tíra, and in the end of the fifteenth century they were in Hustnugger, from which they were expelled by the Eusofzyes. The old Afghan writers reckon them Deggauns, but they appear to have used this word loosely. There are still a few Shulmauni in the Eusofzye country who have some remains of a peculiar language.”

The valley of the Lundye has almost certainly been Paropamisan in recent times. Elphinstone notes about its main inhabitants: “The Swatis, also known as Deggauns, seem to have Indian roots. They used to have a kingdom that stretched from the western branch of the Hydaspes to near Jellabahad. Over time, they were pushed into smaller areas by the Afghan tribes, and by the end of the fifteenth century, Swaut and Buner, their last strongholds, were taken over by the Eusofzyis. They still make up a large population in those regions.” By Indian, I think it refers to a group similar to that of Kashmir—I'm not saying it’s intended. Another quote takes us further back: “The Shulmauni once lived in Shulmaun, along the banks of the Korrum. They later moved to Tira, and by the end of the fifteenth century, they were in Hustnugger, from where they were driven out by the Eusofzyis. The old Afghan writers counted them as Deggauns, but it seems they used this term loosely. There are still a few Shulmauni left in the Eusofzye region who speak remnants of a unique language.”

Hence, the Paropamisans may safely be considered as a population of a receding frontier, the encroachment upon their area having been Afghan. With these the Asiatic populations end.

Hence, the Paropamisans can be seen as a group on a shrinking frontier, with Afghan expansion into their territory. With them, the Asian populations conclude.


If we now look back upon the ground that has been gone over, we shall find that the evidence of the human family having originated in one particular spot, and having diffused itself from thence to the very extremities of the earth, is by no means absolute and conclusive. Still less is it certain that that particular spot has been ascertained. The present writer believes that it was somewhere in intratropical Asia, and that it was the single locality of a single pair—without, however, professing to have proved it. Even this centre is only hypothetical—near, indeed, to the point which he looks upon as the starting-place of the human migration, but by no means identical with it. The Basks and Albanians he does not pretend to have affiliated; but he does not, for this reason, absolutely isolate them. They have too many miscellaneous affinities to allow them to stand wholly alone.

If we look back at the ground we've covered, we'll find that the idea of the human family originating from one specific location and spreading from there to the farthest corners of the earth is far from absolute and conclusive. It's even less certain that we've identified that specific location. The current writer believes it was somewhere in tropical Asia and that it came from a single pair—though he doesn't claim to have proven it. Even this center is merely hypothetical—close to where he sees the beginning of human migration, but not exactly the same. He doesn't try to connect the Basques and Albanians, but he also doesn't completely isolate them either. They share too many miscellaneous connections to be entirely alone.

In the way of physical conformation, the Hottentot presents the maximum of peculiarities. The speech, however, of the latter is simply African; whilst, in form and colour, the Basks and Albanians[249] are European. A fly is a fly even when we wonder how it came into the amber; and men belong to humanity even when their origin is a mystery. This gives us a composition of difficulties, and it is by taking this and similar phænomena into account, that the higher problems in ethnology must be worked. Nothing short of a clear and comprehensive view of the extent to which points of difference in one department are compensated by points of likeness in another, will give us even a philosophical hypothesis; all partial argument from partial points of disagreement being as unscientific as a similar overvaluation of resemblances.

In terms of physical appearance, the Hottentot has the most unique features. However, their speech is purely African, while the Basks and Albanians[249] are European in form and color. A fly is still a fly, even if we question how it ended up in amber; similarly, people belong to humanity even if their origins are unclear. This creates a mix of challenges, and it's by considering these and other similar phenomena that we can tackle the more complex issues in ethnology. We need a clear and thorough understanding of how differences in one area can be balanced by similarities in another to develop even a philosophical hypothesis; all partial arguments based on limited points of disagreement are just as unscientific as an exaggerated focus on similarities.

As for the detail of the chief difficulties, the writer believes that he, unwillingly and with great deference, differs from the best authorities, in making so little of the transition from America to Asia, and so much of that between Europe and Asia. The conviction that the Semitic tongues are simply African, and that all the theories suggested by the term Indo-European must be either abandoned or modified, is the chief element of his reasoning upon this point—reasoning far too elaborate for a small work like the present. He also believes that the languages of Kafferistan, the Dardoh country, and north-eastern Afghanistan, are transitional to the monosyllabic tongues[250] and those of Persia—in other words, that the modern Persian is much more monosyllabic than is generally supposed. Yet even this leaves a break. How far the most western tongue of this class can be connected with those of Europe, and how far the most south-western one has Semitic affinities are questions yet to examine—questions beset with difficulties. However, as the skeleton of system he believes the present work to be true as far as it goes, and at the same time convenient for the investigator. That there is much in all existing classifications which requires to be unlearnt is certain. Lest any one think this a presumptuous saying, let him consider the new and unsettled state of the science, and the small number of the labourers as compared with the extent of the field.

As for the main challenges, the writer feels, somewhat reluctantly and with great respect, that he disagrees with the leading experts by downplaying the transition from America to Asia while emphasizing the one between Europe and Asia. The belief that the Semitic languages are essentially African and that all theories related to the term Indo-European need to be either dismissed or revised is central to his argument on this matter—an argument that's too complex for a brief work like this. He also thinks that the languages of Kafferistan, the Dardoh region, and northeastern Afghanistan serve as a bridge to the monosyllabic languages[250] and the languages of Persia—in other words, modern Persian is much more monosyllabic than most people realize. Still, this raises further questions. How links between the most western language of this category and those of Europe should be established, and how the most south-western one relates to Semitic languages, are issues that need further investigation—issues that come with their own challenges. However, he believes the underlying structure of the current work is accurate as far as it goes and is also helpful for researchers. It's clear that a lot in existing classifications needs to be rethought. If anyone thinks this sounds arrogant, they should consider the evolving and uncertain state of the field, along with the limited number of researchers compared to the vastness of the subject.

THE END.

THE END.

FOOTNOTES

[27] Since this chapter was written, the news of the premature death of the most influential supporter of the double doctrine of (a.the unity of the American families amongst each other, and (b.the difference of the American race from all others—Dr. Morton, of Philadelphia,—has reached me. It is unnecessary to say, that the second of these positions is, in the mind of the present writer, as exceptionable as the first is correct. Nor is it likely to be otherwise as long as the eastern side of the Rocky Mountains is so exclusively studied as it is by both the American and the English school. I have little fear of the Russians falling into this error. With this remark the objections against the very valuable labours of Dr. Morton begin and end. His Crania Americana is by far the most valuable book of its kind. His Crania Ægyptiaca and other minor works, especially his researches on Hybridism, are all definite additions to ethnological science. The impulse which he, personally, gave to the very active study of the Human Species, which so honourably characterises his countrymen, is more than an Englishman can exactly value. Perhaps, it is second only to that given by Gallatin: perhaps, it is scarcely second.

[27] Since this chapter was written, I've learned about the early death of the most influential supporter of the double doctrine of (a.) the unity of American families amongst each other and (b.) the distinctiveness of the American race from all others—Dr. Morton, from Philadelphia. It's unnecessary to say that, in my opinion, the second position is as questionable as the first is correct. It's unlikely that this will change as long as the eastern side of the Rocky Mountains continues to be exclusively studied by both American and English scholars. I don't worry much about Russians making this mistake. With this comment, my objections to Dr. Morton's very valuable work begin and end. His Crania Americana is by far the most important book in its field. His Crania Ægyptiaca and other smaller works, especially his research on Hybridism, are all significant contributions to ethnological science. The momentum he personally provided to the active study of the Human Species, which so honorably defines his fellow countrymen, is hard for an Englishman to fully appreciate. Perhaps it's second only to that provided by Gallatin; perhaps, it's barely second.

[28] Mr. Norris, for instance, of the Asiatic Society, has given reasons for connecting the Australian tongues with those of the Dekhan.

[28] Mr. Norris, from the Asiatic Society, has provided reasons for linking the Australian languages with those of the Dekhan.

[29] Taken, with much besides, from Mr. Brown’s Tables, in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

[29] Taken, along with much else, from Mr. Brown’s Tables, in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

[31] Considering the Burampúter and Ganges as separate rivers.

[31] Thinking of the Burampúter and Ganges as distinct rivers.

[32] Conveniently thrown into a single class, and called Hyperboreans.

[32] Conveniently grouped into one category and referred to as Hyperboreans.

[33] The great family of which the Mantshús are the best-known members.

[33] The large family of which the Mantshús are the most recognized members.

[34] Not necessarily with many syllables, but with more than onehyper-mono-syllabic.

[34] Not necessarily with many syllables, but with more than onehyper-mono-syllabic.

[35] Observe—not of the island of Ceylon.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Notice—not from Sri Lanka.

[36] Of Orissa.

From Odisha.

[37] The Cashmírian of Cashmír is in this predicament. It is not safe to say that it is Hindu rather than Persian, or Paropamisan—a term which will soon find its explanation.

[37] The person from Cashmír is in this situation. It's not accurate to say it's more Hindu than Persian, or Paropamisan—a term that will soon be explained.

[38] From the town of Dioscurias, in which Pliny says business was carried on through 130 interpreters—so numerous were the languages and dialects.

[38] From the town of Dioscurias, where Pliny noted that business was conducted through 130 interpreters—there were so many languages and dialects.

[39] The Phasis, Tshorok, &c.

The Phasis, Tshorok, etc.

[40] The Kur and Aras.

The Kura and Aras rivers.

[41] The Irôn and Mizjeji.

The Irôn and Mizjeji.

[42] From Moorcroft’s Travels in the Himalayan Provinces, and Vigne’s Cashmír.

[42] From Moorcroft’s Travels in the Himalayan Provinces, and Vigne’s Cashmír.

PRINTED BY RICHARD TAYLOR,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

PRINTED BY RICHARD TAYLOR,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

London, January 1863.

London, January 1863.

Book Catalogue PUBLISHED BY MR. VAN VOORST.

INDEX.

Accentuated List of Lepidoptera p.    6
Adams & Baikie’s Manual Nat. Hist. 11
Adams’s Genera of Mollusca 5
Aikin’s Arts and Manufactures 13
Anatomical Manipulation 12
Ansted’s Ancient World 9
—— Elementary Course of Geology 9
—— Geologist’s Text-Book 9
—— Gold-Seeker’s Manual 9
—— Scenery, Science, and Art 13
Babington’s Flora of Cambridgeshire 7
—— Manual of British Botany 7
Baptismal Fonts 13
Bate and Westwood’s British Crustacea 4
Beale on Sperm Whale 3
Bell’s British Quadrupeds 3
—— British Reptiles 4
—— British Stalk-eyed Crustacea 4
Bennett’s Naturalist in Australasia 10
Bloomfield’s Farmer’s Boy 14
Boccius on Production of Fish 4
Bonaparte’s List of Birds 3
Brightwell’s Life of Linnæus 13
Burton’s Falconry on the Indus 3
Church and Northcote’s Chem. Analysis 8
Clark’s Testaceous Mollusca 5
Clermont’s Quadrupeds & R. of Europe 3
Couch’s Illustrations of Instinct 11
Cumming’s Isle of Man 12
Cups and their Customs 13
Currency 15
Dallas’s Elements of Entomology 5
Dawson’s Geodephaga Britannica 6
Domestic Scenes in Greenland & Iceland 13
Douglas’s World of Insects 6
Dowden’s Walks after Wild Flowers 8
Drew’s Practical Meteorology 10
Drummond’s First Steps to Anatomy 11
Economy of Human Life 15
Elements of Practical Knowledge 13
England before the Norman Conquest 13
Entomologist’s Annual 5
Fly Fishing in Salt and Fresh Water 4
Forbes’s British Star-fishes 5
Forbes’s Malacologia Monensis 5
—— and Hanley’s British Mollusca 5
—— and Spratt’s Travels in Lycia 12
Garner’s Nat. Hist. of Staffordshire 12
Gosse’s Aquarium 12
—— Birds of Jamaica 3
—— British Sea-Anemones, &c. 12
—— Canadian Naturalist 12
—— Handbook to Marine Aquarium 12
—— Manual of Marine Zoology 12
—— Naturalist’s Rambles on Dev. Coast 12
—— Omphalos 9
—— Tenby 12
Gray’s Bard and Elegy 14
Greg and Lettsom’s British Mineralogy 9
Griffith & Henfrey’s Micrographic Dict. 10
Harvey’s British Marine Algæ 7
—— Thesaurus Capensis 7
—— Flora Capensis 7
—— Index Generum Algarum 7
—— Nereis Boreali-Americana 8
—— Sea-side Book 12
Henfrey’s Botanical Diagrams 7
—— Elementary Course of Botany 7
—— Rudiments of Botany 7
—— Translation of Mohl 7
—— Vegetation of Europe 7
—— & Griffith’s Micrographic Dict. 10
—— & Tulk’s Anatomical Manipulation 11
Henslow, Memoir of 10
Hewitson’s Birds’ Eggs 3
—— Exotic Butterflies 6
Hunter’s Essays, by Owen 10
Instrumenta Ecclesiastica 13
Jeffreys’s British Conchology 5
Jenyns’s Memoir of Henslow 10
—— Observations in Meteorology 10
—— Observations in Natural History 10
—— White’s Selborne 12
Jesse’s Angler’s Rambles 4
Johnston’s British Zoophytes 5
—— Introduction to Conchology 5
—— Terra Lindisfarnensis 8
Jones’s Aquarian Naturalist 10[2]
Jones’s Animal Kingdom 11
—— Natural History of Animals 11
Knox’s (A. E.) Rambles in Sussex 3
Knox (Dr.), Great Artists & Great Anat. 11
Latham’s Descriptive Ethnology 11
—— Ethnology of British Colonies 11
—— Ethnology of British Islands 11
—— Ethnology of Europe 11
—— Man and his Migrations 11
—— Varieties of Man 11
Leach’s Synopsis of British Mollusca 5
Letters of Rusticus 12
Lettsom and Greg’s British Mineralogy 9
Lowe’s Fauna and Flora of Madeira 8
—— Manual Flora of Madeira 8
Malan’s Catalogue of Eggs 3
Martin’s Cat. of Privately Printed Books 15
Melville and Strickland on the Dodo 3
Meyrick on Dogs 13
Micrographic Dictionary 10
Mohl on the Vegetable Cell 7
Moule’s Heraldry of Fish 4
Newman’s British Ferns 8
—— History of Insects 5
—— Letters of Rusticus 12
Northcote & Church’s Chem. Analysis 8
Owen’s British Fossil Mammals 9
—— on Skeleton of Extinct Sloth 9
Paley’s Gothic Moldings 14
—— Manual of Gothic Architecture 14
Poor Artist 13
Prescott on Tobacco 13
Prestwich’s Geological Inquiry 9
—— Ground beneath us 9
Samuelson’s Earthworm and Housefly 10
—— Honey-Bee 10
Sclater’s Tanagers 3
Seemann’s British Ferns at One View 7
Selby’s British Forest Trees 8
Shakspeare’s Seven Ages of Man 14
Sharpe’s Decorated Windows 14
Shield’s Hints on Moths and Butterflies 6
Siebold on True Parthenogenesis 6
Smith’s British Diatomaceæ 8
Sowerby’s British Wild Flowers 6
—— Poisonous Plants 6
Spratt and Forbes’s Travels in Lycia 12
Stainton’s Butterflies and Moths 6
—— History of the Tineina 6
Strickland’s Ornithological Synonyms 4
—— Memoirs 9
—— and Melville on the Dodo 3
Sunday Book for the Young 13
Tugwell’s Sea-Anemones 5
Tulk and Henfrey’s Anat. Manipulation 11
Vicar of Wakefield, Illustr. by Mulready 14
Wallich’s North-Atlantic Sea-Bed 10
Watts’s Songs, Illustrated by Cope 14
Ward (Dr.) on Healthy Respiration 12
Westwood and Bate’s British Crustacea 4
White’s Selborne 12
Wilkinson’s Weeds and Wild Flowers 7
Williams’s Chemical Manipulation 8
Wollaston’s Insecta Maderensia 6
—— on Variation of Species 11
Yarrell’s British Birds 3
—— British Fishes 4
—— on the Salmon 4

Students’ Class-Books.

MANUAL OF CHEMICAL QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS. By A. B. Northcote, F.C.S., and Arthur H. Church, F.C.S. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

MANUAL OF CHEMICAL QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS. By A. B. Northcote, F.C.S., and Arthur H. Church, F.C.S. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

HANDBOOK OF CHEMICAL MANIPULATION. By C. Greville Williams. 15s.

HANDBOOK OF CHEMICAL MANIPULATION. By C. Greville Williams. £15.

ELEMENTARY COURSE OF GEOLOGY, MINERALOGY, AND PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. By Professor Ansted, M.A., &c. Second Edition, 12s.

ELEMENTARY COURSE OF GEOLOGY, MINERALOGY, AND PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. By Professor Ansted, M.A., etc. Second Edition, 12s.

ELEMENTARY COURSE OF BOTANY: Structural, Physiological, and Systematic. By Professor Henfrey. 12s. 6d.

ELEMENTARY COURSE OF BOTANY: Structural, Physiological, and Systematic. By Professor Henfrey. 12s. 6d.

MANUAL OF BRITISH BOTANY. By Professor Babington, M.A., &c. Fifth Edition, 10s. 6d.

MANUAL OF BRITISH BOTANY. By Professor Babington, M.A., etc. Fifth Edition, 10s. 6d.

GENERAL OUTLINE OF THE ORGANIZATION OF THE ANIMAL KINGDOM. By Professor T. Rymer Jones. 8vo, Third Edition, £1 11s. 6d.

GENERAL OUTLINE OF THE ORGANIZATION OF THE ANIMAL KINGDOM. By Professor T. Rymer Jones. 8vo, Third Edition, £1 11s. 6d.

ZOOLOGY.

MAMMALIA.

A GUIDE TO THE QUADRUPEDS AND REPTILES OF EUROPE, with Descriptions of all the Species. By Lord CLERMONT. Post 8vo, 7s.

A GUIDE TO THE QUADRUPEDS AND REPTILES OF EUROPE, with Descriptions of all the Species. By Lord CLERMONT. Post 8vo, 7s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH QUADRUPEDS, INCLUDING THE CETACEA. By THOMAS BELL, F.R.S., P.L.S., Professor of Zoology in King’s College, London. Illustrated by nearly 200 Engravings, comprising portraits of the animals, and vignette tail-pieces, 8vo. New Edition, with the cooperation of Mr. Tomes, in preparation.

HISTORY OF BRITISH QUADRUPEDS, INCLUDING THE CETACEA. By THOMAS BELL, F.R.S., P.L.S., Professor of Zoology at King’s College, London. Illustrated with almost 200 engravings, featuring portraits of the animals and vignette tail-pieces, 8vo. New Edition, prepared with the help of Mr. Books.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE SPERM WHALE, and a Sketch of a South Sea Whaling Voyage. By THOMAS BEALE. Post 8vo, 12s. cloth.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE SPERM WHALE, and a Overview of a South Sea Whaling Voyage. By THOMAS BEALE. Post 8vo, 12s. cloth.

BIRDS.

HISTORY OF BRITISH BIRDS. By WILLIAM YARRELL, V.P.L.S., F.Z.S., &c. This work contains a history and a picture portrait, engraved expressly for the work, of each species of the birds found in Britain. Three volumes, containing 550 Illustrations. Third Edition, demy 8vo, £4 14s. 6d.

HISTORY OF BRITISH BIRDS. By WILLIAM YARRELL, V.P.L.S., F.Z.S., etc. This work includes a history and a detailed illustration, specially created for this book, of each bird species found in Britain. It consists of three volumes with 550 illustrations. Third Edition, demy 8vo, £4 14s. 6d.

COLOURED ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE EGGS OF BRITISH BIRDS, with Descriptions of their Nests and Nidification. By WILLIAM C. HEWITSON. Third Edition, 2 vols. 8vo, £4 14s. 6d. The figures and descriptions of the Eggs in this edition are from different specimens to those figured in the previous editions.

COLORED ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE EGGS OF BRITISH BIRDS, with Descriptions of their Nests and Nesting. By WILLIAM C. HEWITSON. Third Edition, 2 vols. 8vo, £4 14s. 6d. The images and descriptions of the Eggs in this edition are from different specimens than those shown in the previous editions.

SYSTEMATIC CATALOGUE OF THE EGGS OF BRITISH BIRDS, arranged with a View to supersede the use of Labels for Eggs. By the Rev. S. C. MALAN, M.A., M.A.S. On writing-paper. 8vo, 8s. 6d.

SYSTEMATIC CATALOG OF THE EGGS OF BRITISH BIRDS, organized to replace the use of Labels for Eggs. By Rev. S. C. MALAN, M.A., M.A.S. On writing paper. 8vo, 8s. 6d.

ORNITHOLOGICAL RAMBLES IN SUSSEX. By A. E. KNOX, M.A., F.L.S. Third Edition. Post 8vo, with Four Illustrations by Wolf, 7s. 6d.

ORNITHOLOGICAL RAMBLES IN SUSSEX. By A. E. KNOX, M.A., F.L.S. Third Edition. Post 8vo, with Four Illustrations by Wolf, 7s. 6d.

FALCONRY IN THE VALLEY OF THE INDUS. By R. F. BURTON, Author of ‘Goa and the Blue Mountains,’ &c. Post 8vo, with Four Illustrations, 6s.

FALCONRY IN THE VALLEY OF THE INDUS. By R. F. BURTON, Author of ‘Goa and the Blue Mountains,’ etc. Post 8vo, with Four Illustrations, 6s.

MONOGRAPH OF THE BIRDS FORMING THE TANAGRINE GENUS CALLISTE; illustrated by Coloured Plates of all the known species. By P. L. SCLATER, M.A., Fellow of Corpus Christi College, Oxford, F.R.S., F.Z.S., &c. 8vo, £2 2s.

MONOGRAPH OF THE BIRDS IN THE TANAGRINE GENUS CALLISTE; illustrated with Color Plates of all the known species. By P. L. SCLATER, M.A., Fellow of Corpus Christi College, Oxford, F.R.S., F.Z.S., etc. 8vo, £2 2s.

BIRDS OF JAMAICA. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S., Author of the ‘Canadian Naturalist,’ &c. Post 8vo, 10s.

BIRDS OF JAMAICA. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S., Author of the ‘Canadian Naturalist,’ etc. Post 8vo, 10s.

GEOGRAPHICAL AND COMPARATIVE LIST OF THE BIRDS OF EUROPE AND NORTH AMERICA. By CHARLES LUCIEN BONAPARTE, Prince of Musignano. 8vo, 5s.

GEOGRAPHICAL AND COMPARATIVE LIST OF THE BIRDS OF EUROPE AND NORTH AMERICA. By CHARLES LUCIEN BONAPARTE, Prince of Musignano. 8vo, 5s.

THE DODO AND ITS KINDRED; or, The History, Affinities and Osteology of the Dodo, Solitaire, and other Extinct Birds of the Islands Mauritius, Rodriguez, and Bourbon. By H. E. STRICKLAND, M.A., F.G.S., F.R.G.S., and R. G. MELVILLE, M.D. Edin., M.R.C.S. Royal 4to, with 18 Plates and other Illustrations, £1 1s.

THE DODO AND ITS RELATIVES; or, The History, Connections, and Bones of the Dodo, Solitaire, and other Extinct Birds from the Islands of Mauritius, Rodriguez, and Bourbon. By H. E. STRICKLAND, M.A., F.G.S., F.R.G.S., and R. G. MELVILLE, M.D. Edin., M.R.C.S. Royal 4to, with 18 Plates and other Illustrations, £1 1s.

ORNITHOLOGICAL SYNONYMS. By the late HUGH EDWIN STRICKLAND, M.A., F.R.S., &c. Edited by Mrs. HUGH EDWIN STRICKLAND and SIR WILLIAM JARDINE, Bart., F.R.S.E., &c. 8vo, Vol. I. containing the Order Accipitres, 12s. 6d. Vol. II. in the press.

ORNITHOLOGICAL SYNONYMS. By the late HUGH EDWIN STRICKLAND, M.A., F.R.S., etc. Edited by Mrs. HUGH EDWIN STRICKLAND and SIR WILLIAM JARDINE, Bart., F.R.S.E., etc. 8vo, Vol. I. containing the Order Accipitres, 12s. 6d. Vol. II. in preparation.

REPTILES.

HISTORY OF BRITISH REPTILES. By THOMAS BELL, F.R.S., President of the Linnean Society, V.P.Z.S., &c., Professor of Zoology in King’s College, London. Second Edition, with 50 Illustrations, 12s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH REPTILES. By THOMAS BELL, F.R.S., President of the Linnean Society, V.P.Z.S., etc., Professor of Zoology at King’s College, London. Second Edition, with 50 Illustrations, 12s.

FISHES.

PRODUCTION AND MANAGEMENT OF FISH IN FRESH WATERS, by Artificial Spawning, Breeding, and Rearing. By GOTTLIEB BOCCIUS. 8vo, 5s.

PRODUCTION AND MANAGEMENT OF FISH IN FRESH WATERS, through Artificial Spawning, Breeding, and Rearing. By GOTTLIEB BOCCIUS. 8vo, 5s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH FISHES. By WILLIAM YARRELL, V.P.L.S., F.Z.S., &c. Third Edition. Edited by SIR JOHN RICHARDSON, M.D. Two vols. demy 8vo, illustrated by more than 500 Engravings, £3 3s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH FISHES. By WILLIAM YARRELL, V.P.L.S., F.Z.S., etc. Third Edition. Edited by SIR JOHN RICHARDSON, M.D. Two volumes, demy 8vo, illustrated with over 500 engravings, £3 3s.

YARRELL.—GROWTH OF THE SALMON IN FRESH WATER. With Six Coloured Illustrations of the Fish of the natural size, exhibiting its structure and exact appearance at various stages during the first two years. 12s. sewed.

YARRELL.—GROWTH OF THE SALMON IN FRESH WATER. With Six Colored Illustrations of the Fish at natural size, showing its structure and exact appearance at various stages during the first two years. 12s. sewed.

HERALDRY OF FISH. By THOMAS MOULE. Nearly six hundred families are noticed in this work, and besides the several descriptions of fish, fishing-nets, and boats, are included also mermaids, tritons, and shell-fish. Nearly seventy ancient seals are described, and upwards of twenty subjects in stained glass. The engravings, two hundred and five in number, are from stained glass, tombs, sculpture and carving, medals and coins, rolls of arms, and pedigrees. 8vo, 21s.; a few on large paper (royal 8vo) for colouring, £2 2s.

HERALDRY OF FISH. By THOMAS MOULE. This work features nearly six hundred families, along with various descriptions of fish, fishing nets, and boats, and also includes mermaids, tritons, and shellfish. Nearly seventy ancient seals are detailed, alongside more than twenty subjects in stained glass. The engravings, totaling two hundred and five, come from stained glass, tombs, sculptures and carvings, medals and coins, rolls of arms, and family trees. 8vo, 21.; a few on large paper (royal 8vo) for coloring, £2 2.

FLY-FISHING IN SALT AND FRESH WATER. With Six Coloured Plates, representing Artificial Flies, &c. 8vo, 7s. 6d.

FLY-FISHING IN SALT AND FRESH WATER. With Six Colored Plates, representing Artificial Flies, etc. 8vo, 7s. 6d.

AN ANGLER’S RAMBLES. By EDWARD JESSE, F.L.S., Author of ‘Gleanings in Natural History.’ Contents:—Thames Fishing—Trolling in Staffordshire—Perch Fishing Club—Two Days’ Fly-fishing on the Test—Luckford Fishing Club—Grayling Fishing—A Visit to Oxford—The Country Clergyman. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

AN ANGLER’S RAMBLES. By EDWARD JESSE, F.L.S., Author of ‘Gleanings in Natural History.’ Contents:—Thames Fishing—Trolling in Staffordshire—Perch Fishing Club—Two Days’ Fly-fishing on the Test—Luckford Fishing Club—Grayling Fishing—A Visit to Oxford—The Country Clergyman. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

INVERTEBRATA.

HISTORY OF BRITISH SESSILE-EYED CRUSTACEA (Sand-hoppers, &c.). By C. SPENCE BATE, F.R.S., F.L.S., and Professor WESTWOOD, F.L.S., &c. With figures of all the species, and tail-pieces. Uniform with the Stalk-eyed Crustacea by Professor Bell. Parts 1 to 10, each 2s. 6d.

HISTORY OF BRITISH SESSILE-EYED CRUSTACEA (Sand-hoppers, etc.). By C. SPENCE BATE, F.R.S., F.L.S., and Professor WESTWOOD, F.L.S., etc. With illustrations of all the species, and tail-pieces. Consistent with the Stalk-eyed Crustacea by Professor Bell. Parts 1 to 10, each 26d.

HISTORY OF BRITISH STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA (Lobsters, Crabs, Prawns, Shrimps, &c.). By THOMAS BELL, President of the Linnean Society, F.G.S., F.Z.S., Professor of Zoology in King’s College, London. The volume is illustrated by 174 Engravings of Species and tail-pieces. 8vo, £1 5s.; royal 8vo, £2 10s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA (Lobsters, Crabs, Prawns, Shrimps, etc.). By THOMAS BELL, President of the Linnean Society, F.G.S., F.Z.S., Professor of Zoology at King’s College, London. The book includes 174 illustrations of various species and decorative tail pieces. 8vo, £1 5s; royal 8vo, £2 10s.

BRITISH CONCHOLOGY; or, an Account of the Mollusca which now inhabit the British Isles and the surrounding Seas; with particulars of their habits and distribution. By J. GWYN JEFFREYS, F.R.S., F.G.S., &c. Vol. I. containing the Land and Freshwater Shells, post 8vo, with Nine Plates, price 12s.

BRITISH CONCHOLOGY; or, a Study of the Mollusks Living in the British Isles and the Surrounding Seas; including Details About Their Habits and Distribution. By J. GWYN JEFFREYS, F.R.S., F.G.S., etc. Vol. I. featuring the Land and Freshwater Shells, post 8vo, with Nine Plates, priced at 12s.

INTRODUCTION TO CONCHOLOGY; or, Elements of the Natural History of Molluscous Animals. By GEORGE JOHNSTON, M.D., LL.D., Fellow of the Royal College of Surgeons of Edinburgh, Author of ‘A History of the British Zoophytes.’ 8vo, 102 Illustrations, 21s.

INTRODUCTION TO CONCHOLOGY; or, Elements of the Natural History of Mollusk Animals. By GEORGE JOHNSTON, M.D., LL.D., Fellow of the Royal College of Surgeons of Edinburgh, Author of ‘A History of the British Zoophytes.’ 8vo, 102 Illustrations, 21s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH MOLLUSCA AND THEIR SHELLS. By Professor ED. FORBES, F.R.S., &c. and SYLVANUS HANLEY, B.A., F.L.S. Illustrated by a figure of each known Animal and of all the Shells, engraved on 203 copper-plates. 4 vols. 8vo, £6 10s.; royal 8vo, with the plates coloured, £13.

HISTORY OF BRITISH MOLLUSCA AND THEIR SHELLS. By Professor ED. FORBES, F.R.S., etc. and SYLVANUS HANLEY, B.A., F.L.S. Illustrated with a picture of each known animal and all the shells, engraved on 203 copper plates. 4 volumes, 8vo, £6 10s.; royal 8vo, with the plates colored, £13.

SYNOPSIS OF THE MOLLUSCA OF GREAT BRITAIN. Arranged according to their Natural Affinities and Anatomical Structure. By W. A. LEACH, M.D., F.R.S., &c. &c. Post 8vo, with 13 Plates, 14s.

SYNOPSIS OF THE MOLLUSCA OF GREAT BRITAIN. Organized by their Natural Relationships and Anatomical Features. By W. A. LEACH, M.D., F.R.S., etc. Post 8vo, with 13 Plates, 14s.

HISTORY OF THE BRITISH MARINE TESTACEOUS MOLLUSCA. By WILLIAM CLARK. 8vo, 15s.

HISTORY OF THE BRITISH MARINE TESTACEOUS MOLLUSCA. By WILLIAM CLARK. 8vo, 15.

GENERA OF RECENT MOLLUSCA; arranged according to their Organization. By HENRY AND ARTHUR ADAMS. This work contains a description and a figure engraved on steel of each genus, and an enumeration of the species. 3 vols. 8vo, £4 10s.; or royal 8vo, with the plates coloured, £9.

GENERA OF RECENT MOLLUSCA; organized by their structure. By HENRY AND ARTHUR ADAMS. This work includes a description and a steel-engraved image of each genus, along with a list of the species. 3 vols. 8vo, £4 10s.; or royal 8vo, with the plates colored, £9.

MALACOLOGIA MONENSIS. A Catalogue of the Mollusca inhabiting the Isle of Man and the neighbouring Sea. By EDWARD FORBES. Post 8vo, 3s. (Edinburgh, 1838.)

MALACOLOGIA MONENSIS. A Catalogue of the Mollusks living in the Isle of Man and the surrounding Sea. By EDWARD FORBES. Post 8vo, 3s. (Edinburgh, 1838.)

HISTORY OF BRITISH STAR-FISHES, AND OTHER ANIMALS OF THE CLASS ECHINODERMATA. By EDWARD FORBES, M.W.S., Professor of Botany in King’s College, London. 8vo, with more than 120 Illustrations, 15s.; or royal 8vo, 30s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH STARFISHES AND OTHER ANIMALS OF THE CLASS ECHINODERMATA. By EDWARD FORBES, M.W.S., Professor of Botany at King’s College, London. 8vo, with over 120 illustrations, 15s.; or royal 8vo, 30s.

ELEMENTS OF ENTOMOLOGY: an Outline of the Natural History and Classification of British Insects. By WILLIAM S. DALLAS, F.L.S. Post 8vo, 8s. 6d.

ELEMENTS OF ENTOMOLOGY: an Outline of the Natural History and Classification of British Insects. By WILLIAM S. DALLAS, F.L.S. Post 8vo, £8.6.

THE ENTOMOLOGIST’S ANNUAL FOR 1855 to 1863. 12mo, 2s. 6d. each.

THE ENTOMOLOGIST’S ANNUAL FOR 1855 to 1863. 12mo, 2s. 6d. each.

HISTORY OF THE BRITISH ZOOPHYTES. By GEORGE JOHNSTON, M.D., LL.D. Second Edition, in 2 vols. 8vo, with an illustration of every species. £2 2s.; or on large paper, royal 8vo, £4 4s.

HISTORY OF THE BRITISH ZOOPHYTES. By GEORGE JOHNSTON, M.D., LL.D. Second Edition, in 2 vols. 8vo, with an illustration of every species. £2 2s.; or on large paper, royal 8vo, £4 4s.

MANUAL OF THE SEA-ANEMONES COMMONLY FOUND ON THE ENGLISH COAST. By the Rev. GEORGE TUGWELL, Oriel College, Oxford. Post 8vo, with Coloured Illustrations, 7s. 6d.

MANUAL OF THE SEA ANEMONES COMMONLY FOUND ON THE ENGLISH COAST. By the Rev. GEORGE TUGWELL, Oriel College, Oxford. Post 8vo, with Colored Illustrations, 7s. 6d.

NATURAL HISTORY OF ANIMALS. By Professor T. RYMER JONES. Vol. II. Insects, &c., with 104 Illustrations, post 8vo, 12s.

NATURAL HISTORY OF ANIMALS. By Professor T. RYMER JONES. Vol. II. Insects, etc., with 104 Illustrations, post 8vo, 12s.

FAMILIAR INTRODUCTION TO THE HISTORY OF INSECTS; being a Second and greatly Improved Edition of the Grammar of Entomology. By EDWARD NEWMAN, F.L.S., Z.S., &c. With nearly 100 Illustrations, 8vo, 12s.

FAMILIAR INTRODUCTION TO THE HISTORY OF INSECTS; being a Second and greatly Improved Edition of the Grammar of Entomology. By EDWARD NEWMAN, F.L.S., Z.S., etc. With nearly 100 Illustrations, 8vo, 12s.

THE WORLD OF INSECTS: a Guide to its Wonders. By J. W. DOUGLAS, Secretary to the Entomological Society of London. This work contains rambling observations on the more interesting members of the Insect World to be found in the House, the Garden, the Orchard, the Fields, the Hedges, on the Fences, the Heaths and Commons, the Downs, in the Woods, the Waters, or on the Sea Shore, or on Mountains. 12mo, stiff-paper wrapper, 3s. 6d.

THE WORLD OF INSECTS: A Guide to Its Wonders. By J. W. DOUGLAS, Secretary to the Entomological Society of London. This book includes casual observations on the more fascinating members of the Insect World found in the House, the Garden, the Orchard, the Fields, the Hedges, on the Fences, the Heaths and Commons, the Downs, in the Woods, the Waters, or on the Sea Shore, or on Mountains. 12mo, stiff-paper wrapper, 3s. 6d.

SIEBOLD ON TRUE PARTHENOGENESIS IN THE HONEY-BEE AND SILK-WORM MOTH. Translated from the German by W. S. DALLAS, F.L.S. 8vo, 5s.

SIEBOLD ON TRUE PARTHENOGENESIS IN THE HONEY-BEE AND SILK-WORM MOTH. Translated from the German by W. S. DALLAS, F.L.S. 8vo, 5s.

PRACTICAL HINTS RESPECTING MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES, with Notices of their Localities; forming a Calendar of Entomological Operations throughout the Year, in pursuit of Lepidoptera. By RICHARD SHIELD. 12mo, stiff-paper wrapper, 3s.

PRACTICAL TIPS ABOUT MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES, along with Information on their Locations; creating a Yearly Calendar for Entomological Activities focused on Lepidoptera. By RICHARD SHIELD. 12mo, stiff-paper cover, 3s.

HEWITSON’S EXOTIC BUTTERFLIES. Vols. I. and II., containing 790 Coloured Figures of new or rare species, Five Guineas each volume.

HEWITSON’S EXOTIC BUTTERFLIES. Vols. I. and II., featuring 790 Colored Illustrations of new or rare species, Five Guineas for each volume.

Of Vol. III., Four Parts (41 to 44 of the entire work) are at this time published, 5s. each.

Of Vol. III, Four Parts (41 to 44 of the entire work) are currently published, 5s. each.

MANUAL OF BRITISH BUTTERFLIES AND MOTHS. By H. T. STAINTON. 2 vols. 12mo, 10s.

MANUAL OF BRITISH BUTTERFLIES AND MOTHS. By H. T. STAINTON. 2 vols. 12mo, 10s.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE TINEINA. By H. T. STAINTON. Coloured Plates. Vols. I. to VII. 8vo, cloth, each 12s. 6d.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE TINEINA. By H. T. STAINTON. Colored Plates. Vols. I. to VII. 8vo, cloth, each 12s. 6d.

GEODEPHAGA BRITANNICA: a Monograph of the Carnivorous Ground-Beetles Indigenous to the British Isles. By J. F. DAWSON, LL.B. 8vo, without the Plates, 10s.

GEODEPHAGA BRITANNICA: a comprehensive study of the carnivorous ground beetles native to the British Isles. By J. F. DAWSON, LL.B. 8vo, without the Plates, 10s.

INSECTA MADERENSIA; being an Account of the Insects of the Islands of the Madeiran Group. By T. VERNON WOLLASTON, M.A., F.L.S. 4to, with Thirteen Coloured Plates of Beetles, £2 2s.

INSECTA MADERENSIA; an Account of the Insects of the Madeira Islands. By T. VERNON WOLLASTON, M.A., F.L.S. 4to, with Thirteen Colored Plates of Beetles, £2 2s.

AN ACCENTUATED LIST OF THE BRITISH LEPIDOPTERA, with Hints on the Derivation of the Names. Published by the Entomological Societies of Oxford and Cambridge. 8vo, 5s.

AN ACCENTUATED LIST OF THE BRITISH LEPIDOPTERA, with Hints on the Derivation of the Names. Published by the Entomological Societies of Oxford and Cambridge. 8vo, 5s.

BOTANY.

BRITISH WILD FLOWERS. Illustrated by JOHN E. SOWERBY. Described, with an Introduction and a Key to the Natural Orders, by C. PIERPOINT JOHNSON. Re-issue, to which is now added a Supplement containing 180 new figures, comprising lately discovered Flowering Plants, by JOHN W. SALTER, A.L.S., F.G.S.; and the Ferns, Horsetails and Club-Mosses, by JOHN E. SOWERBY. 8vo, with 1780 Coloured Figures, £3 3s.

BRITISH WILD FLOWERS. Illustrated by JOHN E. SOWERBY. Described, with an Introduction and a Key to the Natural Orders, by C. PIERPOINT JOHNSON. Reissue, now including a Supplement featuring 180 new illustrations of recently discovered flowering plants, by JOHN W. SALTER, A.L.S., F.G.S.; and the ferns, horsetails, and club-mosses, by JOHN E. SOWERBY. 8vo, with 1780 colored illustrations, £3 3s.

BRITISH POISONOUS PLANTS. Illustrated by JOHN E. SOWERBY. Described by CHARLES JOHNSON, Botanical Lecturer at Guy’s Hospital; and C. PIERPOINT JOHNSON. Second Edition, containing the principal Poisonous Fungi. Post 8vo, with 32 Coloured Plates, 9s. 6d.

BRITISH POISONOUS PLANTS. Illustrated by JOHN E. SOWERBY. Described by CHARLES JOHNSON, Botanical Lecturer at Guy's Hospital; and C. PIERPOINT JOHNSON. Second Edition, featuring the main Poisonous Fungi. Post 8vo, with 32 Colored Plates, 9s. 6d.

THE BRITISH FERNS AT ONE VIEW. By BERTHOLD SEEMANN, Ph.D., F.L.S. An eight-page out-folding sheet, with descriptions of the Orders, Tribes, and Genera, and a Coloured figure of a portion of each species, 8vo, cloth, 6s.

THE BRITISH FERNS AT A GLANCE. By BERTHOLD SEEMANN, Ph.D., F.L.S. An eight-page fold-out sheet, featuring descriptions of the Orders, Tribes, and Genera, along with a colored illustration of part of each species, 8vo, cloth, 6s.

FLORA OF CAMBRIDGESHIRE: or, A Catalogue of Plants found in the County of Cambridge, with References to former Catalogues, and the Localities of the Rarer Species. By C. C. BABINGTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., &c. 12mo, with a Map, 7s.

FLORA OF CAMBRIDGESHIRE: or, A List of Plants Found in the County of Cambridge, with References to Previous Lists, and the Locations of the Rarer Species. By C. C. BABINGTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., etc. 12mo, with a Map, 7s.

MANUAL OF BRITISH BOTANY; containing the Flowering Plants and Ferns, arranged according to their Natural Orders. By C. C. BABINGTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., &c., Professor of Botany in the University of Cambridge. 12mo, the Fifth Edition, with many additions and corrections, 10s. 6d., cloth.

MANUAL OF BRITISH BOTANY; featuring Flowering Plants and Ferns, organized by their Natural Orders. By C. C. BABINGTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., etc., Professor of Botany at the University of Cambridge. 12mo, Fifth Edition, with numerous updates and corrections, 10s. 6d., cloth.

WEEDS AND WILD FLOWERS. By LADY WILKINSON. Post 8vo, with Coloured Engravings and Woodcuts, 10s. 6d.

WEEDS AND WILD FLOWERS. By LADY WILKINSON. Post 8vo, with Colored Illustrations and Woodcuts, 10s. 6d.

ELEMENTARY COURSE OF BOTANY; Structural, Physiological, and Systematic. With a brief Outline of the Geographical and Geological Distribution of Plants. By ARTHUR HENFREY, F.R.S., L.S., &c., Professor of Botany in King’s College, London. Illustrated by upwards of 500 Woodcuts. Post 8vo, 12s. 6d.

ELEMENTARY COURSE OF BOTANY; Structural, Physiological, and Systematic. With a brief Overview of the Geographical and Geological Distribution of Plants. By ARTHUR HENFREY, F.R.S., L.S., etc., Professor of Botany at King’s College, London. Illustrated with over 500 Woodcuts. Post 8vo, 12s. 6d.

VEGETATION OF EUROPE, ITS CONDITIONS AND CAUSES. By Professor HENFREY. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

VEGETATION OF EUROPE, ITS CONDITIONS AND CAUSES. By Professor HENFREY. Foolscap 8vo, £5.

PRINCIPLES OF THE ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF THE VEGETABLE CELL. By HUGO VON MOHL. Translated, with the author’s permission, by Professor HENFREY. 8vo, with an Illustrative Plate and numerous Woodcuts, 7s. 6d.

PRINCIPLES OF THE ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF THE VEGETABLE CELL. By HUGO VON MOHL. Translated, with the author’s permission, by Professor HENFREY. 8vo, with an Illustrative Plate and numerous Woodcuts, 7s. 6d.

RUDIMENTS OF BOTANY. A Familiar Introduction to the Study of Plants. By Professor HENFREY. With Illustrative Woodcuts. Second Edition, foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

RUDIMENTS OF BOTANY. A Friendly Introduction to the Study of Plants. By Professor HENFREY. With Illustrative Woodcuts. Second Edition, foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

A SET OF SIX COLOURED DIAGRAMS; for Schools and Lectures. By Professor HENFREY. 15s.

A SET OF SIX COLOURED DIAGRAMS; for Schools and Lectures. By Professor HENFREY. 15s.

THESAURUS CAPENSIS: or, Illustrations of the South African Flora; being Figures and brief descriptions of South African Plants, selected from the Dublin University Herbarium. By W. H. HARVEY, M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Botany in the University of Dublin, and Keeper of the Herbarium. 8vo, Vol. I., with 100 Plates, uncoloured, £1 1s.

THESAURUS CAPENSIS: or, Illustrations of the South African Flora; featuring images and short descriptions of South African plants, chosen from the Dublin University Herbarium. By W. H. HARVEY, M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Botany at the University of Dublin, and Keeper of the Herbarium. 8vo, Vol. I., with 100 Plates, uncolored, £1 1s.

FLORA CAPENSIS; being a Systematic Description of the Plants of the Cape Colony, Caffraria, and Port Natal. By Professor HARVEY and Dr. SONDER. 8vo, Vol. I. Ranunculaceæ to Connaraceæ. Vol. II. Leguminosæ to Loranthaceæ. Each 12s.

FLORA CAPENSIS; a Systematic Description of the Plants of the Cape Colony, Caffraria, and Port Natal. By Professor HARVEY and Dr. SONDER. 8vo, Vol. I. Ranunculaceæ to Connaraceæ. Vol. II. Leguminosæ to Loranthaceæ. Each 12s.

INDEX GENERUM ALGARUM: or, a Systematic Catalogue of the Genera of Algæ, Marine and Freshwater: with an Alphabetical Key to all the Names and Synonyms. By Professor HARVEY. 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.

INDEX GENERUM ALGARUM: or, a Systematic Catalogue of the Genera of Algae, Marine and Freshwater: with an Alphabetical Key to all the Names and Synonyms. By Professor HARVEY. 8vo, sewed, 2s. 6d.

MANUAL OF THE BRITISH MARINE ALGÆ, containing Generic and Specific Descriptions of all the known British Species of Sea-Weeds, with Plates to illustrate all the Genera. By Professor HARVEY. 8vo, £1 1s. Coloured Copies, £1 11s. 6d.

MANUAL OF THE BRITISH MARINE ALGÆ, featuring generic and specific descriptions of all the known British species of seaweeds, along with plates to illustrate all the genera. By Professor HARVEY. 8vo, £1 1s. Coloured copies, £1 11s. 6d.

NEREIS BOREALI-AMERICANA; or, Contributions towards a History of the Marine Algæ of the Atlantic and Pacific Coasts of North America. By Professor HARVEY. Royal 4to, with 50 Coloured Plates, £3 3s.

NEREIS BOREALI-AMERICANA; or, Contributions to the History of the Marine Algae of the Atlantic and Pacific Coasts of North America. By Professor HARVEY. Royal 4to, with 50 Colored Plates, £3 3s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH FOREST-TREES. By PRIDEAUX JOHN SELBY, F.R.S.E., F.L.S., &c. Each species is illustrated by a portrait of some well-known or fine specimen, as a head-piece: the leaf, florification, seed-vessels, or other embellishments tending to make the volume ornamental or useful, are embodied in the text or inserted as tail-pieces. 8vo, with nearly 200 Illustrations, £1 8s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH FOREST-TREES. By PRIDEAUX JOHN SELBY, F.R.S.E., F.L.S., etc. Each species is shown with a portrait of a well-known or fine specimen at the top: the leaf, flowers, seed pods, or other features that enhance the book’s appeal or usefulness are included in the text or as closing illustrations. 8vo, with nearly 200 Illustrations, £1 8s.

MANUAL FLORA OF MADEIRA AND THE ADJACENT ISLANDS OF PORTO SANTO AND THE DESERTAS. By R. T. LOWE, M.A. 12mo. Part I. Thalamifloræ. Part II. Calycifloræ. Each 3s. 6d.

MANUAL FLORA OF MADEIRA AND THE ADJACENT ISLANDS OF PORTO SANTO AND THE DESERTAS. By R. T. LOWE, M.A. 12mo. Part I. Thalamifloræ. Part II. Calycifloræ. Each 3s. 6d.

PRIMITIÆ ET NOVITIÆ FAUNÆ ET FLORÆ MADERÆ ET PORTUS SANCTI. Two Memoirs on the Ferns, Flowering Plants, and Land Shells of Madeira and Porto Santo. By R. T. LOWE, M.A. 12mo, 6s. 6d., boards (150 copies printed).

PRIMITIÆ ET NOVITIÆ FAUNÆ ET FLORÆ MADERÆ ET PORTUS SANCTI. Two Memoirs on the Ferns, Flowering Plants, and Land Shells of Madeira and Porto Santo. By R. T. LOWE, M.A. 12mo, £0.33, boards (150 copies printed).

WALKS AFTER WILD FLOWERS; or the Botany of the Bohereens. By RICHARD DOWDEN. Foolscap 8vo, 4s. 6d.

WALKS AFTER WILD FLOWERS; or the Botany of the Bohereens. By RICHARD DOWDEN. Foolscap 8vo, 4s. 6d.

TERRA LINDISFARNENSIS. The Natural History of the Eastern Borders. By GEORGE JOHNSTON, M.D., &c., &c. This volume embraces the Topography and Botany; and gives the popular Names and Uses of the Plants, and the Customs and Beliefs which have been associated with them. The chapter on the Fossil Botany of the district is contributed by George Tate, F.G.S. Illustrated with a few Woodcuts and 15 Plates, 8vo, 10s. 6d.

TERRA LINDISFARNENSIS. The Natural History of the Eastern Borders. By GEORGE JOHNSTON, M.D., etc. This volume covers the geography and plant life, providing the common names and uses of the plants, as well as the customs and beliefs linked to them. The section on the fossil plants of the area is contributed by George Tate, F.G.S. Illustrated with a few woodcuts and 15 plates, 8vo, 10s. 6d.

HISTORY OF BRITISH FERNS. By EDWARD NEWMAN. Comprising, under each Species, Figures, detailed Descriptions, an ample List of Localities, and minute Instructions for Cultivating. 8vo, 18s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH FERNS. By EDWARD NEWMAN. Including, for each Species, Images, detailed Descriptions, a comprehensive List of Locations, and thorough Instructions for Cultivation. 8vo, 18s.

SYNOPSIS OF THE BRITISH DIATOMACEÆ; with Remarks on their Structure, Functions, and Distribution; and Instructions for Collecting and Preserving Specimens. By the Rev. WILLIAM SMITH. The Plates by TUFFEN WEST. In 2 vols. royal 8vo. Vol. I. 21s.; Vol. II. 30s.

SYNOPSIS OF THE BRITISH DIATOMACEÆ; with Comments on their Structure, Functions, and Distribution; and Guide for Collecting and Preserving Specimens. By Rev. WILLIAM SMITH. The Plates by TUFFEN WEST. In 2 volumes, royal 8vo. Volume I: £21; Volume II: £30.

CHEMISTRY, MINERALOGY, GEOLOGY.

A MANUAL OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS (Qualitative). By A. B. NORTHCOTE, F.C.S., and ARTHUR H. CHURCH, F.C.S. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

A MANUAL OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS (Qualitative). By A. B. NORTHCOTE, F.C.S., and ARTHUR H. CHURCH, F.C.S. Post 8vo, £10.6.

HANDBOOK OF CHEMICAL MANIPULATION. By C. GREVILLE WILLIAMS, late Principal Assistant in the Laboratories of the Universities of Edinburgh and Glasgow. Post 8vo, with very numerous Woodcut Illustrations, 15s.

HANDBOOK OF CHEMICAL MANIPULATION. By C. GREVILLE WILLIAMS, former Principal Assistant in the Laboratories of the Universities of Edinburgh and Glasgow. Post 8vo, with many Woodcut Illustrations, 15s.

ELEMENTARY COURSE OF GEOLOGY, MINERALOGY, AND PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. By DAVID T. ANSTED, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., &c., Consulting Mining Engineer, Honorary Fellow of King’s College, London, Lecturer on Mineralogy and Geology at the H.E.I.C. Mil. Sem. at Addiscombe, late Fellow of Jesus College, Cambridge. A Second Edition, post 8vo, with many Illustrations, 12s.

ELEMENTARY COURSE OF GEOLOGY, MINERALOGY, AND PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. By DAVID T. ANSTED, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., etc., Consulting Mining Engineer, Honorary Fellow of King’s College, London, Lecturer on Mineralogy and Geology at the H.E.I.C. Mil. Sem. at Addiscombe, former Fellow of Jesus College, Cambridge. A Second Edition, post 8vo, with many Illustrations, 12s.

THE ANCIENT WORLD. By Professor ANSTED. Second Edition, post 8vo, 10s. 6d., with 149 Illustrations.

THE ANCIENT WORLD. By Professor ANSTED. Second Edition, post 8vo, 10 6, with 149 Illustrations.

“The work may be described as an outline of the history of vegetable and animal life upon the globe, from the early age when there were only seaweeds and marine invertebrates as yet in existence, down to the era when the mammals received among them the king of species, Man. By his intimate acquaintance with the subject, and power of arrangement and description, Professor Ansted succeeds in producing a narration, which tells in its entire range like a romance.”—Manchester Examiner.

“The work can be seen as a summary of the history of plant and animal life on Earth, starting from the time when only seaweeds and marine invertebrates existed, up to the period when mammals included the dominant species, Man. Through his deep understanding of the topic and his skill in organizing and describing it, Professor Ansted creates a narrative that reads like a novel in its entirety.”—Manchester Examiner.

GOLD-SEEKER’S MANUAL. By Professor ANSTED. Foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

GOLD-SEEKER’S MANUAL. By Professor ANSTED. Foolscap 8vo, £3.50.

GEOLOGIST’S TEXT-BOOK. Chiefly intended as a Book of Reference for the Geological Student. By Professor ANSTED. Foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

GEOLOGIST’S TEXTBOOK. Mainly designed as a reference book for geology students. By Professor ANSTED. Foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

THE GROUND BENEATH US; its Geological Phases and Changes. Three Lectures on the Geology of Clapham and the neighbourhood of London generally. By JOSEPH PRESTWICH, F.R.S., F.G.S., &c. 8vo, 3s. 6d. sewed.

THE GROUND BENEATH US; its Geological Phases and Changes. Three Lectures on the Geology of Clapham and the area around London in general. By JOSEPH PRESTWICH, F.R.S., F.G.S., etc. 8vo, 3s. 6d. sewn.

GEOLOGICAL INQUIRY RESPECTING THE WATER-BEARING STRATA OF THE COUNTRY AROUND LONDON, with reference especially to the Water Supply of the Metropolis, and including some Remarks on Springs. By JOSEPH PRESTWICH, F.G.S., &c. 8vo, with a Map and Woodcuts, 8s. 6d.

GEOLOGICAL INQUIRY ABOUT THE WATER-BEARING STRATA OF THE AREA AROUND LONDON, focusing especially on the Water Supply of the City, and including some Comments on Springs. By JOSEPH PRESTWICH, F.G.S., etc. 8vo, with a Map and Illustrations, 8s. 6d.

MANUAL OF THE MINERALOGY OF GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND. By ROBERT PHILIPS GREG, F.G.S., and WILLIAM G. LETTSOM. 8vo, with numerous Woodcuts, 15s.

MANUAL OF THE MINERALOGY OF GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND. By ROBERT PHILIPS GREG, F.G.S., and WILLIAM G. LETTSOM. 8vo, with many illustrations, 15s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH FOSSIL MAMMALS AND BIRDS. By Professor OWEN. This volume is designed as a companion to that by Professor Bell on the (Recent Mammalia) ‘British Quadrupeds and Cetacea.’ 8vo, with 237 Illustrations, £1 11s. 6d., or large paper (royal 8vo), £3 3s.

HISTORY OF BRITISH FOSSIL MAMMALS AND BIRDS. By Professor OWEN. This volume is meant to complement Professor Bell's book on the (Recent Mammalia) ‘British Quadrupeds and Cetacea.’ 8vo, with 237 Illustrations, £1 11s. 6d., or large paper (royal 8vo), £3 3s.

DESCRIPTION OF THE SKELETON OF AN EXTINCT GIGANTIC SLOTH (Mylodon robustus). With Observations on the Osteology, Natural Affinities, and probable Habits of the Megatherioid Quadrupeds in general. By RICHARD OWEN, F.R.S., &c. 4to, £1 12s. 6d.

DESCRIPTION OF THE SKELETON OF AN EXTINCT GIGANTIC SLOTH (Mylodon robustus). With Observations on the Bone Structure, Natural Relationships, and Likely Behaviors of the Megatherioid Quadrupeds in general. By RICHARD OWEN, F.R.S., etc. 4to, £1 12s. 6d.

MEMOIRS OF HUGH E. STRICKLAND, M.A., Deputy Reader of Geology in the University of Oxford. By SIR WILLIAM JARDINE, Bart.; with a selection from his Printed and other Scientific Papers. Royal 8vo, Illustrated by Maps, Geological Sections, Plates and Woodcuts, 36s.

MEMOIRS OF HUGH E. STRICKLAND, M.A., Deputy Reader of Geology in the University of Oxford. By SIR WILLIAM JARDINE, Bart.; with a selection from his Printed and other Scientific Papers. Royal 8vo, Illustrated by Maps, Geological Sections, Plates and Woodcuts, 36s.

OMPHALOS. An Attempt to Untie the Geological Knot. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. The law of Prochronism in organic creation. Post 8vo, with 56 Illustrations on wood, 10s. 6d.

OMPHALOS. An Attempt to Untie the Geological Knot. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. The law of Prochronism in organic creation. Post 8vo, with 56 Illustrations on wood, £10.6.

GENERAL NATURAL HISTORY, &c.

ESSAYS AND OBSERVATIONS ON NATURAL HISTORY, ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, PSYCHOLOGY, AND GEOLOGY. By JOHN HUNTER, F.R.S. Being his Posthumous Papers on those subjects, arranged and revised, with Notes, by RICHARD OWEN, F.R.S., D.C.L., Superintendent of the Natural History Department, British Museum, &c. &c. 2 vols. 8vo, £1 11s. 6d.

ESSAYS AND OBSERVATIONS ON NATURAL HISTORY, ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, PSYCHOLOGY, AND GEOLOGY. By JOHN HUNTER, F.R.S. These are his posthumous papers on these topics, organized and edited, with notes by RICHARD OWEN, F.R.S., D.C.L., Head of the Natural History Department, British Museum, etc. etc. 2 volumes, 8vo, £1 11s. 6d.

THE NORTH-ATLANTIC SEA-BED; comprising a Diary of the Voyage on board H.M.S. ‘Bulldog’ in 1860, and Observations on the Presence of Animal Life, and the Formation and Nature of Organic Deposits, at great depths in the Ocean. By G. C. WALLICH, M.D., F.L.S., F.G.S. Published with the sanction of the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. 4to, Part I., with Map and 6 Plates, 15s. Part II., completing the work, will contain the remaining portion of the letter-press and Plates (7 to 20), and will be published shortly.

THE NORTH-ATLANTIC SEA-BED; including a Diary of the Voyage on board H.M.S. ‘Bulldog’ in 1860, along with Observations on the Presence of Animal Life and the Formation and Nature of Organic Deposits at great depths in the Ocean. By G. C. WALLICH, M.D., F.L.S., F.G.S. Published with the approval of the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. 4to, Part I., with Map and 6 Plates, 15s. Part II., which will complete the work, will include the remaining part of the text and Plates (7 to 20), and will be published soon.

MEMOIR OF THE REV. J. S. HENSLOW, M.A., F.L.S., F.G.S., F.C.P.S., Rector of Hitcham, and Professor of Botany in the University of Cambridge. By the REV. LEONARD JENYNS, M.A., F.L.S., F.G.S., F.C.P.S. Post 8vo, with a Photographic Portrait, 7s. 6d.

MEMOIR OF REV. J. S. HENSLOW, M.A., F.L.S., F.G.S., F.C.P.S., Rector of Hitcham and Professor of Botany at the University of Cambridge. By REV. LEONARD JENYNS, M.A., F.L.S., F.G.S., F.C.P.S. Post 8vo, with a Photographic Portrait, £7.50.

THE HONEY-BEE; its Natural History, Habits, Anatomy, and Microscopical Beauties. With Eight Tinted Illustrative Plates. By JAMES SAMUELSON, assisted by Dr. J. BRAXTON HICKS. (Forming a Second Part of Humble Creatures.) Post 8vo, 6s.

THE HONEY-BEE: Its Natural History, Habits, Anatomy, and Microscopic Wonders. With Eight Colorful Illustrative Plates. By JAMES SAMUELSON, with help from Dr. J. BRAXTON HICKS. (This is the Second Part of Humble Creatures.) Post 8vo, 6s.

HUMBLE CREATURES (Part I.): THE EARTHWORM AND THE COMMON HOUSEFLY. In Eight Letters. By JAMES SAMUELSON, assisted by J. B. HICKS, M.D. Lond., F.L.S. With Microscopic Illustrations by the Authors. Second Edition, post 8vo, 3s. 6d.

HUMBLE CREATURES (Part I.): THE EARTHWORM AND THE COMMON HOUSEFLY. In Eight Letters. By JAMES SAMUELSON, assisted by J. B. HICKS, M.D. Lond., F.L.S. With Microscopic Illustrations by the Authors. Second Edition, post 8vo, 3s. 6d.

GATHERINGS OF A NATURALIST IN AUSTRALASIA; being Observations principally on the Animal and Vegetable Productions of New South Wales, New Zealand, and some of the Austral Islands. By GEORGE BENNETT, M.D., F.L.S., F.Z.S. 8vo, with 8 Coloured Plates and 24 Woodcuts, 21s.

GATHERINGS OF A NATURALIST IN AUSTRALASIA; being Observations mainly on the Animal and Plant Life of New South Wales, New Zealand, and some of the Austral Islands. By GEORGE BENNETT, M.D., F.L.S., F.Z.S. 8vo, with 8 Colored Plates and 24 Woodcuts, 21s.

THE MICROGRAPHIC DICTIONARY: a Guide to the Examination and Investigation of the Structure and Nature of Microscopic Objects. By Dr. GRIFFITH and Professor HENFREY. Second edition, with 2459 Figures (many coloured), in 45 Plates and 812 Woodcuts, 840 pp., 8vo, £2 5s.

THE MICROGRAPHIC DICTIONARY: a Guide to the Examination and Investigation of the Structure and Nature of Microscopic Objects. By Dr. GRIFFITH and Professor HENFREY. Second edition, with 2459 Figures (many colored), in 45 Plates and 812 Woodcuts, 840 pp., 8vo, £2 5s.

OBSERVATIONS IN NATURAL HISTORY; with a Calendar of Periodic Phenomena. By the Rev. LEONARD JENYNS, M.A., F.L.S. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

OBSERVATIONS IN NATURAL HISTORY; with a Calendar of Periodic Phenomena. By the Rev. LEONARD JENYNS, M.A., F.L.S. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

OBSERVATIONS IN METEOROLOGY; relating to Temperature, the Winds, Atmospheric Pressure, the Aqueous Phenomena of the Atmosphere, Weather Changes, &c. By the Rev. LEONARD JENYNS, M.A., F.L.S., &c. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

OBSERVATIONS IN METEOROLOGY; about Temperature, Winds, Atmospheric Pressure, the Water Phenomena in the Atmosphere, Weather Changes, etc. By the Rev. LEONARD JENYNS, M.A., F.L.S., etc. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

PRACTICAL METEOROLOGY. By JOHN DREW, Ph.D., F.R.A.S., Corresponding Member of the Philosophical Institute of Bâle. Second Edition, foolscap 8vo, with 11 Illustrative Plates, 5s.

PRACTICAL METEOROLOGY. By JOHN DREW, Ph.D., F.R.A.S., Corresponding Member of the Philosophical Institute of Bâle. Second Edition, foolscap 8vo, with 11 Illustrative Plates, 5s.

THE AQUARIAN NATURALIST: a Manual for the Sea-side. By Professor T. RYMER JONES, F.R.S. Post 8vo, 544 pp., with 8 Coloured Plates, 18s.

THE AQUARIAN NATURALIST: a Guide for the Beach. By Professor T. RYMER JONES, F.R.S. Post 8vo, 544 pages, with 8 Colored Plates, 18s.

NATURAL HISTORY OF ANIMALS; being the Substance of Three Courses of Lectures delivered before the Royal Institution of Great Britain. By T. RYMER JONES, F.R.S., Professor of Zoology in King’s College, London. Post 8vo, Vol. I. with 105 Illustrations; Vol. II. with 104 Illustrations, 12s. each.

NATURAL HISTORY OF ANIMALS; the Content of Three Series of Lectures given at the Royal Institution of Great Britain. By T. RYMER JONES, F.R.S., Professor of Zoology at King’s College, London. Post 8vo, Vol. I. with 105 Illustrations; Vol. II. with 104 Illustrations, 12s. each.

GENERAL OUTLINE OF THE ORGANIZATION OF THE ANIMAL KINGDOM, AND MANUAL OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. By T. RYMER JONES, F.R.S., Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College, London; late Fullerian Professor of Physiology to the Royal Institution of Great Britain, &c. &c. Third Edition, 8vo, £1 11s. 6d.

GENERAL OUTLINE OF THE ORGANIZATION OF THE ANIMAL KINGDOM, AND MANUAL OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. By T. RYMER JONES, F.R.S., Professor of Comparative Anatomy at King’s College, London; formerly Fullerian Professor of Physiology at the Royal Institution of Great Britain, etc. etc. Third Edition, 8vo, £1 11s. 6d.

FIRST STEPS TO ANATOMY. By JAMES L. DRUMMOND, M.D., Professor of Anatomy and Physiology in the Belfast Royal Institution. With 12 Illustrative Plates. 12mo, 5s.

FIRST STEPS TO ANATOMY. By JAMES L. DRUMMOND, M.D., Professor of Anatomy and Physiology at the Belfast Royal Institution. With 12 Illustrative Plates. 12mo, 5s.

GREAT ARTISTS AND GREAT ANATOMISTS; a Biographical and Philosophical Study. By R. KNOX, M.D., F.R.S.E. Post 8vo, 6s. 6d.

GREAT ARTISTS AND GREAT ANATOMISTS; a Biographical and Philosophical Study. By R. KNOX, M.D., F.R.S.E. Post 8vo, 6s. 6d.

ILLUSTRATIONS OF INSTINCT, deduced from the Habits of British Animals. By JONATHAN COUCH, F.L.S., Member of the Royal Geological Society, and of the Royal Institution of Cornwall, &c. Post 8vo, 8s. 6d.

ILLUSTRATIONS OF INSTINCT, based on the Habits of British Animals. By JONATHAN COUCH, F.L.S., Member of the Royal Geological Society, and of the Royal Institution of Cornwall, etc. Post 8vo, 8s. 6d.

DESCRIPTIVE ETHNOLOGY. By ROBERT GORDON LATHAM, M.D., F.R.S., Fellow of King’s College, Cambridge; Vice-President of the Ethnological Society of London; Corresponding Member of the Ethnological Society of New York. 2 vols. 8vo, £1 12s. The portion on Indian Ethnology, separate, 16s.

DESCRIPTIVE ETHNOLOGY. By ROBERT GORDON LATHAM, M.D., F.R.S., Fellow of King’s College, Cambridge; Vice-President of the Ethnological Society of London; Corresponding Member of the Ethnological Society of New York. 2 volumes, 8vo, £1 12s. The section on Indian Ethnology, sold separately, 16s.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE VARIETIES OF MAN. By Dr. LATHAM. 8vo, Illustrated, £1 1s.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE VARIETIES OF MAN. By Dr. LATHAM. 8vo, Illustrated, £1 1s.

ETHNOLOGY OF EUROPE. By Dr. LATHAM. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

ETHNOLOGY OF EUROPE. By Dr. LATHAM. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

ETHNOLOGY OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS. By Dr. LATHAM. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

ETHNOLOGY OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS. By Dr. LATHAM. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

ETHNOLOGY OF THE BRITISH COLONIES AND DEPENDENCIES. By Dr. LATHAM. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

ETHNOLOGY OF THE BRITISH COLONIES AND DEPENDENCIES. By Dr. LATHAM. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

MAN AND HIS MIGRATIONS. By Dr. LATHAM. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

MAN AND HIS MIGRATIONS. By Dr. LATHAM. Foolscap 8vo, 5s.

ANATOMICAL MANIPULATION; or, The Methods of pursuing Practical Investigations in Comparative Anatomy and Physiology. Also an Introduction to the Use of the Microscope, &c. By ALFRED TULK, M.R.C.S., M.E.S.; and ARTHUR HENFREY, F.L.S., M.Micr.S. With Illustrative Diagrams. Foolscap 8vo, 9s.

ANATOMICAL MANIPULATION; or, The Methods for Conducting Practical Investigations in Comparative Anatomy and Physiology. Also an Introduction to Using the Microscope, etc. By ALFRED TULK, M.R.C.S., M.E.S.; and ARTHUR HENFREY, F.L.S., M.Micr.S. With Illustrative Diagrams. Foolscap 8vo, 9s.

ON THE VARIATION OF SPECIES, with especial reference to the Insecta; followed by an Inquiry into the Nature of Genera. By T. VERNON WOLLASTON, M.A., F.L.S. Post 8vo, 5s.

ON THE VARIATION OF SPECIES, with special reference to Insects; followed by an Inquiry into the Nature of Genera. By T. VERNON WOLLASTON, M.A., F.L.S. Post 8vo, 5s.

MANUAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE USE OF TRAVELLERS: being a Description of the Families of the Animal and Vegetable Kingdoms, with Remarks on the Practical Study of Geology and Meteorology. To which are appended Directions for Collecting and Preserving. By ARTHUR ADAMS, M.R.C.S.; W. BALFOUR BAIKIE, M.D.; and CHARLES BARRON, Curator of the Royal Naval Museum at Haslar. Post 8vo, 12s.

MANUAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR TRAVELERS: A Description of the Families of the Animal and Plant Kingdoms, with Insights on the Practical Study of Geology and Meteorology. Including Guidelines for Collecting and Preserving. By ARTHUR ADAMS, M.R.C.S.; W. BALFOUR BAIKIE, M.D.; and CHARLES BARRON, Curator of the Royal Naval Museum at Haslar. Post 8vo, 12s.

LETTERS OF RUSTICUS ON NATURAL HISTORY. Edited by EDWARD NEWMAN, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c. 8vo, 8s. 6d.

LETTERS OF RUSTICUS ON NATURAL HISTORY. Edited by EDWARD NEWMAN, F.L.S., F.Z.S., etc. 8vo, 8s. 6d.

THE ZOOLOGIST; a Journal of Natural History. Nos. 1 to 251, 1s. each.

THE ZOOLOGIST; a Journal of Natural History. Issues 1 to 251, 1s. each.

THE SEA-SIDE BOOK: an Introduction to the Natural History of the British Coasts. By W. H. HARVEY, M.D., M.R.I.A., &c. With a Chapter on Fish and Fish Diet, by YARRELL. Foolscap 8vo, with 83 Woodcut Illustrations, 4th Edition, 5s.

THE SEA-SIDE BOOK: an Introduction to the Natural History of the British Coasts. By W. H. HARVEY, M.D., M.R.I.A., etc. With a Chapter on Fish and Fish Diet, by YARRELL. Foolscap 8vo, with 83 Woodcut Illustrations, 4th Edition, 5.

A HISTORY OF THE BRITISH SEA-ANEMONES AND MADREPORES. With Coloured Figures of all the Species. By PHILIP HENRY GOSSE, F.R.S. 8vo, £1 1s.

A HISTORY OF THE BRITISH SEA ANEMONES AND MADREPORES. With Color Illustrations of All the Species. By PHILIP HENRY GOSSE, F.R.S. 8vo, £1 1s.

HANDBOOK OF THE MARINE AQUARIUM; containing Practical Instructions for Constructing, Stocking, and Maintaining a Tank, and for Collecting Plants and Animals. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. Foolscap 8vo, Second Edition, 2s. 6d.

HANDBOOK OF THE MARINE AQUARIUM; containing Practical Instructions for Building, Stocking, and Keeping a Tank, and for Collecting Plants and Animals. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. Foolscap 8vo, Second Edition, 2s. 6d.

MANUAL OF MARINE ZOOLOGY OF THE BRITISH ISLES. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. Parts I. and II., 7s. 6d. each.

MANUAL OF MARINE ZOOLOGY OF THE BRITISH ISLES. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. Parts I. and II., 7s. 6d. each.

A NATURALIST’S RAMBLES ON THE DEVONSHIRE COAST. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. With 28 Lithographic Plates, some coloured, post 8vo, One Guinea.

A NATURALIST’S RAMBLES ON THE DEVONSHIRE COAST. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. With 28 Lithographic Plates, some in color, post 8vo, One Guinea.

THE AQUARIUM: an Unveiling of the Wonders of the Deep Sea. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. Post 8vo, Illustrated, Second Edition, 17s.

THE AQUARIUM: an Unveiling of the Wonders of the Deep Sea. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. Post 8vo, Illustrated, Second Edition, 17s.

THE CANADIAN NATURALIST. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. With 44 Illustrations of the most remarkable Animal and Vegetable productions. Post 8vo, 12s.

THE CANADIAN NATURALIST. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. With 44 Illustrations of the most remarkable animal and plant species. Post 8vo, 12s.

TENBY: A SEASIDE HOLIDAY. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. Post 8vo, with 24 Coloured Plates, 21s.

TENBY: A SEASIDE HOLIDAY. By P. H. GOSSE, F.R.S. Post 8vo, with 24 Coloured Plates, 21s.

THE ISLE OF MAN; its History, Physical, Ecclesiastical, and Legendary. By J. G. CUMMING, M.A., F.G.S. Post 8vo, 12s. 6d.

THE ISLE OF MAN; its History, Physical, Ecclesiastical, and Legendary. By J. G. CUMMING, M.A., F.G.S. Post 8vo, 12sh. 6d.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE COUNTY OF STAFFORD; comprising its Geology, Zoology, Botany, and Meteorology: also its Antiquities, Topography, Manufactures, &c. By ROBERT GARNER, F.L.S. With a Geological Map and other Illustrations, 8vo, with a Supplement, 10s. Price of the Supplement, 2s. 6d.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE COUNTY OF STAFFORD; including its Geology, Zoology, Botany, and Meteorology: as well as its Antiquities, Topography, Manufacturing, etc. By ROBERT GARNER, F.L.S. Featuring a Geological Map and other Illustrations, 8vo, with a Supplement, £1. Price of the Supplement, 25p.

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF SELBORNE. By the late Rev. GILBERT WHITE, M.A. A New Edition, with Notes by the Rev. LEONARD JENYNS, M.A., F.L.S., &c.; with 26 Illustrations, foolscap 8vo, 7s. 6d.

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF SELBORNE. By the late Rev. GILBERT WHITE, M.A. A New Edition, with Notes by the Rev. LEONARD JENYNS, M.A., F.L.S., &c. with 26 Illustrations, foolscap 8vo, 7s. 6d.

TRAVELS IN LYCIA, MILYAS, AND THE CIBYRATIS, in company with the late Rev. E. T. Daniell. By Lieut. SPRATT, R.N., and Professor EDWARD FORBES. Two vols. 8vo, with numerous Illustrations, including Views of the Scenery, Plans of Ancient Cities and Buildings, Plates of Coins and Inscriptions, Cuts of Rock Tombs, Fossils, and Geological Sections, and an original Map of Lycia. 36s.

TRAVELS IN LYCIA, MILYAS, AND THE CIBYRATIS, alongside the late Rev. E. T. Daniell. By Lieut. SPRATT, R.N., and Professor EDWARD FORBES. Two volumes, 8vo, with many Illustrations, including views of the scenery, plans of ancient cities and buildings, images of coins and inscriptions, cuts of rock tombs, fossils, geological sections, and an original map of Lycia. £36.

HEALTHY RESPIRATION. By STEPHEN H. WARD, M.D. Foolscap 8vo, 1s. 6d.

HEALTHY RESPIRATION. By STEPHEN H. WARD, M.D. Foolscap 8vo, 1s. 6d.

TOBACCO AND ITS ADULTERATIONS. By HENRY P. PRESCOTT, of the Inland Revenue Department. With upwards of 250 Illustrations drawn and engraved on Forty Steel Plates. 8vo, 12s. 6d.

TOBACCO AND ITS ADULTERATIONS. By HENRY P. PRESCOTT, from the Inland Revenue Department. Featuring over 250 illustrations drawn and engraved on Forty Steel Plates. 8vo, 12s. 6d.

A LIFE OF LINNÆUS. By Miss BRIGHTWELL of Norwich. Foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

A LIFE OF LINNÆUS. By Miss BRIGHTWELL of Norwich. Foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

SCENERY, SCIENCE, AND ART; being Extracts from the Note-book of a Geologist and Mining Engineer. By Professor D. T. ANSTED, M.A., F.R.S., &c. 8vo, with Woodcuts and Four Views in tinted lithography, 10s. 6d.

SCENERY, SCIENCE, AND ART; being Extracts from the Note-book of a Geologist and Mining Engineer. By Professor D. T. ANSTED, M.A., F.R.S., etc. 8vo, with illustrations and four views in colored lithography, 10s. 6d.

ILLUSTRATIONS OF ARTS AND MANUFACTURES; being a Selection from a Series of Papers read before the Society for the Encouragement of Arts, Manufactures, and Commerce. By ARTHUR AIKIN, F.L.S., F.G.S., &c., late Secretary to that Institution. Foolscap 8vo, 8s.

ILLUSTRATIONS OF ARTS AND MANUFACTURES; being a Selection from a Series of Papers read before the Society for the Encouragement of Arts, Manufactures, and Commerce. By ARTHUR AIKIN, F.L.S., F.G.S., etc., former Secretary to that Institution. Foolscap 8vo, 8s.

THE POOR ARTIST; or, Seven Eye-Sights and One Object. “SCIENCE IN FABLE.” Foolscap 8vo, with a Frontispiece, 5s.

THE POOR ARTIST; or, Seven Eye-Sights and One Object. “SCIENCE IN FABLE.” Foolscap 8vo, with a Frontispiece, 5s.

SUNDAY BOOK FOR THE YOUNG; or, Habits of Patriarchal Times in the East. With Woodcuts, 2s. 6d. By ANNE BULLAR.

SUNDAY BOOK FOR THE YOUNG; or, Habits of Patriarchal Times in the East. With Illustrations, 2s. 6d. By ANNE BULLAR.

Other Books for Young Persons, by Miss Bullar.

Other Books for Young People, by Miss Bullar.

DOMESTIC SCENES IN GREENLAND AND ICELAND. With Woodcuts, 2s. Second Edition.

DOMESTIC SCENES IN GREENLAND AND ICELAND. With Illustrations, 2s. Second Edition.

ENGLAND BEFORE THE NORMAN CONQUEST. 2s. 6d.

ENGLAND BEFORE THE NORMAN CONQUEST. 2. 6.

ELEMENTS OF PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE; or, The Young Inquirer Answered. Explaining in Question and Answer, and in familiar language, what most things daily used, seen, or talked of, are; what they are made of, where found, and to what uses applied. Including articles of food and aliment; miscellanies in common use; metals, gems, jewellery; and some account of the principal inventions and most interesting manufactures. Second Edition, 18mo, with Illustrations, 3s. cloth.

ELEMENTS OF PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE; or, The Young Inquirer Answered. Explaining in Q&A format, and in simple language, what most everyday items are; what they’re made of, where they can be found, and how they’re used. This includes food and nutrition, everyday items, metals, gems, jewelry, and a look at key inventions and fascinating manufacturing processes. Second Edition, 18mo, with Illustrations, 3s. cloth.

CUPS AND THEIR CUSTOMS. Post 8vo, 2s. 6d.

CUPS AND THEIR CUSTOMS. Paperback, 2£ 6p

HOUSE DOGS AND SPORTING DOGS: their points, breeds, management, and diseases. By JOHN MEYRICK. Foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

HOUSE DOGS AND SPORTING DOGS: their traits, breeds, care, and illnesses. By JOHN MEYRICK. Foolscap 8vo, 3s. 6d.

ARCHITECTURE AND THE FINE ARTS, &c.

INSTRUMENTA ECCLESIASTICA: a Series of Working Designs, engraved on 72 Plates, for the Furniture, Fittings, and Decorations of Churches and their Precincts. Edited by the Ecclesiological, late Cambridge Camden Society. 4to, £1 11s. 6d.

INSTRUMENTA ECCLESIASTICA: a Series of Working Designs, engraved on 72 Plates, for the Furniture, Fittings, and Decorations of Churches and their Surroundings. Edited by the Ecclesiological, formerly Cambridge Camden Society. 4to, £1 11s. 6d.

The Second Series contains a Cemetery Chapel, with Sick-house and Gateway Tower—A Wooden Church—A Chapel School—Schools and School-houses—A Village Hospital—An Iron Church—And Designs for Funeral Fittings, for Timber Belfries, and for a variety of Works in Metal, Wood, and Stone. Price also £1 11s. 6d.

The Second Series includes a Cemetery Chapel, a Sick-house, and a Gateway Tower—a Wooden Church—a Chapel School—Schools and Schoolhouses—A Village Hospital—An Iron Church—And Designs for Funeral Fittings, Timber Belfries, and various Works in Metal, Wood, and Stone. Price also £1 11s. 6d.

BAPTISMAL FONTS. A Series of 125 Engravings, examples of the different Periods, accompanied with Descriptions. With an Introductory Essay by F. A. PALEY, M.A., Honorary Secretary of the Cambridge Camden Society. 8vo, One Guinea.

BAPTISMAL FONTS. A Collection of 125 Engravings showcasing examples from different periods, along with descriptions. Featuring an introductory essay by F. A. PALEY, M.A., Honorary Secretary of the Cambridge Camden Society. 8vo, One Guinea.

TREATISE ON THE RISE AND PROGRESS OF DECORATED WINDOW TRACERY IN ENGLAND. By EDMUND SHARPE, M.A., Architect. 8vo, Illustrated with 97 Woodcuts and Six Engravings on steel, 10s. 6d. And a

TREATISE ON THE RISE AND PROGRESS OF DECORATED WINDOW TRACERY IN ENGLAND. By EDMUND SHARPE, M.A., Architect. 8vo, Illustrated with 97 Woodcuts and Six Engravings on steel, 10s. 6d. And a

SERIES OF ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE WINDOW TRACERY OF THE DECORATED STYLE OF ECCLESIASTICAL ARCHITECTURE. Edited, with descriptions, by Mr. SHARPE. Sixty Engravings on steel, 8vo, 21s.

SERIES OF ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE WINDOW TRACERY OF THE DECORATED STYLE OF ECCLESIASTICAL ARCHITECTURE. Edited, with descriptions, by Mr. SHARPE. Sixty Engravings on steel, 8vo, 21s.

HERALDRY OF FISH. By THOMAS MOULE. The Engravings, 205 in number, are from Stained Glass, Tombs, Sculpture, and Carving, Medals and Coins, Rolls of Arms, and Pedigrees. 8vo, 21s. A few on large paper (royal 8vo), for colouring, £2 2s.

HERALDRY OF FISH. By THOMAS MOULE. The engravings, 205 in total, are sourced from stained glass, tombs, sculptures, carvings, medals and coins, rolls of arms, and pedigrees. 8vo, £1 1s. A few on larger paper (royal 8vo), for coloring, £2 2s.

SHAKSPEARE’S SEVEN AGES OF MAN. Illustrated by WM. MULREADY, R.A.; J. CONSTABLE, R.A.; SIR DAVID WILKIE, R.A.; W. COLLINS, R.A.; A. E. CHALON, R.A.; A. COOPER, R.A.; SIR A. W. CALLCOTT, R.A.; EDWIN LANDSEER, R.A.; W. HILTON, R.A. Post 8vo, 6s. A few copies of the First Edition in 4to remain for sale.

SHAKESPEARE’S SEVEN AGES OF MAN. Illustrated by WM. MULREADY, R.A.; J. CONSTABLE, R.A.; SIR DAVID WILKIE, R.A.; W. COLLINS, R.A.; A. E. CHALON, R.A.; A. COOPER, R.A.; SIR A. W. CALLCOTT, R.A.; EDWIN LANDSEER, R.A.; W. HILTON, R.A. Post 8vo, 6s. A few copies of the First Edition in 4to are still available for sale.

GRAY’S ELEGY IN A COUNTRY CHURCH-YARD. Each Stanza illustrated with an engraving on wood, from 33 original drawings. Elegantly printed, in post 8vo, 9s. cloth. (Small edition, 2s. 6d.)

GRAY’S ELEGY IN A COUNTRY CHURCH-YARD. Each Stanza illustrated with an engraving on wood, from 33 original drawings. Elegantly printed, in post 8vo, 9s. cloth. (Small edition, 2s. 6d.)

A Polyglot Edition of this volume, with interpaged Translations in the Greek, Latin, German, Italian, and French languages. 12s.

A Polyglot Edition of this volume, with interleaved Translations in the Greek, Latin, German, Italian, and French languages. 12s.

GRAY’S BARD. With Illustrations by the Hon. Mrs. JOHN TALBOT. Post 8vo, 7s.

GRAY’S BARD. With Illustrations by the Hon. Mrs. JOHN TALBOT. Post 8vo, 7s.

THE VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. With 32 Illustrations by WILLIAM MULREADY, R.A.; engraved by JOHN THOMPSON. First reprint. Square 8vo, 10s. 6d.

THE VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. With 32 Illustrations by WILLIAM MULREADY, R.A.; engraved by JOHN THOMPSON. First reprint. Square 8vo, 10s. 6d.

“And there are some designs in the volume in which art may justly boast of having added something to even the exquisite fancy of Goldsmith.”—Examiner.

“And there are some designs in the volume that art can rightfully claim have enhanced the even exquisite imagination of Goldsmith.”—Examiner.

MANUAL OF GOTHIC ARCHITECTURE. By F. A. PALEY, M.A. With a full Account of Monumental Brasses and Ecclesiastical Costume. Foolscap 8vo, with 70 Illustrations, 6s. 6d.

MANUAL OF GOTHIC ARCHITECTURE. By F. A. PALEY, M.A. With a complete Account of Monumental Brasses and Ecclesiastical Costume. Foolscap 8vo, with 70 Illustrations, 6s. 6d.

“To the student of the architecture of old English churches this beautiful little volume will prove a most acceptable manual.”—Spectator.

“To the student of the architecture of old English churches, this beautiful little book will be a very useful guide.”—Spectator.

MANUAL OF GOTHIC MOLDINGS. A Practical Treatise on their formations, gradual development, combinations, and varieties; with full directions for copying them, and for determining their dates. Illustrated by nearly 600 examples. By F. A. PALEY, M.A. Second Edition, 8vo, 7s. 6d.

MANUAL OF GOTHIC MOLDINGS. A Practical Guide on their formations, gradual development, combinations, and variations; with complete instructions for copying them and determining their dates. Illustrated by almost 600 examples. By F. A. PALEY, M.A. Second Edition, 8vo, 7s. 6d.

“Mouldings are the scholarship of architecture.”—Christian Remembrancer.

“Mouldings are the foundation of architectural scholarship.”—Christian Remembrancer.

THE FARMER’S BOY AND OTHER RURAL TALES AND POEMS. By ROBERT BLOOMFIELD. Foolscap 8vo, 7s. 6d. With 13 Illustrations by Sidney Cooper, Horsley, Frederick Tayler, and Thomas Webster, A.R.A.

THE FARMER’S BOY AND OTHER RURAL TALES AND POEMS. By ROBERT BLOOMFIELD. Foolscap 8vo, 7s. 6d. With 13 Illustrations by Sidney Cooper, Horsley, Frederick Tayler, and Thomas Webster, A.R.A.

WATTS’S DIVINE AND MORAL SONGS. With 30 Illustrations by C. W. COPE, A.R.A.; engraved by JOHN THOMPSON. Square 8vo, 7s. 6d.; copies bound in morocco, One Guinea.

WATTS’S DIVINE AND MORAL SONGS. With 30 Illustrations by C. W. COPE, A.R.A.; engraved by JOHN THOMPSON. Square 8vo, 7s. 6d.; copies bound in morocco, One Guinea.

THE ECONOMY OF HUMAN LIFE. In Twelve Books. By R. DODSLEY. With Twelve Plates, engraved on steel, from original designs, by Frank Howard, Harvey, Williams, &c. 18mo, gilt edges, 5s.

THE ECONOMY OF HUMAN LIFE. In Twelve Books. By R. DODSLEY. With Twelve Plates, engraved on steel, from original designs, by Frank Howard, Harvey, Williams, etc. 18mo, gilt edges, 5s.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL CATALOGUE OF PRIVATELY PRINTED BOOKS. By JOHN MARTIN, F.S.A. Second Edition, 8vo, 21s.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL CATALOGUE OF PRIVATELY PRINTED BOOKS. By JOHN MARTIN, F.S.A. Second Edition, 8vo, 21s.

THE CURRENCY UNDER THE ACT OF 1844; together with Observations on Joint Stock Banks, and the Causes and Results of Commercial Convulsions. From the City Articles of “The Times.” 8vo, 6s.

THE CURRENCY UNDER THE ACT OF 1844; along with Comments on Joint Stock Banks, and the Reasons and Outcomes of Commercial Upheavals. From the City Articles of “The Times.” 8vo, 6s.

NATURAL HISTORY OF THE BRITISH ISLES.

This Series of Works is Illustrated by many Hundred Engravings; every Species has been Drawn and Engraved under the immediate inspection of the Authors; the best Artists have been employed, and no care or expense has been spared.

This Series of Works is illustrated with hundreds of engravings; every species has been drawn and engraved under the direct supervision of the authors; the best artists have been hired, and no effort or expense has been spared.

A few Copies have been printed on Larger Paper.

A few copies have been printed on larger paper.

SESSILE-EYED CRUSTACEA, by Mr. Spence Bate and Professor Westwood. Parts 1 to 10, price 2s. 6d. each.

SESSILE-EYED CRUSTACEA, by Mr. Spence Bate and Professor Westwood. Parts 1 to 10, price 2s. 6d. each.

QUADRUPEDS, by Professor Bell. A New Edition preparing.

QUADRUPEDS, by Professor Bell. A new edition is in the works.

BIRDS, by Mr. Yarrell. Third Edition, 3 vols. £4 14s. 6d.

BIRDS, by Mr. Yarrell. Third Edition, 3 vols. £4 14s. 6d.

COLOURED ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE EGGS OF BIRDS, by Mr. Hewitson. Third Edition, 2 vols., £4 14s. 6d.

COLOURED ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE EGGS OF BIRDS, by Mr. Hewitson. Third Edition, 2 vols., £4 14s. 6d.

REPTILES, by Professor Bell. Second Edition, 12s.

REPTILES, by Professor Bell. Second Edition, 12s.

FISHES, by Mr. Yarrell. Third Edition, edited by Sir John Richardson, 2 vols., £3 3s.

FISHES, by Mr. Yarrell. Third Edition, edited by Sir John Richardson, 2 vols., £3 3s.

STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA, by Professor Bell. 8vo, £1 5s.

STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA, by Professor Bell. 8vo, £1 5s.

STAR-FISHES, by Professor Edward Forbes. 15s.

STAR-FISHES, by Professor Edward Forbes. 15s.

ZOOPHYTES, by Dr. Johnston. Second Edition, 2 vols., £2 2s.

ZOOPHYTES, by Dr. Johnston. Second Edition, 2 volumes, £2 2s.

MOLLUSCOUS ANIMALS AND THEIR SHELLS, by Professor Edward Forbes and Mr. Hanley. 4 vols. 8vo, £6 10s. Royal 8vo, Coloured, £13.

MOLLUSCOUS ANIMALS AND THEIR SHELLS, by Professor Edward Forbes and Mr. Hanley. 4 volumes. 8vo, £6 10s. Royal 8vo, Coloured, £13.

FOREST TREES, by Mr. Selby. £1 8s.

FOREST TREES, by Mr. Selby. £1 8s.

FERNS, by Mr. Newman. Third Edition, 18s.

FERNS, by Mr. Newman. Third Edition, 18s.

FOSSIL MAMMALS AND BIRDS, by Professor Owen. £1 11s. 6d.

FOSSIL MAMMALS AND BIRDS, by Professor Owen. £1 11s. 6d.

Works in Preparation.

THE ANGLER NATURALIST.
BY H. CHOLMONDELEY-PENNELL, Author of “How to Spin for Pike.”

THE ANGLER NATURALIST.
BY H. CHOLMONDELEY-PENNELL, Author of “How to Spin for Pike.”

HISTORY OF THE BRITISH HYDROID ZOOPHYTES.
BY THE REV. THOMAS HINCKS, B.A.

HISTORY OF THE BRITISH HYDROID ZOOPHYTES.
BY THE REV. THOMAS HINCKS, B.A.

OOTHECA WOLLEYANA.
BY ALFRED NEWTON, M.A., F.L.S.

OOTHECA WOLLEYANA.
BY ALFRED NEWTON, M.A., F.L.S.

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF TUTBURY.
BY SIR OSWALD MOSLEY, BART., D.C.L., F.L.S., F.G.S.

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF TUTBURY.
BY SIR OSWALD MOSLEY, BART., D.C.L., F.L.S., F.G.S.

FLORA OF MARLBOROUGH.
BY THE REV. T. A. PRESTON, M.A.

FLORA OF MARLBOROUGH.
BY REV. T. A. PRESTON, M.A.

NOTES ON THE ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY OF ELY CATHEDRAL.
BY THE REV. D. J. STEWART, M.A.

NOTES ON THE ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY OF ELY CATHEDRAL.
BY THE REV. D. J. STEWART, M.A.

JEFFREYS’S BRITISH CONCHOLOGY.
VOLS. II., III., IV.—MARINE UNIVALVES, BIVALVES, AND NUDIBRANCHS.

JEFFREYS’S BRITISH CONCHOLOGY.
VOLS. II., III., IV.—MARINE UNIVALVES, BIVALVES, AND NUDIBRANCHS.

JOHN VAN VOORST, 1 PATERNOSTER ROW.

JOHN VAN VOORST, 1 PATERnoster ROW.

Transcriber’s Notes

Transcription Notes

The cover was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

The cover was made by the transcriber and is available in the public domain.

Some page numbers do not appear due to removed blank pages.

Some page numbers are missing because blank pages have been removed.

Punctuation errors were corrected.

Punctuation errors were fixed.

Inconsistent hyphenation was retained.

Inconsistent hyphenation was kept.

To match the spelling of chapter topics in Contents with that in the main text,

To ensure that the spelling of chapter titles in the Contents matches that in the main text,

  • on page v, two occurrences of “history” were changed from “History” (Physical history of Man; Physical history) and two occurrences of “Extract” were changed from “extract” (Extract from Knox; Extract); and
  • on page vi, “area” was changed from “areas” (size of area) and “Area” was changed from “area” (Monosyllabic Area).

On page 18, “te ipsum” was changed from “teipsum”.

On page 18, “te ipsum” was changed from “teipsum”.

On page 38, “Lawrence” was changed from “Lawrance”.

On page 38, “Lawrence” was changed from “Lawrance”.

On page 49, “Troglodytes” was changed from “Trolodytes”.

On page 49, “Troglodytes” was changed from “Trolodytes”.

On page 95, “Mediterranean” was changed from “Mediterannean”.

On page 95, “Mediterranean” was changed from “Mediterannean”.

On page 97, “Kaffre” was changed from “Caffre”.

On page 97, “Kaffre” was updated from “Caffre”.

On page 101, “Papuás” was changed from “Papuá”.

On page 101, “Papuás” was changed from “Papuá”.

On page 107, “architectural” was changed from “architectual”.

On page 107, “architectural” was changed from “architectual”.

On page 158, “hypothesis” was changed from “hypotheses”.

On page 158, “hypothesis” was changed to “hypotheses.”

On page 216, “Norris” was changed from “Norriss”.

On page 216, “Norris” was changed from “Norriss”.

On page 220, “Buddhist” was changed from “Bhuddhist”.

On page 220, “Buddhist” was changed from “Bhuddhist”.

On page 237, “his mother’s” was changed from “mothers”.

On page 237, “his mother’s” was changed from “mothers”.

On page 241, “Mysus” was changed from “Myrus”.

On page 241, “Mysus” was updated from “Myrus”.

On page 243, space was inserted before “-der”.

On page 243, space was added before “-der”.

In footnote [19], “pp.” was changed from “p.”.

In footnote [19], “pp.” was changed from “p.”.

In Mr. Van Voorst’s Catalogue,

In Mr. Van Voorst's Catalog,

  • on page 6, “Vols.” was changed from “Vol.” (Vols. I. to VII.).
  • on page 8, “DESERTAS” was changed from “DEZERTAS”.
  • on page 15, “Parts” was changed from “Part” (Parts 1 to 10).

The following is the split-up version of Mr. Wilson’s table on page 64 for narrower screens.

Here’s the simplified version of Mr. Wilson’s table on page 64 for smaller screens.

PART 1—Key

PART 1—Key

A: Longitudinal diameter. B: Parietal diameter. C: Frontal diameter. D: Vertical diameter. E: Intermastoid arch. F: Intermastoid arch from upper root of zygomatic process.

A: Longitudinal diameter. B: Parietal diameter. C: Frontal diameter. D: Vertical diameter. E: Intermastoid arch. F: Intermastoid arch from the upper root of the zygomatic process.

  A B C D E F
Very old.
1. 7·0 5·4½? 4·9? 4·10 13·11 11·5
2. 7·0 4·8 4·4 5·3 13·2 11·0
3. 6·11 5·3 3·11 5·0 ... 12·0
4. 7·0 4·11 4·4 5·3 13·8 11·4½
5. 6·6 4·1? 4·11 4·2? 13·2 11·3
6. 7·3 5·4 4·6 5·2 14·3 11·9
7. 7·5 5·2 4·5 5·2 14·3 12·0
8. 7·9 5·6 4·9 ... ... 12·3
9. 7·3 5·8 4·3½ 4·9 14·0 11·9
Moderately old.
17. 7·9 5·0 4·10 5·6 14·9 11·11
18. 7·6 5·1 4·6 5·1 14·8 11·3
19. 7·3 5·3 4·5 5·4½ 14·5 12·4
20. 7·5 5·6½ 5·0½ 5·6 14·11½ 12·3
21. 7·3 5·6½ 4·4 5·6 14·8 12·0
22. 7·2 5·7 4·5 5·6 14·9 11·10
23. 7·3½ 5·7 4·6 5·2 15·0? 12·4?
24. 7·2 5·5 4·6 ... ... ...
25. 7·8 5·6 4·3½ 5·3 14·4 11·8
26. 7·9 5·7 5·3 5·6 15·7 13·3
27. 7·11 5·5 4·9 ... ... 12·0

PART 2—Key

PART 2—Key

G: Intermastoid lines. H: Ditto from upper root of zygomatic process. I: Occipitofrontal arch. J: Ditto from occipital protuberance to root of nose. K: Horizontal periphery. L: Relative capacity.

G: Intermastoid lines. H: Same as above from the upper root of the zygomatic process. I: Occipitofrontal arch. J: Same as above from the occipital protuberance to the root of the nose. K: Horizontal periphery. L: Relative capacity.

  G H I J K L
Very old.
1. 3·6½ 4·8½ 13·9 12·0 20·4 32·2
2. 4·1 4·10 14·0 11·11 19·6 31·9
3. ... 4·8½ 14·4 11·4 19·0 30·11
4. 4·1 4·10 13·10 11·3 16·7½ 28·10½
5. ... 4·8? 13·11 12·0 19·0 29·6
6. 4·4 5·0½ 14·8 12·3 20·8½ 33·1½
7. 3·7 4·10½ 14·3 12·3 20·7½ 33·2½
8. ... 5·6 15·6 ... 21·3 ...
9. 3·8½ 5·0 14·2 11·9 20·7 32·7
Moderately old.
17. 4·0 5·4 15·5 13·6 21·3 34·6
18. 3·11 5·3 14·6 12·11 20·4 32·11½
19. 3·11½ 4·9 14·9 12·9 20·10 33·5½
20. 4·0 ... 14·9 12·6 20·10 33·9
21. 4·1 5·3 14·5 12·10 20·2 32·11
22. 4·3 5·6 14·4 12·6 20·0 32·8
23. ... ... 14·8 12·6½ 19·10½ 32·4
24. ... ... ... 12·10 20·7 ...
25. 4·7 5·6 14·6 12·7 20·11 33·10
26. 4·0½ 5·4 16·4 14·4 21·11 35·2
27. ... 5·1 15·5 13·9 21·6 ...

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

 


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!